/V/^^. ^ ■ /—T GRAMMAR OF THE SINDHI LANGUAGE. COMPAEED WITH THE SANSKRIT -PRAKRIT AND THE COGNATE INDIAN VERNACULARS, D^' ERMST TRUMPP. PRINTED BY ORDER OP HER MAJESTY'S GOVERNMENT FOR INDIA. TRUBNER AND CO., 60, Paternoster Row, LONDON. F. A. BROCKHAUS, LEIPZIG. 187 2. /^^ GRAMMAR OF THE 8INDHI- LANGUAGE. GRAMMAR OF THE SINDHI LANGUAGE. COMPAEED WITH THE SANSKRIT -PRAKRIT AND THE COGNATE INDIAN VERNACULARS, BY D^- ERIEST TEUMPP. PRINTED BY ORDER OF HER MAJESTY'S GOVERNMENT FOR INDIA. TRUBNER AND CO., 60, Pateenoster Row, LONDON. F. A. BROCKHAUS, LEIPZIG. 18 7 2. f \< y<(^% 61600 ^06 "^SBER ooLtEormd. DEDICATED TO SIR BARTLE FRERE, K.C.B. AS A TOKEN OF HiaHEST REGARD AND ESTEEM BY HIS OBEDIENT HUMBLE SERVANT E. TRUMPP. PREFACE. Ihe Grammar, which is now offered to the learned PubHc, has been compiled already years ago, but as there were no means of printing it, it was laid aside hopelessly. That it has finally been rescued from obli- vion is owing to the enlightened patronage of Her Ma- jesty's Government for India, which liberally granted the printing expenses. I am afraid, that I have given rather too much than too little by endeavouring to render the Grammar as complete as possible; I trust, however, that this object may have been attained to some extent at least. A beginner will do well, after he has acquainted himself with the Sindhi system of sounds, to commence at once with the declensions and to turn bye and bye to the formation of themes after he has got a fair insight into the fabric of the language. The Intro- duction is intended for those only, who wish to pe- netrate more deeply into the origin and nature of the Sindhi. 8 PREFACE. The quotations, which I have added, I hope may prove useful to introduce the beginner into the study of the Sindhi literature; most of the quotations are taken from my edition of the Shaha jo Risalo^), but many others also from manuscripts in my possession, which I collected during my former stay in Sindh. What we need now most is a criticallv sifted edition of the popular Sindhi tales and songs, which are very numerous and from which a good collection might be made. The next desideratum is an enlarged Sindhi Dictionary, as the late Capt. Greo. Stack's Dictionary, which is very good as far as it goes, is not sufficient for reading older or more difficult pieces. We may fairly expect, that these deficiencies will soon be re- medied by Mr. Peile, the present energetic and en- lightened Director of Public Instruction in the Bombay Presidency, for which the thanks of the learned Public will be due to him. The Sindhi is by no means an easy language, it is on the contrary beset with more intricacies and dif- ficulties than any of its Prakrit sisters. But on the other hand it amply repays to the philologist the labours he bestows on it; for the Sindhi has preserved a great many forms, for which we look in vain in the 1) Published with the title: Sindhi Literature. The Divan of Abd-ul-Latif, known by the name of: Shaha jo Risalo, 739 pages. Printed by F. A. Brockhaus, Leipzig, 1866. In the quotations Sh. stands as an abbreviation for it. PREFACE. 9 cognate idioms. For the purpose of intercomparing the modern Arian dialects the Sindhi is therefore invalu- able. For this reason we have pointed out, in the form of annotations^ the relation of the Sindhi with the Sanskrit- Prakrit on the one hand and with the modern cognate idioms on the other hand, to give some impulse to a comparative study of the North- Indian Vernaculars, which as yet has been totally neglected. The Sindhi Grrammar of the late Capt. Stack is an accurate and meritorious work, but as all first attempts (for the Sindhi Grrammar of Wathen does not deserve the name) incomplete and destitute of a Syntax. I sincerely wish, that the deficiencies of his work , from the emendation and enlargement of which he was prevented by an untimely death, may have been made up by the Grammar now offered to the Public. The English reader will no doubt meet in this Grrammar with many an expression, which he will con- sider as erroneous or ill -chosen. For all such and si- milar mistakes I must beg his pardon, which the kind reader surely will not withhold, when he is told, that the idiom, into which I endeavoured to clothe my thoughts, is not my mother - tongue. Whilst this Grrammar was passing through the press, I had gone to India for the purpose of trans- lating the Sikh Grranth. In order not to delay too long the printing of it, I could only see and correct a proof-sheet once. The unavoidable consequence was. 10 PREFACE. that owing to the letters of this Grrammar being loaded with so many dots and distinguishing marks, a number of misprints has crept in, which the student is requested to correct first after the affixed list of misprints. Reutlingen, 4*^ June, 1872. E. TRUMPP. CONTENTS, Page. Inteoduction. On the relation of the Sindhi to the Sanskrit and Prakrit i-l The Sindhi Alphabet. §. 1 1-6 I. The Sindhi consonantal system. §.2. • 7—21 II. The Sindhi vowel system. §.4 21-28 Other orthographic signs. §.5 28—30 Section I. The Formation of Themes in Sindhi. Chapter I. The termination of Sindhi nouns. §. 6. 31—44 Chapter IE, Primary themes. §.7 45 I. Formation of abstract nouns. §.8 46—51 11. Formation of appellatives and attributives. §. 9. 51—57 Chapter III. Secondary themes. §. 10. I. Formation of abstract nouns 57—62 II. Formation of appellatives, attributives and possessives 63—77 Chapter IV. Formation of diminutives. §. 11. 77—80 Chapter V. Compound nouns. §.12 80—88 Chapter VI. (render of nouns. §.13 88—98 Chapter VII. Formation of the Feminine from masc. bases. §.14 98—103 12 CONTENTS. Page. Section 11. The Inflexion of Nouns. Chapter YIII. I. Formation of the Plural. §. 15. 104-111 II. Formation of cases ; case - af- fixes. §.16 111—122 in. The Formative. §.17 122-128 Survey of the SindhT declensional process. Declension of the Genitive affix ys^ and jcX.a.a«. §.18 128-130 I. Declension 130-134 II. Declension 134-136 III. Declension 136—137 IV. Declension 138 V. Declension 139 VI. Declension 140-142 VII. Declension 142—144 Chapter IX. Adjectives. §. 19. Position of adjectives 145—148 Formation of gender. §. 20 ...... . 148-152 Adjectives ending in 'u' 152 Adjectives ending in o 153 Adjectives ending in u^ a 154 Adjectives ending in i, e 155 Comparison of Adjectives. §.21 ... 156—157 Chapter X. Xumeral adjectives. §. 22. I. Cardinal numbers 157 — 169 Inflexion of cardinal numbers. §.23 • • 169—173 11. Ordinal numbers. §.24 174-176 Inflexion of the ordinals. §.25 176-178 III. Arithmetical figures. §.26 • 178-179 IV. Collective numbers. §.27 180-181 V. Proportional numbers. §.28 182—183 VI. Reduplicative numbers. §.29 184 VII. Fractional numbers. §.30 184-188 Chapter XI. Pronouns. I. Pronouns of the I and II Person. §. 31 188-194 II. Demonstrative pronouns. §.32 194—202 III. The relative pronoun. §.33 202—204 CONTENTS. 13 Page. IV. The correlative pronoun. §.34 204—206 V. Interrogative pronouns. §-35 206—209 Vl. Indefinite pronouns. §.36 210-215 VII. The reciprocal pronoun. §.37 215—217 VIII. Pronominal adjectives. §.38 218-224 IX. Pronominal suffixes. §.39 225 I. Pronominal suffixes attached to nouns. §.40 227-242 II. Pronominal suffixes attached to postpositions and adverbs. §. 41. 242—249 Section III. Tlie Verl). Chapter XII. Formation of the verbal themes. §.42 250-260 The Imperative. §.43 260-268 The participle present. §.44 268-271 The participle past. §.45 271-279 The participle of the Future passive. §. 46. 279-280 Indeclinable past participles. §.47 • • • 280—284 Chapter Xm. Formation of the tenses and persons. §. 48. I. Simple tenses 284 1) The Potential 285-287 2) The Aorist 288-291 3) The Future 291-293 II. Compound tenses. 1) The compound Potential • 293 2) The present tense 293-295 3) The habitual Aorist 295 4) The Imperfect 295 5) The Perfect 296 6) The Pluperfect 296 7) The compound future tenses • • • • 297 Chapter XTV. The auxiliary Verbs. A) The auxiliary verb ^^li. §.49 297-304 B) The auxHiary verb J^'. §.50 • • • • 305-312 Chapter XV. Inflexion of the regular verb. A) Inflexion of the neuter verb. §. 51 • • • 312-322 14 CONTENTS. Page. B) Inflexion of the transitive Verb. §. 52. 1) Active Voice 322-330 2) Passive Voice 330-338 Chapter XYI. Compound Verbs. §.53 338—344 Chapter XVII. The Verb with the pronominal suffixes. §. 54. 1) The pronominal suffixes attached to the auxiliary verbs {^y^ and ^j^, §. 55. 346—360 2) The pronominal suffixes attached to the regular verb. §.56 360—379 Section IV. Adverts, Postpositions, Conjunctions and Interjections. Chapter XVIII. Adverbs. §.57 380-398 Chapter XIX. Postpositions. §.58 398-409 Chapter XX. Conjunctions. §.59 410—417 Chapter XXL Interjections. §.60 418-424 SYNTAX, I. THE ANALYTICAL PART. Section I. The ITonn. Chapter I. On the absence of the article. §.61. 425—428 Chapter 11. On the gender of Xouns. §. 62 . 428—431 Chapter HI. Number. §. 63. . . 431—435 Chapter IV. Cases of the Noun. I. The Nominative. §.64 435-438 IL The Vocative. §.65 • 438-441 III. The Instrumental. \. m 441-443 IV. The Genitive. §.67 -• 443-452 V. The Dative. §.68 452-455 VI. The Accusative. §.69 455-459 VIL The Locative, §.70 459-463 VIII. The Ablative. §.71 463-466 Chapter V. Pronouns. I. Personal Pronouns. §.72 466-469 CONTENTS. 15 Page. n. Demonstrative pronouns. §.73 470—472 m. The relative and correlative pronoun. §. 74. 472—476 IV. The interrogative pronouns. §. 75 • •■ • 476—477 V. The indefinite pronouns. §.76 477—478 VI. The reflexive pronoun. §.77 478-481 Section 11. Tlie Verb. Chapter VI. The Infinitive. §.78. ...... 481-483 Chapter VII. The Gerundive. §.79 483—484 Chapter VIII. The Participles. §.80 484-491 Chapter IX. The tenses of the verb. I. The Present. §.83 491-494 II. The Imperfect. §.84 494 III. The Aorist. §. 85. 1) The simple Aorist 495 2) The habitual Aorist 496—497 IV. The Perfect. §.86 497-498 V. The Pluperfect. §.87 498-499 VI. The Future and Future past. §. 88 • • • 500-501 Chapter X. The Moods. I. The Indicative. §.89 501 II. The Potential. §.90 502-504 III. The Imperative. §.91 505-506 n. THE SYNTHETICAL PART. Section III. The simple Sentence. Chapter XI. Subject and Predicate. §. 61. . . 507—508 Chapter XII. Concord of the Subject and Pre- dicate. §.93 509 Chapter XHI. Enlargement of the sentence by a near and remote object. §. 94. . . 510—513 Chapter XIV. Enlargement of the sentence by a nearer definition of the verb as pre- dicate. §.95 513-514 Chapter XV. Omission of the verb as predi- cate. §.96 515 16 CONTENTS. Page. Section IV. Tlie compoimd Sentence. Chapter XYI. i. Coordination of sentences. §. 97. 516—517 Chapter XYII, Contraction of coordinate sen- tences into one; concord of two and more subjects and predicates. §. 98. 517—519 Chapter XVIII. ii. Subordination of sentences. §. 99. 1) Subordination of a sentence by subjunctive particles. §.100 520-525 2) Subordination of a sentence by the relative and relative adverbs. §. 101 525—526 3) Subordination of a sentence by an inter- rogative pronoun or particle. §. 102 • • • 526 Chapter XIX. Abbreviation of subordinate sen- tences. §. 103 527 Chapter XX. On the indirect oration. §. 104. 528 Appendix I On the Sindhl Calendar 529—533 Appendix II. Survey of the different Sindhi- Arabic Alphabets 534—535 INTRODUCTION. THE EELATIONSHIP OP THE SINDHI TO THE SANSKRIT AND PEAKRIT. The Sindhi is a pure Sanskritical language, more free from foreign elements than any other of the North Indian vernaculars. The old Prakrit grammarians may have had their good reason, to designate the Apabhran- sha dialect, from which the modern Sindhi is immedia- tely derived, as the lowest of all the Prakrit dialects; but if we compare now the Sindhi with its sister-tongues, we must assign to it, in a grammatical point of view, the first place among them. It is much more closely related to the old Prakrit, than the Marathi, Hindi, Panjabi and BangalT of our days, and it has pre- served an exuberance of grammatical forms, for which all its sisters may well envy it. For, while all the modern vernaculars of India ^) are already in a state of complete decomposition, the old venerable mother- tongue being hardly recognisable in her degenerate daughters, the Sindhi has, on the contrary, preserved most important fragments of it and erected for itself a grammatical struc- ture, which surpasses in beauty of execution and internal harmony by far the loose and levelling construction of its sisters. The Sindhi has remained steady in the first stage of decomposition after the old Prakrit, wheras all the 1) In speaking of the modern vernaculars of India we exclude troughout the Dravidian idioms of the South, which belong to quitt a different stock of languages. Trump p, Sindhi-Grammar. 1 11 INTRODUCTION. other cognate dialects have sunk some degrees deeper; we shall see in the course of our introductory remarks, that the rules, which the Prakrit grammarian Krama- dishvara has laid down in reference to the Apabhransha, are still recognisable in the present Sindhi, which by no means can be stated of the other dialects. The Sindhi has thus become an independant language, which, though sharing a common origin with its sister- tongues, is very materially differing from them. The Sindhi, which is spoken within the boundaries of Sindh proper, is divided into three dialects, which grammatically differ very little from each other, but offer considerable discrepancies in point of pronunciation. The dialect of lower Sindh, comprising the Indus -Delta and the sea-coast, is called ^J^ lari, from t5T5 laru^), by which lower Sindh is designated. The dialect, which is spoken north of Haiderabad, is called TOTT?^^ siraiki, from "ftl^ siro, by which Upper Sindh is designated; the dialect in vogue in the Thar, or desert of Sindh, is called ^^IT!^ thareli, from ^"^ tharu, the desert. The dialect of Lar, though employed in most Sindhi compositions, is not the purest; the vowels are frequently contracted and the consonants too much softened down by assimilation. The northern or Siraiki dialect has remained far more original and has preserved the purity of pronunciation with more tenaciousness, than the southern one. With reference to this superiority of the northern dialect to the southern the Sindhis like to quote the proverb: lara jo parhyo sire jo dhago. The learned man of Lar is an ox in Upper Sindh. 1) ^T5 is not a proper noun, but an appellation, signifying: „sloping ground;" the same is the case with 'RTOT ^i^^» which signifies the upper country. INTRODUCTION. Ill The dialect of the Thar is vigorous but uncouth and already intermingled with the Marvari; it is spoken by the Shikaris, Dhedhs (%;g carrier) and other out- cast tribes. As far as I know, there are no literary compositions extant in this dialect. The object of these introductory remarks is to show the relative position, which the Sindhi holds to the Sanskrit and Prakrit; and in order to elucidate this subject, we shall lay down the rules and principles, by which the present Sindhi vowel and consonantal system has been derived from the Sanskrit by the me- dium of the Prakrit. Thus, we hope, a solid basis also will be gained for intercomparing the Sindhi with its other sister-tongues. By this process alone, which will enable us, to assign to the Arian stock, what has been taken from it, though much altered now in shape and outward appearance by dint of contraction and assimilation, we shall on the other hand be able to trace out a certain residuum of vocables, which we must allot to an old aboriginal language, of which neither name nor extent is now known to us, but which, in all probability, was of the Tatar stock of languages and spread throughout the length and breadth of India before the irruption of the Arian race, as all the other vernaculars contain a similar non- Arian residuum of words, which have been already designated as "provincial" by the old Prakrit grammarians. The following investigation is destined for such as may be competent, by their previous studies, to penetrate more deeply into the real nature of the modern idioms of India, and for them, I trust, these outlines may prove useful and at the same time incentive, to follow up more deeply the intricate path, which I have pointed out. 1* IV INTRODUCTION. I. THE SINDHI VOWEL SYSTEM. ■) §. 1. We consider first the single vowels, their change, substitution, contraction or elision in Sindhi. 1) ^ (r) and its permutations. The Sindhi, like the old Prakrit, has cut off ^ from its system of sounds; for it is either treated as a vowel, in which case it is changed to i, a etc., or as a consonant, in which latter case it coincides with At the beginning of a word ^, if standing by itself, is changed to ft (ri), just as in Prakrit, e. g. Sindhi ft^ richu, bear, Prak. f^, Sansk. "^"^^ But if ^ be joined to a consonant, the following rules hold good: a) r is usually dissolved into i, as: "^^TTST disanu, to see, Sansk. ^"^ (but Prak. '^'^l^), Hindi t^lJ^J? ft^ vichu, scorpion, Prak. fcj^f^^ (or f^^j^^), Sansk. ^f^«fi; f^S^ ki5, done, Prak. f^^, Sansk. ^rf: fxf^- ^Tff ginhanu; to take, Sansk. T^, Prak. ^TTTg^ 6) r is dissolved into u, if the consonant, to which it is joined, happens to be a labial, as: "Sf^ budho, old, Prakrit on the other hand cf^, Sansk. "a^; V(^^ muo, dead, Prak. TT<^ or already T{^ (by elision of ^), Sansk. IJrT. In such instances, as 5^^^^ sunanu, to 1) In order to facilitate the intercomparison of the Sindhi with the Sanskrit and Prakrit we have used in these introductory remarks a modilSed Sanskrit alphabet, the particulars of which see further on under the Sindhi alphabets. The romanized transcription, which we have added -every -where, is in accordance with the Standard Alphabet by Prof. Dr. Lepsius, 2^ edition. INTRODUCTION. V hear, Prak. §^j the original root- vowel (Sansk. ^) has been preserved. c) In most instances though r is dissolved into ar, irrespective of the consonant to which it may be joined, as: H^"^ maranu, to die, Prak. H^, Sansk. 1J. VIT;;^ bharanu, to fill, Prak. H^, Sansk. H. VT"^ dharanu, to place, Prak. "^T, Sansk. "U. tiis^M saranu, to move, Prak. ^^, Sansk. H. In such hke instances the Sindhi, as well as all the other cognate dialects, is quite in accordance with Pra- krit usage, the Sanskrit verbal noun being taken as the base of the infinitive in the modern idioms. In other instances though the Sindhi is not so liberal in dissolving r, as the Prakrit; it has managed, on the con- trary, in many cases to preserve r by changing it to ir or transposing the same , as : 'W^'T mirdangu (or : f^TVI mirdhangu) a tabor, Prak. "Pf^^TY, Sansk. iT^'l:; f^R5 virkhu, taurus (planet), Sansk. cT^; f^Vt hirdho^), heart, Prak. f^^fSI, Sansk. ^^^I^ but the more Prakritical form f^^^ hio, is also in use in Sindhi. In a few cases r has been preserved by being changed to simple r (subscribed), in conjunction with a dental t, d, or a cerebral t, d; as: IfJ^ jatrd, son-in-law, Prak. ^TTT^^Stj Sansk. ^"PRTTl^' ii^ this form ff has been elided , which is rather of rare occurrence, and the dental has passed into a cerebral, the affix cR being dropped altogether; similarly T^T? niatre, audits derivatives, as: TTR^t niatrejo, TfTZHt ^atret5 etc., corresponding to the Prakrit form TJf^^^, Sansk. TTTrT^* 1) The aspiration of \f is caused by the following r, which very frequently aspirates a preceding c-onsonant, as we shall have often oc- casion to notice. VI INTRODUCTION. 2) The Diphthongs ^ ai and ^ au. Properly speaking there are no diphthongs in Sindhi, as little as in Prakrit ; ai is generally pronounced loosely as a-i, and au as a-u. The SindhT, however, is somewhat tighter in its pronunciation and not quite so effeminate as the Prakrit, so that it will depend more or less on the option of the speaker, if he will contract ai or au into a real diphthong, or pronounce them se- parately as two distinct vowels. From the manner of writing, no safe conclusion can be drawn, as a fixed system of orthography is still a desideratum. It may however be laid down as a general rule, that the Sindhi ignores diphthongs and pronounces them as two distinct vowels. a) The diphthong ai. a) In such words, as are borrowed from the Arabic or Persian, the original diphthong is generally retained, and written and pronounced accordingly, as: ^"^ sairu, journey; Arab. IaII; ^^y paida, created, Pers. Ijoo; like- wise in such nouns, as have been taken from the Hindu- stani, as: ^^ paiso, a pice. On the rest it is quite optional, to write and pronounce for instance %^ saina or ^^T mina, marrow, Sansk. "JTWr. In this way a has been shortened to i in all those forms, which are already alleged by the Prakrit gram- marian Kramadishvara in the Apabhransha dialect (com- pare: Lassen, Instit. Linguae Prak. p. 454) as: "Rf^" fTT^ jia-tia (Apabhransha: 'nT^-ffT'^j instead of ^V" rTV)? f^fW^frrfW jite-tite, where -there (Apabhransha: ^r^-Wr^'), from ZJ^-fR); f^ff{ kite, where? (Apa- J) e is in Prakrit before a double consonant := e =: t. INTRODUCTION. IX bhransha: ^r^, from an original form era, instead of ^>^, thence the common Sansk. form c|^)^ The Sindhi adverb ^^ la or ^^ la, thus, corresponds to the Prak. "5^^, and is regularly derived from the Sansk. adverb ^F^ZfTT (not from 'jfrTj which Lassen has already doubted) with the elision of h (la = iha). Short a is occasionally, but rarely, changed to u, as: TT^^ ra-uru, tax, Sansk. TI^^T. (but not in the examples quoted by Lassen §. 173, 3). Long a is in Sindhi frequently preserved in such forms, where in Prakrit it has been already shortened (owing to the contraction or assimilation of the following compound consonant): as: %TP7T hairagi, a religious ascetic, Prak. '^TJ^, Sansk. %ip^; TIU?^ marikha, way, Prak. 4^ J J | , Sansk. 'TTTTj ^T?T j^ti'^? pilgrimage, Prak. ^"^j Sansk. Ijmj; ofT^, vaghu, tiger, Prak. '^7^, Sansk. cZTT^T. Long a has been shortened in ^t^K ^^~ dare, spade, Sansk. "^FJ^. Long a is weakened to i in the following adverbs, after the analogy of the Prakrit, as: IT'fef^- rTf^f^ ja- dehe-taclehe, when -then; ^ff^f^ kadehe, when? which are derived from the Sansk. adverbs: Tf^X-fT^J ^^T. Long a as a feminine termination of Prakrit nouns is in Sindhi occasionally permuted for i or even i (e), as: cfxf va-i, speeck, Prak. cfT^, Sansk. ^J^ ; uft dhure, origin, Prak. ^U, Sansk. '^^. The only example of final ^H of a masc. theme being changed to i is U? ra-e, prince, Prak. TTW, Sansk. TTWT nom. In a certain number of words, ending in the Sansk. crude state in rT (but nom. sing. rTT), final a has been changed in Sindhi (as now and then already in Prakrit) to u, as: fl|^, father, Prak. fl4^| (by elision of rT), Sansk. nom. fxHrff; ^"^ bhau, brother, Prak. HTW Sansk. ^Ifll; and by the same levelling process: ^^ X INTRODUCTION. man, motlier, Prak. TTW, Sansk. WTfTT; TI^ rau, prince (besides T]R()' ^^ pandhu, journey, Sansk. Xt^^T ^• As regards the vowel changes in the midst of a word, the Sindhi adheres on the average to Prakrit usage, as: XI^*^ patharu, bed, Prak. tf?^, Sansk. XT'^BTTT,? Hindi f^W^)? different from the else identical word Xf^T^ stone, Prak. Xfr^, Sansk. IT^^ (Hindi XJr^^); TT^U maya, compassion, Sansk. *i\m (Hindi likewise TT^); ^^^t devali, temple (in Sindhi with the fem. termination i), Prak. ^^^, Sansk. "^cfX^'IJ (Hindi likewise ^cj;^). h) The vowels i, i. Short i is in Sindhi pronounced like short e, when preceded or followed by ^ h, and regularly so, when ending a word, as: ^1|^ eharo, such a one, "firf^frT mehete, a mosque; TTT^ gale, word. Short i corresponds therefore often to the Prakrit IJ e, which is considered short, when followed by a compound consonant, whereas 17 e is in Sindhi always long; e. g. Prak. ^T^jg, Sindhi -pTTCI ("pTTTL^), to take; f?(^ nindra, sleep, Prak. "^ or fttT^, Sansk. f^^T; f^'? cinhu, sign, Prak. ^^^ or f^^, Sansk. f^. It is a curious phenomenon in Sindhi, that occasion- ally a short i is interpolated in a syllable, which the effeminate pronunciation finds too harsh for the ear. This is particularly the case, when a syllable closes with a double n or n followed by another consonant (especially a liquida). The consequence of this effeminate pronunciation is, that the n thus separated by the interpolation of i, becomes nasalized, as: ^f^^ saina, sign, hint, instead of ^Jf^, from ^fl^; ^^fjl^ saisaru, world, instead of ^H^T^ ' 4-Jd[^C?5 maijala, a day's journey, instead of THT^ (jCli), and is frequently no longer heard at all, especially INTRODUCTION. XI in the mouth of the Muhammedans , who write: jClo ma-izala, sLL^ sa-isaru etc. Lengthened is i in ^ ki, what, Prakrit already ^, from the Sanskrit f%R ; further in ^f^ sihu, lion, Prak. ^^, Sansk. f^^; but not in f^^ jibha, tongue, Prak. ^fT? Sansk. f^^. Long 1 is kept fast by the Sindhi in many instances, where in Prakrit it has been shortened to i, in consequence of the assimilation of consonants, as: rft^ tirthu, a holy bathing-place, Prak. frTF^, Sansk. rft^. Long 1 is rarely shortened to i, and this only, when ending a noun, as: IRTft. nare, a woman, Prak. et Sansk. ^f^. Long 1 passes into e in those instances, which have been already marked out by the old Prakrit grammarians, as Prakrit ^f^B^ T^ftH etc., Sansk. cR^'?^^ f^ etc. The corresponding Sindhi forms are: qRF^, keharo, what? (by transposition of i|, instead of %^;^) ; ^"^ keru, who, (by elision of 5, instead of %H kerhu; in the Apa- bhransha dialect r on the other hand has been dropped, as: ^^). The Prakrit form Tjf^ (Apabhransha "^il^) has not been taken up by the Sindhi, but other forms have been created from the pronominal bases cfi^ ^^ 'ift, ^tjit^ ^^) ^y adding to them the diminutive affix 5^ ro, as : f^^^t keharo, of what kind; f^^^t^flT^ft Jetiara — tehar5 , of which kind — of such a kind ; ^l^^t ehar5, of this kind, ^^5^ ^haro, of that kind. c) The vowels u, u. On the whole the Sindhi has taken up those changes, which these vowels have been made subject to in Prakrit; XII INTRODUCTION. but in some special cases it has remained more original, than the Prakrit, as: Xf^n purusu, man, Prak. Xlft^ Sansk. Tf^^; ^f^tt? mukhiri, a bud, Prak. Tf^^, Sansk. U is changed to a in: Tf^ garo, heavy, Prak. T^^ Sansk. H^; I'^T^ dabalu, weak (Prak. still ^W^, Sansk. q^cf^; or it may be dropped altogether, as: Iff^ pare, on, upon, Prak. "^^T^ft, Sansk. "^XTfi!,, U is changed to o only in the following instances, ^s: ^rft iiioti, pearl, Prak. l^"^ (motta) Sansk. TT^; T^t^ p5thi, book, Prak. "q^r^^? Sansk. ^^^15 5 ^- 5k. kodare, a spade, Sansk. "^Ff^^ Long u is preserved more tenaciously in Sindhi, than in Prakrit, e. g. ^T^ nuro, a hollow ring on the ankle, Prak. TTf^^T, Sansk. cTOT: — ^^ such cases, where • original u has been depressed to o in Prakrit, the original ' vowel generally reappears in Sindhi, as: ^fl^f^ ukhiri, a mortar, Prak. ^^1^^, Sansk. ^^Hl^^; Ilf^ puthe, ^ power, Prak. "CTtf^? Sansk. Xlf^, which is, though identical in form, not to be confounded with Xjf^ puthe, the back, Sansk. XTg', Hindi Xf^^ d) The vowels e and o. In Sindhi, as well as in Prakrit, e and o are no longer looked upon as Gruna - vowels , but as simple sounds. In Sindhi e and o are always long, never anceps, as in Prakrit; for the short Prakritical e short i is substituted in Sindhi, as: f^^ hiku, one, Prak. 15^; and for the short Prakritical o short u, as stated already. Both vowels keep their place very steadfastly and frequently reappear in such cases, where they have been INTRODUCTION. XIII already shortened in Prakrit, owing to the assimilation of consonants, as: $TT premu, love, Prak. tf^TT (p^mma); ^H^ jobhanu, time of youth, Prak. "^St"^^ (jovva- nam); ^ff jogu, fit, Prak. ^^pTf, Sansk. '^^t^. Quite exceptional is the shortening of o to u in ^^f\ luharu, blacksmith, instead of: ^t^^T"^ (Sansk. ^t^^lT)? where a has been likewise shortened to a; and the change of e to i in xf^ piju, draught, Sansk. ^"ZJ; 1^ khi, wellfare, Sansk. "^l^; rftw nihu, love, Prak. ^]|^, Sansk. '^^; if(^ mihu, rain, Prak. ^i|t, Sansk. When ending a noun e and o are frequently shortened to e and li respectively, especially in poetry; but these changes being peculiar to Sindhi, we shall consider them hereafter separately. The peculiarity of the Apabhransha dialect, as noted by the grammarian Kramadishvara , is fully borne out by the modern Sindhi; it uses likewise in the locative singular e (i) instead of e, as XJl^f^ pa- radehe, in a foreign country, XfJT^ ghare, in a house etc. In the same way, as the Apabhransha, the Sindhi also changes to a great extent the Prakrit termination o to u, as: cjj;^ kamu, business, Prak. "^piTt ^^c. The same may also be said of the ablative sing, termination ^|?j (= a — o with elision of ^) which is commonly shortened to adu in the Apabhransha dialect , and in Sindhi further to a-u: as ^^T^ ghara-u, from a house. This old Sindhi ablative termination is now-a-days generally con- tracted to ^^ au (a being likewise shortened to a, and to avoid the hiatus , both vowels being nasalized) but a-u is still very frequently used in poetry. XIV INTRODUCTION. §• 3. The elision, contraction and insertion of vowels. These three points , so important in the old Prakrit, we may, as far as the Sindhi is concerned, sum up under the following brief remarks: a) An ehsion of vowels takes far more rarely place in Sindhi, than in the Prakrit, because the consonants do not so easily give way; there is however no lack of instances, in which the Sindhi accedes to Prakrit usage, as: <1^|^ duar5, temple (different from H^|15 door, Sansk. '^JX), Sansk. Hg(T^^5 where e has been elided; (^^1^ siar5, the cold season, Prak. ^ff^WT^) Sansk. ^ri<*lc!i; ^^ kumbharu, potter, Sansk. cR^^TT.; X(i^j^ pakhala, a pair of leather-bags , Sansk. XfTftl^^; f^TET rinu, the desert (the Pin), Sansk. "S^JRIIJ; f^^ dhia, daughter (prakrit already \ft^j see Lassen p. 172, note); f^ bi, also, Prak. f^, Sansk. ^fxT. h) As regards the contraction of vowels, the Sindhi coincides more fully with the Prakrit, though in some instances I have noticed a deviation from Prakrit analogy, as: "^^t cotho, the fourth, Prak. xl^ir'^, Sansk. T^IJ^; 1^75 moru, peacock, Prak. 1^^? Sansk. THR; ^^ lunu, salt, Prak. ^TTf, Sansk. ^cfTJT; ^^^ sonu, gold, Sansk. G. Trumpii, Sindhi-Grammar. 9 XVIII INTRODUCTION. The cerebral "^ is occasionally written in Sindhi, but only by Brahmans, and even with them its use depends on their relative knowledge of Sanskrit. We may therefore as well leave out this letter from the consonantal system of the Sindhi, as its actual pronun- ciation is completely ignored. In Capt. Stack's Sindhi Dictionary some words are given with the cerebral ^, such as: f^'^^ visai, voluptuary, 5"^ dustu, bad, cJJ]? kastu, wretchedness etc., but the letter itself as well as those words are only known to the Brahmans. The guttural 5^ n, as well as the palatal ^T n^ keep their place in Sindhi as single letters, e. g. ^3* anu, body (Hindi ^rf or ^TJ )? Sansk. ^^; ^^3^ mananu, to ask (Hindi iqjJ^J), Sansk. ^T'l^ (r. Wj)^ TJSP^T maiianu, to heed (Hindi ^^), Sansk. "^iT^W. In the kindred dialects both these nasals are only used in con- junction with a letter of their varga, and never as single consonants (the Panjabi alone being excepted). The cerebral "^ n has not supplanted the dental "ST in Sindhi, as in Prakrit, but both are sharply kept asunder; '^ n is also used as a single consonant, in the same way as 3* n and Sf n , and is of very frequent occurrence, in which respect the Panjabi alone agrees with the Sindhi, the other dialects using TJT n only before letters of the cerebral class, with the exception of the Hindustani, which is destitute of a cerebralnasal. §. 6, 1) Single consonants at the beginning of a word. At the beginning of a word the following consonants occur in Sindhi: J) Gutturals: ^ k, ^ kh; ^ g, "R gh; — - f h; — — ^ g. 2) Palatals: "^^ c, ^ch; ^ j, 1^ jh; — "^f y; — ^ s, ^T J. 3) Cerebrals: ? t, 3 th; 5d, ^dh; — 'S r; — — f d. 4) Dentals: TT t, ^ th; ^ d, ^ dh; ^ n; t r; ^ 1; ^ s; — ojLablals: "R p, "^ ph; "^ b, ^ bh; i?m; "^ v; — — '^ h. INTRODUCTION. XIX This scheme deviates from that of the Prakrit in some essential points, which we have partly already noticed. Peculiar to the Sindhi is the cerebral 5 r, beginning a word, which is not found in any of the other dialects. It is, however, also in Sindhi confined to the two inter- jections § re and ^ ri; the former is used in calling out to a man, the latter in calling out to a woman. There can be no doubt, that we have in both forms the Sansk. interjectional adverb ^JX^ (which form is also used in Sindhi) which has been vindicated by Dr. Cald- well (Comparative Grammar of the Dravidian languages, p. 440) to the Dravidian idioms of the south, and the original signification of which is : o slave ! The correctness of Dr. Caldwell's statement is borne out by the Sindhi, in which besides. 5 ^.nd 5^ also ^^ and ^I5T i^ used, corresponding to the Dravidian ada. All those consonants, as arrayed above, hold their place at the beginning of a word, when standing single; but when a noun happens to be compounded, then the first consonant of the second noun is no longer con- sidered initial, and may therefore be elided, as: TO^% siaro, the cold season, Prakrit already Tf^^Tf^? Sansk. ^sfVfT^ — ^T^* 1) ^ k is not subject to aspiration, as in some examples of the Prakrit, e. g. I^^, Sansk. cfi^, Sindhi ^"^ kubo, hump-backed; neither is k changed to "^ at the beginning of a w^ord, but frequently at the end (being an affix) and in the case of the genitive affix ^^ even to the media ^ j. The k of Arabic - Persian words on the other hand is now and then aspirated or even changed to ^ /, as: ;«jLi4^ khutabu, school, or ^Li:^ x^tabu, from the Arabic iol;c^; ^L-§X^ sukhanu, a rudder, Arab. ^LXL. 2* XX INTRODUCTION. 2) T g is aspirated in the single instance of ^P^ gharu, a house, Prak. TJ^ (instead of ^T^), Sansk. 17^, 3) rT t is very frequently changed to the cor- responding cerebral 7 t. The tendency of the dentals, to surrender their place to the corresponding cerebrals, has so much got the upper hand in Sindhi, that its consonantal system differs therein quite materially and significantly from the old Prakrit; e. g. ZT^ tramo, copper, Prak. wt"^, Sansk. fTFt (^^^^^ TTRT); | tre, three, Prak. frffiSj Sansk. "^tftl (Hindi rft*T); ^^^ same may also be stated of the aspirate ^ th , as : 31"^ thanu, stable, Prak. "^TJl, Sansk. ^T«7. The cerebral ^ (3) with its media 5 (^ comprises the most non-Arian elements of the language; nearly y4 of the words, which commence with a cerebral, are taken from some aboriginal, non-Arian idiom, which in recent times has been termed "Scythian"^), but which we would prefer to call Tatar. This seams to be a very strong proof, that the cerebrals have been borrowed from some idiom anterior to the introduction of the Arian family of languages; the Sanskrit uses the cerebrals very sparingly, but in Prakrit, which is already con- siderably tinged with so-called "provincial" (i. e. non- Arian) elements, they struggle already hard to supplant the dentals. 4) ^ d , as well as its tenuis rT t , is very frequently changed to the corresponding cerebral 5 d, and, as even d did not seem hard enough at the beginning of a word, it was changed in most cases to the peculiar Sindhi ? d (the pronunciation of which see under the Sindhi al- phabets), as: ft*^ ^olij a kind of sedan chair, Prakrit already f^^T? Sansk. "I^^T"' 55 dandu, a stick, Prak. 1) This term, tliougli used by Dr. Caldwell and Mr. Ed. Norris, we find too vague; Tatar is more specific, as we understand by this term a certain family of languages. INTRODUCTION. XXI 5Tt5, Sansk. "^5; ff^TTf dianu, to give, Prak. ^f^^ Sansk. root ^J; f^^HT disanu, to see, Prak. Fcpl^ Sansk. "g^. But if r be joined to the cerebral media, the simple cerebral (^ must be used, as 5 d is already by its own nature a double cerebral, e. g. ^T^ drakha, grape, Sansk. "^T^^ (Hindi ^T^). The simple cerebral 5 d is very seldom to be met with at the beginning of a word, and must be carefully distinguished from ^ d, as: T53t ^it^l^Oj obstinate, but f^Tf dit^^o, seen, par- ticiple past of T5?RT to see. ^ d, is changed to its aspirate V dh in the single instance of fif^ dhia, daughter, after the precedent of the Prakrit ift^J o^ ^W. 5) Initial "R is aspirated in some instances, as: XfJT^ifft phasi or TRT^ phahi, a noose, Sansk. XTT^ (Hindi Xf^f^); now and then it passes also to the semi -vowel cf (by the medium of "^ b) as: oJTCT vajho, a Hindu schoolmaster, Sansk. t^IfX^T'^ (initial u having first been dropped). 6) The semi -vowel '^ y has become now very scarce in Sindhi at the beginning of a word, as: ^^^ITf yabhanu, coire; IJ^ yato, stout; HJl^ yaraha, eleven. After the analogy of the Prakrit initial "^ is generally changed to ^, as: ^ jo, who, Sansk. ^; Ifn jasu, fame, Sansk. "^"^J. In words, borrowed from the Arabic or Persian, y is always preserved, as: "^"'^ yarn, friend, Pers. sL> etc. The only instance, where initial '^ has been changed to ^ 1 in Sindhi is ^^T3 lathe, a walking-stick; the same is the case in Prakrit, ^ft, Sansk. llf%. XXII INTRODUCTION. §• 7. 2) Single consonants in the midst of a word. According to a common Prakrit rule the following consonants : ^ k, ^ g; ^ c, W J; W t, ^ d; XT p, ^ b, when standing single in the midst of a word, may either be retained or elided. This rule we find corroborated by the Sindhi, but not without some essential restrictions, \ the consonants being on the whole more frequently re- tained than elided, as the effeminacy of pronunciation has not yet reached that degree of indistinctness in Sindhi, which so peculiarly characterizes the Prakrit. We shall therefore find, that in many instances the Sindhi has followed the already beaten track, but has more fre- quently preserved the old harder form, or chosen its own way of ehsion and contraction. The semi -vowels are but rarely totally elided in Sindhi; they either keep their place or are dissolved into their corresponding vowels. Examples of elision: Ifl^ sui, needle, Prak. ;fj^ Sansk. ^'^. f^^ kio, done, Prak. f^^, Sansk. cRff; ^T^ rau, prince, Prak. JJ^^ Sansk. TT'5IT' "^^^^W ca-umas5, the rainy season, Sansk. "^fTl^TIff; ^^^ sara-u, autumn, Prak. ^Tj^? Sansk. '^T.^^; ftf^ piu, father, Prak. fxTW? Sansk. flRTT. This process of elision is extended even to foreign words, as: ^T^"^! nakhuo, a ship-master, Pers. ItX^LI. But more frequently the consonants keep their place, as: ^TFT^ sagaru, the sea, Prak. ^T^^, Sansk. ^TPTl; ;:iTT^ nagaru, town, Prak. XSJ^^, Sansk. ^rf^; ^"^^ vacanu, promise, Prak. c[^IT!f, Sansk. oT"^^. It is quite characteristical , that the Prakrit does not elide the cerebrals, for which it shows already such a predilection, but, wherever possible, it changes INTRODUCTION. XXIII the dentals into cerebrals, to guard them thus against elision. This process we find in full operation in the modern dialects, which have sprung from the Prakrit; the common dentals have become too weak for the mouth of the people , a circumstance , which receives a particular light from the manner, in which the modern Indians write and pronounce European words; every dental is without mercy changed by them into a cerebral, which proves at least so much, that the cerebrals are more familiar to them, than the dentals. Let us now briefly glance over the exceptions, which have been noted down by the Prakrit grammarians. 1) According to the rule, laid down at the head of this paragraph, the letters ^ k, T g, '^ c, IT j are, when not elided, retained. The exceptions from this rule in Prakrit are not borne out by the Sindhi, and seem therefore to have been more of a local character. The only exception, which is corroborated by the modern idioms, is the Prakrit form "^f^Tjft? sister, Sansk. ^fS^^jf^, which must be explained by an original form "^f^^^ft' from which "^f^Tjt ^^^ sprung ; Hindi "^f^^ and Sindhi, by transposition of the aspiration, ^'3[^[ bhenu. ^ k, may pass into its corresponding media ^, as: H^W bhagatu, a worshipper, Sansk. ^T^; ^T^f^ sagate, strength, Sansk. "Sttf^;, On the contrary there is a transition of T to ^ (and by the influence of following r to kh) in t^J khada, a pit, Prak. T[^, Sansk. TJ^^ 2) The cerebral 7 t and its aspirate Z th, frequently pass into their corresponding media, as: ^^ kandhi, a necklace (besides ^^), Sansk. ^Tt^^, This is fully borne out by the modern dialects, especially the Sindhi, which goes already a step further in this downward course, and changes 5 d to f r, and ^ dh to ^ rh; e. g. "^5 baru, the Indian fig-tree, Sansk. cf^; ft?^ troranu, to break, Sansk. "^^i Tf^UJi parhanu, to -"^XIV INTKODUCTION. read, Sansk. "q^; if^ pirhi, throne, Sansk. xft^t; ^f^ brhanu, to rolfdown, Sansk. ^. To this permutation also the original Sanskritical 5 d IS subject in many instances, as: ^f^ juranu, to be joined, Sansk. :5Tf; xft^TTT piranu, to press, Sansk. ^ ' \ ' ^^ J^?^' inanimate body, Sansk. 1^5, In a similar manner also the Sansk. ^ dh may be changed to lM^I saghanu, to be able, Prak. ^^^TTT, Sansk. ^fJ^^fiT INTRODUCTION. XXXIII (Hindi ^«^^), and perhaps a few others, which may have escaped my notice. On the whole the Sindhi, as well as the kindred dialects, agrees with this ground -law of the Prakrit^), without making it an immutable rule of its proceedings : for it may also assimilate the following consonant to the preceding. In many instances the Sindhi is more , original, than the Prakrit, by preserving such like con- junctions of consonants, as are usual in Sanskrit. Examples of assimilation. ^1^ suto, asleep, Prak. ^'^, Sansk. ^^; ^TR^ upano, created, Prak. '^'OJirjJT, Sansk. '^rR^ST? ^TFT bhatu, boiled rice, Prak. ^'^, Sansk. ^^ (Hindi ^Trf^? ^J W^' longing the preceding vowel); ^^ ladho, received, Prak. ^5^, Sansk. ^^. But on the other hand: cR"^ kubo, hump -backed, Prak. 'H^t? Sansk. cR^, But an original compound consonant may also be preserved unaltered in Sindhi, as: ^©5 sabdu, word, Prak. ;^^, Sansk. "SJ^; ^"^5 mukto, free, Prak. '^'^, Sansk. H^. It depends however more or less on the option of the speaker, if he will pronounce a compound con- sonant as such, or separate the same by the insertion of a vowel, as: ^"©S sabdu, or ^f%H sabidu, the in- serted i being pronounced so rapidly, that it is scarcely perceptible. The Musalmans therefore, when writing with Arabic letters, never place the sign jazm {-^) above a con- sonant, destitute of a vowel, but always add the kasr, which is nearly equal to jazm, it being scarcely heard at all in 1) It must be stated here, that according to the common method of writing the Sindhi, a double consonant is not expressed generally, but only in such instances, where two words, written else in the same way, are to be distinguished, as ^1 una, by him, and ^f unna, wool. Trumpp, Sindhi-Granimar. 3 XXXIV INTRODUCTION. pronunciation. The next vowel, thus inserted, is usually i (kasr), but a or u may also be employed, according to euphony or the sequence of vowels, as: VJTJff bhagatu, a worshipper, Sansk. ^^; ^rfffT sagate, power, Sansk. ?lf^ (Hindi ^^r^ £). §. 14. B) Assimilation of the nasals. a) A nasal, preceding a consonant, generally keeps its place as: '^ff antu, end, Sansk. ^'5Jf^ A preceding nasal may be dropped altogether, if the preceding vowel happen to be a long one, as: T^PR masu, flesh, Sansk. Hf^5 ^ift g^^o, a cart, Sansk. T{1^ (Hindi 1T^), the doubled consonant being cleared away in the latter instance by the prolongation of the preceding vowel. The compound •^ nm is severed by the insertion of a vowel, as: ^W^ janamu, birth, Sansk. ^•^. h) In a compound consonant the following nasal is assimilated to the preceding consonant, as: '^'PT age, fire, Prak. ^frrf, Sansk. ^pj; ^^Tt lago, applied, Prak. ^TTf, Sansk. ^^; ^'Tt bhago, broken, Sansk. The compound consonant however may also remain unaltered, or be taken asunder by the insertion of a vowel, as: ^]f^ ratnu or ^)R ratanu, jewel; WlTTTHf jujanu, wise, Prak. n^, Sansk. »^; ^XT«Tt supano, dream, Sansk. The nasal may also be pushed forward, to escape being assimilated: as: rtlT nango, naked, Prak. •T"T^ Sansk. ^^. On the reverse a following nasal may also as- similate a preceding consonant, as: ^^^ sa-ina, hint, Sansk. ^^; TTTSft rani, queen, Sansk. "^J^. The nasal may also assimilate a preceding consonant in such a wise, INTRODUCTION. XXXV that it draws the same over at the same time to its own varga. The only example of such an assimilation (if it be not to be explained in some other way) is the reflexive pronoun XfT^ pana, self, Prak. ^XnTJ, Sansk. ^|f44|; in Hindi we have the form ^TJ , which has sprung from W^, instead of ^^ {= ^|rHT); compare on this head: Lassen §. 67. c) The nasals may assimilate a preceding or fol- lowing semi-vowel, as: XT^ft pum, virtuous, Prak. XJTrifT, Sansk. TRnf; H^ suno, empty, Prak. ^JTrTTT, Sansk. "StRJZf; ^^^ unna, wool, Sansk. "^^T^^; "^^TTTOT ca-umaso, the rainv season, Sansk. ^TT^TH, On the other hand notice Xf^J puro, full, Sansk. TlT[f; "^"^ curu, pulverized, Sansk. '^TJ) where the semi- vowel r has assimilated the nasal, r being stronger in sound, than n. ^ mr in the Sanskrit ^^ amra, is changed in Sindhi to mb, as : ^f^ ambu, mangoe, Prak. ^15 (Hindi ^TT) ; but in the case of the Sindhi word TJ^T t^'^^o? copper, Sansk. ffj^, Prak. rf^ (Hindi rTT^T o^ fTTWf) the semi- vow^el r has been pushed forward to t = t, as r may easily hold its place in conjunction with a dental or cerebral. ^ mb is assimilated to mm, as : irTTT nimu (= nimmu) a lime-tree, Sansk. m'^; ^ ml is taken asunder, after the analogy of the Prakrit, as: fil^Tjr milanu, to be obtained, Prak. 'ftf^'RlJ? Sansk. %, Hindi likewise §. 15. C) Assimilation of the semi -vowels. a) The semi-vowel '^ y. a) If the semi- vowel "^ happen to be joined to a preceding consonant, it is assimilated to the same, as: 3* XXXVI INTRODUCTION. ^IT jogu, fit, Prak. ^TTf, Sansk. "^TTJ, Hindi ^TJ ; m^ vagku, a tiger, Sansk. ^Tlf: cf??T va-isu, a Yai- shy a, Sansk. ^3f^Z[ (Hindi '^^). It may, however, also hold its place , as : «fTW vakyu , a sentence , Sansk. cff^ though this is very rarely the case. P) ^, when compounded with a preceding ^, is elided, as: Hft turi, a small trumpet, Prak. fT^? Sansk. fT§; V^^ dhira, firmness, Prak. \|^^, Sansk. \f§; ^^ aru, sense of honor, Sansk. ^If, Hindi ^ft^". But '^ may also be preserved b}^ being changed to ^, as: ifim' dhirju, the same as: ^\jj^ ??"k5I suriju, the sun, Prak. ^T or ^^ft? Sansk. ^fZf; ^"^^ acurju, wonder- ed ^ -^ C^ ^ v» n9 ful, Prak. ^"^ISrR^j Sansk. ^^^. Y) '^ joined to a preceding dental is either simply dropped, as: j7\J\ nitu, always, Prak. f^^, Sansk. mHI; ^n"%H aclitu, the sun, Sansk. ^JTreHT, or it may also, though rarely, be preserved, as: ^^ift mathya, falsely, Prak. frr^T? Sansk. fi^^AjT. But the more usual way is that "^j being first assimilated to a preceding dental, draws the same over to its own (i. e. palatal) class, so that r^ is changed to W, "SZJ to "^j ^ to "^il and ^ to 515^ (for which double consonants, as remarked al- ready, the simple bases are only written in Sindhi); e. g. f^^Tvija, science (^ = '^), Prak. "^^TTj Sansk. f^- W-) W^ aju, to-day, Sansk. ^Rf (Hindi ^T^); ^T^ khaju, food, Sansk. 1^"^; TT15, manjhu, the midst, Prak. TI^rCT, Sansk. lP[Uf: "^IJTtl bajhanu, to be bound, Sansk. "^XZT ; "^T^y vajho , a Hindu schoolmaster , Sansk. ^XTPITT'^; ^T liaca, murder, Sansk. ^^HTT. B) ^ joined to a preceding ^ is changed to IJ^ jh, as: Tf^ g^jliOj concealed, Prak. TTtCT^STT? Sansk. T^Rt. s) ^ is assimilated to a preceding ^, but final ^, instead of being doubled in consequence thereof, is INTRODUCTION. XXXVII aspirated, e. g. cfi^ kalha, yerterclay, Prak. cR^, Sansk. chtt4 (Hindi ^5^); H^ mulliu, price, Sansk. ^7^; in the midst of a word '^ is simply assimilated to ^ (the doubling not being expressed in Sindhi), as : "^^^T palangu, a bedstead, Sansk. Xfq^ (r being exchanged for 1); XJ- ^Tff palanu, a pack-saddle, Prak. Xf^^JTJT, Sansk. Xf^EffTJJ, 1)) The semi- vow el T, r. a) T. is assimilated to a p>re ceding or follo^ying consonant, as: ^PT ^E^^ "^^^ front, Prak. ^JTrff, Sansk. ^^^ 'T^^ g^yai'l? name of a Eagini, Sansk. ^T^^tQ'? ^- ITTTJ gajann, to thunder, Sansk. Tl^{^ (but Hindi T^^- ^T); ^PT kamu {= kammu), business, Pralc ^i^, Sansk. ^5^;^ (Hindi ^^) ; ^^ mundhi, head, Sansk. TT^^; IRTI sapu, snake, Sansk. ^If; THm sigho, quick, Sansk. ^Sff^ (Hindi "S^t^); "^^fit caki, a mill, Sansk. ■^^; nibhagu, misfortune, Sansk. f^^jrf^ On the other hand \, preceding or following a con- sonant, may just as easily hold its place, without being assimilated, as: ^"^ carco, silly talk, Sansk. '^^; tf^ pri, friend, Sansk. iv(H\ T{^ parbhu, a festival, Sansk. Xf"^ ( of = -q , and ^ aspirated by the influence of X) ; rf^ garbu, pride, Sansk. Tycj; "Sra sukiai, Friday, Sansk. W^\l J^^ surgu, heaven, Sansk. WT? ^W dharmu, re- ligion, Prak. IfYT?, Sansk. ^ff{^ Yery frequently such a compound is again dissolved into its constituent parts by the insertion of a vowel, as: fxpO' piri, friend, or jf^ pri; fxf'fti^TrfW piribhate, break of day, Sansk. IWTfT; or r is transposed for euphony's sake, as: IfrTT^ partapu, splendour, Sansk. IfrlT'R; "Rrf partu, leaf (of a book), Sansk. "q^- "^^ drigho, long, Prak. f^XXI, Sansk. '^; flfi"^ kirte, trade, f^# kirtu, ^^^ XXXVIII INTROD UCTION. action, Sansk. ^frT and ^ff; ^cfi traku, a spinning wheel, Sansk. rf^. It very rarely happens, that r is totally elided in a compound, as: GfTSr vaghu, tiger, Sansk. ^U^? TlfTT rate, night, Sansk. Jjf^ (Prak. "^C^ by ejection of a); Hr^ bhau, brother, Sansk. ^rTT. The ejection of r in these and such like examples is caused by the preceding long vowel, which precludes the possibility of assimilating the compound consonant, or by the consonant, with which r forms a conjunction, being initial. In such cases, as 1^"^, the Prakrit has preferred to drop the long vowel, in order to make room for assimilation. P) When compounded with a preceding dental, r is in most cases assimilated to the same in Prakrit, though it may also keep its place; in Sindhi on the other hand r is, when following a dental, mostly pre- served, and the assimilation takes place only in the dialect of Lar (Lower Sindh) , whereas in the dialect of the Upper country (Siro) the original compound is preserved, the den- tal only being commonly changed to a cerebral (or even to an aspirated cerebral, by the influence of r); e. g. TfZ putru, son, Prak. Xf^, Sansk. Tf^ (in Lar: TfT puttu, according to the analogy of the Prakrit); fr^Z mitru, friend, Prak. fiT^? Sansk. jij^ (in Lar: J^Z mittu); '^^ candru, the moon, Prak. "^^^j Sansk. '^^'^ ^^ khetru, a field, Sansk. '?^; Tf^ mantru (or with tran- siton to the media) 1^^ mandru, an incantation, Sansk. T{^; ^ tre, three, Sansk. J^; 5^ dadhru, or 5^ da- dhu, a cutaneous disease, Sansk. F"^; ^XfTTT dhrapanu, to be satiated, Sansk rT'R^ (by transition of the tenuis into the media). In those adverbs , which are compounded with the adverbial affix ^, ^ is, after the precedent of the Prakrit, changed in Sindhi to ^, as: f^Tq kithe, where; f^^ jithe, in ^yhich place; fTT^ tithe, in that place etc. E, when preceding a dental, may likewise be as- similated to the same, as: ^fTT^T katanu, to spin, Sansk. of)'^«-f; ^TTT katara, scissors, Sansk. cfJ^rCt? «ff? ^^^te, a wig, Sansk. oTf^^T; ^f khada, a jDit, Prak. T|f^ Sansk. rffl". On the other hand the compound may also be retainedunaltered, as: ^^TT ardhangu, palsej, Sansk. ^VT'^; ^nt arthu, object, Sansk. ^^; fft^ tirthu, a holy bathing-place, Sansk. fft^; or the compound may again be dissolved by the insertion of a A'owel, as: ^^fw mtirate, image, Sansk. TTTTT^ ^TlrT kirate, glory, Sansk. ^lf#, Prak. f%f%; rf% tirathu = rfl^. Y) ^ rv is either assimilated , as : ^i^ sabhu , all, Sansk. ^of, Hindi ^^^ (the aspiration of b being caused in Sindhi by the influence of elided r); or the compound may be retained unaltered, as, ^TST^PTm sarvasagate, omnipotent; or the compound may be dissolved again by the insertion of a vowel, as: m^ purabu, the east, Sansk. XToT, B) In the compound ^ sr the semi -vowel r may either be assimilated, as, ^^^ suo, heard, Prak. ^^ (= ?7rTT)? Sansk. ^^] ^^ sasu, mother-in-law, Sansk. ^^; or, the compound may be retained, as: "^l" sri, prosperity; or more commonly, the compound is dis- solved by the insertion of a vowel, as f^TTiy siradhu, funeral obsequies, Sansk. "^J^ (Plindi ^^). The San- skrit ^^, tear, Prak. already ^fe (instead of ^^) has become in Hindi ^^; the Sindhi form is '^IT hanja or ^IJ^ hanjha (with initial euphonic h) , s being changed in this instance to ^ or 1^; Panjabi likewise anjhu. The same holds good with reference to the compound XL INTRODUCTION. ^ sr, as: ^PT^^ sahasu, thousand, Prak. ^^W, Sansk. The compound ^ rs and ^ rs are assimilated in SindhT as well as in Prakrit, as: cf^"^ to rain, Sansk. '^^; "RTOt Paso, side, Sansk. XIJ^ (Hindi T(J^); ftp^ sisi, head and neck, Sansk. "^If (Hindi H^H); o^ "they are preserved (of course with transition of "^ and "^ to ^), as: ^l^;3[ darsanu, interview, Sansk. '^'^^; rT^^ tarsanu, to wait, Sansk. fT'EfTU; the compound "Bf rs may also be dissolved into Tff, and this again into Ti^, as: ^^^ sarah5, happy, Sansk. ^^"^ (compare §.11, end). c) The semi-vowel -^ 1. a) ^ forming a compound with another consonant at the beginning of a word, is severed from the same by the insertion of a vowel, as: HU^ saraha, praise, Prak. ^I^JTITj Sansk. "^tfr (r = 1 in Sindhi); fl|t^n Idlesu, fatigue, Sansk. ^7^ (Hindi ^^H); H^^^cR sa- loku, a Sloka, Sansk. "^^cfi, p) In the midst of a word ^ is assimilated to any consonant, save ^, T. and '^, as: "^^"^ bakaru, vegetables, Prak "Sf^^, Sansk. cf^^; or it is severed again from the compound by the insertion of a vowel, as: ^cR, hot ... ^ wind, Prak. '^^, Sansk. "^"^T? ^^^^ initial vowel u being thrown back to serve in place of an inserted vowel. d) The semi-vowel '^ v. a) «f, joined to a preceding consonant at the be- ginning of a word, is either dissolved into u, as: mj surgu, heaven, Sansk. ^f^TT; ^^j^ duaru, door, Prak. ^^Xt^ Sansk. fR; ^W^ ^uau, taste, Sansk. ^fT?[; or it is totally elided (i. e. assimilated to the preceding consonant) as: IT^^ Jalanu, to burn, Sansk. ^^?f; ^rj sargu (besides Wj), heaven, Sansk. ^^; ^T^ sai, INTRODUCTION. XLI lord, or ^J^\ sami, Prak. ^T'fil? Sansk. ^^f5=(^; ^- F^ sahuro, father-in-law, Sansk. "Jg^UT,; ^?! sasu, mother- in-law, Sansk. ^^^ cf v may also be severed from the compound by the insertion of a vowel (a or u), as: ^"^15 savadu, taste, flavour (besides ^^^), Sansk. ^T^; ^^T^ duvaru, door (besides "^W^)- "^ very rarely as- similates a preceding consonant, as: "^ ba, two, Sansk. "l" (r=: vva = bba = b). p) "^ V being joined to a preceding consonant in the midst of a word, is assimilated to the same, as: X(^ pako {= pakko) cooked, Prak. flf^, Sansk. Xf^; 'RH satu, strength, Prak. ^"W, Sansk. ^?^. In the abstract affix r^, ^«7, the dental on the \ other hand is assimilated to the semi -vowel '^, which latter is first changed to the labial "^j and then to the corresponding tenuis '^, so that we have in Sindhi the forms If pa, T^ po, XfUf panu or TJI^t P^i>o, as: "^Xr^If banhapa, '^T'^'^t banhapo etc., slavery, from "^P^ banho, a slave. The regular form of assimilation however is also in use, but only in a few examples; f^ is in this way as- similated to "W tt = 5 tt^7 ^^^ ^^^ double consonant again cleared away by the prolongation of the preceding vowel, as: ^f^lj^ chokiratu, time of youth, from ^- ^"^ chokaru, a boy. The semi -vowel may also be dissolved into u, as: Xf^^ITO'^ paramesuru , supreme lord = Grod , Prak. already Xf^'^^^, Sansk. XRJFf^^^; or it may be retained, as: FJ- i^^l^^ danesvari, liberal, besides: ^J^^^^^ danesuri. §. 16. D) Assimilation of the sibilants. a) The palatal sibilant ^ s. a) ^ s, when preceded by "^ c and ^ ch, is as- similated to them, as: ^"^^ acurju, wonderful, Prak. XLII INTRODUCTIOiN. W^fr.^? Sansk. ^^iz| (long a being shortened in Prakrit and Sindhi, and in compensation thereof the fol- lowing consonant doubled, to restore again the quantity of the syllable); ^f^'^'^^ sanicaru, Saturday, Sansk. "^OJ^- ^l (Hindi B^^-^), P) The compound ^ cc (which how^ever is rendered in Sindhi, as all double consonants, by its simple base) arising from the assimilation of ''^, is, after the analogy of the Prakrit, frequently aspirated in Sindhi, on account of the inherent tendency of the sibilant towards aspiration (^ z:^ ^), as: T^^ vichu, scorpion, Prak. f^^Sf^t? Sansk. o|f^cR: TTSrTT^j pachutau, repentance, Sansk. M^l rJI'R, final M being changed (by b ^= v) in Sindhi to u. 7) ^ followed by ^, assimilates the same, as: ^^ rasi (= rassi), a rope, Prak. Jjf^, Sansk. '^f^TT, but not necessarily; for: cfi^^ft^ kasmiru, Kashmir. h) The cerebral sibilant "^ s. a) The compound '^'^ sk (of "^T^ I have hitherto not met any instances) is assimilated in Sindhi to ^ (^= "^), and not to '^^ kkh, as in Prakrit; e. g. ?^T^ dukalu, famine, Sansk. 'F'B^f^; f^^^ft nikami, useless, Sansk. f^bch4^; ^^ suko, dry, Sansk. ^"^ (Hindi, as in Prakrit, ;^T). p) The compounds ? st and "? sth, are assimilated in Sindhi to tth, as: f^^ dith5, seen, Prak. f^^, Sansk. 1^; ^7 gothu, a village, Prak. rff^, Sansk. rf^^; f^^ nitharu, obstinate, Prak. f^^^, Sansk. 'PT^; frj^ mitho, sweet, Sansk. "ftf?^ The compound is also retained unaltered, as: 5'S' dustu, bad; but this is only done by Brahmans, who understand Sanskrit; the common people ignore it com- pletely. INTRODUCTION. XLIII The cerebral 7, which has sprung from "B" or ¥ by assimilation, may also pass into its corresponding media ^ dh, and this again to ^ rh, e. g. ^^ k5rhu, leprosy, Sansk. ^"^ (the preceding vowel u having been length- ened in Sindhi to 5, to clear away the double consonant tth or ddh). Y) The compounds '^ sp, ^^ sph are assimilated to "^ in Sindhi, as: "^T"^ bapha, steam, Prak. cfX.T^, Sansk. ofT'^Xf (Hindi "^T"^, and even with aspiration of In compound Avords "^"R is simply assimilated to ^ p (= pp) as: X^XJTV niputro, without a son, Sansk. S) In the compounds "^^ sm and "^ sn, "^ is in Prakrit exchanged for h and placed after H and TJT respectively; in Sindhi the original compound may be preserved, as: fcfmr visnu, Prak. f^TTj?; f^^rj'^fF vi- snavahti, a worshipper of Vishnu; by the Musalmans however words of this kind are simply written ^^^, yhiyxl^ , Hindustani likewise ^^^ , as cerebral s is ignored by the common people. s) The compound '^ sy (and ^^ sv) is in Prakrit assimilated to W ss, but in Sindhi to ^ kh {= kkh) as: TOT^ sik^^j ^ disciple = Sikli, Sansk. 'BtT'EJI. c) The dental-sibilant ^ s. a) The compound '^ sk is assimilated in Prakrit to ^ kh, in Sindhi however to ^ k, as: ^TJ kandhu, shoulder, Prak. 'J^^ ('^^^)7 Sansk. "^i^ (Hindi ^If). P) The compounds "^ st and ^ sth are assimilated to ^ {= tth) and T^ ts to ^ ch (= cch), as: ^S? thaiiu, woman's milk, Sansk. '^^TH; f^I^t ^^'•-io? become, Sansk. f^rf; ^H thambhu , "post (Prakrit on the other hand XLIV INTRODUCTION. 1^7^), Sansk. T^^T^; cf^ vathu, thing, Sansk. cm[; ^ig hathu, hand, Prak. ^r^, Sansk ^"^ (Hindi ^T^); "SfTTJIT thano, place, Sansk. ^TH^ ^^ atha, is, Prak. ^jfF5J, Sansk. ^f^; offs^ vache, a buffalo calf, Prak. ^-^^ Sansk. "^i^. The compound "^ st however may also, instead of being assimilated, be dissolved into its constituent parts by the insertion of a vowel, and when the compound happens to be initial, by prefixing a vowel, as: ^^- fj{ astute, praise, Prak. TJ^, Sansk. ^frt; ^jf^gT^ istiri, woman, Sansk. ^^, "~' 7) "W sp is assimilated to '^ {= pp), ^5 sph to "^ (= pph), '^ ps to "^ {= pp) respectively as: XU^TTT phutanu, to be broken, Sansk. "^7; TJI^nT phurti, activity, Sansk. ^^f%; ^If^ ^^P^j ^ ^i^^ of coarse wheaten flour, Sansk. "^rf^cJiX; but "^ may also remain un- assimilated, as: c^"^^^ In compound words ^ sp may be preserved , as : f^- ^Cffrf, vispate, Thursday, Sansk. c|^44*|f^; or the com- pound, esjaecially at the beginning of a word, .may be dissolved into its constituent parts , as : 'RT'W parasu , the philosopher's stone, Sansk. ^^ (^1^)5 Hindi Hkewise h) The compound "^ sn, when beginning a word, is either dissolved into its consistuent parts by the insertion of a vowel, as: ^^T^ sananu, bathing, Sansk. "^T^; ^^^ saneho, a message of love, Sansk. '^^; or the preceding ^ is cast off altogether, as: ^fe nihu, love, Sansk. %^ (Hindi ^^), Prak. also %^; ^^ nuhu, daughter-in-law, Prak. T^t^^? Sansk. "^^J. e) The compound "^ sm is assimilated to ^ s (== ss) as: f^^T^ visai, stupor, Sansk. '^'^^; or dissolved again by the insertion of a vowel, as: ^^TTTF sumaranu, to remember, Sansk. '^; fsf^PT"^ visamanu, to be INTKODUCTION. XLV or s stunned, Sansk. f^f^ (fcfl^^H, Prak. f^*^^^) ; is changed to h and placed after TJ (similarly to '^^), | as Prakrit T^ = "^^ in the pronominal forms H^fS ^T^T (cf. Lassen p. 331, 4; p. 329, 5), In Sindhi the Tf of the conjunct '1^ is also changed to v, as ffo^ tavhi, you, instead of rTT«^ tumhi. ^) The compound ^ sy is assimilated to ^ s (=: ss) and thence farther to ^ h, as: TifS niuhi, rfyF tuhietc, which must have sprung from an original form *i^, j 7 rT^ etc., Prak. already ^5, TT^ (thence also the other Prakrit forms TTtJJ^ ^:^ := ^^^ ^ =- T^^^ ^); V irtf^ tahe, of that (nom. sing. ^ so) Prak. rTW Sansk. W^. d) The compound "^ ks. This compound letter is assimilated in Sindhi: a) To 1^ Idi (= kkh), as: ^rf^ akhe, eye, Sansk. ^f^; ^^ khiru, milk, Sansk. '^i;; ^T^ kharo, brackish, Sansk. J^JX} 1^ khetu, field, Sansk. W^'^ f^T^T khima, patience, Sansk. "^TTT; ^ k^ii, wellfare, Sansk. '^TJ; T!^^ rakhanu, to keep, Sansk. T!^^; ^t~ "& khande, patience, Sansk. I^TPfT. AU these instances are against Prakrit usage, ac- cording to which "J^ ought to have been assimilated to ^ ch, though ^ is also admissible in Prakrit, and prove distinctly, that the Sindhi has followed its own course, independently of the Prakrit. P) ^ is also assimilated to ^ ch, after the pre- cedent of the Prakrit, as: 'ft^ richu, a bear, Sansk. ^^'i Sfl* churl, a knife, Sansk. TS'^'i f^^TTT chinanu, to pluck, Sansk. f^Tff ; ^5r^[I!r lachanu, sign, Sansk. ^- "H^ but ^X^"^ lakhanu is also in use in Sindhi. According to Prakrit rule every consonant (the nasal n excepted), which is joined to ^, must be dropped; XLVI INTRODUCTION. but the Sindhi so far deviates from the Prakrit , that it separates any such consonant by the insertion of a -vowel, as: Prak. ^^^g^, but Sindhi ^f^Tft lachimi, the wife of Yishnu, Hindi likewise ^^[^, Sansk. ^"g^. On the other hand the Sindhi assimilates the nasal in the compound "^tTJ ksn to 1^ (kh = ks), whereas the Prakrit changes the same to TT]^, as: Sindhi frT^i^ tikho (=:tikkho), quick, Prak. frf"^i|, Sansk. rH'^. A change of ^ kh (= ks) to the spiritus ^ h is found in Hindi, after the analogy of the Prakrit, as: Hindi ^FTT^tlT rigkt (opposed to left), instead of the more common HT^l^'^L ^^^ ^^^ ^^ Sindhi, which simply clears away the doubling of the letter in Prakrit by the prolongation of the preceding vowel, as: ^if^^t^t 4^" khino, right, southerm. §. 17. F) The spiritus ^ h. The spiritus ^ cannot be assimilated to any other consonant. If therefore ^ be joined to any other con- sonant, the compound is again separated into its com- ponent parts in the following way: a) In the compounds S 1^5 ^ ^^j ^ is put after the nasal, a euphonic transposition, which is already common in Prakrit, as: "^f^ bahe, fire (instead of "^f^ bahe), Prak. o(Tr^, Sansk. «rfe; V^^ cinhu, mark, Sansk. fxjri; the hardened Prak. form f^^ or ^^ is not used in Sindhi. The compound 'S (instead of ^ hm) is in Sindhi, on account of the preponderance of the labial, already ex- changed for T^ mbh, as: "^^TfT bambhanu, a Brahman, Prak. "^Tf^, Sansk. ^l^ITrr. h) ^ hy is assimilated to ^ jh (by transposition: hy = yh = jh), as: ^TfCT g^j^^, concealed, Prak. XT- t3JT^, Sansk. g^^. INTRODUCTION. XLVII c) 5 hv i^ assimilated to H in Sindhi (hv =: vh = bh), whereas in Prakrit the following semi -vowel is simply elided, as: f^^jibha, tongue, Prak. ^^, Sansk. f^^J, (Hindi ^'t^). §. 18. E) Assimilation of three conjunct consonants. In Sindhi, as well as in Prakrit, a compound, con- sisting of three consonants, can only then be tolerated, if the first consonant happen to be a nasal: as: ^5 candru, moon, ^f? mantru, incantation. ^ As regards the assimilation of three conjunct con- sonants the preceding rules come into operation. If no assimilation takes place, the one or the other of the consonants thus joined together, is severed from the rest by the insertion of a vowel, as: ^T'TOT'O' sastiri, a Shastri, learned in the Shastras (a usual title of a Brahman), from the Sansk. ^Mt!5l. In reference to the assimilation itself the following rules are to be observed. a) If one of the consonants happen to be a semi- vowel, it is dropped, and the assimilation of the re- maining two consonants is effected according to the usual method, as: TtTJ^ marathi, a Marathi man (or. adj.), Sansk. TT^TO'5' ^P"'^t ^EJ^i ^^® foremost, Sansk. ^p^f; XrP§^ paso, side, Prak. XfJ^, Sansk. XfT^. The semi -vowel '^ alone, when preceded by a dental, forms an exception to this rule, this compound being changed to the corresponding palatal (see §. 15, y), as: ^^ sanjho, evening, Prak. ^^IJJ, Sansk. ^R^^. h) When of three conjunct consonants the two former or the two latter can be assimilated, preference is given to the stronger assimilation, as: TT3t. machu, fish, Prak. '5R['^^^, Sansk. JJf^; in this instance M ts is assimilated to ^ (cch), the assimilation of it being stronger than that of ^ to '^. XLVIII INTRODUCTION. §. 19. G) Elision of a double consonant. The doubling of a consonant renders the same so much stronger, that even a long vowel, preceding it, must give way and is weakened to its corresponding short one. On the other hand a double consonant, as noticed already, may again be rendered simple; but in this case the preceding vowel, to make up for the quantity of the syllable, must be prolonged, as: ^xfW rate, night, Prak. ^"^j Sansk. "^f^; cJ5^ kamu (= kam- mu), business, Prak. cf^Tl^, Hindi on the other hand It is quite against the genius of the language, to elide totally a double consonant; notwithstanding this some few examples of this kind are to be met with in Sindhi, as: 5^H duare, illness, 5W^5 ^^j- duari, ill, Prak. 'S'5^: Sansk. H"^^; ftl^t ^i^? friend (cor- roborated already by the Prakrit, which however pre- serves also the original from 'fil'^). In these and such like examples the process cannot have been such, that a double consonant is elided at once, but it must first have been reduced to its simple base by the prolon- gation of the preceding vowel, as: iftm i^i^o, instead, of fiT'^; from this base has sprung again, according to the usual laws of elision, the form iflf^^ mio, in which, against the ordinary process, long i has been shortened to i, fi?^^. In the forms ^^ffft ^^^ ^^ff'^j original double b must have been changed to vv (both letters, b and v, being already identical in Prakrit) previous to its elision; but it is quite an extraordinary phenomenon, that the following vowel has been lengthened instead of the preceding one. INTRODUCTION. XLIX Far more easily may one of the compound con- sonants be elided, when preceded by a long vowel, which renders the assimilation impossible, especially if one of the compound consonants be a semi-vowel, as: "^"^ vaghu, a tiger, Sansk. «m'5T; TJ'^ rani, queen, Sansk. ^^J3^. Thus even two semi-vowels may disappear, as: X(J^ paso, side, Sansk. tjj^, §. 20. H) A double consonant at the beginning of a word. A compound consonant at the beginning of a word is subject to the same laws of assimilation, as in the midst (or end) of a word. But as a double consonant would not be utterable at the beginning of a word, one of the assimilated, i. e. doubled consonants is simply cast off, so that only the simple base of the con- sonant remains, as: q^«5(y jalanu, to burn, instead of: ^^m jjalanu, Sansk. ^^;?T: "^ITT vaghu, tiger, instead, of ^"m vvaghu; cRlJ kandhu, shoulder, instead of ^U kkandhu. But if a word be compounded, the common laws of assimilation are applied (to the second), as: ^4'^ dubalu, weak, Prak. H«4'<^. Those compounds, which are not susceptible of assimilation, are dissolved into their component parts by the insertion of a vowel, as: fch^ff kilesu, weariness, Prak. |cD^^, Sansk. ^>^; s;q^;[g sumaranu, to re- member, Prak. ^TT^, Sansk. "^^ ("51); or the first letter of the compound is cast off, which is particularly the case, if this happen to be a sibilant, as: iffe nihu, love, Prak. ^TJI^ saneha, Sansk. '^^; but if the sibilant be followed by a semi-vowel, the latter, as the weaker, is dropped, as: ^T? sahu, breath, Sansk. Trump p, Sindhi-Grammar. 4: L INTRODUCTION. ^51^; ^T<^ s^l^? wife's brother, Prak. ^PfT^t ^^^^? Sansk. Tm^. ^ tr and ^ dr, which in Sindhi are commonly changed to the corresponding cerebrals, keep their place as well at the beginning as in the midst (or end) of a word, as: 7 tre, three; 3T^ drakha, grape, but Hindi ^|I5, Sansk. ^T^T. THE SINDHI ALPHABET. §• 1- Up to the present time various alphabets have been in use in Sindh, the Muhammadan portion of the com- munity using the Arabic characters, loaded vnth. many dots, to express the sounds peculiar to the Sindhi, and the Hindu population employing different alphabets of their own, which vary very much, according to the lo- cality, in which they are used, though all of them are originally derived from an old Sanskrit alphabet. These latter alphabets, which are known in Sindh by the name of the Banya characters, are utterly unfit for literary purposes, as they have become greatly mutilated in the course of time and are very deficient in the vowel and consonant system, so that the Hindu merchants themselves, after a lapse of time, are hardly able to re- produce with accuracy what they have entered in their ledgers. iSIo alphabet suits the Sindhi better, than the Sanskrit alphabet, the Sindhi being a genuine daughter of Sanskrit and Prakrit. But appropriate as the Sanskrit characters are to the Sindhi sounds, they will under the present state of society in Sindh be hardly in their right place, religious prejudices preventing the great majority of the population from using them in their writings. Sindh has been the first Indian country, which has suc- cumbed to the fury of the Moslim invaders, and Hin- duism and the culture of Sanskrit literature has been Trumpp, Sindhi- G-rainmar. A 2 THE SINDHI ALPHABET. SO completely swept away from its borders, that it is now, as has been stated, "a country without castes and Brahmins." The Muhammadans of Sindh, as soon as they tried to employ their native idiom for literary purposes, de- tected, that the Arabic system, which had been forced upon them as a necessary consequence of the Islam, was deficient in many sounds, and they endeavoured to make up for this deficiency by dotting the nearest corresponding- Arabic letters. The manner, in which they have done this, has not been very satisfactory. They were not led by any system and therefore the emendation, they at- tempted at, stopped half-way. In the guttural class the Arabic base \S (k) was indiscriminately used to express the sounds k, kh; g, gh, g; the aspiration (kh, gh) was left unnoticed, and for the media g not even the corresponding Persian letter {S^ was supplied; the guttural n was expressed by the compound (Xj (nk). In the palatal class the aspirate ch was happily distin- guished by an additional dot (= ^) , and jh marked like- wise _. ; also the peculiar Sindhi J (dy) was not forgotten and marked by _. ; the palatal n (ny) was again expressed by the compound J>, so that in this class all sounds were provided with distinguishing marks. In the cerebral class, which is completely wanting in the Arabic system, the bases of the dentals were retained and the dots distributed in such a way, as to distinguish them from the corresponding dentals, viz. : (^=t; cj = th;j=d,t> = dh,(3 = d, a method, which is not without ingenuity; but the cerebral r and the cerebral n were again completely forgotten (i. e. they were expressed by the corresponding dentals s r and ^ n) and left to the knowledge of the reader. The dental class did not offer many difficulties; only the aspirates had to be provided with diacritical THE SINDHI ALPHABET. 3 marks, which was done in the following way: ^ = th, o = dh. The same was the case with the labial class, where the aspirates only were to be pointed ont by peculiar marks; but here their skill seems to have left them. In order to express ph, refuge was taken to the pe- culiar Arabic and Persian letter o (f), which was pro- vided with two additional dots = o, bh having been expressed already by ^j; the peculiar Sindhi b was dexterously rendered by ^. The Sindhis had in this undertaking apparently the Sanskrit alphabet before their eyes, where the aspi- rates are written and treated as one sound. Ac- cordingly they tried to express the aspiration of a letter by additional dots, which overloaded the few Arabic bases with diacritical signs. The necessity further, to provide marks for the cerebral class, compelled them, to distribute afresh the dots for the dental aspirates, so that the eye finds only with difficulty a resting-place in the confuse mass and position of diacritical marks, as: Oj = t, o = t; td? = th; ^ = th. This attempt to adapt the Arabic characters to the sounds of a Prakrit language is very interesting, though the method applied has followed a wrong track and has not been extended to all the sounds of the language. The way, in which this has been done in Hindustani, is far more correct, in fact, the only course, which can be taken in adapting the Arabic letters to an Indian language. The Arabic system knows no aspirates, and consequently the aspiration must' be expressed by an additional ^s^ h, if the original character of the Arabic alphabet is to be preserved in any way; else a quodlibet will be made out of it, which may be de- signated by any name but Arabic. It was therefore soon found, when European scho- lars began to pay attention to the Sindhi, that the A2 4 THE SINDHI ALPHABET. common Sinclhi characters would not do for scientific purposes. ISTew characters were in consequence com- posed by a Bombay civilian and unfortunately introduced into the government schools of Sindh, without being first submitted to the examination of competent scholars. This new system, instead of striking at the root of the previous confusion, merely endeavoured to make up some deficiencies of the old, while retaining all its errors, so that it cannot even boast of the compactness of the old system. The alterations and emendations were the following: In the guttural class, where the old system wa& most deficient, as we have seen, the Persian letter S g has been justly taken in, and from the Hindustani, the aspirate ^ gh, of which we fully approve. We should now reasonably expect to find the compound j^ kh corresponding to j^ gh; but to our utter surprise we find the old error repeated, and 'kh' again rendered by the simple base j" k. So it has happened , that all the prints published in this character are disfigured by the letter .^, which is now used throughout as the simple base for k, whereas it is well known, that ^=> is only used at the beginning of a word, when connected with a following letter and in the midst of a word only, when unconnected with the preceding and connected with the following letter, and that it is in no way differing, as regards its pronunciation, from kS\ as a final letter the shape of ^=> has never been seen before. The guttural n, which in the old system was con- sequently rendered by lXj (nk), has been expressed in the new system by S^ which is quite inappropriate; for the base is not 'g', but 'n', pronounced with the guttural organ, and in the Arabic consonantal system it can only be rendered by a compound letter (e^ ng). The peculiar Sindhi g is marked S\ we have only to point out the inapplicability of two dots beneath J^ and the frequent confusions, to which it will give rise. THE SINDHI ALPHABET. 5 In the palatal class we meet with the same in- consequence; the aspirate ch has been taken over from the old system (^ ) , whereas for jh the Hindustani com- pound ^^s^ has been borrowed. In the other letters of this class only the dots have been differently distributed; j (in the old system marked S) has been expressed by _. , and the palatal n by -^ , which is less to the point than the old J>, which was as correct as it could be rendered. In the cerebral class only the dots have been dif- ferently arranged as: t = o (old system (^5), th = ;!? (old system o); d = l> (old system the same), dh =: ^> (old system the same), d = S (old system 0); the ce- rebral r, which had not been marked at all in the old system, has been borrowed from the Hindiistani (••), and the cerebral 'n' is marked by the antiquated method of placing a h above it {^), which is highly inconvenient in writing, and has therefore been justly discarded in Hindiistani, where formerly the cerebrals used to be marked by the same letter. In the dental class the old system has been re- tained unaltered. In the labial class the base o was retained for ph, with additional dots (= o; old system o); bh was rendered by o, as in the old system. We fully allow, that the old SindhT system of writing did not answer its purposes, quite abstracted from its deficiency; but instead of emendating the old system by a different distribution of dots and inserting a few Hin- dustani letters, we consider it far more advisable, to adopt the whole Hindustani consonantal system, and to mark those sounds, which are peculiar to the Sindhi, by convenient dots. The Sindhi language is restricted to the com- paratively small province of Sindh; we cannot there- fore see any reason, why the Hindustani alphabet, which 6 THE SINDHI ALPHABET. is known throughout the length and breadth of India^ and which is a compact system in itself, should not be preferred to such a motley composition? The number of the Indian alphabets should not be augmented, but rather, wherever possible, be restricted, as they only serve as barriers to mutual intercourse. If therefore the old system of writing proves unfit for Hterary purposes, we consider it for the best, to sub- stitute one universally known, instead of emendating im- perfectly a local alphabet, which has no chance to spread beyond its narrow borders. As under the present circumstances it is not likely, that the Hindu portion of the community will adopt the Hindustani alphabet, owing to religious scruples on their side, we have chosen for them the Hindi characters, with some slight deviations from the system employed by Capt. Stack, which were imperatively necessary, and which will be noticed further on. We may say the same of the Hindi alphabet, what has been remarked on the Hindustani; it is well known throughout India, and the common vehicle of literature amongst the whole Hindu population. An emendation of the old Banya characters would have been far more useless, than that of the Arabic system current amongst the Moslims. I 1 THE SINDHI ALPHABET. ;. 2. I. The Sindhi consonantal system. ^) SINDHI. Gutturals: ^\^ S;^ .; .s^c> eJ ;; J U" W; ^ ^; ^ jq ^;^. ^ t; th d; dh n r; 1 s Labials: ^'-f '■•6^. V' -^ r ; . . . XT;!?! •^; H TT ^ p; ph b; bh m V b ARABIC LETTERS. £ C t £ ^' ' ^ X T q. t s S z CJ j \ (v Pers ) :t5f- s?r &> r*t 2li5i. •^ c ^ B SFt Z JI3 d »5 d so 4 jiS S ^; r "1 r '^> z ^) V z THE SINDHI ALPHABET. Un- connected. Final. Med. Initial. Name. Pronun- ciation, LT u^ MJ, JM (J^t^-^ S LT tr M. Mi ij^ s ^ (ja xa ^ jLo s Lf^ (jd ^ ^ 4>ll3 z h k k Jb 1 t ib k k h B £ 6 X ^ ^ \ £ X £ " T o (^ A i ^, f (J (J- A '£ oL» q ^ dl, ^ jC ^ < oir k ^ cX ^ r oLT g ^ ^ f f oLJ* g J J< JL J r^' 1 r r ^, ♦ X) r*^ m u c^ k j u^ n o L> X j iii n 5 ^ y ^ ^'5 V s -;5>, ^c ■s:;4 5^ 'f* h c5 ^ -^ J *5f y 10 THE SINDHI ALPHABET. The (purely) Arabic letters are also used as nu- meral values, in recording (by brief sentences, in which the sum of all the letters must be added together) historical events. 1 1 c 8 U^ 60 uy 400 L^ 2 h 9 e 70 ^ 500 C 3 ^ 10 o 80 t 600 O 4 d 20 u^ 90 3 700 » 5 J 30 o 100 LT^ 800 ; 6 r 40 J 200 ib 900 ) 7 u 50 300 d 1000 This method of computation is called abjad, from the first four letters, which are pronounced as a group. The following technical groups are: .^b^, d^xj, v:>^y5, ijoAx^j ^J<-y, (<-%^j ^y^ The Arabs have borrowed this whole system from the Hebrews and have therefore also followed the order of the Hebrew alphabet; the first nine letters re- present the units 1 — 9 ; the nine following the tens, the nine following the hundreds and the last 6 a thousand. The order of the Hebrew alphabet goes only as far as (^ (400); from thence the Arabs have gone their own way, by using those letters, which are peculiar to their own language. THE SINDHI ALPHABET. 11 1) The G-utturals. The gutturals k, g are pronounced in the common manner; their aspirates, kh, gh, as all other aspirates, form, according to the Sanskrit system, one sound, and must therefore be pronounced by a strong breathing of the respective simple base. Peculiar to the Sindhi is the guttural h, which is throughout used as an in- dependent sound (like the engiish ng in "sing"), and never precedes the letters of its own varga or class, in which case Anusvara or simple n is employed (see Introduction §. 5). In the Hindi alphabet it is ex- pressed by ^, it being an original Sanskrit sound, but the Arabic system, which knows only one dental n (^), offers great difficulties in this as in other respects. In EDndustani an independent guttural n is not to be met with ; w^e have therefore been compelled to circumscribe it by the compound Jo ug, which comes nearest to it, following therein the track of the old Sindhi alphabet. But one difficulty still will remain, that the guttural simple n can thus not be distinguished from the guttural n preceding a letter of its own varga, as: cCif (^33*) anu, body, and Jo I (^FT, or more properly: W^) angu (ahgu) a limb. In the alphabet, now in use, an attempt has been made, as has been adverted to, to obviate this dif- ficulty (viz. : J^ = h) , but we cannot agree , that the problem has been solved satisfactorily, a false base having been chosen for the guttural nasal. Practically the dif- ficulty will be easily surmounted by any careful student, as there are only a few nouns in the language, in which simple guttural h is found. We subjoin here an alx3habetical list of all those words, in which the sim^ole (unconnected) guttural nasal is to be found: lXjI ra. ahu, body; 3;L6l ni. anar5, Tuesday. ^^(Xil £ anari, a disease of the gums etc. j^^L£>f m. aharyo, 12 THE SINDHI ALPHABET. a bruise in the sole of the foot; l^j n. anaru, coal; S::S m. anuru, a finger's breadth. SjS f. anure, a finger; toe; 0.x j I m. ananu, courtyard; yJ^Syt^S m. anutho, the thumb; ^^^\ f. anuthi, a thumb-ring, y^l^ m. bhaho, share, and its derivatives, as: j.;cjL£jL4j adj. bhanaito, in shares; ^y^l^ m. bhanero, a sharer, jixix^j m. phehano, the orbicular excrement of camels {^}Xkx^^^ f. phehini, the orbicular excrement of sheep etc.). s* JoL:s. m. Jahuro, the wild Bern fruit; ;^>^JoLs^ f. januri, the wild Beru tree; j^i adj. cano, good, and its derivatives. ^ljQ5&t> m. dhihai, a manufacturer of saltpetre; ^ulj^\i V. a. danoranu, to flog; j.xX!io adj. duhito, stout; ^>.)6 V. a. rananu, to dye, and its derivatives; j.^^ m. raho, a carpenter's chalk-string. ^LxjLl f. sahaha, or: j^\C^ f. sahaha, care, and its derivatives (as: jjc^LxiLL adj. sahahito, careful, ^;oIXjL^ adj. sahahti, ditto); jj^LxiLl V. n. sahahanu, to be careful. S.k^ m. sahu, connexion by marriage, and its derivatives; dik^ m. sihu, born, and its derivatives; ^SXj^^ f. sihari, name of a fish (or: ^^JL.^ sihari); S.kZj m. saharu, the seed-pod of the thorn- tree; ^l^kL V. a. sahanu, to point out; lXUau f. siha, bow. i^jL? m. gaho, or ^t^^f f. gam, name of a fruit and shrub (Grewia betuloefolia). JCJ m. lahu, lameness {yts} adj. laho, lame); JCaJ m, lihu, limb; Jo.J £ liha, THE SINDHI ALPHABET. 13 a trip in carrying; i^j m. lino, time, turn (besides: LXaJ f. lina, ditto). \Sx/i f. mana, a betrothed girl; Sj^a m. munu, a grain of mung; S.kA m. nianaru, fire; ySj.A m. muniro, a mallet (used by washermen); ^^^X;i y. a. mananu, to ask, to beg, and its derivatives; j^i^o adj. mono, having the colour of mung; ;ixo adj. & adv. nihuno, entirely, wholly. ^.Xjfj m. vaiianu, the ^.gg- plant, and its derivatives; JCaj© f. hihu, Assafoetida; ^S-j^ ni. hihiro, name of a fruit of an aquatic plant. Another letter peculiar to the Sindhi is J^, 3J^ g; it is not found in Hindi or Hindustani, nor in any of the cognate dialects, and we have therefore been com- pelled to provide it with a mark of its own. After the precedent of the Pasto we have added a hook below the under parallel line, which marks off this letter strongly enough, without giving rise to any confusion or mis- conception. The pronunciation of g is quite peculiar; it is that of the letter g uttered with a certain stress in prolonging and somewhat strengthening the contact of the closed organ, as if one tried to double the sound in the beginning of a Avord, as gga. The pronunciation is so far quite in accordance with the origin of this and the other three letters, peculiar to the Sindhi, though they are now treated to all intents and purposes as simple letters; e. g. J^l agu, the front, Prak. ^FT, Sansk. ^W (compare Introduction §. 15, 6); j^ Is-go? applied, Prak. ^^^, Sansk. ^^ (see Introduction §. 14); j^^ bhago, broken, Prak. ^''T, Sansk. ^^. In other instances, where an original doubling of g cannot be proved etymologically, the use of this harsh g must be explained by the influence of the following letters, as: ^^ gothu, a village, Prak. 'TK, Sansk. 'TT'3'; in this, as in similar cases, the weio-ht of the double tth, which 14 THE SINDHI ALPHABET. in Sindlii has been reduced to its simple base by the prolongation of the preceding vowel, seems to have been thrown forward on g. Such an influence is especially exercised by a following r, as: yS garo, heavy, Prak. TT^^, Sansk. 7J^. Both letters, g and g, must be carefully distinguished in pronunciation, as the signification of a word varies considerably according to the use of one or the other letter, as: j^f garo, mangy, but j^r garo, heavy etc. 2) The palatals. The palatals ^ j and ^ c, and their respective aspirates j^:^. jh, and ..^ ch, are pronounced in the common Indian way as simple sounds, and are gram- matically treated as such, though they are, according to their present pronunciation, compound sounds. Originally they cannot have been pronounced, as they are at present, for else the grammatical rules of Panini would be incomprehensible. In our days -^ is pro- nounced as english j, and ^ as english ch, that is to say, as dz and ts respectively; how these sounds, if they are to be treated as simple ones, should be aspirated or doubled by any human organ, is past our conception. The old pronunciation of these letters^) must have gone through great variations, till they have become the com- pound sounds of the modern Indian idioms.^) In the Eoman transcription they have therefore not been marked by the palatal stroke (-:_), but \)j the same sign, with 1) See Standard alphabet, p. 93. 2) The pronunciation of the Marathi ^ and ^ as ts and dz respectively before the vowels a, a, u, u, ai, o, does not fall under this head, as this is owing to Dra^-idian influences and only occurs in words of non-Arian origin. THE SINDHI ALPHABET. 15 which the sibilant sh (= s) is provided, to point out their modern pronunciation. The Sindhi has preserved the palatal nasal n (^) as an independent sound, which never precedes the let- ters of its own varga, for which purpose anusvara (and in Hindustani writing simple ^) is used. The Hindu- stani being destitute of a palatal nasal, we had to provide a new character. Following the analogy of the old Sindhi alphabet we chose for it the compound vs., which comes nearest to it, for the palatal li of the Sindhi is properly a compound sound, and is pro- nounced ny. The proper circumscription by ^j would not do for this reason, that the palatal li is still con- sidered by the Sindhi as a simple sound and rendered in Sanskrit writing by >[; it ought therefore to be pointed out, as near as possible, as such, for which purpose the compound J> answers much better, than j, which latter would give rise to many misconceptions. In the Eo- manized transcription it has simply been furnished with the palatal line = n. The sign chosen for it in the alphabet at present in use viz.: -., is not to the purpose, as the base is not -^, but the nasal ^, with a subsounding y. The sibilant J^^ ^ s, which we have inserted in our scheme in the palatal row, is no longer a palatal sound at all, but a pure dental sh =-■ s. The original pronunciation of ^ is more than doubtful; now-a-days it is in no way differing from our common sh, and might therefore be as well classed under the dentals. The Arabic ~ Persian ji is always rendered in Sanskrit writing by ^; but it is also found in pure Sindhi words, as: -g-u^ sihu, lion etc. compare; Introduction §. 5. Pecuhar to the Sindhi is , ^, j. It is now treated as a simple sound, but it has in most cases, as etymology proves, sprung from a double jj (= "^j, and is still pro- 16 THE SINDHI ALPHABET. nounced as a compound sound = dy; e. g. : I aju (r=z adyu), to-day, Prak. ^^, Sansk. ^^ (on the as- similating process see Introd. §. 15.); L^^ vija, science, Prak» T^^T, Sansk. T^^T? ^^ veju, physician, Prak. "^^7 Sansk. "^^^ In other nouns though an original doubling of cannot be traced etymologically, as: ^L Jatu, a Jat, Hindi ^T^; and is in such instances fre- quently exchanged for -., as: (^vi'LS^^ jatrl, or: (^vj'L:^ j^tri, a pilgrim, Sansk. '^T"^)» 3) The Cerebrals. The cerebrals ^ t and 3 d, and their respective aspirates, ^^ th and ^i dh are common to all the North-Indian vernaculars ; they are pronounced by turning the tip of the tongue towards the roof of the mouth whilst sounding the dental bases, t, d, etc. respectively. The Sindhi has likewise preserved an independent cerebral ^, I!T, n, which is not bound to the letters of its own varga as: ^^^ vanu, a tree (Sansk. ^^H) ^"^ thanu, the teat of an animal, Hindi ^^, Sansk. W*^. It is pronounced very hard and resembles much the com- pound nr (in Pasto it is therefore very frequently ren- dered by nr). In Sindhi it exchanges therefore occasionally its place with the cerebral r, as: ^^-§iU manhu, man, or: ^yt-jL^ marhu. The cerebral 6 d, which in Prakrit already fre- quently supplants the dental d, has in Sindhi given birth to two other cerebral sounds, viz.: j, 5 d, and 'j, ^T r, and this again aspirated, ^v, ^ rh. J, 5 4 is pronounced in a similar way as g; the cerebral d (6) is uttered with a certain stress in pro- longing and somewhat strengthening the contact of the closed organ, as if a double d was to be pronounced. THE SINDHI ALPHABET. 17 Originally it is, as g, a double d, as may be still proved in most cases by etymology; e. g.: 30^ vado, great, Prak. "^j Sansk. "^^5 ui-^'^}^ coclaho, the fourteenth, Prak. '^[t?Cl'» ^^^ ^^^ Sindhi, which is very fond of hard cerebral sounds, often employs this letter d, where no original doubling of the cerebral has taken place, especially at the beginning of words, where the full stress of the voice can be laid upon it, as: fJfo doll, a kind of sedan chair, Prak. 5t^Tj Sansk. ^^^5T (compare Introd. §. 6. 4). The simple cerebral o has been thus nearly totally supplanted at the beginning of a noun by d, and d is only found in a few nouns, to distinguish them from others written else quite alike, as: ^^5 ditho, obstinate, but j.^'^ ditho, seen. It has therefore been a great mistake of Capt. Stack, that he has not distinguished 5 d from 3 d, and marked both sounds by the same diacritical dot (=5), though he has been aware of their different pronunciation. A Sindhi will never confound <3 d with 5 d; they are in his mouth thoroughly distinct from each other and have been differently marked already in the old Sindhi al- phabet (viz. : d = i> , and d = i). We were therefore com- pelled in this respect to deviate from Capt. Stack's San- skrit alphabet, retaining for the simple cerebral d the original Sanskrit letter 5, and marking the sound of d by a line beneath 5 (= 3), the dot beneath 5 being reserved for some other sound, which we shall presently notice. The cerebral v, ^ r, and its aspirate ^sa'L S rh have sprung from the cerebral 3 d and .5&t> dh respectively (see Inti-oduction §. 7, 2), as: jf guru, molasses, Sansk. 15; \H'is5 drirhata (f^^nT) firmness, Sansk. ?^rTT» We have noticed already (1. c), that by far the greatest number of words, in which r or rh is to be found, is Trumpp, Sindhx-Grrammar. B 18 THE SINDHI ALPHABET. taken from some aboriginal tongue, whicli is now lost, and wich must have had a great predilection for cerebral sounds (as the Dravidian idioms of the south) and to the influence of which the preponderance of the cerebrals in the north Indian vernaculars must be ascribed. The two peculiar letters Z (tr) and 5 (dr), which Capt. Stack in his Sindhi Grammar has advocated for the Sindhi under the cerebral class, are found, on nearer investigation to be compound sounds (see Introduction, §. 15.) and may therefore be safely discarded from the alphabet, as they ought to be written ^ tr and ^ dr respectively, as: ^^ putru, son, Prak. "5^, Sansk. "J^? ^TO drakha, grape, Sansk. ^1^1. A subscribed r is also found in some nouns with the aspirate S dh, as: ST'R^ dhrapanu, to be satiated, and its derivatives, as: ^T?^^ dhrainu, to satiate; ^T^ dhrau, satiety, all of which are sprung from the Sansk. root Hlf (rfHTJT); 3'^ dadhru (also written: 5S dadhu), a cutaneous disease, Sansk. ^^, Hindi ^T^ (compare Introduction §. 15. h. f). We have not inserted the cerebral s "^ in the Sindhi alphabet, though in Capt. Stack's Sindhi Dictionary a few words are written with '^. This letter is com- pletely ignored by the common people and left unnoticed in the old Sindhi alphabet; only a Brahman now and then uses it, to show his knowledge of Sanskrit (com- pare Introduction §. 5). 4) The dentals. The dental row offers nothing particular; ^ r, which is considered a cerebral in Sanskrit, has become a pure dental in the modern idioms. 5) The labials. It is to be noted, that .^^, ''li ph, is to be pro- nounced as the aspirate of ^.j, ^ p, and never as f, which is of Arabic or Persian origin, wherever found. THE SINDHI ALPHABET. 19 Peculiar to the Sindlii is the letter ^, "^ b; it is pronounced in the same way as g and d, being ori- ginally a double b, as: J ba, two, Sansk. W (= vva = bba; see Introduction §. 15. d. a); ^^f kubo, hump-backed (see Introd. §. 13); JjS dabalu, weak, Prak. ^'^^, Sansk. y«t5!. In other nouns however an original doubling of b cannot be traced out, and the language seems to use i^ b and o b quite arbitrarily, as: j^lJ babo, father, but, sjU bab5, father's brother, both nouns being de- rived from the Turkish GG father. The nasal of this class is m; but when preceding a letter of its own varga it is supplanted by simple n (or anusvara), as in all the other rows; e. g.: ^1 i^^) ambu, a mango; 'X^jJS' (^H1^ kumbharu, a potter. §. 3. On the purely Arabic letters. The Sindhi, as well as the Hindustani, has, in con- sequence of the forced introduction of the Islam, been considerably mixed up with Arabic elements, and though the vulgar pay no attention to the particular pro- nunciation of the genuine Arabic sounds, the original Arabic orthography has been generally adhered to. Under the guttural class we find the letters: c, ^, f-' £' U' ^^^ Roman transcription of which we have conformed to the Standard alphabet, though these letters are somewhat differently pronounced in Sindhi. c , which is in Arabic treated as a consonant, is generally ignored and only its accompanying vowel articulated, as: J^ki laqulu, intelligence, is sounded: akulu. In the midst of a word c is either passed unnoticed (i. e. only the respective vowel is uttered) as: o^ niamata (properly: B2 20 THE SINDHI ALPHABET. niiamata) or c with its accompanying vowel is pro- nounced as a long syllable, as: JuJJjtS a ferrier, is sounded like: nalbandu (properly: nadbandu) and by ignorant people also written accordingly; or the c with its respective vowel is dropped altogether; as: lULb food (taiamu) is commonly pronounced: tamu. The same is the case at the end of a word, where c with its vowel is contracted by the vulgar to a long syllable, as: ^t^ receipt - account (jamaia) is pronounced like jama, and mostly written accordingly; only the Mullas, who pretend to a knowledge of Arabic, affect the deep guttural ar- ticulation of the Arabic. In Sanskrit writing c is there- fore simply rendered according to its accompanying vowel, and not dinstinguished by any particular mark or dot. The deep Arabic -^ li is treated in the same way and pronounced as simple h, as: JLi Halu, state, is sounded: halu. The Arabic and Persian ^ x is com- monly pronounced by the vulgar (especially the Hindus, who are quite unable to articulate y) as kh, as: -2^ si/a, a spit, is sounded: sikha (Pers. -^^j^). The Arabic or Persian p 'Y is pronounced in Sindhi as simple g, and very frequently exchanged for S in writing, as: cLj bayu, garden, is sounded as: bagu; ^ Yamu, grief, as: gamu etc. The deep guttural ^j q of the Arabic is articulated in Sindhi like simple k, as: ^^ qoma, a tribe, clan (Arabic j»^i'), is pronounced like: koma; J^i* qaulu, word, like: kaulu etc. The Hindus ignore all these foreign letters in their writings and render them by the nearest Sanskrit consonants, as has been adverted to. The lingual letters, which are peculiar to the Arabic, are not distinguished in Sindhi pronunciation from the THE SINDHI ALPHABET. 21 corresponding dentals; h t is sounded like common t, and ^ s like z; ib ^ and ^ z likewise as z. The Hindus on the other hand pronounce h and ^ like j, and render these letters promiscuously according to their actual pronunciation, which is frequently done by the Musalmans likewise, especially the unlearned. The Arabic letters, which figure under the dental row, viz.: ^ ^, j S, and v z (the two latter of which are also common to the Persian) are pronounced in Sindh (and India generally) as follows: ^ like s, 6 and -. like z, whereas the Hindus pronounce these two latter con- sonants like j and render them also accordingly by ^, which is not unfrequently done by the Moslims also. The Arabic and Persian o f is sounded by the Mu- hammadans as f, but by the Hindus as ph, and ren- dered in their writings by ^. 4. n. The Sindhi vowel system. We next subjoin a tabular survey of the Sindhi vowel system. 1) Simple vowels: I, I a ^ t i (e) 1 e I u u o 2) Diphthongs ai au 22 THE SINDHI ALPHABET. 3) Nasalized vowels. a a e ai 1 ♦ or u3» 6 au 1) Simple vowels.^) The Sindhi uses all the vowels, common to the Sanskrit and Prakrit; but it is to be noted, that i, when preceded or followed by h, or when closing a word, has the sound of short e (see Introduction §. 2. h). E and 5 are in Sindhi, as already in Prakrit, simple (and not Guna) vowels (see Intro- duction §. 2. d), and consequently always long (and not anceps, as in Prakrit). As the Arabic is destitute of the sounds e and o, a great difficulty arises in Sindhi as well as in Hindu- stani, how to distinguish i from e, and u from o. The Indian grammarians have therefore invented the term of J^^ ^pLj ya-e majhtil, or the unknown ^ for the sound e, and J^^ ^fi vave majhtil, or the unknown ^, for the sound 5 ; but at the same time no practical mea- sures were taken, to mark off e and 5 by any dia- critical sign, and the reader was left to help himself, 1) As we shall further on employ only the Hindustani cha- racters, we cannot enter here more minutely on the Sanskrit vowel system, and we refer therefore the student for nearer information to any Sanskrit grammar. We shall only make use of the Sanskrit characters in the course of this grammar, as occasion may call for. THE SINDHI ALPHABET. 23 as best lie could. But as the distinction of i from e and u from o is somewhat difficult for a beginner, especially a European, and for the right understanding of the language very important, we have contrived to dis- tinguish e from i by a perpendicular Kne, as: ^ ke, some, ^^f ki, somewhat; and o from xx. by placing the sign ^- above ^, as: ^jjj» to, from-on; ^^j tu, thou. In prints, destined for the use of natives, these distinctions may be dispensed with as more or less superfluous; but in prints, intended for the use of Europeans I have no doubt they will prove very serviceable and clear away many a stumbling block. In Arabic writing the short vowels a, i, u are not expressed in the body of the consonants, but by mere marks, placed above or beneath the consonant, after which they are to be sounded; if the consonant happen to be an aspirate, the vowel mark is placed on the accessory ^s^. The mark for a is ^^, and is cal- led x^^ fath ah (in Persian J C zabar) ; the mark for i is ^r, and is called slw^y kasrah (in Persian ox zir, pro- nounced in India: zer); the mark for u is -^, and is called x^ zammah (in Persian jiLu pis, pronounced in India: pes) e. g. ^ faiia, ^ fini, ^ funu. But if a noun commence with a short vowel, I (alif) must serve as base for the these vowels, the vowels themselves being considered only as auxiliary signs for the consonants, as: ^jl ana, ^\ ini, ^1 unu. In Arabic initial f is in these cases always provided with hamzah, as: ^1, ^1, ^1, but in Hindustani it is dispensed with, to which practice we shall also adhere in Sindhi. The three long vowels: a, i, u are expressed in the body of the consonants by the letters I, ^^ *, with the addition of the respective vowel points; in this case 24 THE SINDHI ALPHABET. ^ ^5? ; ^^^ called ^jSlL sakin, or quiescent, because tliey are not moved by a vowel of their own; e. g.: i^\^i hari, a peasant; ^sU maru, a beater; ^v^x> muri, capital (in trade) ^K-^ cikatu, creaking. The same holds good with reference to the vowels e and 5, which are not (originally) distinguished in writing from 1 and ti, as: jy^s^ chero, whetting.^) Long a, when initial, is expressed by I and the sign - placed above it, as: sS\ adaru, courtesy. This sign is called sjoo maddah, i. e. extension, and is pro- perly an alif placed above horizontally. Long i and u, when initial, must be preceded by alif, to support the respective vowel point, as ^^ and . themselves are quiescent; e. g.: ^^j>}^ Iho, this very person; ^^1 uho, that very person. The same is the case with e and o, as: jJUj («r(3T) nandho, small; jj^ (t!^ randu, path; j^\^ CfTT^) bambha, hag. But besides this full nasal the Sindhi also uses the proper Anusvara, which only communicates to the respective vowel a nasalizing touch, very extensively, and as both, fall n and the nasalizing touch, which is communicated to a vowel, are expressed in Sanskrit writing by Anusvara, and in Hindiistani by the dental n (^), some confusion necessarily arises from this practice, to obviate which the following remarks should be care- fully attended to. a) Anusvara (or ^) preceding another consonant must always be pronounced as a full nasal, if the vowel of the syllable be short, as: "^^^ ^f^, pandhu, journey; but if Anusvara precede 'h' in a short syllable, it is always to be pronounced as such, i. e. only a slight nasalizing touch is thereby communicated to the vowel, 26 THE SINDHI ALPHABET. as: Wf^, ij"^^ jabe; ^^, ^i muhii, mouth; in a few words, where full n precedes h, it must be rendered in Sanskrit writing by *T, not by Anusvara, as: f^'S cinhu, a sign; ^Bp^TIT thanhanu, to compress. In Hindustani writing no such distinction can be made, as there is only one (^) at hand, which must serve as full nasal or Anusvara, as the case may be; no tiling is therefore left to the student, but to commit these few words to memory. We must repeat here, what has been remarked already, that the use of the Arabic characters oifers great difficulties when apphed to a Prakrit language of India. h) Anusvara preceding a consonant in a long syl- lable is to be pronounced as a full nasal, as: '^jf^ ,^Lj banthe, ravenousness ; "HT"^, -4^^. pingha, a swing; ^^.^ j^JJi^ kundhu, a young man; '^'^T, jJou^ vendo, going; ^i \jy^^ ^^^ \M}i^ buzzing. This rule is based on the fact, that in Sindhi every THE SINDHI ALPHABET. 27 word must needs end in a vowel (which however may be nasahzed). d) Anusvara, placed between two vowels, be they short or long, always retains its proper nasalizing sound, as: ^?^, ^^jf ai, and; TTS^, \^^}^ mainu, to measure; W^, ^y^^ ^^5 I; ^j^ajLa^ kiau, it has been done by them (compare: Introduction §. 4). The same holds good with reference to Anusvara, following a diphthong (see: Introduction §. 1, 2), as: .x) maddah, prolongation) is placed on initial alif, to render it long, as: y^3\ atharu, pack- saddle. In the midst and at the end of a word maddah is not placed on alif, if the preceding consonant be moved by fatHah, in which case alif is called ^5'Lw sakin, or quiescent, as: L^K ra-ja, prince; lilUo ma -la, garland; but if the preceding consonant is provided with jazm (i. e. not moved by a vowel), alif must have the sign of maddah, as commencing a syllable, e. g. : jjLs qur-anu, Qoran, not qu-ranu. 2) The sign -^ (*yi jazm, abscission), placed above THE SINDHI ALPHABET. 29 a consonant denotes, that the consonant thus marked O ^ 5 0^ is not moved by a vo^Yel, as: j-^^ vel-ho, idle; Syo mar-du, man; Owl sar-gu, heaven. In old Sindhi T\T.i- tings the use of jazm is hardly to be met with, as they preferred to provide such a mute letter T^-ith kasrah, the sound of which was hardly heard in pronunciation, as: o'yo mari-du, instead of Syo mar-du, and served quite the purposes of jasm. "We cannot adopt this system, as in many cases it will give rise to confusion and mis- conceptions. 3) The sign ^^ (jo^5 ^^§^9 conjunction) only occurs in Arabic phrases and constructions; it joins two words, the latter of which begins with ahf, the accompanying vowel of which is dropped and the final vowel of the preceding word drawn over or rather joined to the following; e. g.: iXX^-il cXa^ fabdu- Imaliki (instead of: JC^^JI tX^^); ^a«I JU* qala-sma5 (instead of: /^4mjI^ JL5)j ^' i*-^-? bismi - llahi. The use of the so-called Tan v in (i. e. -2_ |, ^, pro- nounced in Arabic 'un', 'an', 'in^) in Sindhi is to be disproved of, as the Tanvin is only a fanciful invention of the Arabian grammarians, and by no means fit to express the Sindhi nasalized short (and least the long) vowels. SECTION I. THE FORMATION OF THEMES. 31 SECTION I. THE FORMATION OF THEMES IN SINDHI. Chapter I. The termination of Sindhi nouns. §. 6. In the formation of themes the relative position^ which the Sindhi holds to the Sanskrit -Prakrit on the one side, and to its modern sister-tongues on the other side, is most clearly delineated. The pecuHarity of the Sindhi, and at the same time the great advantage, which is possesses over the kindred idioms consists therein, that every noun, substantive, ad- jective, pronoun, participle and infinitive ends in a vowel. By this vocalic termination the Sindhi has preserved a fle- xibility, and at the same time a sonorousness, of which the other modern vernaculars are completely destitute. After w^hat has been remarked on the nature of the diphthongs in Sindhi (see Introduction §. 1), it may be easily gathered, that no Sindhi noun can end in a diphthong. A Sindhi noun may therefore end in a, i(e), u; a, i, ti, 5; no noun ever ends in e, and those, which seem to do so, are not in the Nominative, but in the inflected case. A flnal vowel may also be na- salized, as: (j^^'jL^o marhu, man, ^j-(^v?^ cotho, the fourth; ^^.j pri, friend, which is especially the case, if a word terminate in a long vowel, but this con- stitutes , after what we have said on the nature of Anu- svara, no exception to the general rule. In the formation of themes the Sindhi has in the main followed the course pointed out by the Praki^it, but it has created many new formations, independent and irrespective of the Prakrit. The levelling process 32 SECTION I. THE FOKMATION OF THEMES. of the modern idioms has already gained the ascendancy, and terminations, which the Prakrit, though seized al- ready by the same tendency, has as yet kept asunder, have been thrown together into one class in Sindhi. The Sindhi has lost the neuter, which has been already discarded in the Apabhransha dialect of the Prakrit, the immediate predecessor of the modern Sindhi. This, as it seems, has been the first step, to break the fetters of the old compact mother-tongue, and to initiate the levelling process of the present idiom. Inasmuch as the Sindhi requires a vocalic ter- mination for every noun, the distinction of the gender is not so perplexing as in the other dialects, which offer great difficulties in this point to the student. The ter- minations, which have been already fixed for the Pra- krit, have been mostly retained in the Sindhi, with the exception of neuter nouns, which have been, for the most part, transferred to the masculine terminations, less to the feminine. I. The termination u. 1) Masculine themes in u. By far the greatest number of nouns end in Sindhi in u, and are, with a few exceptions , masculine. This short final u corresponds to the Prakrit termination ^^ o, which, according to the testimony of the old Prakrit grammarians, has been already shortened to u in the Apabhransha dialect.^) To this class belong in Sindhi: 1) In Marat 111 final ^ (= Sindhi u) has on the whole become already quiescent; the same is the case in Bangall, except when final a is preceded by a double consonant, in which case it is heard. In PanjabT, Hindi and Hindustani final a has quite disappeared; for nouns like piu, father, mail, mother etc. are in Panjabi ex- ceptional cases. SECTION I. THE FORMATION OF THEMES. 33 a) such nouns, as end in Prakrit in o (= San- skrit final ^, as: Ij naru, a man, Prak. TJt^, Sansk *TT.; i^ gharu , house , Prak. "^^ (Sansk. TiD ; li" kamu, business, Prak. c^f^, Sansk. cUTT^, To this class be- longs also a number of adjectives (though the majority of them has retained the termin^ltion o), as: J^j* talu, hidden; y^\ ajaru, imperishable; o^a^I acetu, careless. Most of the adjectives, borroved from the x^rabic or Persian, assume this termination, as: j.Ui* tamamu, whole; s«^*^ Y^^lb^^? poor etc. h) such nouns, as end originally in u, as: il^ vau, wind (Sansk. "^T^ i^-; t)oo madu, liquor, Sansk. c) such nouns, as end in Sanskrit in ta (crude form tr), Prak. a (by ehsion of t), or which add in Pra- krit the termination aro, as: ^^ piu, father, Sansk. fRlTT, Prak. fcf^; ^L^ bhau, brother, Sansk. i^TrTT, Prak. already ^^ (in Sindhi again with elision of d); ^'U4? bhataru, husband, Prak. H^TTT? Sansk. ^WT (see Varar. Y, 31). 2) Feminine themes in u. These are, comparatively speaking, few in number; to this class belong such nouns, as end in Sanskrit in u, and are feminine as: ^j f. thing, Sansk. "^^i J^j> dhenu, a milk-cow, Sansk. V^T? or such, as have shortened u to u, as: jj^ sasu, mother-in-law, Sansk. ^^; \ vijii, lightening, Prak. f^^, Sansk. f^^Hrl^* In a few themes original a has been shortened to u, the Sindhi following herein the levelling process no- Trumpp, Sindhl-Grammar. C 34 SECTION I. THE FORMATION OF THEMES. ticed under 1, c irrespective of gender, as: ^U man, mother, Prak. 411^1, Sansk. ^WT; ^s^o dhiu, daughter, Prak. already ift^T ^^^ ^ft^iT, Sansk. "Sf^T (see Varar. IV, 33; Lassen p. 172, note); ^li niihu, daughter-in- law (Sansk. 'W^ 5 quite exceptional is Sw^ bhenu , sister, Prak. cjf^Ajft (Hindtist. J^^j), Sansk. ^fJlTSft. -^ number of nouns ending in u, which are feminine, we shall enumerate when treating of the gender of nouns; their origin is in many cases unknown. n. The termination o. Besides the nouns ending in u, those ending in o are the most numerous in Sindhi; they are all without exception masculine. The old Prakrit termination ^Sti (o) bas been split in Sindhi into two classes, in one of which o has been shortened to u and in the other of which it has been retained unaltered. A strict rule seems not to have been attended to in settling these two terminations , but usage alone seems to have decided for the one or the other; in many in- stances both terminations are promiscuously used. It is worthy of notice, that many nouns, which end in Sindhi in o, have retained the corresponding termination a (masc.) in Hindi and Hindustani and to a great extent also in Marathi, Bangali and Panjabi, and similarly those nouns, which terminate in Sindhi in u, have dropped the corresponding vocalic termination (i. e. ^, a) in the dia- lects quoted. Examples: ^J taro, the sole of a shoe (Sansk. W^ n.) ^ galo , the throat (Sansk. 1^ m.) , whereas on the other hand J^r galu, cheek, corresponds to the Sansk. T^ m., j^y lurko or JUJ lurku, a tear; j^b^-ww sonar5, SECTION I. THE FORMATION OF THEMES. 35 goldsmith (Sansk. ^cf^^TT)? on the other hand JL^i luharu, blacksmith (Sansk. ^^^TT.)^ In some instances the language has made use of these two different terminations to derive words of somewhat dif- ferent meanings from one and the same base, as : 3 >^r^ euro, powder, filings, and [^ curu, adj. powdered (both from the Sansk. "^Tj) ; s..gxo matho, the head, and ^.^ mathu, the top (both from the Sansk. TJ^ n.). We may however lay down some rules, by which the Sindhi seems to have been guided in retaining the original Prakrit termination 0: 1) Adjectives, derived directly from the Sanskrit- Prakrit, have on the whole retained the ending o, as: yix^ cano, good (Sansk. ^^); j-^^ mitho, sweet (Sansk. TO"?); jsL^^kharo, bitter (but \l^ kharu, s. m. potash, both being derived from the Sansk. "'^T.); ^^j rukho, hard (Sansk. ^^). In many nouns though both ter- minations are allowed as: j^ii^l adharo or: wit>l adharu, helpless; jv^Jo nidharo or: j.5i\j nidharu, wretched; 3>^j! abharo or: J^] abharu, poor. Adjectives derived by secondary affixes from other themes generally retain the termination o, as: iJu^ Ja- tiko, relating to a Jat (o^); }^U vaniko, belonging to a Vanyo (j-^ilp; j.-^-^; rasil5, juicy (from J*.^); joJoL^f khandiro, patient (from JoL^f). Excepted are the affixes Jjl^ (Prak. «2|nl|, Sansk. "^fT), as: ^IjIjo dayavanu, com- passionate; Jf (^^), as: JIS3 dayalu, the same as ^jl^lSS; nI (^'^)5 when forming substantives, as: ^U^d dhanaru, herdsman, whereas the affix aro generally forms adjectives, as: j.L^^ sagharo, strong (from ^£1). C2 36 SECTION I. THE FORMATION OF THEMES. 2) Verbal nouns, which are derived from the root of verbs by lengthening the root- vowel, take the termination o, as: jjL^ gh.Sitd, decrease, from ^J^^ to decrease. j.^c-jLi carho, increase, from ^ly^'j^ to rise. The termination u however is also in use, es- pecially with such themes, in which the root -vowel is not lengthened, as: oJo marku, boasting, from ^jS'Jo to boast. v5^^ jhatu, snatching, from ^l^-y to snatch. 3) Nouns of agency, which are derived from ver- bal roots by prolonging the root -vowel (if it be short) take likewise the termination o, as: jjaol. vadho, carpenter, from ^jj^5j to cut. _- _ > ^ ' . ysp tobo, diver, from ^^ to dive. ciro, sawyer, from (j»wy^ ^ split. 4) Some nouns of foreign origin change (original) final a or ah to o in Sindhi, as: jjIJ babo, father, Hindust. (turkish) tSG; 3)l5;3 darvaz5, door, Pers. ssl^^S. 5) All participles present and past end in o, as: jtXlJi halando, going; jlii halio, gone; j jJj.U ma- rindo, beating, ^jXx) maryo, beaten. 6) It is seldom the case, that an original final a (fem.) has been changed to 5, and rendered thereby mas- culine, as: zAj taro, star (Sansk. rTTTI fem.); Hindi likewise WITJ masc. (Pasto: (^^jXw st5rai m.); in Marathi it is both masc. and fem. Note. If we turn to the cognate dialects, we find, that the Gujarati comes nearest to the Sindhi in this respect; for nearly all the nouns, which end in Sindhi in 5 and u, have retained SECTION I. THE FORMATION OF THEMES. 37 the termination o. As the Gujarati has preserved the neuter, it forms a regular neuter ending in ^ u from masc. themes in o, as: ^fJT^ ^ dog (in general), but ^{fT^ a male dog. This neuter termination we consider identical with the Sindhi vocalic termination u, with the only difference, that Anus vara, as the sign of the neuter, has been added. In Marathi, Hindi and Panjabi, final 5 of the SindhT and Gujarati has been changed to a. The Panjabi and Hindi (Hindustani) have lost the neuter, but the Marathi, which has preserved it, forms from the masc. termination a a regular neuter ending in e (Tj), which is in its origin nothing else but another masc. termination with the addition of final Anusvara, just as in Gujarati (compare on this point: Lassen, Instit. lin- guae Prak. p. 429, 14); e.g.: ^5^ n. a plantain, Hindi: ^^J m., o|)|^|[| , inf. (properly a neuter verbal noun, as in Sanskrit), Sindhi . T5^ karanu (m.), Hindi c|)<^f-|| karna (m.), Gujarati: * '' _ _ chl^ill (n.), as in Marathi. In Ban gall the termination a (— o of the Sindhi) is only to be met with in a few nouns , as : gadha , ass, ghora, horse etc. (nouns like: pita, karta, do not come properly under this head, as they are Sansk. Nominatives); as a masc. termination of ad- jectives a is unknown in Bangall. m. The termination u (masc. and fern.). Nouns ending in u correspond generally to the Sanskrit-Prakrit termination u, which in Prakrit is leng- thened in the Nom. Sing, to u; those nouns, which end already in Sanskrit u, retain this termination unaltered in Sindhi. Some feminine nouns, ending in u, shorten their final u again to u, adding at the same time one of the feminine terminations i (e) or a; e. g.: .iLl sau, upright (Prak. ^T^, Nom. Sing. W^, Sansk. FT^), Hindi ^V or ^TV; ^;;^* taru m. palate, Sansk. WT^ n. (Hindi ftT^); ^^ bhu f. earth (or: ^^^4-? bhue), Sansk. ^; ^JyL ju f. louse (or; ^Ja^ jua), Sansk. '^^ (with eli- 38 SECTION I. THE FORMATION OF THEMES. sion of final k in Sindhi); ^^^1 abirti, honor (or ©loT abirue) Pers. Under this head fall many appellatives and adjectives^ ending in u, ati and aku, corresponding to the Sansk. affixes uka {^^ and aku (^^)j as: ^^\3 taru, a swim- mer (= taruka), ^^LiJ rahakti or: ^L^J rahati, inhabitant, ^jU^^ khatati , profitable (from viL^ f. profit). In some nouns ending in ti, a more complicated contraction has taken place, as: ^yc=*Lo marhu, man, Prak. l^piIT^? Sansk. 7f |«^l^ (n of the Prakrit inter- changing with r, and ^ being exchanged for h); ^yi\\c> darhu , pome - granate , Sanskrit ^TR?I , Hindustani *vl5; ^^-4^ kachu, tortoise, Sansk. ^"^"^ [(p = h = v = u); ^j^4^; vichu, scorpion, Prak. f^tSi'^, Sansk. IV. The termination a. Nouns ending in a correspond generally to the San- skrit-Prakrit termination a (^) and are all feminine, as: LxLs^ cinta, anxiety, Sansk. 1x1 nH? L!^ haca, murder, Sansk. ^rqi; lo*L^ jatra, pilgrimage, Sansk. 'MT^T; H^f khima, patience, Prak. ^^T, Sansk. ^fil. There exists a small number of masc. nouns, now ending in a, which must not be confounded with the preceding fem. nouns, as they are of quite a difibrent origin; they are derived from Sansk. themes ending (in their crude forms) in an (^R[) and r (^J), and in the Nom. Sing, in a, as: Liir raja, prince; UjI atma, soul; LSj.r' karta, the agent (in grammar). There are also a few foreign words, ending in a, as: Li-wl asna, an acquain- stance, Pers. L^l. SECTION I. THE FOKMATION OF THEMES. 39 A few adjectives end likewise in a (or a) as: LSl<3 data, liberal; ^^U tala, exhausted etc. V. The termination a. The vocalic ending a is shortened from the pre- ceding fern, termination a, just as u has been shortened from o. To this class belong in Sindhi: 1) such nouns, as end in Sanskrit and Prakrit in a, as: ^^ Jibha, tongue, Prak. ^Ul^, Sansk. 'HR'^T' ^^ nuha (besides ,^j) daughter-in-law, Sansk. '^Wl'f ^s^o dhia (besides: ^J?t>), daughter, Prak. ifl'^ or \ftw; ^^yu^ sa-ina, sign, Sansk. ^"^T; 2^ mina, marrow, Sansk. ♦i^T. Further a great quantity of nouns, the formation of which is peculiar to the Sindhi, and which may be derived from every verbal root. This formation cor- responds exactly to the Sanskrit affix ^I^ (a), which is added to the verbal root, to form fem. nouns, as San- skrit: fJ^FTj breaking, from "p^F etc. In Sindhi the derivation of such nouns from verbs is quite general, and the language acquires thereby a great facility to form verbal nouns, as: -4^^ cokha, investigation, Infin. Jj4^j^ (root: 4^^)' ^ g^^^i pounding, Inf ^l^3S (root: df). The Sindhi always falls back on the Pra- Imt, especially in such nouns, as differ already from the Sanskrit, by dropping either a final consonant in Prakrit or affixing a new vocalic ending, as: (j-..a^I asisa, blessing, Prak. ^ftt^, Sansk. '^'RtJ^* 2) The feminines of such adjectives, as end in the masc. in u, as: .^^ kubha, fem. of .^^^ kubhu, un- fortunate; ^[j^ sujana, fem. of ^jl^, well-knowing. Only a very small number of adjectives ends ori- ginally in a, which remain unchanged in gender, num- 40 SECTION I. THE FORMATION OF THEMES. ber and case, as: JLa. jala, or '^L^ jara, abundant; IL^ Jama, much, many. 3) Many nouns fluctuate, as regards their ter- mination, between a or i (e), as both short vowels form the common fem. terminations in Sindhi, e. g.: \\^ nara or ^LS nare, woman; J ara or ^1 are, affection; ^^ chana or ^4^, chane, a pond; 1>. rira or ^. rire, quarrel. From the adjectives, ending in u, the feminine may be formed in final a or i (e), as: \^\ atora, or: y^iS atore, what cannot be weighed, masc. \yi\\ viyili- caryata or ooli caryate, mad, masc. viiol^. This accounts easily enough for the phenomenon, that such nouns, as end in Prakrit in i, have adopted in Sindhi the termination a (simply exchanging one fem. termination for another), as: ^ly^ bhena (besides: jJo^j), sister, Prak. "^f^^ Sansk. HPTni; ^o dhure, origin, Prak. "^TI, Sansk. "^^. But, though the respective fem. terminations are often exchanged, the original gender is commonly strictly adhered to in Sindhi, and the case is very rare, that an original masc. noun has been chang- ed to a feminine, as: «^G bapha, fem. steam, Sansk. "^T"^ masc. (in Hindi it has become likewise a fem.). Note, As regards the cognate dialects, the Ban gall has throughout preserved the original fem. termination a; the Ma- rathi too has remained more faithful to the Prakrit, but it has already in many cases shortened a to a, and then dropped it altogether (in pronunciation at least) as : ift^ Jibh , tongue, cff^ vat, way etc. In the other dialects long final a has either been preserved , or it has been thrown off altogether (after having first been changed to a). As in Sindhi every noun must needs end in a vowel, such fem. nouns, as are borrowed from the Hindustani, frequently adopt the fem. termination *"a' in Sindhi, as: Hindust. ^^\ (f) SECTION I. THE FORMATION OF THEMES. 41 earth, Sindhi ,j»-^) zamina; Hindust. lCLo (f.) property, Sindhi uX-Lo milka. In a few nouns the gender has been changed, as: Hindust. V*^ kitab (fern.), Sindhi V^^ kitabu, masc. VI. The termination i. (masc. et fern.) Themes in i are in Sindhi of both genders; they are either masculine or feminine. 1) Masc. themes ending in T. The termination i in masc. nouns corresponds: a) To the Sansk. affix i (= in), as: ^>i4> dharmi, religious (Sansk. ^MIh), Nom. Sing. VTfT; ^y^ svami, lord (Sansk. ^TT'm*T)5 (^-^'Li hathi, elephant (Sansk. h) To the Sansk. affix ika (X^ = ^j ^y eliding k and lengthening i to i; e. g.: (^xli hari, a peasant, Sansk. ^ifocft)? /^^^^ othi, a camel -rider (from ^j^\ camel); ^jCaj^ thekiri, a seller of earthen ware (from yCugJ, earthen ware). c) To the Sansk. adjectival affix '^ y, by changing ^ to 1, as: jj.j^^ pri, friend, Sansk. TB[^; ^^^^ abhagi, unfortunate, Sansk. ^Rm'^. d) To the Sansk. affix ^[^ iya, by eliding '^^ as: ^5<\Ijb Hindi, Indian; ^tXl*« Sindhi, relating to Sindh. With this class coincide all the Persian and Arabic adjectives, formed by the so-called ^lo s^G or y of relation, as: ^J'Xl farsi, Persian; ^^yk ^arabi, Arabic; ^♦L\ zaxmi, wounded. e) To Sanskrit masc. crudes, ending in i, which ge- 42 SECTION I. THE FORMATION OF THEMES. nerally have final i lengthened to i in Sindhi, as: ^y^ kavi, poet, Sansk. "'^T^; JlXJir kali-kalu, the Kali -pe- riod; in some nouns though original short i has been preserved, as: J^ hare, Vishnu (Hindi: ^K and ^tT)^ ^Aj pa-e, lord, master (= ^m)« There remains a number of words in i, which are masculine, the origin of which is unknown, as: J^ bell, servant; ^jtXjLj bandhi, a log of wood floating in the river; ^^^U manjhi, a brave man. Note. The Ban gall and Marathi agree with the Sindhi in this respect, as Bang, svami, Marathi hatti etc. On the other hand both idioms have retained the masc. termination i, as Bang, pati, lord, Marathi kavi, poet. In Panjabi, Hindi (Hindust.) final i of masc. themes is occasionally preserved, but more ge- nerally dropped, as har = hari; kav = kavi; or lengthened to 1, as in Sindhi, as kali = kal, kali. 2) Feminine themes ending in i. a) Feminine nouns, which end in Sanskrit and Pra- krit in i, remain unchanged in Sindhi, as: ^d^ nadi, river, Sansk. ^I^? 'jlL sati, a virtuous woman, Sansk. ^m? ^1; rani, queen, Sansk. IT^. The Prakrit termination ^ (fem.) is occasionally changed to i in Sindhi, as: ^Sl; vai, speech, Prak. '^TW, Sansk. "^T^ f. ; in some nouns i (Prak.) is shortened to i (e), as: ^^ dithe, sight, Prak.f^JJ^, Sansk. "§f%^ Neuter nouns, which end in Sansk. in i, may accept in Sindhi the fem. ter- mination i, as: ^^<3 dahi, sour milk, Prak. "^f^, Sansk. ^f^; ^54^Li makhi, honey, Sansk. IITT^^, with eli- sion of ^. &) The fem. termination i corresponds to the Sanskrit-Prakrit affix i, by which feminiucs arc formed SECTION I. THE FORMATION OF THEMES. 43 from masculine themes. In Sindlii this termination is used to derive feminines from masc. bases ending in o and u, as: JL^j bhali, fem. good, from the masc. base j-JL^j; 4>^ g^li, a slave-girl, from jjj-f a slave; ^i^lU bambhani, the daughter or wife of a ^^4-4^5 ^^ Brahman. c) The fem. termination i is frequently applied to express littleness, smallness, neatness, as: ^^1^ kati, a small knife, from ^1^ katu, a large knife; ^jU mati, a small jar, from pHo niato, a large jar etc. d) The fem. affix i, which corresponds to the Sansk. abstract affix TJ, derives abstract nouns from adjec- tives and substantives, as: (^^j-^ cori, theft, from ^j.^ corn, a thief; ^^ bhali, goodness, from j.-L^j bhalo, good; ^^34> dosti, friendship, from o^a-^jo dostu, friend. VII. The termination i (e) fem. (m.) The ending 'i', which, with a few exceptions, de- notes fem. nouns, corresponds to the Sanskrit -Prakrit termination I; in others again is has been shortened from 1, in the same way, as final a from a; e. g.: j»tXj budhe, intelligence, Sansk. "^t^? o^i mate, opinion, Sansk. HTrf; s\S nare, woman, Sansk. ^Tii. The termination i (e) is generally used to derive feminines from adjectives and substantives ending in u, as: o^j^l acete, thoughtless, masc. o^^^l; y^iXl^ sa- dhare, stout, masc. y^oJL; .^dS gadahe, a jenny-ass, from jD jLj a jack-ass ; otJ vj parite , a washerwoman, from oo>j a washerman. In some few nouns the original gender has been changed, as: J*f age, fire (fem.), Prak. '^P'TJ (ni.), 44 SECTION I. THE FORMATION OF THEMES. Sansk. ^|R| m.; ^o dehe (fern.), body, Sansk. "^ (m. and n.); in the cognate dialects both are ahke fern. It is further to be observed, that in Sindhi final i (e) very frequently interchanges with final a, both vow- els constituting the regular fern, terminations, e. g.: J are or J ara, fondness; vj/ gore or ^:^ gora, thun- der etc. Among these we must also reckon forms like ^j dhure, origin, Prak. ^JU, short final a having been ex- changed for i (e). In Sindhi, as well as in the cognate dialects, some few masc. nouns have retained the original Sansk. termination i , as : yi hare, Vishnu, v:^^^;^ viraspate , the planet Jupiter (Thursday) -aj pa-e, lord, husband (== 'RtW)? in others again i has been shortened from i, as: ^^aT kehare, lion, Sansk. %'5jft^, Hindi cfi^ and ^ft^f i^^ ^^^^® ^^^ ^SL4^ sahai, a helper. To some nouns of foreign origin the termination i has also been added, as: &\3j:>. /udae, God (Pers. liXL); ..^Xu« sethe, a Hindi wholesale merchant (Hindust. --^^aav); yj^ Xi^i^^j nom. prop, of a Pir and fabulous prophet. Some adjectives, mostly such, as have been bor- rowed from a foreign source, take also the termination i (m. andfem.), as: ji:^h> x^^^? j^^yf^l (Pers. yii^^); ^^ sade, delighted (Pers. jL^); u^^^i- caurase, four-square, Sansk. '^¥. SECTION I. THE FORMATION OF THEMES. 45 Chapter II. Primary themes. §. 7. With reference to the formation of themes the Sindhi conforms on the whole to the system of the Prakrit, in- asmuch as Prakrit themes are directly received into the Sindhi with such modifications, as are peculiar to the Sindhi; but besides this the Sindhi has set up new formations of themes, whereby the inherited stock of vo- cables, be they of Arian or non-Arian origin, is peculiarly remodelled. As regards the themes taken directly from the Prakrit, we must refer to the Sindhi system of sounds in our Introduction, which alone can give the necessary clue as to the origin or derivation of a theme from the Prakrit; in the following we shall only treat of those themes, which have been formed either by modifying the old inherited stock, or by new rules altogether, irrespective of the Prakrit. Nouns of Arabic or Persian origin we shall exclude from our present investigation, as they have nothing in common with the genuine Sindhi forms, but are intruders, without which the Sindhi may well exist; they partake so far of the general laws of the formation of themes, that a vocalic termination is affixed to them, according to their respective gender, to render them sus- ceptible of inflexion. Whe shall divide the Sindhi formation of themes after the precedent of the Sanskrit into two classes, viz: that of primary and secondary themes, that is, such themes, as are directly derived from verbal roots, and such, as are derived from primary nouns, by means of affixes. 46 SECTION I. THE FORMATION OF THEMES. §. 8. I. Formation of abstract nouns. I) Themes in a, i (e); u, o (i fern.) a) Themes in a are formed from the simple root of the verb (which in Sindhi, as weU as in Sanskrit, is always monosyllabical , derivative verbs excepted) by dropping the Infinitive (verbal) affix anu. In this way an abstract noun may be formed from every Infinitive of the language, exhibiting the abstract idea of the verb. The affix a corresponds to the Sansk. affix ^, which is added to the root of the verb (as: Sansk. "5^1, worship, from "^[^ to worship) to form abstract nouns; in Sindhi final a has been shortened to a; see §. 6, Y. e. g.: (^U* jaga, wakefulness, Inf. ^\^ to be awake. .Sli marha, pardon, Inf. J^iwo to pardon. 7^, V^^^-) pi'essure, Inf. ^^-Ui to press. .4^ sagha, strength, Inf. ^^^^4^ ^^ ^^ strong. In some roots 'a' is prolonged to a and 'u' to o , as : v£>i-^ jhata, snatching, Inf. ^^^.^.^ to snatch. dy^ bhola, error, Inf. ,jJL^ to err. Z>) Themes in i (e) are formed in the same way as the preceding (i being only a variation of a), with this difi'erence, that the root- vowel must always be pro- longed (viz: a = a; u = o; i = e), e. g. : ^Vj^f ghate, descrease. Inf. ^^l^ to descrease. (•34^ ghome, vagrancy, Inf. ^^ to wander about. ^•jj^ verhe, quarrel, Inf. ^^'U to quarrel. c) The termination 'u' corresponds to the Sansk. affix ^, which derives abstract nouns from verbal roots, with SECTION I. THE FORMATION OF THEMES. 47 or without prolonging the root- vowel; the same is the case in Sindhi, where the root- vowel either remains un- changed, or is prolonged. E. g.: iSl^ marku, boast, Inf. J^i to boast. .^Sf lahu, descent, Inf. ^J^i to descent. Ij.^ bhoru, crumb, Inf. ,jZ^j to crumble. U^^ pheru, turn. Inf. ^^4^ to turn (v. n.). d) Themes in o are identical with those in u, both terminations interchanging very frequently (see §. 6, I. II.). pl^ g^^^toj deficiency. Inf. ^^f to decrease. ^vLi carho, increase, Inf. 0^>^ to rise. ^y^^ jhagiro, quarrel. Inf. ^I'-iX^ to quarrel. ^Xl^'i dekharo, showing, Inf. ^^^L^jj to show. The masc. termination o is occasionally exchanged for the fem. termination 1, with some slight alteration of meaning, as: ^^a^L^. carhi, ascent, Inf. ^'i^ to ascend. ^.I^Joi dekhari, showing. 2) Themes in anu, ano, ani, ane. a) Themes in anu coincide in Sindhi with the form of the Infinitive, which, according to the te- stimony of the old Prakrit grammarians, has already been the case in the Apabhransha dialect, the Infinitive of which terminated in ^^ (compare: Lassen, Instit. ling. Prak. p. 469, 5). The old Sanskrit Infinitive in ^*^ (the Latin su- pinum) has been lost in the modern vernaculars (the Gujarat! Infinitive, which ends in "^ is properly a neuter Gerundive, and the Bangali infinitive, which ends in te, is a past participle, used as a verbal noun) and 48 SECTION I. THE FORMATION OF THEMES. in its place the verbal noun in ^p^ is substituted, which in Marathi has remained neuter (TJ e), but which in Sindhi and the other dialects has been classed under the masculine termination. The affix anu is added directly to the verbal root in Sindhi, and forms abstract nouns, corresponding to our Gerunds; as: J^S disarm, seeing, root: ,^0. ^Jbc halanu, going, root: Jjd. ^iJo maranu, dying, root: li. The naked verbal root, as pointed out, is in Sindhi nowhere to be met with, but always ends in the Im- perative, where alone its crude form comes to light, in a vowel, which is either u (in intrans. verbs) or i (e) . (in transitive verbs). According to the final vowel of the Imperative the junction vowel of the Infinitive or verbal noun varies in Siro, as: ^^^sUo marinu (to beat), * fjjUi letanu, to recline, but in Lar no regard is had to this circumstance , and all Infinitives (irrespective of their transitive or intransitive signification) terminate in anu. h) Themes in an 5 (which is originally only a variation of anu) express in Sindhi more a lasting action, occupation or state; e. g.: li^*; ^i diano vathano, giving and taking (debt and and credit), besides: J;4^'i J^S^? which is also in use. jiw^ bharino (or bharano) embroidering (literally: fil- ling up). dXjSs manino (or manano) betrothal (literally: asking [for a bride]). Note. It is remarkable , that all the other dialects, with the exception of the Bangali and GujaratI, have retained this ter- mination of the Infinitive, as: Marathi ^^vT (e being originally identical with o, see Lassen §. 144, 2), Hindi (Hindust.) ^T^TT, Panjabi: karna. SECTION I. THE FORMATION OF THEMES. 49 c) More frequently than the termination ano, the feminine ending ani is used in Sindhi, serving at the same time to express smallness, neatness etc. of a state or action: ^^ cavani, saying, Inf. ^^ to say. ^jJli halani, going, gait (comely), Inf j^^Jli to go. ^w^ bharini, embroidery, Inf. ^jy^ to fill. ^^Aij^ vadhani, carpentering, Inf. ^^3^ to cut. Occasionally the termination am is shortened to ani (ane), as: ^^f gehane, swallowing (besides: ^^^f)-> Inf. ^^f to swallow. The affix ani (or ini) joined to roots of causal verbs, signifies: expense for, wages for, as: ^ilL^ khanani, expense for carrying or lifting up (porterage). Inf. ^Ll^ to cause to carry. ^CLi car ani, expense for grazing cattle, Inf Ij")^^ to cause to graze. ^^Cfl^t> dhuarini, expense for washing, Inf ^Jui^^ to cause to wash. 3) Themes in ti. This affix corresponds to the Sansk. affix f^f, by which abstract nouns are derived from verbal roots, be- sides those, which are taken over directly from the San- skrit. The junction vowel in Sindhi is a, as: c>l^ khapate, expense, Inf. J^.1^ to spend. o6^ vanate, pleasure. Inf. ^j to please (act.). i^^L^ o^l avate javate, income, expense (literally: coming, going); as Infinitives they are not used in Sindhi, but in Hindi. Trumpp, Sindhi- Grrammar. D 50 SECTION I. THE FORMATION OF THEMES. ^iXj^t^- chadate, remission, Inf. ^J.^^^ to remit, o^ii halate, behaviour, Inf. ^Ji to go. 4) Themes in atu, atti (a — u), ati (fem.). These affixes correspond to the Sansk. Unadi-affixes ^TT ^fT which Bopp has justly referred to the In- finitive affix 5 = WTT . This is borne out by their sig- nification, which in Sindhi nearly coincides with that of the Infinitive, as: ^Cj^f gheratu, surrounding. Inf. '^>.j^ to surround. 4K^4s- chimkatu, jingling, Inf. ^^jX^^s. to jingle. viKi.4? bhunikatu > humming, Inf. J^^XI^^ to hum. i^Ki..^ bhunika-u (by elision of t.) j'IIa^. pherati, giddiness, Inf. ^v-^-^j to cause to turn. Note. A feminine may thus be derived nearly from all masc. bases. 5) Themes in atru (or: itru). The Sindhi affix atru (or itru) corresponds to the Sansk. affix ?^^, and denotes an instrument, where- with any thing is done or executed. In Lar this affix is assimilated to atu (= attu) whereas in Siro the ori- ginal compound is preserved (only with transition of t into t) ; the root- vowel is lengthened in some themes ; e. g. : lic^l^ vajatru, a musical instrument. Inf. ^j^^ to sound. lic^; vahitru, a beast of burden. Inf. ^i^ to labour. 6) Themes in iko. This affix corresponds to the Sansk. affix ^Ri (the junction vowel 'a' having been changed to i in Sindhi), SECTION I. THE FORMATION OF THEMES. 51 which in Sanskrit forms nouns of agency, but in Sindhi also abstract nouns; as: ji^S dariko, quarrelling, Inf. ^jo to quarrel. sJSj pitiko, beating the forehead. Inf. ^Jcj to strike one's head in grief. §. 9. n. Formation of appellatives and attributives. 7) Themes in o. This affix corresponds to the Sansk. affix ^^ (final ^ being commonly elided in Sindhi), and forms attri- butives from verbal roots, which imply habitual action or possession. The root-vowel, if it be short, must be prolonged, as in Sanskrit; e. g. : j^ol^ vadho, carpenter, Inf. ^^^ to cut. jyxs^ ciro, sawyer. Inf. ^l^^ to split. •jij tobo, diver. Inf. ^j to dive. jvj-^ ghoro, seeker. Inf. ^j^}4^ to seek. In some few instances the full Sansk. affix has been preserved, as: jCSLf gaiku, singer. Inf. ^}f to sing. 8) Themes in u. This affix corresponds to the Sansk. affix ^^ (final ^ beeing ehded in Sindhi and u lengthened) and forms verbal adjectives or attributives, implying a habitual or characteristical action or state. The root- vowel, if short, is commonly prolonged before the ac- cession of this affix; as: ^ol^ vadhii, increasing, Inf. ^j^^^j to increase. ^j\j taru, a swimmer. Inf. '^Ji to swim. yo^^ verhu, a quarrelsome person. Inf. ^'U to quarrel. D2 52 SECTION I. THE FORMATION OF THEMES. • vt^j ph5ru, a robber, Inf. '^y-^. to rob. Jo^ ghomti, a vagabond, Inf. ^^^^f to stroll about. Without prolongation of the root- vowel: ypij rahu, inhabitant, Inf. ^"^ to stay. y^ sahu, patient, Inf. ^j^ to bear. 9) Themes in aku, akti, ati. This affix denotes the same idea of a habitual state or action, as the preceding. It corresponds to the Sansk. affix W^ which is added to the verbal root either unaltered, or with final 'u' lengthened, or with elision of ^ =; a-u. In some instances the root -vowel is prolonged. E. g.: ^^ ^^ ' [ inhabitant, In£ ^^^ to stay. ^Li^ raha-ti, J ^ J^Lo piaku, drinker, Inf ^j to drink. ^Li.j vircau, wearisome, In£ ^^^^ to be wearied. •jlXs^ vekaii, for sale, Inf ^5^ to be sold. ^li^j petati, ill-wishing. Inf. ^j> to curse. 10) Themes in and5 (and indo). This affix corresponds to the Sansk. affix ^Trf , Prak. ^•iTt (^^ Sindhi with change of the tenuis into the media), and forms in Sindhi, like as in Sanskrit and Prakrit, present participles. According to the final vowel of the Imperative the participle ends in ando (Imperative u) or indo (imperative i); some participles are formed irregularly. jjd^ lagando, applying, Imper. tXJ, Inf J^j to apply. jjolLS disand5, seeing, Imper. y^^, Inf ^^'^ to see. ijJjJLygj bhelindo, trampling, Imper. Joy^, Inf ^a^ to trample. SECTION I. THE FORMATION OF THEMES. 53 jjcu^j tliindo (irreg.), Imper. ^Ja^j, Inf. J^^^j* to become. Note, We advert to the fact, that all the other dialects have dropped the nasal in the Prak. affix ^rfl^; the PanjabT has preserved it in a few forms, as: hunda, being, janda, going, but in the regular present participle the affix is always da, with change of the tenuis into the media, just as in Sindhl. In Gu- jarat! the present participle ends in to, as: ^ISWt l^^^hto, writing; in Hindi (Hindtist.) in ta, as: likhta, hota, being etc. Hindu! tu, as: f^^fT likh-tu, writing. The Marath! has formed two present participial affixes from the Sanskrit affix ^ff ; one in ta, corresponding to the Hind! form, as: T^'ferTT? writing, with which affix the terminations of the substantive verb ^Tf^T coalesce into the forms to, tos etc.; the other in at or !t. The Bangal! has discontinued the use of the present participle (with the exception of a few Sanskrit participles ending in at) and only employs the same in conjunction with the substantive verb ach!, as: dekhitechi, I am seeing; but dekhite is by no means to be confounded with the Infinitive, as it is commonly represented in Bangal! grammars, it is the Locative form of dekhit, and signifies literally: I am in seeing (the Locative of the present participle is similarly used in Sindh! and Hind!). 11) Themes in aru, aru, aro. These affixes correspond to the Sansk. affix W^, and form in Sindhi verbal nouns, which imply a ha- bitual action or occupation; their number is not very considerable; as: ^Vf^^ _ _ (a pedlar. Inf. '^\y^ to seek. ^;^;>-^^ ghoraru, J SjLi^j ptijaro, a worshipper, Inf. ^^^j to worship. jsLixAj piiiaro, a cotton carder, Inf. ;j;.io ^^ card cotton. ^Lajo penaru, a beggar, Inf. '^^ to beg. 54 SECTION I. THE FORMATION OF THEMES. 12) Themes in ib5. This affix corresponds to the Sansk. affix rf^, in- credible as this may appear. In Sindhi rT has been elided and vv {= ^) hardened to b {= bb). It forms now in Sindhi present participles passive, though its original use and signification has still been preserved in the for- mation of the future passive; as: j-JL]^ busatib5, being choked, In£ ^'Ll^ to choke. >^?i;S drohibo, being cheated, Inf. ^^jjt) to cheat. j^i^ jhalibo, being seized, Inf. ^\^l^ to seize. 13) Themes in in5. We have in Sindhi two themes in ino, which are quite of different origin and signification. a) The affix ino, added to such verbs, as end in the Imperative in u, corresponds to the Sanskrit affix ^H, which forms attributives and appellatives; in Sindhi the affix ana has been changed to ino; e. g.: j-Lbo halino, going, Imper. Jii. j.i5lvo murkin5, laughing, Imper. c^wo. yfyj^ chirkin5, shying, Imper. jCg^. py^ bhurino, crumbling, Imper. y^. j-Uj pinino, begging, Imper. ^j. Some of these attributives are also used substantively, and as such they are also susceptible of the fem. ter- mination, as:' lUdg^ chinkind, rattle, i. e. that which rattles. ^^y-^, phirin5, spooling -wheel, i. e. that which turns round. jj^lifc> dhavane, a pair of bellows, i. e. that which blows (the fire). h) The other affix ino or ano corresponds to the SECTION I. THE FORMATION OF THEMES. 55 Sanskrit affix ^^7}, by which the future passive par- ticiple is formed in Sanskrit. Thus in Sindhi a Gerundive may be derived from every transitive verb by means of this affix, as: jJnU marin5, one who is to be beaten, Inf. ^^Ixi to beat. ^^ diano, what is to be given. Inf. J^^ to give. ^juj^o dhuano, what is to be washed. Inf. ^^^J^o to wash. jX^'^ rathano, what is to be taken, Inf. 0^** to take. In the same way a gerundive is derived form causal verbs, as: jijC; varain5, what ought to be returned. Inf. ^f^j to return (act), jisuit^ dhuarino, what ought to be caused to wash. Inf. j|j>L^4> to cause to wash. Note. In Hindi and Hindustani the Gerundive coincides with the Infinitive, with this difference, that the Gerundive is properly a masc. substantive, and therefore only a Gerund; very rarely the Infinitive is employed as a Gerundive proper (i. e. future passive participle), agreeing with its governing noun in gender, as in Sindhi. The Panjabi on the other hand quite agrees with the Sindhi in this respect, using the Infinitive as a regular Gerundive, agreeing with the governing noun in gender, number and case, like an adjective. The Mar at hi forms the Gerundive by the affix ^^ffcfj (^H*^^ ^ff"^), which corresponds to the Sansk. affix ff^, Prak. rf^; in MarathI rf has been elided and in its place V lengthened, as: ^TT'^TT faciendus, l^^^T"^ dirumpendus. In a similar way the Gerundive is formed in GujaratI by the affix ^^ (= fTW) ^s: ^^^"Spf scribendus. In Ban gall occurs no proper formation of a Gerundive, but the Infinitive (in distinction from the verbal noun) is ge- nerally employed to express the idea of a Gerund , like in Hindi, as: amake jaite hai, mihi eundum est; but many original Ge- rundive forms are borrowed directly from the Sanskrit, as: kar-- tavya etc., the affix aniya is also in use. 56 SECTION I. THE FORMATION OF THEMES. 14) Themes in io or yo. The affix io or jo is used to derive perfect par- ticiples; it corresponds to the Sanskrit affix rl, Pra- krit already ^, and frequently altogether elided, for which reason y or i is inserted in Sindhi, to prevent the hiatus. The perfect participle of transitive verbs always implies a passive signification, whereas that of in- transitive verbs only expresses the idea of the Prseterite. In many instances the Sindhi ha& preserved the ori- ginal Sanskrit -Prakrit forms of the perfect participles, modified according to the laws of elision and assimilation current in Sindhi. ^^u^J pasyo (or j.aa^S pasio) seen, Inf. ,^^j to see. ^.A-L^ jhalyo (or: j^.^^ jhalio) seized, Inf j^^^i^ to seize. jjG^x) moty5 (or: 0yjo motio), returned. Inf. ^yi to return. j^'j ditho, seen; Sansk. ^^, Prak. f^ZT; Inf J^-^S to see. ^•f uto, said; Sansk. '^^, Prak. TWt; Inf. ^] to say. Note. In reference to the formation of the perfect participles (the perfect participle active in cfff has completely disappeared from the grammar of the modern vernaculars) a great variation is to be noticed in the cognate dialects. The Panjabi, Guja- rat!, Hindi and Hindustani quite agree in this point with the Sindhi, as Panjabi: ghallia, sent. Inf. ghallna; GujaratI: lakhyo, written; Hindi (Hindust.): likha (without insertion of euphonic i or y in the place of elided t or d), Inf. likhna. The MarathT differs considerably in this respect from the idioms mentioned; it forms the perfect participle by affixing ^T to the root of the verb (with the junction vowel a or i, according to the intransitive or transitive signification of a verb). The first traces of this affix must be sought already in Prakrit; the SECTION I. THE FORMATION OF THEMES. 57 Sansk. rf has been changed in Prakrit to the corresponding media F, and this again to 5 (d); see Lassen: Instit. linguae Prak., p. 363. We have seen already (Introd. §. 6, 4) that 5 is fre- quently changed to 5 I" i^ ^^^ modern idioms, and this is again exchanged for 1; as: x|lc?5cO| gone, Inf. xfT^TJj; ^T5^T broken, Inf. ^JS^, The Bangali coincides in this point quite with the Hindi, as: dekha, seen (without insertion of euphonic i or y). Chapter III. Secondary themes. §. 10. Under this head we shall class all those themes, which are derived from other nouns by means of an affix. We shall pass again all those forms, which have been taken directly from the Sanskrit-Prakrit, and only treat of those formations, which are peculiar to the Sindhi. I. Formation of abstract nouns. Abstract nouns may be derived either from sub- stantives or adjectives, the affixes which the Sindhi uses for this purpose, agree all, more or less, with the primitive Sanskrit -Prakrit affixes. 1) Themes in i. (f.) By the affix i a very numerous class of abstract nouns is formed, which, after the analogy of the Per- sian, may be derived from any noun. The final vowel is always dropped before this affix, but in other respects the noun undergoes no change whatever. The affix i corresponds to the Sanskrit affix IJ (n.); in Sindhi as well as in the other dialects the feminine 58 SECTION I. THE FORMATION OF THEMES. form 1, which is already current in Sanskrit, has alone been retained; e. g.: {S)}=^ ^^ri, theft, from [^ coru, thief i^(XjJo mandi, wickedness, from jtXLo mando, wicked. ^^^kami, deficiency, from ^ kame, deficient. 2) Themes in ai. (f) The affix ai is only a variation of the preceding affix; final u (= o) and 5 are not dropped, as before the preceding affix, but changed to a (as in the other dialects) to keep their place; e. g.: ^j^io nirmalai, purity, from JColj nirmalu, pure. ^\'i^ kurai, falsity, from jj^ kuro, false. Both forms are therefore frequently used indiffe- rently, as: J^ bhali, goodness, or: ^^Lgj bhalai, from jJ^j bhal5, good. 3) Themes in ta and tai. (f.) The affix ta forms in Sindhi a very numerous class of abstract nouns from attributives and adjectives; the final vowel is always dropped and the union- vowel i in- serted (except when the noun ends in i). The affix ta corresponds to the Sanskrit affix rTT, which is used for the same purpose in Sanskrit. Besides the affix ta, the emphatic form with i (ta-i) is also in use; e. g.: L£x^ ghatita, ^(i^^f ghatitai, Li^^ jogita, fitness, from «J^ jog^? fit. 4) Themes in te; ti. (f) The affix te, which is else only used with pri- mary formations, is in Sindhi also (though very rarely) found with secondary formations; the affix ti, which is want, from o^^^ ghate, deficient. SECTION I. THE FORMATION OF THEMES. 69 also occasionally to be met with, is only a variation of te (i having been lengthened to i); as: ^^•Xl savate, straightness , from ^j-a-lL sao, straight. ^-i±^r ghatiti, deficiency, from viiu^ gliate, deficient. Note. The affix ti is also used in Hindustani, as: ^^^ deficiency, from [V^. 5) Themes in ane or aine. (f) These affixes form a numerous class of abstract nouns from adjectives implying colour or some other inherent quality. They correspond to the Sanskrit affix ?[JH^, which forms abstract masc. nouns. In Prakrit the termination ^l^ may already be lengthened to ^^ (cf. Yar. Y, 47); in Sindhi TT (m) has been elided, which is rather uncommon, and a feminine termination sub- stituted for the masculine; the i of iman has been dropped = ane, whereas in the form aine i has been inserted after a, to render the V more prominent. E. g.: jTjLg^f achane, whiteness, from j-§^l acho, white. ^IIXj^ vekirane, breadth, from j^J^ vekir5, broad. ^J\i^ vadane, gTeatness, from jo^ vaclo, great. The affix ane (aine) is very often exchanged for the affix ai (see 2.), and with many nouns both affixes are promiscuously used, as: ^\l^ or ^jl;i? blackness. Note. In Hindi and Hindustani the affix ma (= ^TH*?) is rarely used, and no longer as a mascuhne; e. g. : garima, f., importance. In Gujurati the affix an is used (as neuter) e. g.: sj^^fu depth, from ^^T ^^ep; the Mara thi and Bangali hare preserved the original Sansk. termination ma (as masc). In Pan- jabi, as in Gujarat!, the form an (m.) is used, as: ucan, m., height, from uca, high. 6) Themes in po, pa, pai, pi; panu, pano; tanu; atu. These affixes form a very numerous class of abstract nouns from substantives and adjectives. _ We can see in 60 SECTION I. THE FORMATION OF THEMES. this instance, how the Sindhi has menaged to derive from one and the same Sanskrit affix a whole series of abstract affixes, which at the first glance seem to have nothing in common. The affixes po, pa, pal, pi are derived from the Sansk. abstract-affix i^ tva, which is assimilated to "OCT (see Introd. §. 15, D, b.); from this the Sindhi has formed the various terminations pa, pa, pal, pi. From the self-same affix f^, which has become r^ ranapanUj widowhood, from ,jT rana, a widow, j^^l; zalapanu, womanhood, from J('\ a woman. 62 SECTION I. THE FORMATION OF THEMES. Note. These abstract affixes are to be met with in all the cognate idioms. The Hindi and Hindustani use the affixes pan, pana and pa, corresponding to the SindhT forms panu, pano and po. The GujarathT: pan and panii (both neut.); the Marathi: pan (n.) and pana (m.); the Panjabi: puna. The Ban- gal i comes nearest to the Sanskrit in this respect, having re- tained the original abstract affix tva unaltered. 7) Themes in karu, karo, kara, kare. These themes fall under our consideration in this place not so much on account of their formation, as their signification, for we have here not to deal with an affix, but with an adjective, used to form com- pounds , and signifying : making, e f f e c t in g. In Sindhi the original signification of ^TT. has been already ob- literated , and it is now used in the same way as an affix, to form a number of abstract nouns; e. g.: js 1X^(^50 luchikaro, uneasiness, properly: that which makes . (^ dhuryo, a duststorm; properly: that which makes sand (j^4>). SECTION I. THE F0R3UTI0X OF THE3IES. 63 §. 10. n. Formation of apellatives, attributives and possessives. 9) Themes in i. This affix, vrliicli in SincUhi and the kinclrecl idioms is so frequently employed, has sprung from three dif- ferent sources: a) The affix i, correspondiiig to the Sanskrit affix ?[«fi. This affix forms attributives and appellatives of various sigmfications ; the root- vowel is generally length- ened before the addition of this affix, i. e. 'a'* becomes a; 'i : e: 'u' : 5: e. g.: ^^^jl othi. a camel-rider, fr^om ^'t uthu. camtL ,c*iU bakhi:. a seller of vegetables . from SS bakarii. v^' ■ - > • vegetables. ,cJC^-2J>" thekiri. a seller of earthen - vrare : from 1x1^' thekini. earthen- ware. h) The affix i. coiTesponding to the Sansk. affix This affix denotes in all the modem vernaculars descent or relationship. Before its addition to a noun a final short vowel is di^opped. long u is shortened to V. and o is changed to a. Li some instances final short "'u' ('shortened frx'm oi is changed to a {= oi and thus preserved: e. g.: ^tXlw sindhi. of Sindh. frxm .ijj-^ f. sindhu. the country of Sindh. ^tU^ hindiu. relating to a Hindu, from .jJ^. hindiu a Hindu. ^Vlarl. ) of Lar. fr'om ■•^» m. laru. Lower Sindh. ,^I^;N' larai. y 64 SECTION I. THE FORMATION OF THEMES. ^11^ sirai, of Sir5, from j^^ siro, Upper Sindh. c) The affix i, corresponding to the Sansk. affix ?f jhagirai, a quarreller, from jj^^ jhagiro, quarrel. 11) Themes in u. The affix ti, corresponding to the Sansk. affix "^^, is added to substantives, by means of which, as in the primary formations, apellatives and adjectives are derived, denoting an habitual action or state. A final vowel is always dropped before the addition of this affix; SECTION I. THE FORMATION OF THEMES. 65 in some nouns the first vowel is lengthened at the same time; e. g.: yd\i hanti, injurious, from pLi hane, injury. • 1). veru, revengeful, from o^ veru: enmity. loL^ chapirti, a mountaineer, from vl^ chaparu, a range of hills. ^r^^ bakhiru, a man of Bakhar, from ^.^ bakharu, a town of upper Sindh. 12) Themes in au. The affix au is identical with the preceding, the only difference being that the final vowel of the theme is lengthened before the affix u (fin. u = a r:= a). yjiSolio dharmati, religious, from r»vii> dharmu, religion. ^UoLci sarmati, bashful, from, jllco sarmu, shame, modesty. 13) Themes in ao. The affix ao is already so much corrupted, that its origin is scarcely recognisable; it corresponds to the Sanskrit affix *iM, which forms adjectives, denoting "made of, consisting of." The labial m has been elided in this affix as well as in the abstract affix lE^^R^, and a has been lengthened in compensation thereof. The semi -vowel y has likewise disappeared, ao = ayo; the final Anusvara is altogether euphonic and more or less optional; e. g.: jjj.j|^dli haidrao, made of ^jLli haidra, turmeric. ^jjL^Il^ jambhao, made of j-^jLi jambho, a kind of oil-seed. ^jj.jliJ lohao, made of ^j.j lohu, iron. 14) Themes in o. This affix corresponds to the Sansk. affix ^; it Trumpp, Sindhi- Grammar. E 66 SECTION I. THE FORMATION OF THEMES. forms adjectives and attributives in the largest sense. The final short vowel of a noun is always dropped before this affix, and u and i are shortened. The root- vowel either remains unaltered or is lengthened, viz: 'a' to a, i to e and V to o; as: j.^C^ sagho, strong, from .^^ sagha, strength, jjo^ vingo, crooked, from jCj^ vingu, a crook. *jJi^ bhakuo, stupid, from ySC^ bhaku, a blockhead. 5-f^.5 veco, mediator, from -.^ vicu, midst. ' - - _ _ _ > " - }^j)^ baroco, of a Beluch, from --3*.^ barocu, a Beluch. j^jl otho, of a camel, from ..^'l uthu, camel. i^L5 gao, of a cow, from ^y^ gaii, cow. Iregular formations are: i^Lc mahyo, of a buffalo, from ..^JLyo mehe, a buffalo. ^js^ll saio, hundredth (per cent), from Jlj sau, hundred. 15) Themes in aru (aru), aro; alu. These affixes correspond to the Sansk. affix ^TT^ (in Prakrit likewise ^^ cf Yar. IV, 26), which forms possessive nouns. In Sindhi r and 1 are interchanged, and in some nouns aru has been shortened to aru. The root -vowel commonly remains unaltered, but in some nouns 'u' is changed to 6 (i. e. 'u' takes Guna); as: .LL«oo meharu, or a buffalo keeper, from ..g^-yo mehe, L^x> meharu, buffalo. ooW cotyaru, having a f^^}^ coti, bundle of hair on the crown of the head. ]Ui4> dhanaru, a herdsman, from J^<^ dhanu, a herd of cattle. sL^Jjl otharu, a camel-herd, from ..^1 uthu, camel. Jll^ javalu, containing barley, from ^ jau, barley. SECTION I. THE FORMATION OF THEMES. 67 Some of these formations, with the affix alu or alo, are used in a substantive sense, their original possessive signification being more or less lost, as: JGi^ gharyalu, j ^ ^°"^' ^^^^^^^^^^ containing or ^Uj^ gharyalo, j expressing the hour {^^. JL5 dialu, candlestick; literally: having a light (^o). Jll^^ jhuralo, cloudiness; literally: containing clouds 16) Themes in iro and ilo, or: ero and elo. These affixes correspond to the Sansk. '^'^ and "^^ and form attributives, signifying: habit, quality or intensity; ero and elo have sprung from the Prakrit affix ilia (Var. IV, 25); e. g.: iyxi&jJL^ khandhiro, patient, from ^jJL^ khandhe, patience. p^A^jci hathilo, obstinate, from ,-gii hathu, obstinacy. jo«jL§^ chavero, 1 ',-* v-,^--.- [ shadowy, from pL^ chava, shade. jJL}w§^* tharelo, of the Thar, having the custom of the Thar or desert. dLc*^ camelo, leathern, from ^ camu, leather. 17) Themes in iru. This affix corresponds to the Sansk. affix ^ (with the union -vowel i) and forms attributives and appel- latives as well as possessive nouns; a final vowel, short or long, is always dropped before the addition of this affix; e. g.: l^iXll sandhiru, a house-breaker, from j^d^ sandhe, a hole in a wall. E2 68 SECTION I. THE FORMATION OF THEMES. 1jL4s> jhatiru, a peeper, from ^L^:^ jliati, looking througb. a hole. 1.^1x4^. chimbhiru , a rebuker, from ^^^rs. chim- bba, rebuke. Lj^ jhapiru, one who snatches, from j-^yg^ j^apo, a snatch. licAj petiru, a glutton, from ouj petu, belly. i i yo^ vihiru, poisonous, from Ja^ f. poison. 18) Themes in atu and alu. This affix has sprung from the Sanskrit affix HfT by elision of fl; in some nouns 'a' has been lengthened, to compensate for the elision of m; it forms possessive nouns, just as in Sanskrit; e. g. : vLul4^ bharyatu, a porter, from {^y^ bhari, a man's load. oJ^vj.j porhiatu, a labourer, from j--v?;>^. porhio, labour. oUaj^ dianyatu, a debtor, from ^^^^'i diani, a debt. 19) Themes in eto (ito). The Sindhi affix eto corresponds to the Sansk. affix ^iT, denoting "to be provided with", to possess as one's own. The short i of the Sansk. affix has in Sindhi been produced to e, on account of the accent; the final vowel is always dropped before this affix; e. g.: j.Aj^. putreto, having a son, from y!b patru, son. j.;cax»4> dhieto, having a daughter, from ^^,:> dhia, daughter. j.xAjj.:s^ joeto, having a wife, from &ys^ joe, wife. j.AjLgJ bhaito, having a brother, from iL^ bhau, brother. SECTION I. THE FORMATION OF THEMES. 69 20) Themes in aito. This affix is identical with the preceding in de- rivation and signification, the only difference being that final o, V and 'a' are changed before it to a, as: j.Aj|^l; varaito, adj., at the right time, from j^!^ varo, time. sjcjL^ sajhaito, adj., opportune, from ^^ sajhu, opportunity. tAjlil; vataito, having a road, from ^^^ vata, a road. 21) Themes in ru and lu. a) The affix ru corresponds to the Sansk. diminutive affix T,, and is affixed to adjectives and participles present, with some slight variation of the original meaning; when added to adjectives the root -vowel is now and then lengthened. Final 'u' and o are changed to 'a' before the addition of this affix; i remains unaltered. •ij^T khabaru, left-handed, from j^4^ khabo, left. *i^Ll sajaru, right-handed, from j^Ll sajo, right. '-f^^ khasaru, sterile, from (j-*4^ khasu, not fully developed. y-U^cf^\^ kachiro, of the province of Kach, from ^4=^l^, a Kachi. '^dJ^^S3 likhandaru, a writer, from jtXl^ part. pres. writing. h) The affix lu is identical with the affix ru (r [r] = 1) and turns preterite participles into simple adjectives; it is seldom found with adjectives, the signification of which it does not change materially. Jo^ vialu, lost, from ^^ vio, gone, lost. Jl§j(3 dithalu, seen, from y^'s3 ditho, seen. 70 SECTION I. THE FOKMATION OF THEMES. J|^^ vistiralu, simple-minded, from jv^^ visuro, simple-minded. Similarly in Prakrit the affix r or 1 (dimin.) is added to nouns and adjectives, without essentially al- tering their signification (cf. Yarar. IV, 26), as Sansk. f^lT lightening, Prak. f^'5|[or fsjl^^; iftfT yellow, Prak. xH*^ or: xft'^^y. The same affix ^5T we notice in the Mar at hi, where it is added to preterite participles to turn them into real adjectives, as: xn^^^^f gone (from x| I^^T) ? Ht'fe^^ broken (from ^'^[^); the same holds good in Grujarati, as: ^%^, written (Adj.) (from cfii^Jt). 22) Themes in iryo. The affix iryo is originally compounded of the di- minutive affix T. {=^ r) and the adjectival affix yo ('^); it forms adjectives and attributives denoting inclination or hesitation; e. g.: ^j^tX.^ sadhiryo, half-wishing; literally: being some- what disposed to wish. ^y-js^^f ghoriryo, a pedlar; i. e. one who is inclined to seek out. ^jvoLj periryo, a walker; literally: disposed to travel afoot. ^'jxiyj paramatiryo, easily persuaded; literally: dis- posed to take another's counsel. 23) Themes in aku and akti. These Unadi- affixes, which else only occur with primary themes, are in Sindhi also used (but very ra- rely) in secondary formations, as: S\''U^cs^ jheraku, quarrelsome, from jv-v-^^ jhero, ^\'U^:^ jheraku, contention. SECTION I. THE FORMATION OF THEMES. 71 24) Themes in iko. This affix corresponds to the Sansk. affix ^ (in Sindhi with the addition of the union-vowel i) and forms adjectives, denoting relation, quality etc. A final vowel, short or long, is dropped before this affix; final u alone is shortened to 'u' and takes the union -vowel 'a' instead of 'i'; e. g. : ji^Ljf^ vapariko, mercantile, from xLIf: vaparu, trade. yGI^ vaniko, relating to a j^l^ vanyo or shopkeeper. ^Li hariko, relating to a (^^Li hari or peasant. yS^yjQ miruako, brutal, from ^^y^ miru, a wild beast. 25) Themes in ico or eco. These affixes have sprung from the Sansk. affix ^^, and form adjectives denoting descent or origin. In Sindhi 'i' has been lengthened to i or even to e, and the guttural k has been exchanged for the palatal c. The final vowel, short or long, is always cast ofi" before these affixes; e. g. : ^^^^f gotheco, of the same village, from ^}f go- thu, village. j.^*jLj par eco, of the same quarter, from ^'^Lj paro, quarter. j^.;^ pareco, of the opposite side, from ^U adv., op- posite. j-^^jj^ verhico, of the jungle, from ^yJ^ verhe, jungle. 26) Themes in oko. This affix, which is added only to nouns or ad- verbs, denoting time, is identical with the affix ^; the union-voWel o is peculiar and not to be met with else- where; every final vowel, short or long, is dropped be- fore it; e. g.: 72 SECTION I. THE FORMATION OF THEMES. ^}s^)^ varehoko, yearly, from J^s^ varehu, year. j.5j.jfr ratokd, nightly, from c^l^ rate, night. j.5j.iLi hanoko, recent, from ^iLS hane, now. adj. j.5j^JI^ kalhok5, of yester (day or night), from ^Jl5^ kalha, yesterday, adv. j.5j^j paroko, of last year, from wj (fem.) last year. A few other adjectives are formed by the same affix, with the further difference, that the root -vowel is lengthened, as: jfjsOJls^ candroko, moonlight, from ^JL^i. candru, moon. 27) Themes in ano (anu, ino), ahiko. This affix corresponds to the Sansk. affix ?[r?, and forms adjectives denoting relation or descent. It is remarkable, that the original union -vowel 'i' has been dislodged in Sindhi and a substituted in its place (com- pare with this such Latin forms, as: romanus, afri- canus). The adjectives, formed by the affix ano may moreover add the affix ko (with the union vowel 'i'), so that we thus have adjectives with a double affix, which do not materially differ from the simple forms in ano; e. g.: jiljj.£s. corano, ^.f V- _ -T - f of a thief, from sis. corn, thief. jXaKj-ss. coraniko, /"•• ' jili lucano, rascally, from ^ luco, rascal. jiU^t) dhiano, of a daughter, from ^^^^ dhia, daughter. ji byo miruano, of a wild beast, from ^^>f miru, wild beast. jiUL^ bhayano, of a partner, from ^SL^ bhai, partner. SECTION I. THE FORMATION OF THEMES. 73 In a few nouns a short root -vowel is lengthened, as: jil'^JoLi candrand ^j^CJoLi candranu, jJ>JoLi candrino, moonlight, from ^0 ,"1 cXxis heku, one. jj^-^j panjuno, quintuple, from "Xi panja, five. pyl, sauno, hundredfold, from ^Z^ sati, hundred. 1) Compare also the Persian iuli^ as: JuLS^O twofold etc. 74 SECTION I. THE FORMATION OF THEMES. 29) Themes in ani. This affix, corresponding to the Sansk. affix ^|^f^ forms patronymics or nouns denoting descent; the short final T of the Sansk. affix has been lengthened in Sindhi, as in other similar nouns. A final short vowel is dropped before this affix , likewise o ; final i is changed to y (= i) and u is shortened; e. g.: ^^\Sy^' mahmudani, son or descendant of c>yj^ mahmudu. ^iG^I aryani, son of ^s\ ari. ^b3f aduani, son of ^Sl adu. ^LT IS bagani, son of j.5^Lj bag5. 30) Themes in ino. This affix corresponds to the Sansk. affix ^^^ and forms adjectives denoting relation or descent; as: ^IXlI sanino, affianced, from iX^ sanu, connexion by marriage. )X^j vasino, subjected, from J.^, power. 31) Themes in atho. This affix coincides with the Sansk. affix ^fZ (with transition of t into th); it forms possessive nouns, as in Sanskrit; e. g.: j^'LoLj panyatho, damp (containing water), from ^Lj pani, water. ^^^(^s^ chabaratho, containing vl^^ chabaru, a kind of grass. 32) Themes in aso (asii). This affix, corresponding to the Sansk. affix ^, SECTION I. THE FORMATION OF THEMES. 75 forms adjectives, denoting ^'to be full of", to be pro- vided with"; as union -vowel a has been inserted; as: ^LjjI^ varyaso, sandy, from ^y^ van, sand. (j^lljo mavasu, full of pride, from ^i mau, pride. 33) Themes in haru or haro. This affix is in Sindhi and in the cognate dialects added to verbal nouns (i. e. the Infinitive); it forms a kind of participle, which is commonly used as a sub- stantive noun. In Mar at hi it forms the participle future, as it implies at the same time the notion of some future act or state; in Sindhi too it is now and then used in a future sense. It is to be noted though, that the Marathi affix is not "^T^, as commonly shown in Marathi grammars, but ^l\; a like mistake is generally to be met with in Gujarat! grammars, where it is stated to be «TrT.. In Marathi and Grujarati the form of the affix is clearly enough ^STR, corresponding to the Sansk. adjective ^TT., making, doing, with elision of ^. In Sindhi, Hindi and Panjabi it is har, which form is to be explained in this way, that initial ^ has been ori- ginally aspirated by the following ^ (which is very frequently the case in Sindhi), and then elided, leaving h (see In trod. §. 8). In Sindhi the form haru, haro, is only added to the Infinitive, in other themes the original form karu has been retained unaltered; e. g.: sL^^y^ sirjanaharu, the creator, In£ jj^^^Ca*/ to create. ^L^.^j likhanaharu, a writer, or one, who is about to write; Inf. J)4^ ^^ write. 34) Themes in karu, karu. The original adjective form karu (in Sindhi also shortened karu) is also (but rarely) in use; it forms ad- jectives and attributives from substantives; as union- vowel a is inserted: 76 SECTION I. THE FORMATION OF THEMES. ^^Ij-S^-T^ jterakaru, I quarrelsome, causing quarrel, 'Sfu^^:- jherakaru, | from j^^g^ jliero, quarrel. 35) Themes in vanu. The Sindhi has preserved in this affix the JSTom. Sing, of the Sansk. affix <=lr!^ (= van), and discarded the Prakrit form cpjf^; the same is the case in the cognate dialects, with the exception of the Grujarati, which uses the termination ^J{^ It forms adjectives, implying possession; e. g.: ^I^Lj5 dayavanu, compassionate, from LI5 daya, com- passion. J^ljLi^ vijavanu, learned, from ILy vija, learning. j^ly-^Aw silavanu, virtuous, from JkA-w silu, virtue. 36) Themes in vara This is one of the most useful affixes of the modern vernaculars; it may be joined to any verbal noun or substantive, and denotes an owner or actor; this affix is most extensively used in Hindustani (vala), where it is used as a substitute for different formations. It corresponds to the Sansk. affix '^^, from which it has been derived by lengthening the root-vowel. It is to be observed, that ^Jj must be joined to the formative or oblique case of a noun. j»Ul^ gharavaro, owner of a house, from 1^ gharu, house. jjlljlgi** gharanevaro, owner of houses. sJ^i5S dianavaro, a giver. Inf. ^^ dianu, to give. jJli* vicavaro, mediator, from ^^ vicu, midst. jslpj^ beriavaro, boatman, from ^^''LKi beri, boat. SECTION I. THE FORMATION OF THEMES. 77 37) Themes in yo. The affix yo, corresponding to the Sansk. affix ^, forms adjectives from substantives, as: y^fl^ bhagyo, fortunate, from iSL^ bhagu, fortune; luck. ^yf^ vikevikhyo, a grumbling person, from J^^ vikevike, grumbling. y^;y!::^ joyo, effeminate, from ^^ (^j\) joe, wife. Chapter IV. Formation of Diminutives. §. 11. The Sindhi evinces a great facility in forming dif- ferent kinds of Diminutives; it surpasses in this re- spect all the kindred dialects, being able to derive di- minutives from any substantive, adjective or even par- ticiple. The one method, to express the idea of a diminu- tive, is, to substitute the feminine termination for the masculine, the feminine expressing generally: small - ness, littleness, nicety, as: ^^ katu, m. a large knife, ^'l/ kati, fem. a small knife (cf. §. 5, YI, 2, c). An old diminutive formation has been preserved in a few straggling words, ending in otru (otro) or otu (oto) ; the same formation is still current in the Pasto (otai, utai), where diminutives are regularly derived by means of this affix. The origin of this diminutive affix is rather uncertain; e. g. Sindhi: ^IjifiG bahoti, a small fire, from .^cli bahe, fire; lj^x>La^ jamotru, the headman of a village (literally: a 78 SECTION I. THE FORMATION OF THEMES. little p»Li jamu or Jam, prince); ^j*L)^ diati, a small light, from j.jj dio, an oil -light. Besides these formations the Sindhi uses for the purpose of forming diminutives proper two affixes, which are originally identical; viz.: ero {= ro, the union- vowel T having been produced to e, on account of the accent), which is added to adjectives only, and ro, which is promiscuously joined to adjectives and sub- stantives. Both these affixes correspond to the Sanskrit diminutive affix T. r, from which the Sindhi, after its own peculiar method, has menaged to form two separate diminutive affixes. The other diminutive affix of the Sanskrit, ^ k, is not in use in Sindhi, but is so in Hindi, Marathi and Panjabi. 1) The affix ero. This deminutive affix is, as noted already, added to adjectives only and implies: somewhat more or less (as the case may be), rather, very; e. g.: ^yf^^i> drighero, somewhat long, adj. j-g-O drigho, long. jyjs^ thorero, rather little, adj. }\y^ thoro, little. j^AJc^f ghat ero, rather deficient, adj. ^a^ ghate, deficient. 2) The termination ro, fem. ri. This diminutive affix is joined to substantives and adjectives, even to such, as have already received the affix ero; it denotes small n ess, littleness, deficiency, tenderness or contempt. In order to point out more effectually the idea of the diminutive, the feminine ter- mination ri may be chosen, instead of the masculine. The Sindhi poets use the diminutives with great taste and delicacy, and know to give different shades to their pictures by their proper application. The final vowels SECTION I. THE FORMATION OF THEMES. 79 undergo the following changes before the addition of the affix ro (ri): 1) Final u (m.) is changed to V or T, with the ex- ception of fern, nouns ending in V, wich remain unaltered. 2) In the same way final o is changed to 'a' or T. 3) Final 'a' remains unaltered. 4) Final 'i' remains unaltered or passes (for euphony's sake) into 'a'. 5) Final i and u are shortened with a subsounding 'a' (as union-vowel). Final V. j^ jJJ pandharo , a short journey, from ^ jJl pandhu, journey. ^'-j^ hatiri, a small shop, from vivi hatu, shop. j^jJi^ jinduro, short life, from jJ:^* jindu, life, fem. (5^4^ vijuri, a small flash of lightening, from '^ viju, fem., lightening. Final 5. s-IaJL^ hiar5 heart (endearing), from ^Xxsi> hio, heart. j^j.^ bholiro, a small monkey, from j-ij-^ bhol5, monkey. yj)}4^ th5riro, | very little, from j ^^- thoro, little. ^jyjsy^ thoreriro, | extremely little. Final V. ^^^j> dhiari, a little daughter, from ^j> dhia, daughter. Final Y. (^L^l akhiri, a small eye, from ^1 akhe, eye. (5^Lr galhari, a short word, from .^il? galhe, word. 80 SECTION I. THE FORMATION OF THEMES. Final i and u. yu^i)jJo mandhiaro, a small churning staff, from ^j^jJx? mandhi, a churning staff. bhatuari, a small scorpion, from yX^ bhatu, a scorpion. Chapter V. Compound nouns. §• 12. I. Nouns compounded with a preceding particle. 1) Nouns compounded with the negative par- ticles a, ana, na, nir, ni, ma. All these negative particles are of Sanskrit origin and used in the same way and in the same sense, as in the Sanskrit. The negative particle 'a' is only used with adjectives, ana chiefly with participles and Gerundives, rarely with adjectives; na with adjectives, and the shor- tened form n"a with Gerundives and participial adjectives; nir and ni (with assimilated r), only with adjectives (and abstracts, derived from adjectives). We have not mentioned expressly the negative particle dur (^), which belongs to the same class, as it occurs in such formations only, as are borrowed directly from the Sanskrit and have already passed through the process of assimilation, usual in Sindhi, as: Jfe'^ dukalu, famine, Sansk. "^"^T^ (see Introd. §. 16, B). For the sake of a general survey we have summed up here all the negative prefixes, though the nouns compounded with them belong to the subsequent classes of compounds, as far as their com- position is concerned. SECTION I. THE FORMATION OF THEMES. 81 Prefix a: ou^^l acetu, thoughtless; thence. ..... ^Ua£!^I acetai, ^Awyi^l aceti. thoughtlessness. Prefix ana: yl^xJi] anathiano, impossible. j.^.^1 anapucho, unasked. jjsLIoJI anavesaho, unbelieving. ^^L^j^t anavesahi, s. £, unbelief. Prefix na: j;l^LS nakaro, useless. jXliLj nacano, unwell. ^jLxIilS nacanai, illness. Prefix na: j-Ix^I nathiano, impossible. ^Alg^ nathiani, impossibility. yX^S nakhatu, profitless. Prefix ma: ^iX^ machadu, not giving up. •.iL^jCc makhatu, profitless. Prefix nir and ni: ^^5^^ nir-dal, unfeeling, Sansk. M^lf. JLO nir-asu, hopeless, Sansk. frT^T^. j.XlSjG ni-dhaniko, masterless ( Ait^). j^xxj ni-putro, sonless (Ijcj). 2) Nouns compounded with the privative particles re, without, and be, without. The privative particle re, which is also used as a preposition, and as such always requires the For- mative (oblique case), is derived from the Sanskrit pre- Trumpp, Sindhi-Grrammar. F 82 SECTION I. THE FORMATION OF THEMES. position ^rT (Prakrit f^Jf = ft'J^ ^^^ contracted ^ re) without, excepted; be is borrowed from the Persian and corresponds originally to the Sansk. prefix f%. These prefixes are in Arabic writing generally written separately and not joined to the noun, as: re: s.^.^ (5> re-kamo, useless. iAjU ^s re-panyo, waterless. i^i ^^ re-cayo, untractable. be: j.4^;l ^ be-sagh5, powerless. j^<> ^j be-din5, irreligious. s.i ,-j be-lajo, shameless. 3) Nouns compounded with the particles of qua- lification su, well, ku, badly, and ava (au), away, from. su: JLCw sukalu, good time = cheapness. owj^ sucetu, attentive. ^wjjl supri, good friend = sweetheart. ku: ciJ^J kupate, dishonesty. yj^£S kupatyo, dishonest. ^l/jy kuniyau , bad justice = oppression. jXliiXr kudhang5, ill-bred, ava (au): J/5I avagunu 1 ^.^^^ Jji^^T augunu, j y^ -'la bad landing place. h^\ autaru, j 4) Nouns compounded with the possessive particle sa (shortened from the Sansk ^5), implying "with", "provided with". j-JL^x^ saphalo, fruitful. SECTION I. THE FORMATION OF THEMES. 83 j^s».j.A-l sabojlio, intelligent. jw^ll saputro, having a son. II. Nouns compounded with a substantive, adjective or numeral. The Sindhi generally follows in the formation of its compound nouns the rules of the Sanskrit, though the compounds cannot be formed in Sindhi in the same un- limited number, as in Sanskrit, the want of case-in- flexions offering an essential obstacle. No compound can be formed from more than two nouns, a noun com- pounded of three words is a linguistic impossibility in Sindhi, as in such a compound all idea of coor- dination or subordination would be completely lost. We shall consider the compounds current in Sindhi under the received Sanskrit appellations. 1) So-called Tatpurusa compounds, or conjunction of two nouns, of which the former stands in a case- relation with the latter. These compounds are rarely used in common con- versation, but more extensively in poetical compositions* The former of the two nouns, which is dependent on the latter, must consequently be placed in the For- mative, to express thereby its grammatical dependency. In reference to the method of writing these compounds there is no fixed rule; some of them, in which the idea of unity prevails so much, that they are considered as one word, are joined in writing accordingly; others again, in which the conjunction is more loose, are written separately; e. g.: ^Ij ^j| utara-vau, north-wind. ^A^J y^ ghara-dhani, master of the house. p^^ ^j^ mathe-khau, torturer, literally: eating one's head. F2 84 SECTION I. THE FORMATION OF THEMES. j.JLXi (jl>.j<3 desa nikalo, banishinent. ^Sy.^ jjl5" karane-trutro ; a lazy fellow; literally: broken of hands. jl^ J^U pana bharti, selfish; literally: filling oneself A peculiar kind of compound is formed by an ad- jective joined to a substantive, which by the addition of the affix varo (see §. 10, 3, b) is turned again into a possessive noun; the adjective must in this case agree with its substantive in gender, number and case. Such compounds are, as far as their signification is concerned, Bahuvrihis, but according to their composition Tat- purusas; for the latter reason we have inserted them in this place; as: jxl^^.j J ^Aj bie desavaro, a foreigner (a man of another country). ^'^SySjM (5"^* tikhia-surtevaro , a man of sharp under- standing. jJ^4^ C5^^ ^^^^ pahavaro, a man of good counsel. More poetical are compounds like: bi3 Jt> ^i^ vadia dile data, a munificent giver (a giver of a great heart). 2) So-called Dvandvas, or aggregation of nouns. In the sense of the Sanskrit Grammar there are no Dvandvas in Sindhi. Two nouns are frequently joined in Sindhi, expressing one common idea, but gramma- tically they are treated as two separate words. In Sindhi, as well as in the other cognate dialects, two nouns are frequently joined together, of which the latter is without a proper meaning, and only added to render the sound more full; these compounds are called alli- terations. SECTION I. THE FORMATION OF THEMES. 85 i^j ^^j vathu puju, f. , hurry; literally: taking {^^) arriving (li). jJL^j 3^^ cano bhalo, very good; very well. v£.-l vE^ mata sata, exchange (^jo and ^^L, both sig- nifying exchange). ^j>: ^^f ghate vadhe, less or more. ^j ^4^ jhuru phuru, rainy weather (Lg^ cloudiness; ^j^^lo ' f aju subaha, in a day or two; literally: to- day, to-morrow. (Xi JCj baka saka, prattle; jG talking, chatting, cX^ being a meaningless alliteration. But more frequently than by aggregation the Sin- dhi joins two nouns by inserting the Persian copula o (frequently nasalized = 6) ; the final vowel of the pre- ceding noun is dropped before it and both words are joined into one and written accordingly; in some in- stances though the final vowel of the preceding noun keeps its place before o. These compounds are Dvandvas in a grammatical sense, only the latter noun being subject to the laws of inflexion. .^jii'ir ratodihu, night and day. ^s^dsl^^s^iXli handhohandhu , every place. ^')i^^; ^ate-o-rate, every night; night by night. wjj J paropare, kind by kind = every kind. The conjunction may also be effected by the Per- sian copulative particle a, in the same way as by o; this a too is very frequently nasalized in Sindhi = a; the final vowel of the preceding word always disappears before a or a; as: 86 SECTION I. THE FORMATION OF THEMES. ^^^^l^x) mukliamnklii , meeting; literally: tete-a-tete. j-^jyoL^Xxj mukhamelo J assembly; literally: face and meeting. Z^ylCj^ veravera, adv., always; literally: time and time. fy,). 3) So-called Karmadharayas, or descriptive com- pounds. The Sindhi is now too simple, to admit of new com- pounds of this kind; the common rule is, as in the other dialects, that the adjective precedes its substantive and agrees with the same in gender, number and case. Some remnants however of original Karmadharaya com- pounds have been preserved in Sindhi, and what is still more remarkable, the Sindhi has formed some similar compounds out of its own resources, in which the ad- jective is joined to the substantive in its original (else not occurring) crude state. It is to be noted, that all compounds of this description are written in one word; e. g.: j^^L^S mahajanu, a great merchant, Sansk. *t^T^H. ^) "^ ^^ ' I a great prince. > .- j^K-^ maharaju, J y^l^'ij vadakhati, a glutton (great eater). j-4^"i^ ghanaghuro, well-wishing. ly^^A mathaghuro, ill- wishing. ^-gjjUoo paramarthu, benevolence. Jj.J"j paraloku, the other world. 4) So-called Dvigus, or collective compounds. This class of compounds, which is formed by a pre- ceding numeral, is in frequent use in Sindhi; e. g.: SECTION I. THE FORMATION OF THEMES. 87 ^y-^ bipahari, midday; compounded of ^ bi, two and (5>4^, a watch of three hours. 'L^ bihare, a ]3air of water wheels. j-wLili caumaso, a space of four months = the rainy season. ji'l^^i cauvatd, a place, where four roads meet; li- terally: having four roads. ^jUAw^rdo panjasnani, washing of the five parts of the body (= head, two hands, two feet). ^^JC^Xi barahamasi, a year = a twelvemonth. 5) The so-called Bahuvrihis, or relative com- pounds. This class of compounds, denoting posssession or relation, which again comprises all the four preceding classes, by changing them into adjectives, is still very numerous in Sindhi; for either original Bahuvrihi com- pounds are borrowed directly from the Sanskrit, or new compounds are formed according to the same principles, which are laid down in Sanskrit. The final noun re- ceives generally the adjectival affix o (see §. 10; 14); in such compounds, as are taken directly from the Per- sian, the final noun may remain unchanged, its relative signification having been fixed already in Persian. a) Bahuvrihi formations from Tatpurusa compounds. y^sy^s rata-varano, having the colour of blood. ^ yj^4^jji matha-miiho, haughty; from .^jc top, and .^ (= j^kjii) mouth. ^4j\Uaj petarthi, glutton; from o^^j petu, belly, and " ^ i \ ^^'^s\ arthi, having an object; having the belly for one's object. 88 SECTION I. THE FORMATION OF THEMES. h) Bahuvrihi formations from Karmadharaya compounds. jit^o^ vadavato, loquacious; literally: having a big mouth. j-^I^f ghana-bijo, having much seed. j.x)l>^^j..^* th5ra-veram5 , having little delay = quick, JtXiL.o safu-dile, having a pure heart; Pers. JU^^^ /us-xialu, joyful; Pers. c) Bahuvrihi formations from Dvigu compounds. 3.0^ caudaro, having four doors. ^X^j bimano, containing two maunds. ysii\^xi\\^ barahamaho , yearly = containing twelve months. d) Bahuvrihi formations from such compounds, as are preceded by an adverb or prefix. j-wXaIw saputr5, having a son. o^A^ sucetu, attentive. kumaty5, dishonest. Chapter VI. Gender of nouns. §. 13. It has been stated already, that the Sindhi has lost the Neuter, most of the original neuter nouns having assumed a masculine, a less number the feminine ter- mination. The gender of a Sindhi noun is easily re- cognizable, as every noun must end in a vowel; some SECTION I. THE FORIMATION OF THE]\IES. 89 terminations admit of no exceptions, others are common to both masculine and feminine nouns. The termination o is masculine without any ex- ception; the termination a is feminine without any ex- ception; all the other terminations contain more or less exceptions. 1) The termination V. The termination \\ is, according to its origin, ge- nerally masculine; but as original Sanskrit -Prakrit themes, ending in \i and being of the feminine gender, have been mixed up with it. a number of nouns have retained the feminine gender. In some of them an ori- ginal feminine termination has been dropped and 'u' sub- stituted in its place, whereas the gender of the noun has been preserved; in others again no reason can be detected, why they have been treated as feminines in Sindhi, the masculine gender having been retained in the cognate dialects; some few of them are of unknown origin, on which we cannot venture any conjecture. As a general rule we may state, that, abstracted from the termination, all nouns are feminine, which imply a female being, as: iUo mau, mother; ^c> dhiu, daughter; .^^ nuhu, daughter-in-law; Jw«l sasu, mother- in-law; 1^;-^ bhenu. sister; ^^^c> dhenu, milk -cow; ^JyJ dhia, ^j nuha, bhena. The following is a list of nouns ending in 'u', which are feminine: '1 aju, f., to-day; Sansk. ^T^T, adv., Hindi ^^, adv. ^1 ansu, £, offspring; Sansk. ^"SJ, m.; Hindi ^^, m. (Xsi angu, or: -^i anghu, f. , a rent, tear; origin unknown. 90 SECTION I. THE FORMATION OF THEMES. tjT au , £ , slimy excrement , origin unknown. lis baburu , f. , the acacia tree ; Sansk. "^"^^j m. Hindi ^12 barkhu, £, shortened from o^^S^Ij barkhata, bles- sing (Arab. o^^Ij; in Sindhi k has been aspirated by the influence of r) pronounced as a good omen in beginning to count = one. 4XL bindu, f. , semen virile; Sansk. t^'^, m., Hindi J«.4j bhasu, £, ashes; Sansk. ^^H, n.; Hindi HH, m. Ij paru, £5 last year; Sansk. Ht*rt^, adv. •5^^ priina-u, £, the day of the full moon; also ^^^ puna-e; Sansk. "R"^^, n. jjTLS' taku, £, a leathern vessel; origin unknown. jaS tandu, £, thread, wire; Sansk. rT^H, m.; Hindi w^* tharu, £, cream; origin unknown. A^ thanu, £, woman's milk; Sansk. tuiiH, m.; Hindi JTo' traku, £, the spindle of a spinning wheel; Sansk. ff^; in Sindhi r has been pushed forward, to keep its place the more easily in conjunction with the cerebral; see Introd. §. 15, B, a. 1^ Jaru, £, leech, afterbirth. Two words have been apparently melted into one. ^^ leech, corresponds to the Hindustani y]\ zalu (properly Persian), which has sprung from the Sanskrit ^|^ch|; the final syl*- lable ka has, as elsewhere, been cast off, but the original gender retained. ^^ afterbirth, has been SECTION I. THE FORMATION OF THEMES. 91 shortened from the Sansk. ^U^, ra., HindListani ^A^ jer (Greek: Y'^pa^). In Hindiistani the gender of w^ seems to be doubtful, for Shakespear is silent about it; in Hindi it is considered mascuHne (Thompson, Hindi Dictionary). JUri- jindu, f., life; borrowed from the Panjabi, where it is likewise fem. ^i Ja-u, £, sealing-wax; origin unknown. NL^5'^:i jaukharu, f., a salt, used in medicine; com- pounded of ^i barley, and >L^5^5 which see. Jl§.^ jhilu , f. , name of a plant (Indigofera pauciflora) ; origin unknown. J^ cupu, f., or: L^, Sansk. "^JT.. J^g^ chilu, £, bark, peel; Sansk. "3Cf^ or ^^T5 the original fem. termination i (I) has been lost in this noun, but the gender retained; besides J- ^-_^ the form d^:^ is also in use. yfj^ cizu, £, thing; taken from the Hindustani (Per- sian) where it is fem. ^[io dhatu, £, root; metal. Sansk. VIU, m.; Hindi m?!^ or ^TrT, m., but used as fem. in the sense of semen virile. js^o'i dadhu, £, ringworm; Sansk. '^'5, m.; Hindi ^T^, m. 92 SECTION I. THE FORMATION OF THEMES. r^^ sara-Uj fern., autumn, Sansk. "^^5 fern., Hindi ^SfJ^, fern. JuiXlxL sugandhu, f. (occasionally also masc), perfume, Sansk. ^n*^? ni., Hindi ^Ip^ , m. jQdslMj sindhu, £, the country of Sindh; tlie Indus; Sansk. f^pg, m.; Hindi 'ftpi or "ftpg, m. vLr katu, £, rust (occasionally also m.); origin unknown. fj^ kasu, £, verdigris; origin unknown. [L^ kharu, f, potash; Sansk. "^^j m., n.; Hindi ^T, m. '-L^ kharu, f (also masc), oil -cake, Hindi ^13<^, f, Sansk. 1^^, n. ^4X14^ khandru, £, sugar, Sansk. <5t £, marrow; Sansk. +1^1, Hindi ^WT, £ ajo minu, C^ i J^-Lo mailu, £, dirt; see Ijc, with which it is identical. SECTION I. THE FORMATION OF THEMES. 93 Ij nimu, f., the nimb tree; Sansk. M*-^<^, m.; Hindi q^ or ^t^, m. ' ^ Y ^ ^ nahatharu, £, whitlow, from ^ nahu, nail and L^*, which see. ^jj vathu, £, tiling; Sansk. «fW, n.; Hindi £, world; Sansk. f^T^fH, m. ; Hindi f^m^ , m. J^y visu, ^^ vasa-u, £, a cultivated ]3lace; Sansk. root: cfr^d, provided with rain (and therefore cultivated). £, poison; Sansk. f^"^, n. ; Hindi f^^ or f^l^, m. ^^ vikhu .5^^ ^dhu ? : ^^ vansu, £, lineage; Sansk. "^"SJ, m. ; Hindi " hiiidu, £, India; originally an Arabic-Persian word, derived from the province nearest to the Persians, i. e. f^p^ (by change of s into h); Hindustani: jJ^, m. JCl^ hihu, £, assa foetida; Sansk. f^^, m.; Hindi f|rj^ or f^Tj^ or f|^, m. Under this head we must class all the imitative sounds, which end in V, and which are considered fe- 94 SECTION I. THE FORMATION OF THEMES. mi nines, because their final V is not subject to in- flexion; the same may be stated of some Dvandvas, which consist properly of two Imperatives, ending in 'u', and which are likewise treated as feminines, being exempt from the laws of inflexion. Ji^ ^\ acu vanu, £, coming going (Imper.). y^^ y4^ jhau jhau, £, grumbling (imitative sound). ,„^ .js^ ca-u, ca-u, i. , , ,, . ,^ . > - -J^ ' ( ^alkmg (Imper.). d>5 ^ ca-u, vatu, f., J ^' "yj^ tau tau, £, gabbling (imitative sound). IJ ^*^ vathu puju, £, hurry (Imper.). ^ etc. etc. etc. 2) The termination u. The termination u is generally masculine; there are however some exceptions, the gender of which is regulated either by original Sanskrit usage, or by the practice of the cognate dialects. The imitative sounds, ending in u or u, are all treated, on account of their inflexibility, as feminine. Such exceptions are: ^^1 abirti, £ (also: ^jol abirue), honour; Hindustani "^^^T, £ (Pers.) ^^Ajl au, £, pride, egotism; identical with the I. per- sonal pronoun of the Sing. J (Panjabi: hau, £). ^4? ^^^5 f-j earth (also: ^^j bhue); Sansk. W[^, £ •^j tarti, £, a fine cord of camel's hair (root: ^Ji^ to pass through). ^ys> ju, £, louse (also: J^ ju^a); Hindi ^, £, Sansk. ^^, f. yjyd^^ camaju, £, a kind of louse, adhering to the skin ((^). SECTION I. THE FORIMATION OF THEMES. 95 '. (J 55 ^"f^ ^^^' ^'^ imitative sound; the hum of a spinning wheel. SS ku-ku, f. , imitative sound, by which a dog is called. yjjf gau, f., cow; the same as ^^yS. ^J lu, £, small hair on the limbs (also: ^ lua); Sansk. ^fT^' ^^-^ Hindi ^T^, m. yD^ vahu, f., daughter-in-law; Sansk. "^f^, Hindi '^^. 3) The termination a. The termination a comprises, according to its origin, as we have seen, mostly feminine nouns; there are however a few masculine nouns, ending in a, the gender of which is, in most cases, already fixed by the signification of the noun itself, or by the language, from which the noun in question is taken; such ex- ceptions are: Lil^ raja, prince; Sansk. JSTom. TT^, m. S"^ lala, master; lord; Hindi ^T^T. [jS karta, the agent (in grammar) ; Sansk. Xom. ^^L Uj-| atma, soul; Sansk Xom. ^JifrHl, m. L^i^Lc ma/jilia, melancholy. Arab.: Hindustani, masc. b^i clevata. Deity; Hindi ^"^TTT, f; Sanski-it 4) The termination i. The termination i is, as stated already, divided between masculine and feminine nouns, yet so, that the feminine prevail considerably in number. All nouns denoting a male being (man or beast) are of course masculine, whereas nouns, denoting a female being, inanimate objects or abstract qualities are femi- 96 SECTION I. THE FORMATION OF THEMES. nine; contrary to this general rule the following nouns are masculine: (^wa;I asiri, a large kind of tamarisk tree. ^^tXjG bandhi, a log of wood floating in the river. ^i\lj bundi, the muzzle of a gun -barrel. ,^^^j bhacatij name of a plant (Desmochaeta lap- pacea). ^^LS paki, razor (by the Hindus used as fem.) ^Lj pani, water. ^.^Jo pakhi, bird. (^jL.^j thudi, the lower stalk of a plant. ^o* tiki, a cake. ^.^£s^ chathi, a religious ceremony, performed on the sixth day after childbirth. ^^c> dogi, a thick stick. ^•i^j> dhari, a coloured edge to a cloth. .^jCIS^II/ surjamukhi, sunflower. ^jLd kundali, horoscope. j^nL.^ ghari, a stripe left unfinished. ^i^ gliiti? ^ lane, alley. (^o^ ladi, the ropes of a boat. ^SIJq mustari, the planet Jupiter. ^5BjLl^ mundhi, head. 3J.X) moti, pearl. ^^1; vangi, a stick with ropes hanging from it, to carry water pots, etc. SECTION I. THE FORMATION OF THEMES. 97 5) The termination i (e). The termination 'i' (e) is, with that of a, the regular feminine ending in Sindhi. There are however a few mascuHne nouns, ending in 'i', which are mostly borrowed from foreign languages. As in conformity with the Sindhi laws of sound no word can end in a silent consonant, the quick and hardly perceptible sound 'i^ (e) has been added to some words, which end originally in a silent consonant, to render them susceptible of inflexion; to some foreign nouns too, which end in a, the short vowel T has been added, for euphony's sake, which however may interchange with 'u' in some cases. i\lL] ahmade, Nom. prop. &]0hsQi>\ adho-adhe, half-sharer = having half and half. Chapter VII. Formation of the Feminine from masculine bases. §. 14. The formation of the feminine from masc. nouns agrees in the main with Sanskrit and Prakrit usage. In some instances feminine derivatives have been taken directly from the Sanskrit or Prakrit, subject, of course, to the peculiar assimilating process of the Sindhi, as; ^iC rani, queen, Sansk. TJ^ (see: Introd. §. 14, b.). Such like formations we shall pass by in the following remarks and only attend to the laws still current in Sindhi. The Sindhi possesses in some cases separate words, to express the idea of the feminine, so that the process of deriving the feminine from the masc. base is super- seded. These instances however are restricted to nouns, implying relationship, and the names of the com- monest domestic animals, where the language has preferred to create separate words, instead of deriving them from the corresponding masc. base; as: J^^wygo bhena, sister; iL^j bhau, brother. ^o dhia, or ^o dhiu, yXj putru, son. daughter; i^Uo mau, mother; ^^ piu, father. ys^ vahu, daughter-in-law; jvJ'L^ ]^^^i son-in-law. ^£s.f<3 daci, a female camel; j..§.flo dagho, a male camel. SECTION I. THE FORMATION OF THEMES. 99 i> yS ga-u, cow; tX^li dandu, ox. ^.^Jjyo mehe, a female buf- ^H sanu, a male buffalo. falo ; From other masc. bases the Sindhi forms regularly a feminine, as far as this is admissible; some nouns are only extant in the feminine, the masculine being out of place or having disappeared from the language. 1) Formation of the Feminine from masc. nouns in V. From substantives ending in V the Sindhi forms the Feminine by changing 'u' into i or i (e); with ad- jectives the termination 'i' (e) or V may be optionally used. In the case of the substantives the use of the ter- mination i or 'i' (e) is more or less optional , but in some of them one or the other is preferred. ^ySj.^ chokari, S}^ chokare, ^Sf gaclahe, jenny-ass, from .s^Sf gadahu, jack-ass. ^J> parte, washerwoman, from ^yl partu, washerman. "yf',^^ dhira or yfj^c> dhire, firm, from v-v?o dhiru, adj. m. Besides this common formation of the feminine another method of forming the same by means of the affixes ni, ni, ani, aini, is in use, which are however only added to nouns denoting human beings , castes, occupations etc. very rarely to names of animals or to adjectives. All these affixes correspond to the Sansk. affix ^IX'fl' (z= ;^, see Bopp, Compar. Grram. §. 840), as: ^J^T^jft the wife of Indra etc. In Sindhi the original affix ani (with change of the dental to the cerebral) has either been preserved, or a (see Bopp sub loco) has again LofC. ^2 girl, from S}-^ chokaru, boy. 100 SECTION I. THE FORMATION OF THEMES. been cast out, and only ni (ne) added. All these affixes are joined to the feminine termination (i, seldom to a), as: j^i Jatine, ^^i jatini, ^Uici Jaty-ani, ^^Lf gahine, ^Ll^LT gahyanij the wife of a Jat. a female singer; masc. not in use. ^iLss^jwi^) barocani, the wife (or female) of a _.jJ or Beluch. ^^)^^^ sihane, lioness, from -4^a^ sihu, lion. (j^j^4^ chutine. "^ swift, from vi>^4^ chtitu, adj. m. .aJ^^cs. chutini, ^iL-0^9. chutyani. 2) Formation of the Feminine from masculine nouns in o. From masc. nouns ending in o the feminine is formed by changing 5 into 1, as: {S)}^r^ chori, a female orphan, from 3;j.-g.9^ ch5ro, orphan, m. ^j.f golT, a slave-girl, from j.Jj.f golo, a slave m. Besides this feminine termination the affixes ni, ni, ani, aini are also in use with nouns denoting caste, trade or occupation, as: ^^^aJ langhine. ^-l^^J langhini, ^Ll§^ langhyani, j^Ll^^j langhyaine, the wife (or female) of a j.^^3 langho or drummer (by caste). 1) After a Palatal sl^ort i is frequently cast out. SECTION I. THE FORMATION OF THEME; 101 3) Formation of the Feminine from masculine nouns in u. Masc. nouns ending in u form the feminine by the affixes 111 or ni. with the union-vowel i. by which final 11 is dislodged: hnal u may also be shortened to *u'\ which serves at the same time as union-vowel, e. o-.-. (^ iXisi hindini. ^Jujc hindine the wife (or female) of a .cxLs. Hindu or: ^tXl$& hinduni ^cX-i^ hindune The affixes aiii or aiiii are also in use, before the addition of which final Ti is alwavs shortened to hi*, as: t5^ iCjU5i hindu-ani ^j\ZiXLsi^ hindu-aine a Hindu female. 4) Formation of the Feminine from masculine nouns in i and i. From masc. nouns ending in i and 'i' (ei the fe- minine is formed by nitans of the affixes ni, ni or am; final i is shortened to 'i\ and serves thus as union- vowel: as: «^> if korini. ^,^3^ korine, ,-ilosi5^ korvani. the wife (^female) of a ^s}f kori, weaver. vS^H"^*^ sethini . ^, ^'a;^^ sethine. sethvaiii the vife ( female) of a -§iU-w sethe. a Hindu wholesale merchant. Xote. The coo'nate dialects form the feminine from masc. nouns in the same ^\'av as the Sindhi. bv chanoina' either the 102 SECTION I. THE FORMATION OF THEMES. masc. termination to the feminine, or by adding one of the above-mentioned fern, affixes. The Hindi and Hindustani approach the Sindhi very closely in this respect; they form the feminine either by sub- stituting the feminine termination i, as: i^V larki, girl, from l^jJ larka, boy, ^ii^il^ brahmani, the wife (or female) of a Brahman, from j^^JsLj brahman; or by adding one of the af- fixes an, in, ani, to the masc. base, as: ,j>Um/ sunaran (or sunarin), the wife of a sLk^ sunar, goldsmith; ^v^-^ serm, a lioness, from vA^ ser, a lion; ^^^\yX^ mehtarani, the wife (daughter) of a mehtar, or sweeper. The same law holds good in Gujarati; either the feminine termination I is substituted for the masculine, as: ^fTtj ^ ^^" male dog, from ^rT^ ^ male dog, or the feminine affixes "^"^ TJr or ^I^in ^^® added to the masc. base, as: "^"^IH a tigress, from Gn"^ tiger; ^Z'^CtT? ^ female camel, from ^^ a male camel; lf|iy'^|ijj| mistress, from IHlft ^o^^* The formation of the feminine is quite analogous in the Panjabi; for the masc. termination is either changed to the fe- minine, as: ghori, a mare, from ghora, a stallion, or the fe- minine affixes an, ni, ani are added to the masc. base, as: uskajan, a slanderous woman, from uska]T, a slanderous man; utni, a female camel, from ut, a male camel; mu gal ani, the wife (or daughter) of a mugal. The MarathT forms the feminine from nouns in 'a' (quies- cent) or a by substituting the fern, termination I, as: l^'T^T girl, from ^TT^T boy; HT^fX? ^ slave-girl, from (^^ a slave; in nouns ending in 'a', the Sansk. fern, termination a is occa- sionally to be met with, as: ^^T or ^tTT^T ^^^ ^^^^ of ^ ^^* Besides these two fem. terminations the affix in or In is to be found in nouns ending in 'a' (quiescent) or I, as: ^T^H^ •> tigress, from «rT^? tiger, XflXfyTTT a sinful woman, from XIXmT ^ sinner; \I^?fX^ mistress, from \Irff master. SECTION I. THE FORMATION OF THEMES. 103 The Bang all stands nearest to the Sanskrit with regard to the formation of the feminine; it substitutes the fem. ter- minations a or I for those of the mascuhne, as: tanya, daughter, from tanya, son; puttrl, daughter, from puttra, son. Ad- jectives or nouns of agency, ending in ka ('a^ being quiescent) form their feminine always in ka, as: karika, doing, from karak, m., gayaka, a female singer, from gayak, a male singer. Nouns in i (= in) form their feminine by the affix ni, as: hattini, a female elephant, from hatti, a male elephant; likewise patni, mistress, from pati, master. Also the use of the affix ani or ani is strictly in accordance with Sanskrit practice, as: acaryaiiT, the wife of an acarya. We find thus, that all the north-Indian vernaculars of San- skrit origin fully agree in the formation of the feminine. 104 SECTION 11. THE INFLEXION OF NOUNS. SECTION II. THE INFLEXION OF NOUNS. Chapter VHI. I. Formation of the Plural. §• 15. The crude form of a Sindhi noun is always iden- tical with its JSTominative Singular, the Nominative Singular having no longer a case-sign in any of the modern Arian tongues. The Sindhi possesses no definite or indefinite article, as little as the Sanskrit or the Prakrit; if the one or the other is to be expressed for distinctness' sake, a demonstrative or indefinite pronoun (or the numeral "one") is placed before a noun. There is no longer a Dual in Sindhi, neither in Pali nor Prakrit, nor in any of the modern Sanskritical tongues; we have therefore only to describe the formation of the Plural (JS'omina- tive), according to the respective terminations of nouns. 1) InTouhs ending in u. Nouns ending in ii are, as we have stated already, for the greatest part masculine, a few of them only being feminine. According to their respective gender the Plural is formed, as follows: a) Plural of masculine nouns ending in u: These nouns form their Plural by changing u into a, as: .i^«^ khtihu, a well, Plur. .iy^f khuha, wells; [z varu, husband, Plur. T: vara. If final \i' be preceded by short V, a euphonic v is inserted in the Plural, as: .r ra-u, weed, Plur. iC rava, weeds. But if final V be SECTION IL THE INFLEXION OF NOUNS. 105 jDreceded by any other vowel, but short 'a', the insertion of V is optional, as: ^L^ ghau, a wound, Plur. "Xj^ ghava or: ^Lg/ ghaa, wounds; ^jS deu, a god, Plur. Iji deva or: LS clea, gods; but when a long vowel, preceding final u, is nasalized, the insertion of v be- comes necessary, as: ^Lgo than, a dish, Plur. l^L^' thava, dishes. The following two nouns form their ISfom. Plural in an irregular way: iL^j bhau, brother, Plur. ZjL^ bhaura or: y^2 bhauru^ brothers. ^j piu, father, Plur. iL piura, fathers. Both these Plurals point back to the Prakrit forms ^T^n (Nom. Sing. ^T^) and fxi^^J (j^om. Sing. flf^^), and are therefore, properly speaking, not ir- regular (c£ Yarar. V, 35). Annotation. We have already noticed (§. 5, I.), that the Sindhl termination u is shortened from the Prakrit ^| ; in Pra- krit nouns ending in o form their Plural in a, which has been shortened in Sindhi to a. The cognate idioms agree with the Sindhi in this respect. In Hindi and Hindustani, this class of nouns, having already dropped the terminating short vowel in the Singular, throw the same off in the Plural likewise, i. e. they remain unaltered in the Plural. The same is the case in Marathi and PanjabI; the Gujarati alone adds the Plural termination o. &) Plural of feminine nouns ending in ii. These nouns form their Plural by changing final u into u, as: ..^*^ vathu, a thing; Plur. ^^4->5 vathu, things; ^ viju, lightening; Plur. ^y^% ^y^? lightenings. The following nouns have, besides their regular Plural , also an irregular one , as : 106 SECTION II. THE INFLEXION OF NOUNS. 0MV4J bhenu, sister (or: (^^.a^j bhena); Plur. ^Jj^ bhenu or: vi-^^j bhenaru, ^^^-aa^j blienaru, sisters. iU mau, mother; Plur. ^^Uo mau, or: wjU mairu, ^j^^SLo mairu, mothers. ^t> dhiu (or: Jj&t> dhia), daughter; Plur. ^y^i^ dhiu, or: >.^i3>j dhiaru, ,j^5.%t> dhiaru, daughters. ..^j nuhu (or: ^j nuha), daughter-in-law; Plur. ^^^ nuhu or: ^^3 nuharu, \j^y^ nuharu, daughters- in-law. In the levelling process of decomposition these fern, nouns have adopted the same affix ara (or for euphony's sake: ira), as the irregular Plurals of masc, nouns, and as feminines they have lengthened the same also to aru. Annotation, In Pali fern, nouns ending in 'u' remain either unchanged in the Plural, as: yagu, sacrifice, Plur. yagu, or o (the Sansk. Plural affix ^H ) is added to them (with inserted euphonic 'y') as: yaguyo; the latter is also the case in Prakrit, as: bahu, wife, Plur. bahuo, or the affix 6 may be again shor- tened to 'u% as: bahtiu. In Sindhi this Plural affix 'u' has been contracted with final 'u' (u) into u, and at the same time nasa- lized = u. 2) Nouns ending in o (o). These form their Plural by changing final o into a, as: jji>t>l^ vadho, a carpenter, Plur. Liol^; jjj.j tobo, a diver, Plur. Ljjj toba, divers. If final o be nasalized, which is frequently the case, the nasal is also preserved in the Plural, as: ^y^y^ cotho, the fourth, Plur. ^L^j.^. cotha. If final o be preceded by short 'a' (or nasalized: a), a euphonic v is inserted between them in the Plural, as : y^S tao, a pan; Plur. 1^3' tava, pans; ,jj^Aj nao, new; Plur. jjllli nava; but if final 5 be preceded by any other SECTION 11. THE INFLEXION OF NOUNS. 107 vowel, the insertion of v is optional, as: jlT kuo, mouse, Plur. Cf kua or: ly kuva; j.X^ meo, fisherman, Plur. Llkjo mea or: \^^ meva; pL^ gha-o, a fish-net, Plur. L.3L4-f gha-a or: \^l^f ghava. We have repeatedly adverted to the fact, that the Prakrit termination o has in Sindhi either been shor- tened to 'u', or retained unaltered; the formation of the Plural of the latter description of nouns is quite in ac- cordance with Prakrit usage (Sing, o, Plur. a). Annotation. In the cognate idioms the masc. termination a has been substituted instead of o. In Hindi, Hindustani, Marathi and PanjabT masc. nouns ending in a commonly change the same in the Plural to e, a Plural termination, which is already in use in the inferior old Prakrit dialects (see: Lassen, Instit. Ling. Prak. p. 430). The Gujarat! differs in this respect, as masc. nouns ending in o add to the Plural termination a the affix o, as: chokaro, a boy, Plur. chokara-o; a similar formation of the Plural is already ascribed to the MagadhI dialect of the Prakrit; cf. Lassen^ p. 399. 3) Nouns ending in u, u. Nouns ending in u or, as it is more common, in u, be they masc. or feminine, remain unchanged in the Plural, as: ^y%=->^ vichu, m., scorpion, Plur. ^^-^^ vichu; yf gau, fern., cow, Plur. yS gau, cows. In Pali, masc. themes ending in 'u', lengthen the same in the Nom. Plural to u, as bhikkhu, a beggar, Plur. bhikkhu; and such masc. themes, as end in u in the Nom. Sing., remain unchanged in the Plural, as: abhibhti, a chief, Plur. abhibhu (contracted from abhi- bhuvo). In Prakrit masc. themes ending in 'u' lengthen their final vowel always in the Nominative Sing., to which in the Nom. Plural the affix o (— ^^) is added, as: vau, wind, Nom. Sing, vau, Nom. Plur. vau5, winds. This Plural affix o may in Prak. be again shortened to 'u', and in the modern dialects it is dropped altogether. In Sindhi u is usuallv nasalized = u. 108 SECTION 11. THE INFLEXION OF NOUNS. Annotation. In Hindi, Hindustani, Marathi and PanjabI masc. nouns ending in u, remain unaltered in the Plural; but fern, nouns add in Hindustani the Plural termination a, as joru, a wife, plural jorua, the Prakrit Plural affix o being changed to a, I. The Gujarat! keeps close to the Prakrit in forming the Plural of masc. nouns ending in u, by adding the Plural affix o, as: hindu, a Hindu, Plur. hinduo. 4) Nouns ending in a (a). These are, as noticed already (§. 13, 3) for the most part feminine; they form their Plural hy adding the Plural affix u, as: L^ haca, f., murder; Plur. ^jGl^ haca-u, murders. The Plural of these nouns corresponds to the Prak. Plural termination a-o or a-u, o (or shortened 'u') being added to final a of the Singular (see Lassen p. 307). In Sindhi the Prak. Plur. increment o has been changed to ti, and at the same time nasalized. Few nouns ending in a are masculine; they remain unaltered in the Plural, as: l^l!!^ lala, master, Plur. ^"3 lala, masters. The Prakrit Plural increment 5 (a-o) has first been shortened to 'u', and then been dropped altogether in Sindhi. Annotation. In Hindi and Hindustani fem. nouns ending in a (1) form their Plural by adding the increment S, as bala, misfortune, Plur. balal. This e corresponds to the Prakrit affix o , which in the inferior Prakrit dialects is frequently changed to e (cf. Lassen, p. 398, 408). Those masc. nouns, the final a of which does not correspond to the Sindhi o, remain likewise unaltered in the Plural. — In Panjabi fem. nouns ending in a add either 1 or ii, the Plural increment i being a change from the Hindi e, and ia from the Prakrit affix o, with euphonic 4' or y. A few masc. nouns remain likewise unaltered in the Plural, as atma, soul; pita, father etc. — The Gujarat! entirely agrees with the Prakrit, adding simply o to the fem. nouns in a, as: ma, mother, Plur. ma-o. — In Marathi fem. nouns ending in a do not un- dergo any change in the Plural, as: mata, mother, Plur. mata; SECTION n. THE INFLEXION OF NOUNS. 109 some masc. nouns, falling under this head, remain likewise un- altered in the Plural. 5) JNouns ending in a. These nouns being all feminine, form their Plural by changing final 'a' either to u (as in Lar); or to a (as in Siro); Ij tara, nostril, Plur. ^^Ji taru or: ^!li* tara, nostrils. These nouns have been, as noted already, shortened from Sanskrit-Prakrit bases ending in a; they either drop final 'a' before the Plural increment a {--^ Prak. o), or restore the original a and drop the Plural increment o ■= u, nasahsing at the same time the final long vowel. Annotation. This class of nouns is wantig in the cognate idioms, where final 'a' has become silent; e. g. Hindustani: jibh, £, tongue, Plural: jibh-e, the Plural being made up by the increment e = Prak. o. — Panjabi: bah, f., arm (Sindhi: ..^o baha), Plur. bahl; Marathi: jibh, f. Plur. similarly: jibha. The Gujarat! is consequent in adding simply the Plural increment 6 to fem. bases, ending in a quiescent consonant, as: sanjh, f., evening, Plur. sanjho. 6) Kouns ending in i (i). a) Masculine nouns ending in i remain unaltered in the Plural: Jy^j bell, a servant, Plur. J^ bell, servants; ^Jvj pri, friend, Plur. ^^j pri, friends. In Prakrit masc. nouns ending in i form their Plural by adding the increment 5, which has been shortened to 'u' and then cast off altogether in Sindhi. h) Feminine nouns ending in i add in the Plural the increment u, shortening before this affix the pre- ceding long i, which may also, for euphony's sake, be changed to y; as: ^^'^ goli, a slave-girl, Plur. ^y^^ goliu, goliyu, golyu; ^-oL^J nihai (or: nihai), a potter's kiln, Plur. ^j^^^Lgj i^iliayu. 110 SECTION n. THE INFLEXION OF NOUNS. Feminine nouns in i add in Prakrit likewise the affix 0, which may be shortened to 'u'; in this case final 'u' has in Sindhi been lengthened to u and nasalized at the same time, to distinguish the Plural of the feminine nouns from that of the masculine. If final 1 be preceded by any letter of the palatal class or by 'h', it is commonly dropped before the Plural affix u, as: ^^skjo manji, a stool, Plur. ^y^^ manju, stools; ^^^j f., manjhi, a buffalo, Plur. ^y^sx^ manjhu, buffaloes. * Annotation, In Hindi and Hindustani fern, nouns follow the method of the Prakrit in forming their Plural, with the only difference, that the Prak. Plural increment o is changed to a, and this again nasalized, as churl, knife, Plur. churm. Masc. nouns in i do not differ from their Singular. The Panjabi quite accords with the Hindi, fem. nouns in T adding the Plural ter- mination a, as dhi, daughter, Plur. dhia, the masc. nouns in i remaining unaltered in the Plural. The same may be remarked of the Marathi. The Gujarati stands nearest to the Prakrit in this respect, all nouns, be they masc. or feminine, adding simply the Plural affix o. 7) J^onns ending in i (e)* a) Fem. nouns ending in T (e) form their Plural by adding the Plural affix u, as: ^i^jIC rate, night, Plur. ^y^'(s rateu, nights. — If 'i' be preceded by a palatal or h, it disappears before the Plural termination u, as: ^Avu) mehe, buffalo, Plur. ^^^1a>o mehu, buffaloes. £:j^ joe, wife, forms its Plural either regularly, as: jj^j.^^ joyu, or irregularly, as: ljj.:a. joii*^? r?>^ johiru, or ^^y\y=^ joiru, wives. &) Masc. nouns ending in T (e) remain unchanged in the Plural, as: -^ic-w/ sethe, a wholesale merchant, Plur. j^X^^ sethe. SECTION 11. THE INFLEXION OF NOUNS. Ill Annotation. In Hindi and Hindustani, as stated already, final T has been dropped, and such nouns, as end in Sindhi in 'a' or 4', use there one common Plural increment, viz.: e. In Gujarat! and Panjabi final 4' has likewise disappeared in most cases, and o and i. are respectively added as Plural terminations. In Mar at hi fem. bases ending in 'i' remain either unchanged in the Plural or have final 4' lengthened to i. The lengthening of final 'i' in the Plural is more in accordance with Pali and Prakrit usage (e. g. Pali: ratti, night, Plur. ratti or rattiyo; Prak. ratti-o or: ratti-u). Masc. bases ending in 4' remain similarly either unaltered in the Plural, or (according to some Pandits) lengthen the same to i (as in Pali and Prakrit). II. Formation of cases; case -affixes. §. 16. Properly speaking there is no longer a declension in Sindhi, nor in any of the modern languages of the Arian stock; there are only a few remnants of the an- cient Sanskrit, Pali and Prakrit case-inflexions, all the other cases being made up by means of case -affixes or postpositions.^). If we compare the modern Arian dialects with the Pali and Prakrit, we perceive at once the great de- terioration, the modern idioms have undergone in this respect; for while the Pali and Prakrit have as yet pre- served all the cases of the Sanskrit, with the exception of the Dative, which has already become scarce in Pali and has been discarded altogether in Prakrit, its functions being shifted to the Genitive, tke modern idioms have lost nearly all power of inflexion and substituted in lieu of flexional increments regular adverbs, w^hich we ge- nerally term postpositions. The same process we can notice in the modern Eomanic tongues, where after the loss of the Latin declensional inflexions, prepositions have been substituted to make up for the lost cases. 1) lu poetry postpositions may also be placed before the noun, they govern, as the rhythm may require. 112 SECTION II. THE INFLEXION OF NOUNS. The great distinctive feature of the declensional process of the modern Arian dialects , with the exception of the Bangali, consists in the fact, that there are pro- perly only two cases of a noun, the absolute or crude form, corresponding throughout to the I^om. Sin- gular, and the Formative case, to which the various adverbs or postpositions are added, which serve to make up for the lost case-terminations. This latter case has been generally called the oblique case by European grammarians, but we prefer to call it the Formative (after the precedence of Dr. Caldwell). The number of declensions, if they may be termed thus, depends therefore in Sindhi, as well as in the cognate idioms, on the various methods, in which the Formative is made up; for the case-signs remain the same, as well for the Singular as the Plural, since they are, as we shall presently see, originally either (Sanskrit) prepositions or adverbs. We shall now first investigate the remnants of the ancient case - terminations in Sindhi and the adverbs or postpositions, which have been substituted for such cases, as have lost their original inflexions. In the arrangement of the cases we shall follow the common order, which has been instituted by the old Sanskrit grammarians, in order to facilitate the intercomparison. 1) The N^ominative case of the Singular and plural we may pass over, since they have been noticed already. 2) The Accusative case of the Singular and Plural has been dropped in Sindhi, as well as in all the other kindred idioms. This has been already the case in the inferior Prakrit dialects, and is expressly mentioned of the Apabhransa, the mother of the modern Sindhi (see: Lassen p. 459). We must keep this fact constantly before our eyes, that in Sindhi, as well as in its sister-tongues, there is no such thing (in a grammatical sense), as an Accusative SECTION n. THE INFLEXION OF NOUNS. 113 case, the Accusative being now throughout identical with the N'ominative. If we find therefore generally stated in European grammars, that the postposition ^5^ khe, or j5" ko in Hindustani serves to denote also the Accusative case, we have, in the strictly grammatical sense of the word, to repudiate such an idea. Whe shall see under the Dative case, what the origin of that postposition is, and that will satisfactorily explain the syntactical pecuHarities of the modern Indian tongues, which use such and similar postpositions, where we use either the Dative or the Accusative. 3) The Inst rumen talis is not distinguished by any case-affix or postposition in Sindhi, but differs from the I^ominative Sing, only by the change of the final vowel (where such a change is admissible). The In- strumentalis is in the Singular and Plural identical with the Formative (which see further on). From thence it would follow, that the Instrumentalis is originally the Genitive, which may be rendered very probable by the Instrumentahs of the Plural. Annotation. The Hindi and Hindustani use as Instru- mental case- affix ne. In Hindu! (see Garcin de Tassy, Eu- diments de la langue Hindoui, 26, 99) we meet further the affixes ne, ne, ni and na, and in the Plural (a)n or ne, n#, ni, as in the Singular. In Panjabi we find the instrumental affix nai, or na, or only i, or the Formative is promiscuously used for the Instrumentalis, just as in Sindhi. In Gujarati we meet with e as Instrumental affix. The Marathi uses for the Instrumentalis Sing, the affix ne, and for the Plural nl. As to the origin of these various instrumental affixes there can hardly be a doubt. The Sansk. instrumental case -inflexion of the Sin- gular na, na (see Bopp , Comp. Gram. I, §. 158) has been used as a separate adverb in Hindustani and Panjabi (not in Marathi, where it coalesces with the noun as a regular inflexion), or even been abbreviated to T or e (n being originally only a euphonic addition to the instrumental affix a), as partlv in Pan- jabi and in Gujarati. In the Instrumentalis Plur. the Marathi uses also (besides nl) the affix hi, corresponding to the Prak. Plur. instrumental affix j^ or f^; see Lassen, p. 310. In Ban- Trumpp, SindM-G-rammar. H 114 SECTION II. THE INFLEXION OF NOUNS. gall te is used as instrumental affix, which is originally iden- tical with the Ablative affix "flfj = ff^, 4) The Dative case has totally disappeared from the Prakrit and its functions have been assigned to the Geni- tive. We find therefore in the modern idioms the greatest discrepancy as to the method , in which the Dative case is provided for. In Sindhi the affix ^ khe is used, as well for the Singular as the Plural, being placed after the Formative Singular or Plural of a noun: as ^^f l^f ghara khe, to a house, ^^ ^"i^ gharane khe, to houses. In poetical language the postposition ^ kane or: ^ kane is also used instead of ^^f khe, which are ap- parently derived from the same source, as ^5^, only by a different process of assimilation (cf. the Hindi: kan, kane, Hindu! ^i|). Annotation. The Bangali uses as Dative affix ke, the Hindi and Hindustani ko (dialectically also pronounced ^ku' in the Dekhan), the Hindu! (according to Garcin de Tassy) also k^, kaij, kah, kah, kaha and even hi. Dr. Caldwell, in his Comparative Grammar of the Drandian languages has attempted to vindicate the Hindustani ko for the Dravidian languages of the South; he says (p. 225): "In the vernaculars of northern India, which are deeply tinged with Scythian characteristics, we find a suffix, which appears to be not only similar to the Dravidian, but the same. The Dative- Accusative in the Hindi and Hindustani is ko, or colloquially ku; in the language of Orissa ku, in Bangali ki, in SindhT khi, in Shingalese ghai; in the Uraon, a semi -Dravidian Kole dialect, gai^ in the language of the Bodos, a Bhutan hill tribe, kho, in Tibetan gya. The evident existence of a con- nexion between these suffixes and the Dravidian Dative case-sign ku, is very remarkable. Of all the analogies between the North -Indian dialects and the south eTn, this is the clearest and most important, and it cannot but be regarded as be- tokening either an original connexion between the northern and the southern races, prior to the Brahmanic irruption, or the ori- gination of both races from one and the same primitive Scythian SECTION IL THE INFLEXION OF NOUNS. 115 stock." If this case -sign ko or ku then be the clearest and most important analogy between the North-Indian vernaculars and the Dra vidian tongues, we shall see presently, that there will be no analogy whatever between them, though at the first sight the identity of both seems to be past any doubt. In the first instance the fact speaks already very strongly against such a supposition, that the Marathi, which is the closest neighbour to the Dra vidian tongues, has repudiated the use of khe, ke or ko, and employed a Dative -affix, the origin of which we hope to fix past controversy. We shall further see, that the Gujarati and Panjabi have also made up for the Dative case by postpositions, borrowed from the Sanskrit, without the slightest reference to the Dravidian languages, and we may therefore reasonably expect the same fact from the remaining Arian dia- lects. It would certainly be wonderful, if those Arian dialects, which border immediately on the Dravidian idioms, should have warded off any Dravidian influence on their inflexional method, whereas those more to the north should have been ''deeply tinged with Scythian characteristics." Fortunately we are able to show, that such an assumption is not only gratuitous, but irreconcilable with the origin of the above mentioned Dative-affixes. We derive the Sindhi khe, the Bangali ke, from the Sanskrit Locative cfiff, 'for the sake of, 'on account of, 'as regards'. This will at once account for the aspiration of k in Sindhi; for this is not done by chance, but by a strict rule (see In trod. §. J, e, note); in Bangali r does not exercise such an influence on the aspiration of a preceding or following consonant, and therefore we have simply ke. The Sanskrit form cRff becomes in Prakrit first f^W, then (by the regular elision of t) f^IX, and contracted ke, and in Sindhi, by reason of the elided r, khe. The Hindi and Hindustani form of this adverb ko we derive in the same way from the Sansk. cpff which is used adverbially with the same signification as the Locative ^fT, In Prakrit already, and still more so in the modern dialects, the neuter has been merged into the masculine; we have therefore first f^iTt, thence THR^^, and contracted ^, ko. We can thus satisfactorily account for the various forms: khe, ke or ko. ,That the proposed derivation of these adverbs does not rest on a mere fancy, is further proved by the Sindhi particle re, 'without', which is derived in the same way from the Sansk. Locative '^n, Prakrit "Kn "^ ftlj? a^d thence contracted H2 116 SECTION II. THE INFLEXION OF NOUNS. re (ria). It remains now for us to notice briefly the somewhat deviating forms of the Hindui, as exhibited by Garcin de Tassy. In ^t ^^ ^^^^ '^T kail a euphonic Anusvara has been added, to which the modern tongues have taken a great fancy; kavi is only a different pronunciation for k^, o changing in Hindui very commonly to au. The forms ^^ kah, or with euphonic Anusvara ^^ kah or oR^ kaha, present again another proof for the correctness of the proposed derivation of these adverbs. For we have in cR^^ <^^^ ^^ (Hindi also: kan, kane, with a full nasal, and in consequence thereof with ejection of h) the same basis as in ^f and cfif , only the assimilating process has been different. The vowel '^ r, when joined to a con- sonant, can, according to Prakrit usage, be resolved either into 4' (as in f^^) or into 'a' (as: ^fT for ^rf) (see Varar. I, 27; Lassen p. 116, 2, a; Introd. §. 1); in consequence of the inherent r the following consonant is aspirated (as in Sin- dhi: kk = k), so that we get the form cp^; this aspirated ^ th is again elided, so that h only remains (see Lassen p. 207; Introd. §. 8), and thus we have the forms cp^^ ^^^ With the other alleged form f^ hi, the matter stands different; we compare this Hindui Dative affix with the Apabhransa Genitive affix H, -he Genitive, as noted already, supplying in Prakrit the place of the Dative (as to the analysis of this ^ see Lassen p. 462 and 466). The Marathi uses two affixes to make up for the Dative, which are joined to the crude form by the so-called union-vowel, viz: ^, s and ^T la. The first of these two, s, is identical with the Prak. Genit. -Dative case termination T^tf ss = Sansk. ^ZJ sy, so that we have here the remnant of an ancient Sanskrit- Prakrit case-inflexion. The latter one, la is more doubtful as to its origin. Lassen has already started a conjecture (see Instit. Ling. Prak. p. 55, 99) as to the origin of this affix; he derives it from the Sansk. ^|^ = ^H'^^ 'place habitation', signifying the place, where the action rests. "\Ve cannot endorse this de- rivation, as the Marathi case-affix is not ^Jf^ ^^^5 but ^J la and we cannot see any reason, why initial long a should have been transferred to the back of this particle. We would com- pare the Marathi Dative affix la with the Sindhi postposition SECTION II. THE INFLEXION OF NOUNS. 117 lae, 'on account of, 'for the sake of, 'for', HindustanT ^LJ lie, both of which are derived from the Sansk. root C?5| (3 daro; jjLSGv zabana, from the tongue, nom. jjLjv zabana, tongue. Those nouns, which end in the Singular in i (!) and u (u), shorten the same before the affix a, as: ^^'Ip noria, from a rope, nom. (^jjj nori, a rope; ^Jt^r5 ^^" rua, from a wild beast, nom. ^^'^ miru, a wild beast. 118 SECTION 11. THE INFLEXION OF NOUNS. Nouns in 'i' (e) generally retain their final vowel before tlie affix a, but they may also drop it, as: ;jL>w4:> phu- rea, from (by) a robbery, nom. y^^ phure, a robbery; ^iSlj nirta, out of thought, with reflexion, nom. ^Ij nirte, thought. Nouns in a either nasalize the same in the Ablative, or, more commonly, use the postposition ^Lg5^ kha etc. In the Plural the Ablative affix a is joined to the full Formative in -ne, as: ^L^Sf gha- rane-a, from houses, (^Lu^y? miruane-a (^Loj^), from wild beasts etc. Besides this common Ablative affix a we find in Sindhi also such forms, as: au (^y), contracted: 6 (^3 1), and even u (^.1). In the more ancient idiom, as used by the Sindhi poets, the Ablative Singular generally ends in a-u. All these various Ablative affixes are derived from the Prakrit Ablative ^Tt^ (see Lassen p. 302, 304, 599), which becomes (by the elision of d) ao, or shor- tened: au. The Sindhi uses also the postposition ^L^O ^^^j ^1^ khaii, jjH^ kho, to express the idea of the Abla- tive; all these and other postpositions require the For- mative of a noun. Other postpositions, which are used to make up for the Ablative, see under the list of post- positions. Annotation. Nearest to the Sindhi comes the Mar at hi in this respect, which uses as Ablative-case terminations the affixes 1) The postposition ^^-^ kha etc. is derived form the same source, as ne-^j with the only difference, that the Ablative termination a, ail etc. has been added. The same is to be said of the Ablative postposition ^LIj kana, derived from ^^ by the same process. SECTION 11. THE INFLEXION OF NOUNS. 119 un and hun, occasionally also tun. In Bangali and Pan- Jabi we find the Ablative affix te (though in Panjabi a re- gular Ablative termination o is also to be met with), which has sprung from the Prakrit Ablative termination Jf[ to; si- milar to it is the Gujarat! Ablative affix thi, which has been aspirated. In Hindi we find also thi, but most in use is se, apparently identical with the Prakrit Genitive termination ^ (see Lassen p. 462). 6) The Sanskrit Genitive -case termination ^, in Pali and Prakrit W ss, has been lost in all the modern tongues, mth the exception of the Bangali, where ss has been hardened to r. All the other dialects have taken to a new way of forming the Genitive, of which we find already some traces in the old Yedic language: the noun, which ought to be placed in the Genitive case, is changed into an adjective by an adjective affix, and thence follows, as a matter of course, that this so- called Genitive, which is really and truly an adjective, must agree in gender, number and case with its go- verning noun as all other adjectives. The Sindhi employs for this purpose the affix ^ jo (fem. ^^ ji), corresponding to the common adjective affix k5 (= Sansk. ^, with transition of the tenuis (c = k) in tothe media ( j) , very hkely to establish thereby some distinction between these two originally identical affixes. In Sindhi this adjective affix jjs^ jo is always written separately, whereas the common adjective affix ko is joined to the base, as in Sanskrit (see §. 10, 24); it follows always the Formative Sing, or Plur. of a noun, as: (^^c> j^ ^-^ ghara jo dhani, the master of the house, ^^^^ i^ UT^ gharane j5 dhani, the master of the houses; &^ ^^ J*.Ivo mursa ji j5e, the wife of the man; ^^j^ ,jj^ ^^r^ mursane ju j5yu, the wives of the men. In poetry jjJ«l sando, 'belonging to', is used quite in the same way, as ^, as: 120 SECTION 11. THE IMFLEXION OF NOUNS. i5^ ^b ^iXjJ^ ^bjj priya sande para de, towards the direction of the friends. Annotation. The Marat hi uses as Genitive case -affix "^5 with transition of the guttural ^ into the corresponding pa- latal, as in Sindhl, yet without changing the tenuis into the media. The Hindi and Hindustani have preserved the ori- ginal Sanskrit adjective affix ^, without changing it into the palatal ka; in Hindu! we meet also with the affix ko and kau. The Panjabi and Gujarat! seem to make an ex- ception from what we have just stated. In Panjab! the Genitive case-affix is da, in which we recognise the Prak. Ablative affix ^ do (= cTH), turned into a Genitive affix. This Panjab! Genitive case-affix will clear up the Pasto Genitive prefix C> da, being identical with it in origin. The Gujarat! employs as Genitive case-affix no, which is another adjective affix, corresponding in signification with cfi and used in Sindh! (see §. 10, 27), to form adjectives in the same way, as ko (on the origin of this affix no see Bopp's Comp. Gram. HI, §. 839). 7) The original Sanskrit Locative termination 'i' has been preserved in Sindhi, though the Locative can now only be distinguished in masc. bases ending in 'u', as: ^jJ^ handhe, in a place, nom. jad^kh handhu; ^^a^ mathe, on the top, nom. „.^ mathu, the top. In nouns, ending in any other vowel, but 'u' (masc), the Locative must be expressed, for perspicuity's sake, by an adverb or postposition , requiring the Formative of a noun , as : ^j^ (54^^^ kothia me or: .-^^^ is^}'^ k5thia manjhe, in a room. In poetry the Formative of any. noun is commonly u.sed also as Locative, without a postposition. Annotation. In Marath! the Locative affix 'i' has been leng- thened to ! and at the same time nasalized = 1. Besides this we meet also with the Locative termination ^J||T , which is originally the Sansk. Ablative, used as a Locative. In Ban- gah the Locative ends in e (i), as in Sindhi,' or is expressed by the affix te. In Panjab! the Locative is generally ex- SECTION 11. THE INFLEXION OF NOUNS. 121 pressed by adverbial postpositions, though the Locative itself has not been altogether lost; we find there the affix f, as in MarathT, or e, which are always joined to the base of a noim. In Gujarat! the Locative is either expressed by the affix e, or by the help of postpositions. In Hindi and Hindustani the Locative, as a distinctive case, has been quite lost and must always be expressed by postpositions. Still some vestiges of it are lingering in the so-called participles ab- solute, as: bote, or with the emphatic hi, hotehi, in being. Some other idiomatic phrases, as: ,^i> (j^l us din, on that day etc. point also to an original Locative. 8) The Vocative is expressed in Sindhi by pre- iixing one of the interjectional particles: e, he, ho or ya, and, when speaking to an inferior, re (fern, ri) or are.^) The final vowel of a noun in the Vocative either undero'oes a chano;e or remains unaltered. In the Vocative Singular masc. nouns ending in 'u' change the same to V, asi'^L^Ajo ;^l e mehara, o buffalo-keeper! nom. >L^xj meharu; those ending in o change the same to a, as: iCx^Aw ^1 e stimira, o Sumiro! those ending in u, I, 'i' remain unaltered, as: ^y-^^, (^t e Punhu, o Punhu! In the Vocative Plural nouns ending in 'u' (m.) have the termination 5 or a, as: j.G ^f e yaro or: I'^G yara, o friends! (nom. sing. sG); those ending in o terminate in the Vocative Plur. in a, o and au, as: \s^jJq ^^I e man- gata, o beggars! or: ^xxLo mangato, ^i^li mangatau (tiCi mangata-u), Nom. Sing. j.axLo mangato; those ending in u. (u) terminate in o or a, before which affixes the preceding u (u) most be shortened, as: L^lil^ (cl e va- tahua or i^s^ljU ^\ e vatahuo, o travellers! JSTom. Sing. yJ^LJ•|^ vatahti; those ending in i terminate in the Plural 1) About the origin of re, rl, are, see Dr. Caldwell's Compar. Grammar of the Dra\ddian languages p. 440. 122 SECTION IL THE INFLEXION OF NOUNS. in a, and au (a-u), shortening at the same time the final 1 of the base, as: L^v.1^ ;-u^j bhenaru, sisters etc., retain likewise their final 'u' in the Vocative Plural, as: Cl^ ^1 e bhenaru, o sisters! when ending in u, they drop in the Vocative final Anusvara, as: ^y^^ (^t e dhiaru, o daughters! Nom. Plur. ^^y^^c> dhiaru. The Vocative may also be used without any inter- jectional prefix, as: L^jU marhua, o men! §. 17. in. The Formative. The Formative or obhque case, though in Sindhi throughout identical with the Instrumentalis , is by itself no case, but represents merely the euphonic change of the final vowel of a noun previous to the accession of any flexional particle or postposition, by means of which SECTION II. THE INFLEXION OF NOUNS. 123 the various cases are made up. The changes, which the final vowel of a noun undergoes before the accession of any adverbial postposition, are on the whole the same as those before any other affix. In Sindhi the post- positions do not coalesce with the noun itself, the lan- guage still being conscious of the fact, that it has to deal with original adverbs. We have hinted already, that the Formative is originally the Grenitive; it would be rather difficult, to prove this in reference to the Formative of the Singular, but that the Formative of the Plural originally represents the Genitive Plural, is borne out by the Prakrit and the kindred modern idioms. In Prakrit the Grenitive Plural ends in ^TJT §TJT ^TJF in the Apabhransa dialect ^^ ^^ ^^, thence the Sin- dhi Formative Plural a, e, or -ne. Though the Formative be, in all likelihood, the Genitive of the Prakrit, the adjectival affix ^c^ has been added to it, to turn it into an adjective, the modern idioms once having taken this course to supply the Genitive. From thence it was only a consequent step, to use the ancient Genitive as the base, to which all the other declensional postpositions were added, i. e. the Genitive was turned into the Formative. 1) The Formative of nouns ending in 'u' (masc. and fem.) a) Masculine nouns ending in 'u' change final 'u' in the Formative Sing, to 'a', as: ^^13 dasu, a slave. Form. (j]-l3 dasa; ^ ^\3 dasa jo, ^^45" J^l5 dasa khe etc. If final 'u' be preceded by a short 'a', the insertion of euphonic v becomes necessary, as : ^ C ra-u, a weed, Form. y^ rava; the same is the case, when final 'u' is preceded by a long nasalized a, as: ^L^i* than', a dish. Form. pLgo thava. But if final 'u' be preceded by any other 124 SECTION II. THE INFLEXION OF NOUNS. vowel, the insertion of euphonic v is optional, as: if: van, wind, Format, ^f^ vava or ^|^ vaa; ^jS deu, a demon. Format. ^.jS deva or ..jS dea; when final 'u' however is preceded by short or long ^i', no euphonic insertion is required, as: yj diu, a mound, Format, ^jj dia; ^^ viu, a meadow. Format. Jj^ via; ^j^ Jiu, life, Format. The following nouns ending in 'u' retain their final 'u' unaltered in the Formative Singular: ^, piu, father; Format. ^Jj, as: j.^^ ^^ piu jo etc. il^j bhau, brother. Format. iL^j, as: ^^T il4^ bhau khe etc. but ^Aj piu, sweetheart, ^L^ bhau, price, are regular. The Formative Plural ends either in a, e or -ne, as: l^om. Sing. Ji^j phulu, a flower; Koni. Plur. J^:? phula; Format. Plur. ^^4:*. phul-a, ,j-44:*. phul-e, or: j^^J-gj phula-ne. The Formative in a and e is ge- nerally used without a following postposition, and that in -ne more with a following postposition, as being more sonorus; but in poetry the one or other form is used as required by the metre. Those nouns, which form their Plural irregularly, as: iL^J bhau, brother, Nom. Plur. IjL^jbhauraor: laL^ bhauru; ^Jj piu, father, E^om. Plur. Iaj piura, derive their Formative Plural either from the I^ominative Singular or the Nominative Plural, as: ^L^j bhaune or: ^J>A^^ bhaurane; ^a^ piune or, ^jCaj piurane; the contracted form of the Formative (i. e: a, e) is never used with them. SECTION 11. THE INFLEXION OF NOUNS. 125 h) Feminine nouns ending in 'u' remain unaltered in the Formatiye Sing., as: ^Uo mau, mother, Format. iUo, j.^ iUo man jo; in the Formative Plural the long u of the 'Nom. Plur. is shortened before the Format. termination -ne, as: ^ yiju, lightening, IN'om. Plur. ^^4^ viju. Format. Plur. viju-ne. Those fem. nouns, which have, besides their regular Plural, also an irregular one, derive their Formative Plur. from either form, as: ^J.>^ bhenu, sister, 'Nom. Plur. ^y^v^ bhenu or: J-^ bhenaru {^^yLfj^ bhenaru); Format. Plur. ^^^ bhenune or: jjU-y^ bhenarune. 2) The Formative of nouns ending in o (6). Nouns ending in o change the same in the For- mative Sing, to e, as: ^^^ matho, head, Format. ^^^^ mathe. If final 5 be preceded by 'a' or a, a euphonic V may be inserted, as: pS dao, the glare of the sun, Format. ^3 dae or: ^^3 dave; pLi nao, felt. Format, ^b nae or: ^^^b nave; if o be preceded by any other vowel, no insertion of euphonic v takes place, as: pi dio, lamp. Format. ^<*> die; jo^ ctio, perfumed oil. Format. ,^^^ cue. If a noun end in a nasalized o (=6), the Anus vara is retained in the Formative, as; ^j.^b nao, the ninth. Format, (j^^b nae. K o be preceded by y, it is commonly dropped in the Formative, as: >-y?5>-! porhyo (or porhio), labour. Form. ^^;j=j XDorhe. ^Kj^s rupayo, rupee. Format. (^,^y rtipae. 126 SECTION II. THE INFLEXION OF NOUNS. The Formative Plural ends either in a, e, the 1 termination of the Nomin. Plural (a) being dropped be- fore them, or in -ne, final a of the Worn. Plural being shortened to 'a' before it; as: j.^jiykulho, the shoulder, Nom. Plur. l^ kulha, Form. Plur. ^L^JLT kulha, ^j..^,^ kulhe, or: ,j4-^ kulhane; j^^ ku5, rat, Nom. Plur. liy^ kua, Format. Plur. ^J^yS^ ktia, ^^^ kue, or: | ^y^ kuane. 3) The Formative of nouns ending in u (u). Nouns ending in u change the same in the For- mative Singular to ua, as: y^^^ vaghu, crocodile, Format, y^^"^ vaghua. If final u be nasalized (= u), the Anusvara is commonly retained in the Formative, as: jj^"§^^ vichu, scorpion. Format. ^J^g^^ vichua. The Formative Plural ends either in u-a, u-e, or u-ne, ua-ne, long u and u being shortened before the terminations of the Formative, as: ySHs rahu, a resident, Nom. plur. yo^ rahu, residents. Format. Plur. ,jfy»; ra- hua (or: jjl^'^)? ^j-^^ rahue, ^5&J rahune, ^^J ra- huane; ,j^vf miru, a wild beast, ISTom. Plur. ^^^ miru, wild beast. Format. Plur. ^l21^ mirua, ,j«olo mirue, ^jlo mirune, ,j-5yo miruane. 4) The Formative of nouns ending in a (a). Nouns ending in a remain unaltered in the For- mative Sing., as, \Sf\, f , agya, command, Format. 11^ I agya; L^lj raja (m.), king. Format. LiC raja; in the Formative Plur. they end (according to the termination SECTION II. THE INFLEXION OF NOUNS. 127 of the Xomin. Plural: a-u) in u-ne, as: ^LITI agya- ime; also ^Lilj rajaune, masc. 5) The Formative of nouns ending in 'a'. Nouns ending in 'a' remain unchanged in the For- mative Sing., as: *1^ kama, a beam. Format. 1^ kama; in the Formative Plur. they terminate (according to their ISTom. Plural) either in a (e) or u-ne, as: ^Lcfe^ kama, ,j^l^ kame, ^1^ kamune. 6) The Formative of nouns ending in i (i), a) Masc. nouns ending in i change the same in the Formative Sing, to i-a, as: ^JLo malT, a gardener, Formative "^JL* malia. Those nouns, which have final 1 nasalized (=^ i), retain the Anus vara in the Formative, as: (j^vJ pri, friend. Format, ^^^j pria. The Formative Plural ends either in i-a (ya), i-e (ye), or in i-ne, ia-ne (yane), iu-ne (yune), as: ^lllLc malia, ^a^|U malie; ^JLo mahne, ^j^JLc mahane (^jjJL.«), ^j^U ma- liune (^^?Lc). h) Feminine nouns ending in i change the same likevrise in the Formative Sing, to i-a, as: ^jj topi, a hat. Format, ^jj topia; the Formative Plural also quite agrees with that of the masc. nouns, as: ^L^j^* topia, ^^^^jiJ topie, ^^,p t opine, ^J^Jo* topiane. ^^jo" topiune. Such fem. nouns, as have dropped final i in the Nom. Plural (c£ §. 15, 6), drop the same also in the contracted form of the Formative Plur.. as: ^^^^ manji, a stool, Nom. Plur. ^y^^ manjii, Format. Plur. 128 SECTION II. THE INFLEXION OF NOUNS. ^Lixx) manja, j^A^sxi manje; but: ^j^m manjiane, ^J,^^Jo manjiune are also in use. Some other nouns also, in which final i is not preceded by a palatal, drop T in the con- tracted form of the Formative Plural, as: ..vj'a^kore, in scores, from {s';}^ kori, a score. 7) The Formative of nouns ending in T (e). ISTouns ending in T (fem. and masc.) remain un- altered in the Format. Sing., as: o^j, f , bhite, a wall, Format, v^.^ bhite; y^f kehare (m.), a lion, Format. y^f kehare. In the Formative Plural of fem. nouns the same terminations are employed as with fem. nouns ending in i, as: (jLa^j bhitia, ^j,.f^x^j bhitie, jj^a^j bhi- tine, ,j.aa4j bhitiane, ^^aX^j bhitiune. In the Formative Plural final T is frequently dropped altogether, especially in poetry, but only in the contracted form of the For- mative, as: ^aX§j bhate, in (different) ways, from o^^j bhate, habit, manner. The Formative Plural of masc. nouns ends in -ne, the contracted form a, e hardly ever being in use with them, as: ^Jy^^f^ keharine. &j^ joe, wife, which forms its Plural either regu- larly ^^^i>^ joyu, or irregularly: ^Sj.^^ joiru, j.5&j.^ jo- hiru, has in the Format. Plur. either ^Jj.^^ joyune or: ^y^}^ johirine. §. 18. We let now follow, for the sake of perspicuity, a survey of the Sindhi declensional process. As the Gle- nitive affix s^ jo is originally an adjective affix, by SECTION 11. THE INFLEXION OF NOUNS. 129 means of which the noun is turned into an adjective, dependent on the governing noun in gender, number and case, we premise the inflexion of ^^ which, ac- cording to its terminations jo and ji, is inflected after the manner of nouns ending in o and T (fern.). As stated already, j^ always requires the Formative of a noun, as all postpositions. SINGULAR. Masculine. Feminine. INom. j.a. JO. Form. ^^ je. Vocat. Li ja. <5t J^- iSf J^' (5t J^^- (5t J^- PLURAL. ISTom. L^ ja. ^^^ jfi; or-f ji^. Form. s. je; " 1 c>^ jane. ^:^ je; ^ jine; ^L June Vocat. Li- ja. i^^ jiane; ^1:^ jiune.) In poetry the diminutive form yi^ jaro, ^'i^ jari is occasionally used instead of j.^^ , as : Yesterday (thy) relatives have departed (this life); to-day it is thy turn. Golden Alphabet II, 4. In the same way as ^ jo the adjective j ja-1 sando (belonging to, own) is very frequently used in poetry, and inflected regularly, as: SINGULAR. Feminine. ^^djJL sandi. ^d3L sandia. ^iXk^ sandi. Masculine. Nom. ^ sando. Form. ^iXl^ sande. Yocat. ttXil sanda. Trum pp, Sindh: i-Grrammar. 130 SECTION II. THE INFLEXION OF NOUNS. PLURAL. Masculine. Feminine. Nom. ItXlL sanda. ^^^JlLI sandiu. Form. ^Jol/ sandane, ^tXll sandine; jjJtXH san- ^jdl. sande. diane; ^,djS*j sandiune. Yocat. ItXil sanda. j^^^Jjil sandiu. I. DEOLENSIOK Nouns in u (masc. and fern.) a) Masc. nouns in V. SINGULAR. Nom. ..^o deli-u, a country. Format. | lustrum. 1 4?^ ^^^-^• Gen. j.:?^ ^o deh-a jo etc. Dative. .^ ^i deh-a khe. Accusat. ^,i deh-u (^^4^ 4^^)- Locat. ^fi deli-e, or: ^-yo ^o deha me etc. Ablat. ^Li:>S deh-a; ,j54j<3 deh-o; ^^^.^ deh-u. ^1^.0 deh-au; iL^S deh-au or: ^L^ J^fi deha kha etc. Yocat. ^o ^5l e deh-a; ^,S deh-a. PLURAL. Nom. ^j deh-a, countries. Format. \ lustrum. J u'^?^ ^^^"^5 ,^^fi deh-e; ^:^S deha-ne. Gen. i^ (j^.^ dehane jo etc. Dative. ^^ ^j^.'^ dehane khe. SECTION 11. THE INFLEXION OF NOUNS. 131 Accus. 4j5 deh-a {^ ^.'i)- Locat. vA/D lJ^^'^ clehane me etc. (^^v^i cleli-e). Ablat, ^\lx^/i cleliane-a etc.; ^L^ ^^^4^!^ deliane kha etc. Vocat. i^ji deli-o; I^jj deli-a. An irregular noun. SINGULAR. Nom. ^^ pi-U; father. Format. ) Instrum.ji^. P^"^* Grenit. ^ ^^ piu Jo etc. Dative. ^^^ ^^ piu khe. Accus. ^. pi-u (^ ^j. Ablat. ^L^ ^^ piu kha etc. Yocat. ^^ pi-u. PLURAL. 'Norn, "lo piu-ra, fathers. Format lustrum./^ Pi^^-^^' ij;^. P™^a-ne. Dative. ^^^ ^j^^ piune khe; ^^^ ^Lo piurane khe. Accus. p^ piura (^ j^.; ^ ^^). Ablat. ^^i-o pinne-a; ^jLowo pmrane-a etc. ^145^ ^j^, piune kha; ^L^ ^lo piurane kha etc. Vocat. jwAj piur-o. 1) In poetry an additional vowel may be joined to the final a of the Yocative , for the sake of the metre , as : ili • vanau , oh ye trees, instead of U. vaiia; -^cU^ vanaha, :^li« vanaa. Sh. Ma^ourl, III, 6. 7. 8. 12 132 SECTION 11. THE INFLEXION OF NOUNS. ^ yJJo lXLo ^L^j ^L4j (5^^ ^4^J (5j^. Having returned to my own cowpen, may I see the country of Malir. Sh. Um. Mar. I, 13. Forget not (thy) husband; o woman (rather) die! Sh. Um. Mar. II, 6. ehfL^ U^^"" x^^f^ ^T^^ -f^^ r'^ ""^ ^)^ May I be of a black face (literally: in a black face) on the day of the resurrection from amongst the sinners. Maj. 731. Having made a journey from a foreign country he has come hither. Sh. Sor. I, 2. Wounded were those feet of the poor woman from the journey (1-w). Sh. Abiri VI, 6. The thief, the mad man, the stranger, the fool take out of thy mind. Maj. 291. Come near, o sweetheart, do not go away, my friend! Sh. Abiri X, 3. ^xj>1 |vJ4> p ^^ (j-iy-^ ^iXx^ j^iXj^ If one give me thus intelligence of my friends. Maj. 733. Having separated the friends from the friends he shows compassion. Sh. Sor. I, Epil. SECTION 11. THE INFLEXION OF NOUNS. 133 (5^^ v;^ >#5 y^i ^ '^^ r-f^ Stand up, ye physicians, do not sit down, go off with your medicines! Sh. Jam. Kal. I, Epil. h) Feminine nouns in 'u'. SES^GULAR. Nom. ^ vij-u, lightening. Format. ^ Instrum.J^5 ^y-^* Grenit. j^ _.^ viju jo etc. Dative. ^5^ ^^ viJu khe. Accus. ^^ ^dj-u (^^ ^^). Ablat. ^J^ irr^ ^W^ k^^ ^tc- Vocat. ^ vij-u. PLURAL. Nom. \jy=?'y vij-fi- Format. | , " _ lustrum. J c?^^^ ^J^-^^- Genit. ^ ^L^ vijune jo etc. Dative. ^^^ ^j^^ vijune khe. Accus. ^^^ vij-u {^^ ^p. Ablat. (j'--*^^ viju-ne-a etc. ; ^L^ ,j^^ vijune kha etc. Vocat. (j^^^ "^j-fi- An irregular noun. SINGULAR. Nom. iUo ma-u, mother. Format. iLo ma-u. Vocat. iUo ma-u. 134 SECTION 11. THE INFLEXION OF NOUNS. PLURAL. Nom. ^^jLi> ma-u; IsUo ma-i-ru; ^J^'^}^ ma-i-ru, mothers. Format. ^j-sLJo mau-ne; ,jvjUo mairu-ne. Yocat. (j^Li ma-u, *oUo ma-i-ru. ^?^ ^i^Aii ojjs The sweetheart has been won by those, who set off, placing rent upon rents (i. e. in their clothes). Sh. Abiri, YTI, 7. ^. - j- O sisters, I am simple-minded; by me unknowingly a marriage has been contracted. Sh. Abiri V, 16. n. DECLENSION. Nouns in 6 (8). SINGULAR. Nom. ji'lY-yo merak-o, crowd. Format. \ ^ lustrum. j(5f>f merak-e. Genit. ^c^ ^^r^ merak-e jo etc. Dative. ^^^ c5^'rty merake khe. Accus. yS\'U,^ merak-o (^^^ ^5"!^). SECTION n. THE INFLEXION OF NOUNS. 135 Ablat. ^jl^lj^ merak-a etc.; ^L^ ^s^^}^ merake kha. Yocat. l^t>-yo merak-a. PLURAL, Nom. ^yj^ merak-a, crowds. Format. )^^ Instrum./u'^^j^ merak-a; ^5't^ merak-e; ^Ij^xx) me- raka-tie. Genit, j^ ^j^^Y-y* merakane jo. Dative. ^^^ (j^^ t-y^ merakane khe. Accus. I^lv-yo merak-a (^^^ ^\''Lm). Ablat. ^CjSy-jjjo merakane-a etc.; ,jL^ ij-^'T-y^ mera- kane kha etc. Yocat. l^l>-yo merak-a; ^Ij^ merak-au; ji'lj^ merak-5. Having filled the dish with many pearls she gave it to the lucky one {^\^), Maj. 714. The elephant, though he walk slowly, is yet of greater price than a horse. Sh. Shiha Ked. I, 2. Get up, o mad one! be off! do not sit now here! Maj. 249. The sails are straight, the ropes are new, their chiefs are the Muhanos (fishermen). Sh. Sur. I, 12. 136 SECTION 11. THE INFLEXION OF NOUNS. Having lifted the killed one (fern.) into the paniers {^lkiS)j the friend has driven off. Sh. Abiri X, Epil. The lovers scoop out (their head) from the shoulders, says ,'Abd-ul-Latif. Sh. Kal. I, 7: . -r ^ -r 1^ ^ I ■:. .. I .. ^ , In the bottom she (i. e. the boat) has got holes; from the sides water flows in. Sh. Stir. Ill, 6. m. DECLENSION. • Nouns in u (u). SINGULAR. Nom. ^^) rahak-u, an inhabitant. Format, l^' ^^. Instrum.)/^; ^ahak-ua. - ^ :^ !.. - - Ablat. ^I^^L^r rahaku-a; ^^Lg-^^LiT rahakua kha etc. Yocat. ^^Liu rahak-u. PLURAL. Nom. ; y^^\ rahak-u, inhabitants. Format. \ C^MT. rahaku-a; ^,^\^\ rahaku-e; lustrum./'^ ^ ^*' ^ ^/.S'Li's rahakua-ne or: ^rLiv rahaku-ne. Ablat. 0La5"Li^ rahakune-a etc.; ,^1^ v:)-^'-^; rahakune kha etc. Vocat. s^rL^^T rahaku-o; U5^L5^^ rahaku-a. Grains of medicine have been given by me to the sweetheart with (my) hands. Sh. Kohiari IV, 9. SECTION 11. THE INFLEXION OF NOUNS. 137 Cause to come to Punhu this foot-traveller (fern.). Sh. Koh. IV, Epil. darling Marti, would that the Pauhars would be reconciled with me! Sh. Um. Mar. I, Epil. CI > *iLo ,^AAJ J JLXjO r.si,*M ,^,(LKS>- ,^^ u^^;*^ C5^^. ^ -^ ij}^ (5f^^ (5": Truth like gold has not fallen into the mouth of of the people. Sh. Jam. Kal. YIII, 7. By wild beasts, by ants, by birds, by (any) other speach be not misled. Sh. Kal. I, 16. Xii> ^jLxL/o ,j»A-L^ is^)^ '^ (5^^^ L^iXxjyo Marui does not wash the braids in the palaces, away from the Marus. Sh. Um. Mar. Ill, 5. By those cows, by which not a drop was given, the pots have been filled. Haz. Sar. V, 47. -<>0-- .S- 9 Do not remain, o people under the protection of Nangar (i. e. Tattha)! Yerses of the Mamuis. Note. It is a poetical license, if a noun is not inflected in the Formative for the sake of the rhyme, as: u^-^ ^s^ i^}-^ u^ (5^' u"'^^^ oy^ >^;^ High above the sky art thou, I am a wanderer upon earth (^^4^ instead of J^). Sh. Sor. I, 3. 138 SECTION II. THE INFLEXION OF NOUNS. lY. DECLENSIOK Nouns in a (^). a) feminine. SINGULAR. Nom. \^ hac-a, murder. Format. ] ^- T J. \l^ hac-a. instrum. J ••• Ablat. (,jL=^ hac-a); ^l^ L^ haca kha etc. Yocat. La^ hac-a. PLURAL. Nom. v:;^^'-^ haca-u, murders. Format. ] ^, ^ - ^ T J. ^.oL=^ nacau-ne. Instrum. J y^ ••• Ablat. ^jLuuL^ hacaune-a. Vocat. ij^LiP haca-u. h) masculine. SINGULAR. Nom. U.ir raj-a (LitJ raja), a king. Format. ], ^ .- _v _ Instrum. J • -> ^ * Ablat. (jLi^ Lii> raja kha etc. Vocat. LLlJ raj-a. PLURAL. ISTom. Lit^ raj-a, kings. Format. 1 ^^, - »- v T , r.wsL^K raiau-ne. Instrum. J Sr * > "^ Ablat. ^li^L^fJ rajaune-a; jjL^^LilJ rajaune kha etc. Vocat. pl^^ ^^J^"^- SECTION 11. THE INFLEXION OF NOUNS. 139 There is no way with those Jats, o aunt! Sh. Hus. YI, Epil. That one is with thyself, on whose account thou causest thyself troubles. Sh. Abiri III, 5. V. DECLENSION. Nouns in a. SINGULAR. Nona. JidS^ sadh-a, wish. Format. ) ^ ^ Instrum.r'^ '^'^^■^- Ablat. ^Lijuw sadh-a; ^L^^^^Jcl sadha kha etc. Vocat. .ijJ*; sadh-a. PLURAL. Nona. jjLijuL sadh-a; ^^jJL sadh-u, wishes. Format. 1 , . . ^. , . _, ^ , . ^, T f f jli^tVAv sadh-a; ^^.j^tX**; sadh-e; ^iX^ sadnu-ne. Ablat. (jLoiiX^ sadhune-a ; ^l^^tXl, sadhune kha etc. Vocat. ^LitX^ sadh-a; ^yid^ goli-a; ^L^ ^^Jj-f golia kha. Vocat. (^jj^ g5l-L PLURAL. JSTom. ^^^r goliy-u (^^>f goli-u; ^^j.f goly-u). Format. 1 ^ ^ ^ lustrum.) u'^-^i^ g^li-^5 ^^If goli-e; ^j^ golia-ne (go- lya-ne) ; ,j-Jj.f goliu-ne ; ^jyf goli-ne. Ablat. ^jLaaaJ^S^ goliane-a etc. Vocat. \jy^J^ goli-u. 142 SECTION 11. THE INFLEXION OF NOUNS. Then said the lady to her slave-girl: having risen saddle the camel! Maj. 738. ^^^^^ ^ ^^I|j ^^ ^LL^ ^^'6 ^^C> O afflicted one, forget (thy) grief; break in pieces (thy) bed, o Sacui! Sh. Ma^B. Yl, 6. The kernels of the golaros (coccinea indica) will I pick with a snap of the fingers. Sh. Una. Mar. n, Epil. They (i. e. the physicians) give a pill of mercy, having seen the pulses {^^'i^). Sh. Jam. Kal. 11 , 18. To the queens pleasure has returned; the griefs of the slave-girls have been taken off. Sh. Desi, Chot. 3. companions, my soul has been confided to the protection of my sweetheart. Sh. Desi VII, 11. YII DECLEJSTSIOK Nouns ending in e (i). SINGULAR. Nom. ^\.f galh-e, story (fem.). Format. \ ^ __ Ablat. ^Ll^LT galhe-a; ^j^^L^ galh-o etc. Yocat. ^L? galh-e. SECTION II. THE INFLEXION OF NOUNS. 143 PLURAL. Nom. jjy.^JL/^ galhe-u, stories. Format. l^-___ ^ _ ^ ^ Instrum.ju'^-^'^ gallie-a; ;j^Lf galhi-e; ^Vf gal- hea-ne; ^j^iLr galheu-ne; ,jj^\^ galhi-ne. Ablat. ^Ll^Ly galhine-a etc. Yocat. ^yju^\f galhe-u. ^'5 ^;^-^f y^ is^ "^^ (5f^ ur" vj^^^ friend, may some one show me the way to the mosque! Maj. 131. From Kake do not go anywhere! it is not right for thee, o Eano! Sh. Mum. Ran. I, Epil. 4^ U^-i^ U>->e isi)^ "^ ^^ U^ Acknowledge then Muhammad, the intercessor, out of thought and love (cf^U). Sh. Kal. I, 2. mother, I do not trust them, who shed tears, Having brought water into their eyes they show a sandhill. Sh. Jam. Kal. I, 20. The self-willed buffaloes graze the cool deserts. Having come in front of the cow-house they give fresh milk. Sh. Sar. lY, 14. 144 SECTION II. THE INFLEXION OF NOUNS. In the caldrons the limbs boil, where in the eddies a grain does not sink. Sh. Kal. 11, 27. Volumes beautiful in all ways, and other elegant books. Maj. 141. O sisters, give me by no means counsels to return! Sh. Desi yn, 6. &) Masculine nouns. SINGULAR. Nom. yj^ kehar-e, lion. Format. V ' Instrum./^ kehar-e. 1^ - Ablat. ..X^Jjn^ kehare-a etc. (J ^M Yocat. J^ kehar-e. PLURAL. N"om. y^ kehar-e, lions. Format. V ^ _ _ lustrum, ju^^ kehare-a; ^^^^ kehari-e ; ^^ ke- hari-ne. Ablat. ^jLLw^ keharine-a etc. Vocat. py^ kehare-o. This in the business of the lion, that he strikes his hand into the elephant. Sh. Shiha Ked. 7. SECTION n. THE INFLEXION OF NOUNS. 145 Chapter IX. Adjectives. §. 19. The Sindhi adjectives and participles have the same terminations as the substantives and may there- fore be classed under the same heads as the substan- tives. The general rule, that the adjective must agree with its substantive in gender, number and case, holds good in Sindhi likewise. In reference to the gender no exception takes place; but if an adjective or participle be referred to two pre- ceding substantives, the one of which is masculine, the other feminine, the adjective or participle follows in the Plural masculine, as: U^^'^ U^^ ^f}^ T\ >J He created them male and female. Gen. I, 27. With regard to the number the following ex- ception takes place. When an adjective precedes a noun in the inflected case of the Plural, it may remain in the inflected case of the Singular, as: ^ ^^ ^j^ to false prophets, or: ^^T^a^ ^j^ The same is the case, when an adjective precedes a noun in the Vocative Plural, the adjective being then commonly put in the Vocative Singular, as: iL&jCo s^^iXL^ (^1 o Sindhi men! instead of: Li=*Lo U^Jclw ^|. But it does not fall under this head, when an adjective or participle is referred to a preceding substantive fol- lowed by the postposition ^ khe; for in this case there exists no grammatical connexion between the ad- jective and substantive, but the adjective is used ab- solutely as: Trumpp, Sindhi- Grammar. K 146 SECTION II. THE INFLEXION OF NOUNS. He saw those two brothers throwing their net into the sea. Matth. lY, 18. I thought the hills high. As to the case it may be observed, that ad- jectives, which end in i and u may remain unin- flected, when immediately followed by a substantive in the Formative, as: Do not make a journey in the caravan of vin- dictive men! ^W ^T^'^ ^>rf. ^y^i ^ C5f^ To both the helpless there was in many ways pleasant conversation. Maj. 198. An adjective, following a substantive, may be put in the Ablative case, whereas the preceding substantive is only put in the Formative, as: " f " " ' •*• t>T k"' i'' i"'' " " ^ I He who has come from the grand-father's countr}^, has given me a reproach. Sh. Um. Mar. H, 2. When an adjective precedes or follows a noun in the contracted form of the Formative Plural, it as- sumes the same form, as: "Wicked men forsake. I seek in many ways the mercy of others. Sh. Jam. Kal. Y, Epil. I. 1) ^xl^S is contracted instead of ■^^•-^aa SECTION 11. THE INFLEXION OF NOUNS. 147 <5?^. y^ (j^H ^'ji^ (J^<^Lj ^JtXjLf By the burning coals of the thorn and babul tree I am indeed roasted! Sh. Jam. Kal. Ill, 3. Adjectives precede, as a rule, their substan- tives, as: Man sees with his small eye the world. Good, fragrant, sweet -smelling food was contained therein. An adjective may also follow its substantive, es- pecially when the adjective contains more syllables than its substantive, as: The stars from the day of beginning are, without having deviated from their fixed intervals, in full turning. Two and more adjectives very frequently follow their substantive as: ^^^ 4>l^l -g-^*w [JL^ )^^^ ^■€-% L/'i^ sweet and charming friend, make the whole earth blooming! Sh. Sar. lY, 12. .4js\/o |*^r ^^ jj"^. tX-V6-? ^r^l (5^'^ ^-^L^ feltX^ By the knowing and wise God such secrets have been explained in his word. K2 148 SECTION n. THE INFLEXION OF NOUNS. To adjectives, as well as to substantives^ very fre- quently an emphatic i accedes in all cases, signifying 'very', 'quite', 'truly', without altering in any way the termination of the adjective (the feminine Singular of adjectives ending in o alone being excepted; see §. 20, 2), as: SiJCcs^jl ocitoi, quite accidental; ^^aaj^^ yaribei (Sing, fem.) very humble. O companion, make preparation of the very instant journey! Golden Alph. I, 1. §. 20. Formation of gender. With reference to the derivation of the feminine from masculine nouns the general rules, which have been laid down in Chapter YII, §. 14, are equally ap- plicable to adjectives. Some minor points, in which ad- jectives differ in this respect from substantives of the same termination, will be noticed under the following heads. 1) Adjectives ending in 'u'. These change the masc. termination 'u' either to 'e' (i) or to 'a', as: litXj nidharu, helpless, fem. vitXJ nidhare or: IStXj nidhara. U^i^ ^j-fi^r*"^ <^7"^' }^^i 7^^^ Porlorn, helpless, wretched, unacquainted I am! Sh. Abiri YIII, 1. Some adjectives of Sindhi origin, but more so those borrowed from the Arabic or Persian, remain without any change of gender, number and case, as: ^IZ, sarsu, SECTION IL THE INFLEXION OF NOUNS. 149 ?• <- plentiful (s.); ^ri ^^Li^/o Those who have died before dying, they are not done for when dead. Sh. Ma?Bu.ri TV, 7. ^ (j^;^ U-f-^ ^;'^ ^'; erf tj^^o y^ By the medicine, which is in the mouth of the physicians, they have been made whole. Sh. Jam. Kal. n, 17. Those who have looked about with men, will there be put to shame. Maj. 266. 2) Adjectives ending in o (o). These change the masc. termination to i (i); as: ^i^ kuro, false, fem. ^i^ kuri; ^j-^j nao, new, fem. ,j^j nai. When an adjective or participle ends in y5 (or io), being preceded by a consonant, the y (i) is dropped be- fore the fem. termination i, as: j-x^J dukhyo or: j^.^0 dukhio, pained, fem. ^^c> dukhi; j.^ kio, done, fem. ^S ki; but j.^^^ pio, fallen (Part. perf. from ^^) makes its feminine ^Lo pel, not pi. When yo however is preceded by a vowel, the feminine is formed regularly 150 SECTION II. THE INFLEXION OF NOUNS. in yi, as: ^j^ cayo, said (Part. perf. from ^^j^a^), fern, ^^i cayi; ^ kayo, made (another form of the part. perf. of ^^''S)^ fern. ^^ kayi; jjI ayo, come (part. perf. from (j;^!), fem. ^} ayi; but the y may just as well be dropped in such like forms, as: cai, kai, ai etc. When the emphatic i accedes to the feminine Sin- gular, then the masc. termination o is changed to yai in the Nominative, as: u^ muno, blunt, with the em- phatic i in the feminine: ^Ljax> munyai; but the other cases of the feminine are quite regular, and hardly ever found with an emphatic i. Look, says Latif, what credit (is given) to pieces of straw! Sh. Suh."vm, 1. J^ l(3 data, masc. and fem., liberal; ,jSG tala, masc. and fem., worried. The greater number of them is indeclinable, as: Isuo safa, pure (a.); Qi fana, extinct (a.); ^^^, pha, tired; ItXa- juda, se- parate (p.). SECTION 11. THE INFLEXION OF NOUNS. 151 5) Adjectives ending in a. They admit of no change of gender and are all indeclinable^), as: {X^i>j vadhika, excessive; ^^ suiia, empty, barren; JLit> dhara, separate, or compounded: rLit>jsLi4> dharodhara; JL^i jala or "^Li jara, much; "A^ jama, much. (His i. e. God's) life is with the life of every one; but the aspect is quite different. Sh. Kal. I, 24. ^^AX> lX:)c> L:^ ^^.^J^ c5^(3 \Hi> 'iS^O ItX:^ y^ Whose heads (are) asunder, the trunks separated, the limbs in the caldron. Sh. Kal. 11, 24. 6) Adjectives ending in i (i). These remain unchanged in the feminine, as: ^^Li bari, carrying a burden, masc. and fem.; ^i^\^ sa- yadi, savoury, masc. and fem.; some are only used in the feminine. 7) Adjectives ending in e (i). They do not differ in the feminine , like those ending in i; as: (j^j^ caurase, masc. and fem., square. Most of them are indeclinable, chiefly those of foreign origin, e. g.: j»tXw sudhe, pure; j^yc> dadhe, wrong; ^^^ mukhe. 1) Stack exliibits in his Sindhi Grammar the paradigma y-^^-^ sakhara and inflects it in the Formative Plural; but in his Dictionary he gives v-^Xjuw sakharu, which is the proper termination. I have never met with an adjective ending in 'a', inflected in any way, for the cardinal numbers ^^:> panja five etc. can hardly be classed under this head. ^ 152 SECTION II. THE INFLEXION OF NOUNS. supreme; ifiy-^ x^^e (p.), pleasant (generally pronounced short and partly also written (ji^); t>Lxo sade (p.), joyful; JQ barabare (p.), abreast, right; ^L^ bajae (p.), per- formed. The feminine affixes ni, ne, ani (yani), aine (yaine) are occasionally used with adjectives ending in u, o, Uj i, if some inherent quality, habit or occu- pation of living beings is to be marked out (the details see Chapter VII, §. 14), as: r^■^=^ ch^r^ '^ai>Yi- bine chokare, a girl (habitually) humble; ^J ^it>Llw sadhuni rana, a (thoroughly) virtuous widow; ^^ti ^ilJ^j.P^ hodiyam daci, an obstinate (female) camel. We subjoin here a survey of the inflexion of ad- jectives, 1) Adjectives ending in 'u'. SINGULAR. Feminine. Nom. Format. Vocat. Nom. Format. Yocat. Masculine. v::^£s^l acetu, 1 thoughtless. .! aceta. aceta. xcs^t aceta; oti^^l acete. ,, ^ I aceta. (j^^i&^l acete, etc ATS. I aceta; o«jy^l acete. I " 'i xs^] aceta; v:>.-y^l acete. PLUKAL. acetu ; ^J-""^ I acetane. I acetune; etc. acetiu. acetine. etc. 1aA£^ I aceto. acetu ; acetiu. SECTION 11. THE INFLEXION OF NOUNS. 153 2) Adjectives ending in o. SINGULAR. Masculine. Feminine. Kom. ^f' ruklio, dry. is"^) ^'^^^i- Format, ^^-^l rukhe. j)^r^) I'ukhiyu (rukkiu), ^j-j^j rukbe etc. (j>4^; rukhine etc. Format. < ' ^j.^fj rukhane. Yocat. 14^ rukha; ^$^ ^Tf^) r^kliiyu. rukha-u ; ^fl ruklio. SINGULAR. Nom. (jj^0 agio, prior, ^j-^l agi. Format. ,j-v^l agie. ^jj^\ agia. Vocat. ^Ll^i agia. j^C^ agi. PLURAL. JSTom. ^^^ agia. Ur^^' agiyu (agin). j^n agie etc. ^f] agine etc. ^A^l agiane. Vocat. (j^^ agia; ^T^^ agiyu (agiu), ^A^^i agiau; ^fl agio. Format. < 154 SECTION II. THE INFLEXION OF NOUNS. 3) Adjectives ending in u. SINGULAR. Masculine. Feminine. Nom. y.^ saM, patient, y^ saliu. Format. ^^ sahua. Vocat. ^^ sahu. y^^ sahua. y^.Zj sahti. PLURAL. Nom. ^aL sahu. ■ ^j-j^^ sahue etc. Format. ^ C5^ r^" ^ ^/ uH^ ^H ^;'^. The wife, whom thou hast respected, having loved her more than thy Lord (Plur.). Mengho 8. SECTION II. THE INFLEXION OF NOUNS. 157 If thou likest to meet (thy) friend, then esteem virtue more than vices. Sh. Jam. Kal. VIII, 22. Whosoever break one of these least commandments and teach the people thus, he will be called the least in the kingdom of heaven. Matth. V, 19. Chapter X. Numeral adjectives. §• 22. The Sindhi possesses a great variety of numeral adjectives. I. The CARDmAL NUMBERS are: \ jCjbb hiku; jC^ heku; (X)l eku; j^^ hikiro; j^^^^ hekiro, one. ^ ^ ba, two. r ^J tre, three. f X^ care, four. d ^j panja, five. ^ ..^ cha, or: .^s> chaha, six. V vILv^ sata, seven. A ^'1 atha, eight. ^ ^pj nava, nine. 158 SECTION 11. THE INFLEXION OF NOUNS. t* .a daha, ten. ^^ U^;^ yaralia; ,j^J(^| ikaraha; ^"s^ karaha, eleven. ^^ c^^;^ baraha, twelve. ft** ij^Zf^ teraha, thirteen. ff jj^^j^ codaha, fourteen. td ^JtXlS pandraha; ^C^oJOj pandlira, fifteen. \'i J>i;3-w s5ralia, sixteen. rv ^2^^P^ satraha, seventeen. lA \j^'i^ araha, eighteen. \^ ^il uniha, ^^^t univiha, nineteen. !*♦ ^« viha, twenty. Annotation. The Sindhi numerals are all derived from the Sanskrit by the medium of the Prakrit. — Sansk. XXoR one, Prak. ^Ig; in Sindhi a euphonic h has been preposed, as: hiku (= hikku). When commencing to count the Hindus use to say instead of hiku: '■^^ barkhu, and the Musalmans: * tre vanjaha, fifty four. di^ .Sil^^j.^ covanjaha, fifty three, dd ^Q^js^j panj vanjaha, fifty five, di" ,5&Q*Lg.5^ chavanjaha, fifty six. dv ^t^^i^ satvanjaha, fifty seven. ^ -"- ^"^ dA ^l^^-gil athvanjaha, fifty eight. ^ --? d*l -^^^if unahathe, fifty nine. t* .^^1 sathe, sixty. .4icl sathe and J:! satare, when preceded by the SECTION n. THE INFLEXION OF NOUNS. 163 units, are changed, for euphony's sake, to ha the and hat a re, initial (and now medial) s being softened to h. The same is the case in Panjabi, but in Hindustani and Marathi the s of sath is retained, whereas that of sat tar is softened to h. ir .^Jc^Jol ekahathe, sixty one. "i^ -^^L? bahathe, sixty two. H^ j^L^^Js trehathe, sixty three, it^ -^^j^ cohathe, sixty four. ^t ^^x^jsxj panjahathe, sixty five. "i^ j^\u^ chahathe, sixty six. *iv -4!^^ satahathe, sixty seven. Hk j^\ii\ athahathe, sixty eight -'-■'' 1^ v^^ unahatare, sixty nine. V SL satare, seventy. vl y^^jQ^ ekahatare, seventy one. vi* v^LS bahatare, seventy two. vt" r^.p>* trehatare, seventy three, vt^ 7^3^ cohatare, seventy four. " ^ ^ ^^ ^ sd v^^(^l eko sau, or: yLSdii\ ekotarsau, one hundred (and) one. \*^ y^ y'Lj biro sau, or: yll^^yj birotarsau, one hundred (and) two. 1*1" ^ jvwj triro sau, or: ^wjj.o* trirotarsau, one hundred (and) three. \*^ y^ j'iy^ coro sau, or: y^Jiu^ corotarsau, one hundred (and) four. Ud y^ j-sxj panjo sau, or: y^Jiy^ panjotarsau, one hundred (and) five. dh, wliicli would be a surprising phenomenon in a modern Prakrit idiom. In regard to vadhanave it would be necessary to assume a change of n to v, of which we could not adduce another instance. 166 SECTION II. THE INFLEXION OF NOUNS. f«1 ^ }^s^ chah5 saUj or: yL^^^^c^ cbahotarsau, one hundred (and) six. Uv y^j ^XjlL satyo sau, or: yU^^xL sat5tarsau, one hundred (and) seven. I ♦A yjj >^'' athyo sau, or: yjjJSyj^S athotarsau, one hundred (and) eight. f*1 y^ fy^ naro sau, or: ^wj»jp narotarsau, one hundred (and) nine. H* yZj ^st'i dah5 sau, or: yl^jSyS^'i dahotarsau, one hundred (and) ten. ftt y^ 3^;'-^ yarah5 sau, or: ^iLlSj^'^lS yarahotarsau , one hundred (and) eleven. nf y^ 5^;^ baraho sau, or: ^lSj.;e^lo barahdtarsau, one hundred (and) twelve. ft I" yL yS^y^ teraho sau, or: y^JJi^'U^ terahdtarsau , one hundred (and) thirteen. t(f y^ }^^y^ codahd sau, or: ^ISjjd^^:^^ codahdtarsau, one hundred (and) fourteen. Ud yZj yS^\iXXj pandraho sau, or: ^ISj^s^J^Ij pandhr5- tarsau, one hundred (and) fifteen. HI y^ y^")}^ soraho sau, or: ^ILISj-p^j^av s5rhotarsau, one hundred (and) sixteen. I(v yL yS^Jii^ satrah5 sau, or: ^Jj.s^'lxL satrah5tarsau, one hundred (and) seventeen. Ha y^ yS^'li araho sau, or: yMyS^s^'ii arahotarsau, one hundred (and) eighteen. IH y^ H^' uniho sau, or: ylj''3j,^\ unihotarsau, one hundred (and) nineteen. Wo yL y^^^ viho sau, or: y^JSy^i^ vihotarsau, one hundred (and) twenty. SECTION 11. THE INFLEXION OF NOUNS. 167 \Y\ ^^ >-6-V^J ekiho sau, or: ^j>j.^aXjI ekihotarsau, one hundred (and) twenty one. W^ yl^ i-^9^ baviho sau, or: ^iSj^^Lj bavihotarsau, one hundred (and) twenty two. etc. etc. !["♦ y^ j^.y^ trih5 sau, or: ^L^j-^^J>* trihotarsau, one hundred (and) thirty. \f* y^ y^)^ caliho sau, or: y^JSyjy^\^ cahhotarsau, one hundred (and) forty. tfl yL j-gjJL£^J eketaliho sau, or: yL^JSyj^\jijS^\ eketa- lihotarsau, one hundred (and) forty one. etc. etc. Id* yL j^Lio panjaho sau, or: ^L^ySS^C^^ panjahdtarsau, one hundred (and) fifty. f^* yL j.A^-1 sathyo sau, or: ^lljj^^l sathy5tarsau , one hundred (and) sixty. fv* y^ y^y^ satary5 sau, or: ^^j.jJLl sataryotarsau, one hundred (and) seventy. \K* y^ y^jjy] asyo sau, or: y^Ji^j^] asyotarsau, one hundred (and) eighty. \ yjj^ yjy^ naviyo sau, or: y^Jiyjyj naviyotarsau, [y^ j^ji noyo sau, or: pLljjjji noyotarsau, one hundred (and) ninety. When the numeral adjectives of the first series pre- cede the Plural of ^ sau, they must agree with their substantive in number, as: !"♦( (LO or) 1^ J KjI eka ba sava (or sa), literally: two hundreds having or possessing one. !'♦(' y^ ^ 1^ bira ba sava, two hundred and two, etc. etc. etc. 168 SECTION 11. THE INFLEXION OF NOUNS. These numerals are not used in the Formative, as they are only employed in counting. The numerals of the second series remain unaltered, according to their original signification. The hundreds are regularly made up by the Plural 01 ^M/ J as I {"♦♦ (l^ or) jLl ^ ba sava (or sa) two hundred. $"♦♦ ^I< (5 J tre sava, three hundred. f"** "yL ^Li care sava, four hundred. *♦♦ ^ ^0 panja sava, five hundred. I** "yL .^ cha sava, six hundred. \** pi/ o^ sata sava, seven hundred. A*» ^Iw ..pi atha sava, eight hundred. V* ^ ^y.j nava sava, nine hundred. ,A^ sahasu (= sahassu),] ^^^ thousand. [jlC^ hazaru, J \(^y^a^ saliasa,L^^ thousand. ("IlCi .J ba hazara, J !♦♦♦♦♦ J^ lakhu, one hundred thousand. {"♦♦♦♦♦ j^ J ba lakha, two hundred thousand. !♦♦♦♦♦♦ j^ ^S daha lakha, one million. '\^^ kirore,] iten milHons (one hundred lakhs). !♦♦♦♦♦♦< y^ koru, vj^r J ba kirore , ki^ ^ ba kora, twenty millions. (♦♦♦♦♦♦♦♦♦ y*| arbu, one thousand millions (one hundred kar5rs). (♦♦♦♦♦♦♦♦♦♦♦ uj 1^ kharbu, one hundred thousand millions (one hundred arbs). SECTION II. THE INFLEXION OF NOUNS. 169 !♦♦♦♦♦♦♦♦♦♦♦♦♦ Juj nilu, ten billions (one hundred kharbs). {♦♦♦♦♦♦♦♦♦♦♦♦♦♦♦ ^j^j padamu, one thousand billions (one hundred nils). Annotation. (jw»^-w sahasu is derived from the Sansk. TT^^j Prak. ^^^. It is a regular substantive and inflected accor- dingly. &r^ hazaru (s. m.) is of Persian origin. — -4^J lakhu, Sansk. ^^; Hindust. lak (and lakh); Marathl lakh; it is like- wise treated as a substantive masc. — ':iS' kirore (Sansk. "^f?) is not inflected, v^^hereas >^5 koru is treated as a regular sub- stantive. The follov^ing numerals, which belong more to the realm of fancy, are all substantives, as: ^^"1, Sansk. ^''^^J ^y^^ Sansk. ^l^^? J^, Sansk. ? [♦tVj, Sansk. "R^. §. 23. Inflexion of the cardinal numbers. m.; JC56 fern, etc.); the other numerals have no change of gender, but are inflected in the Formative Plural, as: ^ ba, two; Format. Plural: ^ bine. (5 J)* tre, three; „ „ ^JS trine. 5, ,5 u>?^ caine. „ „ jj*^5 panjane. 5? 75 i^-i-iT^ chahane. „ „ jjJCaw satane. „ „ ^^\ athane. „ „ ^yjJi navane. „ „ ^j dahane. 1 ^L:^ care, four; 1.; panja , five; 4^ cha. six; viLul saha, seven; ^yt atha, eight; ^y^ nava, nine; ^(3 daha, ten; 170 SECTION 11. THE INFLEXION OF NOUNS. The following numerals, from eleven -eighten, throw final Anusvara off in the Formative Plural and drop the short a, preceding h, as; ^ji^Lj yaraha, eleven; Format. Plur. ^"X}, yarhane. ^j^Uj baraha, twelve; 5J „ ;j^jL? barhane. ij-iUi teraha, thirteen; ^jj.s. codaha, fourteen; 5? „ ij^C^y terhane. ?5 ^Ji%r^ codhane. ^^ pandrahaL^^^^^. ^jlyajdj pandhra, T) „ ^y^tXlI pandhrane. 4^^ viha, twenty; 7? „ ,j4:J^ vihane. Those numerals, which end in e (i) and e, are not capable of inflexion, as: ^^ sathe, sixty; yX^ satare, seventy; ^^ nave or &J.3 n5e, ninety; but ^^1 asi, eighty, makes the Format. Sing. " a^I asia. yl^ sa-u, hundred; is inflected, as follows: SING. PLUR. Nom. yZj sau; 11 sava, or contracted IL sa. Format. ^ sava; ^j^ savane, ^11 sane, ^^ save, cJ^ sae. The cardinal numbers, chiefly the decimal ones, are also used as collective numbers, and in this case they are inflected according to their respective ter- minations, e. g. ^^i<3 ^^yJ tre dahu, three tens. For- mative ^s^'i ^J>* trine dahune; ^^jl^L^ ^Li care satheu, four sixties; ^yj nave forms the Plural ,j^y naveu, Format. ,j^j*i naveune. When used in a collective sense these numerals are mostly put in the Formative Plural SECTION n. THE INFLEXION OF NOUNS. 171 ending in e, as: ,j.-v4:?^ vllie, in scores; ^,yL save, in hundreds, ^-;«ww^ sahase, in thousands. When a noun in the Formative Phiral takes the termination ne or e, the preceding numeral, Hke all other adjectives, must take the same too, or: ^^^ ^wj^ ^ic> to ten enemies, or: ^^ ^^^wj^ ^j-t^'^- ^ ^^^ \Sy^ do not admit of a Formative in e, but make it i, as: ^j^j bi, ^.vJ tri; of nL^ there is a Formative as well in 1 as in e; ^j-a^ cai or: ^-v^ cae; but the Forma- tives bi , tri , cai are also used with Formatives of nouns ending in ne. The emphatic i (hi) may also be affixed to the cardinal numbers to ex]3ress completeness or inten- sity, as: ^^ bai or: ^Jj.i bei, all two = both, For- mative Plural: ^-^ binhi or: ,j-v4^ binhi; or: ^j-^ binhine, ^^a^L binhini. ^Aj>y trei, all three, Formative Plural: ^^>^ trinhi or: ^j-^^ trinhi; or: ^j^J trin- hine, ^^-^y^ trinhini. ^)^ carai or: ^^AjjLi carei, all four, Formative Plural: ^^^^ caini. ^^^'I athai, all eight. Formative Plural: ^v^^ athani, etc. The cardinal numbers, from two upwards generally require their substantive in the Plural; but they may also be constructed with the Singular, after the manner of the Persian. Sau, hazaru, sahasu, lakhu etc., being properly substantives, are either constructed with the Genitive Plural of the following substantive, or they have the same coordinated in the Plural. The numerals preceding a substantive may either be inflected according to the termination of the substantive or they may remain 172 SECTION 11. THE INFLEXION OF NOUNS. uninflected; when two or more numerals precede a sub- stantive, the last only is inflected. Do not forget the words; in youth there are two, three short days. Sh. Jam. Kal. Y, Epil. "=^5 istr^ ^7^ >^ J^;5 ^f u>^ Having taken provisions of two, three years, depart. Amulu Maniku, Stack's Grram. p. 147. Being unwell she weeps much all the eight watches with grief Maj. 562. ^1^ (^A^ (5^>^ e^L>i ^^ ^^j^ ^3 ^S^ Man has come into the midst of ten enemies — That young man, who wins the battle out of the midst of all these ten enemies etc. Sh. Barvo Sindhi, Chot. 18. .^icl; ^ ^1 ^L5 ^*^ .j^ ^ ^ ^=^ c^f^ Under whose command are sixty, eighty bond-maids; those sixty, eighty bond-maids have pellet-bows in their hands. Amulu Maniku, p. 141. In that very palace one hundred Fairies also will dance near the Dev Sufedu. Then he will say: if thou SECTION 11. THE INFLEXION OF NOUNS- 173 causest these hundred Fairies to sit down and showest me a dancing etc. Amulu Maniku, p. 144. ^^•^ ^y^ '"'^ ^y^ (5^ 07^ j daho, the tenth. ^jj.;&jl^ karho, J ^j.5^!Lj barho, the twelfth. ^jj&ljo terho, the thirteenth. ^j.5>Oi^ codho, the fourteenth. ^}6^ pandraho, j ^^^ ^^^^^^^^^^ ^j^^ijaS pandhro, J ^s.;ii^j^ sorho, the sixteenth. ^•jDjcXw satraho, the seventeenth. SECTION II. THE INFLEXION OF NOUNS. 175 ^j.5&l-l arho, the eighteenth, ^j..^^! uniho, the nineteenth. ^j-^j. viho, the twentieth. ^j^jGI ekiho, the twenty first. ^j.^.Lj b'BViho, the twenty second, etc. etc. ^}^>^ triho, the thirtieth. ^^i^jLa. caliho, the fortieth. ^j.;oL^, panjaho; the fiftieth. ^jj^xL sathyo, the sixtieth. jj^l;u2 sataryo, the seventieth. ^j.-^f asyo, the eightieth. ^^"r ^ ' I the ninetieth. ^jj.Ajj.S naveo, J ^^^ saviyo, ^j.jp« sau-o ^it-vAAA^ sai-0 J the hundredth. Of compound numbers only the last takes the form of the ordinal and is inflected, as: jjj.jl^, ^ JCp hiku sau peheryo, the one hundred and first. ^}ity^ -^ ba saviyo, the two hundredth. jXi l^ Z ha> sa bio, the two hundred and second. ■^3;ip hazaro, j ^^^ tj^ousandth. jjj„u*^.^ sahaso, 176 SECTION 11. THE INFLEXION OF NOUNS. Annotation. The ordinals are regularly derived from the Prakrit; ^y^y^^^ peheryo, the first, though, has not followed the traces of the Prakrit i—z X(^^^ but taken its own course of assimilation; Sansk. lil"^^, thence: pahama; the m of pa- hama has been changed in a rather unusual way to 1 (r), pahala, pahara, thence the Sindhi: pahary8 or peheryo. Hindust. and Panjabi: pahila, MarathT likewise: pahila. i^j bio, the second, points back to the Prakrit cfT^ (shortened from f^fr^) and the other form i^o bijo, corresponds to thePrak. r^^mf. ^A trio, the third, coincides with the Prakrit nT^? ^i^h this dif- ference, that original r has been preserved in Sindhi. ^y^^^ coth5, the fourth, Prakrit x(^^; the original dental (th) has been preserved in Sindhi. The following ordinals are all re- gularly derived from the cardinals, by adding the affix o cor- responding to the Sansk. affix rTH? which has in Sindhi been changed to o by the elison of t (co-mpare: In trod. §. 9). In Hindustani and Panjabi tama has been similarly changed to vS, in Marathi to va; the Gujarat! has preserved the affix mo, and the Bangali even the whole affix tarn. §. 25. Inflexion of the ordinals. The ordinals are regularly inflected as adjectives according to their respective terminations: SINGULAR. Masculine. Feminine. Norn. {j}irH peheryo. »j-"7fv P^^^^^i- Format. ^jI^. pehere. (P/f v P^lieria. * Yocat. ^L^>4^. pelierya. u^?rt^. pelieri. PLUKAL. Nom. ^LSj^j pelierya. u^/f^. peheryu. Format. ^j^l^i>, peherye. vj^j-ff, peherye (peherie). SECTION n. THE INFLEXION OF NOUNS. 177 Format. < ^\i"jfj peherya. ^.y^. pelieryane. Vocat. U^T^. peherya. ^w§j peherine. ^j'^^ peheryune. ^Gj^. peherya. u^'i^i^. peheryu. >:?7f^, peheryd. ^!^^ peheryau. > ^. 9 ^' His first own enemy is the unlucky, wretched, ignorant man. Sh. Barvo Sindhi, Chot. 18. JoJ^ ysL-ww '-j^j.r ^-ir L^$^ In the fort of Kufa are happy the heroes clad in armour, The first are the brothers, the second the nephews, the third the beloved friends. Sh. Keel. Ill, 2. On the twenty first (date) self was forgotten to (=z by) the lover; Consciousness became hidden with the beloved on the twenty second. Maj. 518, 519. On the eleventh day the kindness of the Beragis returned. Sh. Eamak. II, 11. The date of the year is not expressed by the or- dinals, but by the cardinals: Trumpp, Sindhi-Grammar, M 178 SECTION 11. THE INFLEXION OF NOUNS. On the twenty seventh of the blessed month of Ra- mazan, according to calculation, In the night of power the story was completed, on a Tuesday. It was the year of the Hijrat eleven hundred thirty six (= A. D. 1724, 8*^ June). By Fazil was composed the science of the love of the wise ones (i. e. Sufis). Maj. 829. §. 26. ni. AEITHMETIOAL FIGURES. The arithmetical figures or names of the numbers are expressed by adjectives, which are formed by adding the adjective affix o to the cardinal numbers; some few have also, in order to distinguish the arithmetical figures from the ordinals, the affix ko. iXjl eko, p^ hiko, containing the number 'one'; the number or figure 'one'. j.jG biko, the number 'two'. j.5lj triko, ?5 7 , 'three'. y^\s^ caiiko, 11 1 'four'. >^e P^^J^' I) 5 'five'. ^jC^^ chako. 5? 5 , 'six'. iA*M sat5. 11 1 , 'seven'. ^^sS atho, jj 1 , 'eight'. SECTION II. THE INFLEXION OF NOUNS. 179 ^pb nao, the number 'nine'. ^o daho, ?5 55 'ten'. ^JLj yarho, ?? 55 'eleven'. j.5slj barho, ?5 5? 'twelve'. jjOwo" terho. ?5 55 'thirteen'. jjfiSj^ codho, 55 55 'fourteen'. jji\ JOj pandraho 5 55 55 'fifteen'. yS^l}^ sorho, 55 55 'sixteen'. yS^yXjj^ satraho. 5? 55 ' seventeen '. ^jj arho, 5J 55 ' eighteen '. j^^^f unili55 55 55 'nineteen'. >^; vitio, 55 55 'twenty'. j-^j^l ekihoj 55 55 'twenty one'. etc. etc. j^y>* triho, 55 55 'thirty'. ^^L^ caliho, 55 55 'forty'. jjclr^, panjaho, 5? 55 'fifty'. ^.^ sathyo, 55 55 'sixty'. jjlxl satary5, 55 55 'seventy'. J.-U*;! asyo, 55 55 'eighty'. jj^ naviyo, 55 55 'ninety'. j-}^ saviyo, 55 55 'hundred'. They are regiL larly inflected as adjectives ending in 5; LX;^ J two units ' s?f' >^' }^"^^ ^H u^^ ^r^ ^^^'^^^ the number three comes the number four. the sum of twenty; about twenty, the sum of thirty; about thirty. 180 SECTION 11. THE INFLEXION OF NOUNS. §• 27. ly. COLLECTIVE NUMBEKS. We have noticed already (§. 22), that the cardinal numbers may also be employed as collective numbers; but the Sindhi possesses also a peculiar kind of nu- merals, which express an aggregate sum; these are: jS'lio dahako, the sum of ten; about ten. 3^L^^ vihar5, 3^14:?^ viharo, j^LiJ triharo, j^L^^sJ triharo, I ^sU^L^. calhyaro, the sum of forty; about forty. Sf?^^ panjahi, ^^^ ^^^ ^^ ^^^^. ^^^^^ ^^^^ s.5sLio panjaho, J ijCw.^*Llw sathiko, the sum of sixty, about sixty. They are properly adjectives, formed by the affixes ko (§. 10, 24) and ar5, as: j.^LSo dahako, making ten; j.Li. viraho, containing twenty. They may be con- structed either as substantives with the noun in the Ge- nitive, or as numeral adjectives, e. g.: ^ ^"S^^ j.$^Lij ten boys, literally: a decade of boys, or: v^j-^^ jfl^o. To express more distinctly the indefiniteness of such a number, the adverb ^^ khanu (literally: piece, por- tion, Sansk. IJf^) is added to them as well as to the cardinal numbers; e. g. ^"^ ^jli^ viharo khanu, about twenty. La^ y^^/0 ^J^S j\-^Si> ^J They were about five thousand men. Matth, 14, 21. SECTION II. THE INFLEXION OF NOUNS. 181 JsJ^^ cauku, i^'j^y^ caukiri, the sum of four, ^'iy^ kori, a score, are only used substantively, the latter generally in the Formative Plural ^/jj.^ kore, in scores, as: L^ ^S JL.^ \j^^)i^ LiLX^ ^ju^M,^ In thousands are the thanksgivings, in scores the favours of the kind one (i. e. God). Sh. Surag I, Epil. 1. jjXil saikiro, a hundred, is only used when speaking of interest, expressing our "per cent", as: j^sLijf ;^^a1; vJ"^^) (J^^V^^. ^ir55) L.W ^ I borrowed two hundred rupees at five rupees by the hundred (i. e. at five per cent). The percentage may also be expressed by an adjective (a so-called Bahuvrihi, cf. §. 12, II, 5), compounded of the respective amount and the adjective otiro, 'having above', as: ^ yy^y^} one hundred having one above it, i. e. one per cent; ^-w jyJJw^ two per cent. yL iyij)y^ three per cent. etc. etc. Of the same kind are the compound adjectives, such as : (yjl) 3^1^ cauano (sau), one hundred having four Annas, i. e. 4 Annas per cent; (ylu) j-AiLjvj tripanyo (sau), one hundred having three quarters of a rupee, i. e. at three quarters of a rupee per cent, etc. When ^jlc miti (interest) is used, ^ is omitted, as: ^Xjo ^^y^ysa^X^o^ interest of one and a half 182 SECTION II. THE INFLEXION OF NOUNS. §. 28. Y. PEOPORTIONAL NUMBERS. The numerals denoting 'fold', are: •j«.Xa5> hekuno, p'y^^ hekuto, JJ.AJ bino, 1 single. twofold. ^j^-t^ trino, threefold. jjb bito. ^^ >.^ cauno, f^^^^^j^ p^ cauno, J ji^-kxj panjuno, fivefold. ji^^^ chahtino, sixfold. ^yjj^ sattino, sevenfold. jj^^j'l athuno, eightfold, ji^ nauno, ninefold. ^ys^c> dahuno, tenfold. ji^ifi^Lj yarhuno, elevenfold. ^^50^ IJ barhtino, twelvefold. ji^5&wo terhuno, thirteenfold. ^^c>y:^ codhuno, fourteenfold. jijjyc jjj pandhruno, fifteenfold. ^.iyojj.^ sorhiino, sixteenfold. ji»i>lxl satrahuno, seventeenfold. jj«i>vl arhuno, eighteenfold. si -4-^5^ tinihuno, nineteenfold. P^y vihuno, twentyfold. SECTION II. THE INFLEXION OF NOUNS. 183 ji^j^-^Xjl ekihuno, twenty- onefold. ji^-^J* triliuno, fortyfold. p^^l^ calihuno, fortyfold. ji^^cL^do panjahuno, fiftyfold. ^^-<^IL sathyuno, sixtyfold. ii^wA^, sataryuno, seventyfold. ji^^yw.1 asyuno, eightyfold. ^'iyi^.yi naveund, ninetyfold. ji^-Jw sauno, hundredfold. In the same way the affix Lino (c£ §. 10, 28) is added to the fractional numbers, as: ji«i>t>l adhtino, one half-fold. ji^l^ savauno, one (or a certain sum) and a quarter- fold. ii5i^JJ<*> dedhuno, one and a half- fold. ^^Lijl aclhauno, two and a half- fold. When he has been brought over by you, then you make him twofold more a child of hell, than yourselves. Matth. 23, 15. (sf ^y^ Cff '^r^. ^ ^ (5^' (5^7^'^ ^5^ ^ '-^ Other seeds fill upon good land; these brought forth fruit, some hundredfold, some sixtyfold, some thirtyfold. Matth. 13, 8. 184 SECTION II. THE INFLEXION OF NOUNS. §• 29. VI REDUPLICATIVE NUMBERS. The numeral adverbs, denoting reduplication, are. ^LX-^ hekara, "Sj^^ hekara, j ^Lgj bihara. once. j^. bihara , "^LiJj* trihara, ff\ J* trihara, twice. thrice. >Lis.:a. cohara, p ,. ) ^'' ' > lour times. lijj^ cohara, J The further reduplicatives are commonly made up by the cardinals with the nouns j.t* varo, ^yj^-s^^ or s.^j (lino). Annotation. The affix sL^a, or shortened *.5a, has taken its origin from the Sansk. eJTT,^ Hindustani: barah, PanjabI: vari; in Sindhi v has been ehded and euphonic h inserted. §. 30. VII FRACTIONAL NUMBERS. The fractional numbers are of two kinds; they are either substantives or adjectives; a) substantives are: ■ a quarter. .^jj-ss^ cothe, cothai . cotho , SECTION II. THE INFLEXION OF NOUNS. 185 iL pau, a quarter; Plur. ^Lj pava or'^U pa. ^LiJ tribal, a third. .it>f adhu, a half. ^-Sfll savai, one and a quarter; a quarter more (than the whole). J^SL^ sadhu, one half more (than the specified sum). jdjLjo dedhe, one and a half, '^/^x^^j h) adjectives are: }^yi pauno, ( ^^^ quarter less (than the whole). jjU) muno, J -^^l adhu,, j^^jj ^o^ adho, J 111 sava, one quarter more (than the whole), Li 5 LI sadha, one half more (than the whole). ^Juo dedhu, one and a half. <5i LijI aclhai, two and a half. Annotation. -^^^ ' (5? ^"^3"^ ' i^i^ ^® derived from the Sansk. x^fl^'1^5 Hindustam cauth, cauthai; in the same way -jLiJj* is derived from the Sansk. HnT^T^^ Hindustani tihai. ^Lj corresponds to the Sansk. "RT^, Hindustani pao; the ad- jective ^j'lj has sprung from the Sansk. adj. TTT^ST*^^ Hindust. pauna, Marathi paun; the origin of yX>o is doubtful. J^C>\ is substantive and adjective at the same time, Sansk. ^^, Hin- dust. adha. i^y^ ^i^d the adjective l^-w are derived from the Sansk. ^XJTF, having a quarter, Hindust. and Marathi: sava; .5&<3Ljww and the adjective L^e^L.^ (Plur. m.) from the Sansk. ad- jective ^T^5 having a half, with a half^ Hindustani (Instrum.) 186 SECTION II. THE INFLEXION OF NOUNS. sarhe. -^iXj^ and the adjective J^O^/6 are apparently derived from an unusual Sansk. compound f^ + ^^, having three halves, Hindust. derh, Panjabi dedh, Marathi did. ^L55l has drawn its origin from the Sansk. ^^'^'^, Hindust. arhai, PanjabT dhai, Marathi adits. U. In reference to the use of these fractional numbers it is to be observed, that ^juo is generally used with units, and p^^ with two, three etc., as: 3.-0^ s ^x>, a rupee wanting a quarter = three quarters of a rupee; US. > .J li J two rupees wanting a quarter = one rupee and three quarters; 11 yS^'l one hundred wanting a quarter = 75. 1^ one quarter more, as: wyw 111 one ser and a quarter; Ij^^^ ^y^ 111 three sers and a quarter. 1^1 is not inflected in the Singular, nor in the No- minative Plural, but it has a Formative Plural masc, viz.: ^jI^I savaine, ^jI^ savayane or: ^^-ol^ savae, and fern. ^jI^ savaine or: ^1^ savayune; but ge- nerally it is not inflected at all, e. g. : ^j.a*w ,jJjo ,j^ (J*^I11 with four maunds and a quarter or: ^j.^^ ^j-f^^ ^j-f^ ^y^- 1^ may also precede ^, slC^ etc., as: p^ IJ!aL one hundred and a quarter =125; jCi 1^1 one thousand and a quarter = 1250. .;ot>l adhu, half, is a common adjective and used accordingly. Li3L^ sadha, adding one half, is only used with nouns of number subsequent to 'two', and therefore ever found in the Plural; its fern, is ^^I^jLl; sadhiyu. SECTION 11. THE INFLEXION OF NOUNS. 187 ;5^jj* ^J't^' ;^^ 7^ ur^ is^oL^ o^'^ Then she weighs with a balance nine sers and a half of read lead. Maj. 320. ^Joj dedhu, one and a half, is only used in the Singular and not compounded with other numbers, as: ^1 -sfijuo one Anna and a half; 'is ^OuiS one rati and a half. ^Li3l adhai, two and a half, is only used in the Plural, without distinction of gender in the ^Nominative; in the Formative Plural it makes for the Masc. ^SLijI adhaine, ^li'o^ aclhayane or: ^j^li5\ aclhaie, and for the fem. ^jLi<]>l adhaine, ^jLi5l aclhayune, ^^li'3\ adhaie; ^ ^\ic^ two yards and a half; ^^.p C5?^<^^ tw^o Tois and a half; Formative: ^^.^pj** ^Liji; ,joLijj ^^j^ etc. From these fractional numbers another kind of ad- jectives has been derived, implying "consisting of, com- puted at such a rate, standing in such a relation", as: j^iLj panyo or jCuLS panyaku, only used in the compound: j-v^UyJ* oy\ tXxiLJ)', computed at at three quarters of a rupee. pLS pao, compounded with cardinal numbers, as: j^G ;^J>*, consisting of three quarters. j.j|^ savay5, computed at 174. 5.5>jL3t> dedho, consisting of 1%- ^j^J-sj dedhuo, standing in the 1% place. ^Li3l adhayo, consisting of 2^/2. jjj.jLit>l adhao, standing in the 2V2 place. 188 SECTION 11. THE INFLEXION OF NOUNS. These are used as common adjectives and inflected and constructed accordingly. Tlie other fractional numbers maj^ be made up by compositions, as: 5^Lj J>4>I adhu pau == %. ill ^Juj dedhu pau = %- ^LiJ>* 4 ^^ tribal = %. J U^S pauna ba = V/^, etc. etc. etc. Fractions with sjpecial application are: a quarter of a rupee. jj.b parupo, (J^Lj paili, 0oLI paine, ^y)-i pairi, the quarter of a £" (yard). ^^J^ lari, one third of a rupee. J^i^^ adheli, ^oj adhio, (^^s&4>t adhiri, half a gaj, or half a damiri (^5>-oS). half a rupee piece. Chapter XL Pronouns. §. 31. The personal pronoun is in Sindhi of two kinds: it is either used as an absolute pronoun or as a suffix, acceding to nouns, adverbs or verbs. SECTION 11. THE INFLEXION OF NOUNS. 189 I. PERSOISrAL PEONOUNS. The Sindhi has a personal pronoun only for the first and second person Singular and Plural, the third person is made up by means of demonstrative pronouns. A remnant of the old (now lost) personal pronoun of the third person has been preserved in the pronominal suffix of the third person, as we shall see hereafter. 1) The personal pronoun of the first person. There are two forms in common use for the first person Singular, ^J^1^\ au, and shortened ^( a; besides these ^Lx) ma or ^^ mu are also dialectically used in Siro. The great deterioration of the language is strikingly illustrated hj the present forms of the absolute pronouns. The Prakrit form is ^|^ or ^^^ (Sansk. ^^); but in the corrupted Apabhransa dialect, the mother of the modern Sindhi, we meet already the form ^^, from 3fTT (by elision of ^), from which the Sindhi au has drawn its origin (Lassen, §. 183); the other form a has been simply contracted from ^H, The two other forms ma and mu are originally the Accusative, Sanskrit Tit (Prakrit shortened T(), and are still used as the Formative Singular. > O } The Genitive ^j^Xjo muhii or ^j^Xjo miihe, with the adjective affix j.:^ jo, is to be referred to the Prakrit Genitive lif^ (Sansk. ^^, Apabhransa HW (Lassen §. 183), the vowels being nasalized in Sindhi. The Nominative Plural is ^jj^^ asi, Prakrit W^^ (Sansk. root WW); in Sindhi m has been elided and final e changed to i (= !); the Formative jjLIiwI asa 190 SECTION II. THE INFLEXION OF NOUNS. corresponds to the Prakrit Genitive Plural ^^Ti^t'^ (Sansk. ^"J^TT^). Annotation. In the cognate dialects the Accusative has si- milarly been used for the Nominative; Marathi mi (inferior Prakrit dialect TT2[^5 Lassen §. 183, 2), Formative ma (Prakrit Genitive ffi^) ; Hindustani mai, Formative mujhe or mujh (Pra- krit Genitive ^T^IJ); Panjabi: mai, Formative mai; but Gu- jarati: hu, Formative ma. In the Plural the Marathi has in the Nominative ahmi, in the Formative ahma; the Hindustani ham, Formative ham or ham8; the Panjabi asl. Formative asa; the Gujarati hame or hamo, Formative ham or hamo. Inflexion of the first personal pronoun. ^yj| au or ^1 a, I. SINGULAR. Norn. ^y/S\ au, ^T a; ^jU ma, ^^xj mu; Format. 1 ? ^ , - ^ r - Instrumjc)^ ™^' O^ ™^' ^' ^- Genit. s^ ^-^ muhu jo; j.^ ;j»-^ muhe jo; j.:^ ^jyA mu jo; ys^ Ji ^ jo. Accus^* W ^^ "^^ ^^^' ^^ ^^^ "^^ ^^^' Ablat. ^j^'^yx^ muha; ^J^^ ^y^ inuk ha or ^L^ ^U ma kha. PLURAL. Nom. ij-AA^I asi, we. Format.) _^, ^ o, .- ^, ^ :>o,-- ^,^ lustrum.) ^^' ^^^' ^-^^-"^ ^^ ' vi?^"^'"**'' ^^^^''• Genit. j.s> ^Lll asa Jo, y^ ^^Lll asahe jo. Accus!' \^'f ^^^^ ^^^ ^^^' srf' ^^^^ ^^^^^ ^'^^' Ablat. (jL^ (j'-'^i ^sa kha etc. SECTION II. THE INFLEXION OF NOUNS. 191 If they have been seen by you, for Grod's sake tell (me). iVfter them my eyes weep night and day. Sh. Hus. X, 22. By no means I shall give up my friend till the day of resurrection. Sh. Ked. lY, Epil. (jdj^i j.lw.1 ^LLo ^^y^ ^^ ^^f ^yO ^Li* Kazi, why doest thou beat me, having seen me ill, o friend! Maj. 251. Even before me all would have perhaps slided down (into the river) having taken their jars. Sh. Suh. I, 4. ^L^l^ ^j^^ jjL^I ^j-^ i^i y u^^«^f She in bashful before God and faithful towards us. Maj. 671. Our love flows excessively with our sweethearts. Maj. 675. 2) The personal pronoun of the second person. The pronoun of the second person is ^^* tu , which points rather to the Sansk. f^, than to the Prak. fl"^; the Formative and Instrumentalis p to is derived from the Prak. lustrum. ^'^; the Genitive ^j4^' tuhii or ^j.^ tuhe (with j.^ etc.) corresponds to the Apabhransa Ge- nitive Hf ♦ 192 SECTION 11. THE INFLEXION OF NOUNS. The Plural of this pronoun presents a great variety of forms, as: ^^^"^3 tavhi, ^^y^ tavi, ^A^i' tahi, ^^ tai; or: j.^^f avhi (avhe), ^j^f ave, ^^^f ahi, ^T ai, ,j4jt ai. The forms tavhi etc. have been derived from the Prakrit JSTom. Plural H'^, tti having been changed to tav, and m elided. The forms avhi, ah! etc. are very remarkable. As initial t is never elided, they cannot well be derived from tavhi etc. It is therefore very probable, that these forms are to be referred to the Sansk. Plural Tf^ = Prak. IR^, and with elision of initial y, umhe ; in Sindhi 'u' has been changed to 'av' and m elided, as in tavhi. The Formative ^jLS^j tavha, ^Li^f avha corresponds to the Prak. Genitive Plural rf^^TJl^ Annotation, The cognate dialects agree in all essential points with the SindhT. Marathi: tu, Formative tu or tuja (Prakrit fTS" or fT^lJ; Nom. Pkiral tuhmi and Formative tuhm£. Hin- dustani: tu or tai; Genitive te-ra (me-ra), ra being used in this instance to form a pronominal adjective; the Formative tujh is properly the Prakrit Genitive ffr^^ 3,nd the Instrumentalis tu coincides with the SindhT to. The Nomin. Plural tum is shortened from the Prakrit fll^, and the forms tumha (tum- ha-ra), tumh5, tumh point back to the Prakrit Genitive Plural flWXTJT, Panjabi: tu, Genitive te-ra, Instrument, tai (Prakrit fT5): Formative tai (Prakrit Genitive n). Nom. Plural: tusi, Formative: tusa. Gujarat! : tu, Genitive: taha-ro, Formative ta; Nom. Plural: tame or tamo, Formative tam or tamo. Inflexion of the second personal pronoun. SINGULAR. Nom. jjy tu, thou. Format. Instrum. y' to. SECTION 11. THE INFLEXION OF NOUNS. 193 Gren. j^ tai. ^jw^^f avhi (avhe); ^^f avi; ^^^f ahi; ^X^ ai; ij.^1 ai. J^ormat. l^Li^j tavha, ^L^* taha; ^Li^l avha; ^Lil alia; Instrum.j r ^ tavha jo etc.; avha jo; tavahe jo; avahe jo i^^ (jLiy tavha khe; ^f ^Li^i avha khe. Ablat. ^14^ u'"^^^ tavha kha etc. Gen Dative. Accus ^ ^j»l ahe jo. The emphatic 1 or hi, hi is very frequently joined to this pronoun in all its forms. ^^ 4^'^ (5?>^' c;-^^ ^;; r^; u^-f^;-^* Even thou remainest in my heart; only towards thee my eyes (are directed). Maj. 211. Even for thy sake I have borne the tauntings of my companions. Sh. Mum. Rano I, Epil. ^yj^dJ i^S J^^j r^-^^ 3<\a^ ^^p Even thy reproach has been welcomed by me. Maj. 341. Trumpp, Sindhl-Grrammar. N 194 SECTION 11. THE INFLEXION OF NOUNS. Separate from thee I cannot find any strength in my body. Sh. Suh. II, 4. jj^S" ^ ^ ^1 ^^f ^j^ ^ ^llo friends, do not hinder me at all! Maj. 95. 1 shall not at all give up (your) shed nor your door, o friend! Sh. Barv5 S. I, 16. O handsome lady! the mark of your family is greatness. Sh. Um. Mar. II, 8. After my friend (is gone) I talk over with you my misfortunes. Sh. Hus. VI, 5. n. DEMONSTEATIYE PRONOUNS. §. 32. 1) The proximate demonstrative pronoun is ^sa hi, ^s^ he or ^^^ hiu (also pronounced: ^ hiu); in Lar initial h is commonly dropped, as: ^^l i, ^^1 e, ^1 lu. The base of this pronoun is i (cf Bopp §. 360 sqq.); in the Formative another pronominal base is substituted, i-na, (Bopp §. 369; compare also the inflexion of '5JSTT 'this' in Sansk.). Annotation. The Marathi form of this demonstrative is ha, Formative: ya (Prakrit ^^ = Sansk. ^fllTT); Hindustani: yeh, Formative: is (Sansk. ^f^); Plural: ye, Formative: in. PanjabT: ih, Formative: is, Instrument.: in; Plural: ih. For- mative: ina. SECTION II. THE INFLEXION OF NOUNS. 195 Inflexion of the proximate demonstrative. ^ hi, this. Nom. ^5? l^i; (^ he; ^J^ hiu or ^ hiu, masc, 'this'; lie'. ^ hi; ^^ he; ^^ hia or ^ hia, fern., 'this'; 'she'. Format. 1 ^ i • * • \r\ssi hma or r\} ma, com. Instrum. j^" ^^ Genit. j.:^. ^j^ hina jo or j.:^. ^^ ina jo. Dative. ^^ ^jj» hina khe etc. I^^^y ^jjj hina khe etc. ^ hi etc. Ablat. ^L4^ ^j^ hina kha etc. ; ^L% hina. PLURAL. Nom. ^ hi; ^ he, 'these'; 'they'; com. i,jj& hine or ^1 ine; ^jjjt hinane or ^j| inane. Grenit. j^ ,jje hine jo; j^ ^^^.a^o hinane jo. Dative. ^^ ^^ hine khe; ^^ ^1^ hinane khe. 1^^^ ».50 hine khe etc. (5? ^1' cf^ ^^• Ablat. ,jL^ ,j-? hine kha etc. There is also an emphatic form of this pronoun: ^L^ iJ-^ C^>? ^'<^^ God can make sons for Abraham from these stones. Matth. 3, 9. 2) The emphatic proximate demonstrative is jjdI iho, 'this very'; 'this here'. It is properly a compound pronoun, consisting of the demonstrative base T, and 'ho' = Sansk. ^ C^), and therefore inflected ac- cording to both terminations. SINGULAR. K"om. ^^\ iho; y^\ iho; p\ i5; j.^jj i5; masc.^) Lil iha; Lg.jl iha; U] ia; LjI la; fem. orma . I _^| i^he; ,^^l inhi; ^ AS inhia; j^S ineha; com. Instrum. J-i' S?-- ^-'' Genit. ^ ^\ inhe Jo etc. Dative. ^^5^ ^\ inhe khe etc. 1) It very rarely occurs, that the Singular of this pronoun is (after the manner of an adjective) joined to a noun in the Plural. 2) In poetry the form ^\ ehu also is to be met with. SECTION II. THE INFLEXION OF NOUNS. 197 ^-^ ^^1 inhe klie etc. Accus. < " ) ^1 ' ys^l iho; m.; Li[ iha, fern. Ablat. ^i^ ^^l inhe kha etc. PLURAL. Nom. ^1 ihe, com. IiS^mm.JS^^ i^^a^^' v^l inhine; ^^Jj inhe. Genit. jjs. ij-i^l inhane jo etc. Dative. ^-^5^ ij-^^ inhane khe etc. 1^^ 1^)4^^ inhane khe etc. ^lihe,'com. Ablat. jjL^ ij-^i inhane kha etc. The emphatic i may also be added to this pronoun, to point the object out with still greater distinctness, as: ^Jy^\ ilioi) ^l^is very same person, fem. ^Li| ihai; Format. ^J^\ inhei; Plur. ^^\ ihei; Format. ^^a^J or commonly: ,j-ss^] inh!. i ^ ^ Even this is the cause of the Lord, that he draws forth the drowned ones from the eddy. Sh. Surag. n, 16. The lovers, says Abd-ul-Latif, have fallen into this very reflection. Sh. Kal. I, 8. Even these are the works of God; otherwise who wouldstep down into the whirlpools? Sh. Suh. VI, 13. 198 SECTION 11. THE INFLEXION OF NOUNS. 3) The demonstrative pronoun j..g.>| ijli5, 'this one present' is only used in the Nom. Sing, and Plural. It is apparently compounded of the base 'i' and the Sansk. pronoun ^t, s being now and then changed in Sindhi to j, and even to jh (see: Introduction §. 11, 2). SINGULAR. Nom. }l ij^o; fem. l^>[ ijha. PLURAL. Nom. is^l -y^^' ^^^' They come here; the faqirs have been made tawny by the Kak (river). Sh. Mum. Eano II, 3. 4) The remote demonstrative pronoun is ^hu or ys^ ho, in Lar pronounced ^f u or jl o. The base of this pronoun, hu, is not in use in Sanskrit, but in Prakrit a remnant of it has been preserved in the Gre- nitive ^^ Its theme must have been (according to Bopp, Comp. Gramm. §. 341) sva, from which 'hu' has been regularly formed. Its inflection quite agrees with that of ^ hi, only hu (u) being substituted instead of 'hi' in the Formative. Annotation. The Marathi does not know this pronominal base; it only uses to, corresponding to the Sindhi so. In Panjabi we find uh, Instrum. un, and Formative us, Plur. uh, Formative una. The Hindustani uses: woh, Formative us; Plural we, Format, un (Hindu! : wah, Formative va; Plur. we, Formative: un). The Gujarat! , like the Marath!, has only the theme te. SINGULAR. Nom. ^ hu, y^ ho, y u, 31^0, masc. L^, ^^^^^^ yk hu (j.55 h5), ^ hua; ^1 u, ^\ ua, fem. J SECTION II. THE INFLEXION OF NOUNS. 199 Format. Jbormat. | , > Instmm.}'^* ^™^' ^' ™*'' ''°^- Dative. ^^^ ^ huna khe etc. \^4^ ^jj^ huna khe etc. Accus. [*i5 hu, ^ic hua etc. Ablat. ^Ui huna, ^^^^ hunaha, ^bl una; ^l^ ^ huna kha. PLURAL. Nom. ^5^ hti; j.iD ho; £:^5> hue; &.I tie; s^ hoe, com. J^ormat. 1^^ hunane, ^1 unane; ^ hune, ^jl une. lustrum./ " , , ,. ^ ' -u -X ' (emphatic: ^j^xa^o hum). Dative. ^^ ^s^ hunane khe ; ^^^ ^i hune khe etc. \.^4f ..yli hunane khe etc. Accus. <^T ^ [ys^ hti; ^55 ho etc. Ablat. ^L^ ^Jlsii hunane kha etc. Having travelled from a foreign country he had come. Sh. Sor. I, 3. - ' T I am not worthy of that shoe, which they put on (their) foot. Sh. Koh. HI, 8. At that door those are accepted, who have lost their existence. Sh. Surag. I^ Epil. 2. * .1 n - - .1 ^ ^ 'I"" ' Those are the mansions, those the mosques, those the palaces of the Kazis. Maj. 137. 200 SECTION II. THE INFLEXION OF NOUNS. " ^t ^ ^ .. Yesterday were raised by them the masts by the support of the north -wind. Sh. Surag. Ill, 1. 5) The emphatic remote demonstrative is jj&l uho, 'that very'; it is formed in the same way as ys^[ iho, only 'u' being substituted for 'i'. SINGULAR. Nom. 35&I uh5 or j.j| uo, masc. Lil uha or Gl ua, fern. Format. 1 „' , _ ^ 0' , . ^ ' Instrum.jcrf ^ ™^^' ^^ ^^^^^' '^} ^^^^^' ^^^' Genit. 3.2^ ^c^^ unhe jo etc. Dative. ^§^ .^1 unhe khe etc. 1^45" ^^1 unhe khe etc. ys^} uho, m.; Lil uha, fem. Ablat. ,jl4^ ^5-^t unhe kha. PLURAL. Nom. ^1 uhe, com. Format. 1 ^oj , "/ i . o' , ^ lustrum. J S^-^^ unhane; ^1 unhme; ^4^! unhe. Genit. ^ ,j^l unhane jo etc. y Dative. ^4^ ^^jf unhane khe etc. (^^5" jj-gj! unhane khe etc. ^1 uhe, com. Ablat. ^L^^ (j-^l unhane kha etc. The emphatic 1 may also be added to this pro- noun, ^jj.5i| uhoi, 'that very same', fem. ^^W uhai, SECTION 11. THE INFLEXION OF NOUNS. 201 Formative: ^^^tygil unhei, ^^1 unhi or ,j.x^i unahi. Plural: ^^^x^&l uhei; Formative: ^^^1 unhani or ^jj^\ unhi. ^|4^Lf ^5tXll ^1 ^ ^- ^fl The story of that very (person) was heard before. Sh. Khahori I, 11. ^'P it; ^^ 4il ^ ^S^)^ ^sf^ (5^i ^ ^ i5^i Having come to that very house (and) having seen that very child and its mother Mary, they fell at his feet and worshipped (him). Matth. 11, 11. cff^ il^7^. H^ is^' ^^ >^ i5?>^^ ;<^ (sf This one sees the moon, and that one, who is there, (sees his) friend. Sh. Kambh. I, 3. Even those remember thee always Who never live in a town. Sh. Sarangu 11, Epil. Even towards them, says Ahmad, I have an im- mense longing. Umar Marui X. ^) 6) The remote demonstrative pronoun y.^S ujho, that one present, is, like y-^S ij^o? only used in the Nom. Singular and Plural. It is compounded of the base 'u' and the Sansk. pronoun ^: (see: j-g^j). 1) A poem, difierent from that contained in the Shaha jo Kisals. 202 SECTION II. THE INFLEXION OF NOUNS, SINGULAR. Nom. 3"^^^ ujto; fern. L^s.1 ujha. PLURAL. 9 l^om. ^-^1 i^jhe, com. §. 33. m. THE RELATIVE PRONOUN. The relative pronoun in Sindhi is ^ j5, 'who', 'what', Sansk. "^^ Prak. '^; the Formative Singular ^j^i. jahe corresponds to the Prakrit Grenitive ^fW = ^^, the vowels having been nasalized in Sindhi. The Nom. Plural is ,^^ je, as in Prakrit %, and the For- mative ^j^ jine or ^^^ jane points to the Prakrit Gre- nitive Plur. ^T^, a having been shortened in Sindhi. Annotation, The cognate dialects do not differ essentially from the Sindhi; Marathi: Sing, jo, Plur. je; Gujarat! : Sing, je, Plural jeo; Hindust.: Sing, jo or jau; Formative jis; Plur, jo, Formative jin or jinh; Panjabi: jo, lustrum, jin, Formative jis; Plur. jo. Format, jini, BangalT: je or jine. Formative jaha (Prak. ^T^); Plur. jiha-ra. SINGULAR. Nom. ys^ jo, masc. ; Ls>- ja, fem. Format. ] Instrum.M^ J^^^' '^'^- Genitive, j^ ij-g-*-^ j^^^ j^ ^^^• Dative. ^^4^" ^^1^ jahe khe. Accus. ^^ c^f^ J^^^ ^^^5 >=- jo; U. ja. Ablat. (jL^ ^j-^^ jsbhe kha. PLURAL. Nom. ^^ je, com. SECTION 11. THE INFLEXION OF NOUNS. 203 Format. 1 - , v. ^o ,. ^ o .. , . Instrum./S?^ J^^^^' d^t J'^^' c^-S^^Jintane; ^j^^ jmhine. ^1:^ jinane, ^X:^ jinine. Genit. ^ ^j^ jane jo etc. Dative. ,^ ^^ jane khe etc. Accus. ^^ ^J^ jane khe ; ^:5. je. Ablat. jjLi^ ^^ jane kha etc. In poetry the emphatic i very frequently is added to the Formative Sing, and Plur. of this pronoun, as: Format. Sing. j^^I^ jahi; Format, phjr. ^x^ jam (also written jj^aa^ jam), ^j.^^!^ janhi (to be well distinguished from the Format. Sing.) >^^^^ \J"^ U*^ ^ (S^' ^e ^ 3^ That, which is the spittle of Punhu, of that will I lick a drop. Sh. Sah. II, Epil. 2. - J She, who has a longing for Saharu asks not for a slope in the ferry; Those, who thirst after love, consider the brooks as small steps. Sh. Suh. Ill, 4. Those who have fallen asleep on the evening, suffer pains indeed. Sh. Khahori III, Epil. 2. I " .. I I They will depart with faith, in whose mouth the creed is. Maj, 37. 204 SECTION II. THE INFLEXION OF NOUNS. O motlier, go and bring me the spinning wheel from the courtyard. The mountaineer, for whose sake I have spun, is gone to Kec. Sh. Hus. Ill, 8. Those drink draughts, whose heads are devoted. Sh. Jam. Kal. II, 25. §. 34. ly. THE COERELATIVE PEONOUK The pronoun j.a*; so is nearly always used as the correlative of s^; it is seldom found isolated, in which case it retains its original signification 'that'. It cor- responds to the Sansk. pronoun ^t, Prak. ^, The Formative Sing. ,j^S* tahe is derived from the Prak. Genitive TTW (Sansk. rl^) ^ rf^; the ISTom. Plur. .^ ^ I se differs so far from the Sanskrit and Prakrit (^) as having retained the base of the Singular; the For- mative Plural ^j.f tane is to be referred to the Prak. Grenitive fTT'^, a having been shortened, as in ^T^. Annotation. All the kindred idioms know this pronoun; Marathi: to, Plur. tl; GujaratI likewise: te, Plur. teo; Hindust.: s5 or taun, Formative tis; Nom. Plur. so or taun, Formative tin, tinh or tinho. PanjabI: so, Instrument, tin, Formative tis; Plur. so. Formative tina. Bangali: se, Formative taha, Plur. taha-ra. SINGULAR. Nom. j.^ so; fem. LI sa. SECTION II. THE INFLEXION OF NOUNS. 205 Format. ) ^-: .-i ~ lustrum. J ^^'^°' Genit. ^r^ ,j-4^* ^^^^ Jo ^^<^- Dative. ^^^T ^j-gL* tahe khe. Accus. ^^^5^ (j"€^' t^^^ ^he; ^^ s5; LL sa. Ablat. ^L^' taha; ^L^ ^j-S-^-'' ^ahe kha. PLURAL. Nom. --W se; com. Format. 1 r . .. .• -.. ^- . j.- • >j^ tane; ..p tme; .kaj tmane, yXJ tmme; Instrum.J - ^^ V^ ^o' . ^^^ ^j.,^jj tinhane; ,jm^ tinhine. Grenit. ^ ^jj tane jo etc. Dative. ^^^ ^jJ tane khe etc. Accus. ^f ^ tane khe; ^^ se. Ablat. jjLjj tanea; ^L^^ ^ tane kha etc. The emphatic i may also be joined to this pronoun, as: Nom. Sing. ^Sj^ soi, fem. ^SLl sai; Format. ,j.a^* tahi. Nom. Plur. ^aa^ sei, Format. ^^ tani or: ^^3* tanhi. aj.j| S-w Jk:5^l ^ ^ y^ %J^ yJM He is this, he is that; he is death, he is Allah. He is friend, he is breath; he is enemy, he is helper. Sh. Kal. I, 19. (J^/^^^'^ -^ -^5 (5^ vJ^'^"' cs^*-^ 7fr^ O Sumiro! do not confine in fetters that chaste woman! Sh. Um. Mar. HI, 9. 206 SECTION 11. THE INFLEXION OF NOUNS. In that very time I have made an engagement with the inhabitants of the jungle. Sh. Um. Mar. I, 1. When they were fallen asleep, having stretched out their feet on the bed, Then they were left behind by the caravan, whilst sleeping. Sh. Koh. I, 8. jj^j (j^*^ (j^^ ^^ '•^^ (^tX-*.^ jj.A^«;j^ cH 3;>4^' ijr^ ^* 3}^ i^^'^i u'^-'' In whose face there are hundred thousands of noses, Cut off from those one, then what obligation is it to them? Sh. Mum. VI, 22. §. 35. Y. INTERROGATIVE PRONOUNS. 1) The interrogative pronoun ^ keru, who? This pronoun is only used absolutely. The No- minative base yS keru is derived from the Sanskrit c|^^^, Prak. '^f^H (s^® Introduction §. 2, 6); but the Formative Singular ^^i^ kahe, and the Format. Plural w^ kane point back to the Sansk. ^t; Genitive Sing. ^^, Prak. ^W = ^W; Genitive Phiral in Prakrit ^TTjr, the a of which has been shortened in Sindhi. Annotation, The cognate idioms fall back on the Sansk. base cjt (i. e. on the Accus. Sing, cp), as Marathi and Gu- jarat!: kon; Hindust.: kaun, Format, kis; Plural kaun, Format. Accus. SECTION II. THE INFLEXION OF NOUNS. 207 kin, kinh, kinho; PanjabT: kaun, Instrument, kin, Format, kis; Plural kaun, Formative kina. BangalT: ke. Formative kaha; Plural kaha-ra. SINGULAR. ISTom. jjS keru; fern. 1^ kera. Format. ) op , , Grenit. y^. jj-^^ kahe jo etc. Dative. ^^^5^ lH^ kahe khe. ^4^ ^jj^ kahe khe. >^ keru; Ia5^ kera. Ablat. ^L^ jj-^^ kahe kha. PLURAL. Nom. yjS^ kere, com. ^ , * LJ^ kane, ,.»y kine; ,.J5" kinane. ..4^ kinine; Instrum. J V ^ ^ y " " o " . - " jj^5" kinhane, jj-gil' kinhine. Dative. ^^^5^ ^^ kane khe etc. 1^^.^ ^^ kane khe etc. wo kere. Ablat. (jLg^ (j*^ khane kha etc. ^jjli 3jL2^ ^^^uyli U^"^ (J^^ 7^ Who art thou? from whence proceedest thou? what is thy name? Maj. 167. \^y^ ^^ yt^ C5^ \J^ cH-y W j^ Who is the brahman woman? whose (Genit. Plur.) is she? who knows her? Sh. Ma^B. I, 14. 208 SECTION 11. THE INFLEXION OF NOUNS. e^Li Use {s'yi^ '^5 -^^'^^ ^^ r^ Who have they been? wither are they gone? of what class have they been? Maj. 659. 2) The interogative pronoun L^ cha, w^hat? This pronoun is only used in a neuter sense and has no Plural. The Grenitive ^ L^ cha jo etc. signifies: of what sort, of what kind? With the postpositions ^^^ khe, ^b^ kane, ^[^ kha, it signifies: what for? to what purpose? why? — It is derived from the Sansk. f^t^l^ what. Annotation. The Hindustani uses kia, the Panjabi ki and kia, Format, kas; the Marathi kay (Formative kasa); Bangali: ki, Format, kaha. Hindu! : kaha, Format, kahe. ^^^ ^i^ Jl^ 14^^ ^- ^^5 0\y^ yS> ^y j^a^ If the savour of the salt goes, whit what shall it be salted? Matth. 5, 13. 3) The interrogative pronoun .50j^ kohu, what? This pronoun is only used in a neuter sense, just as the preceding one, and is indeclinable. If signifies very frequently 'why', 'what for'. In poetry it is oc- casionally shortened to J^ kuhu. As to its derivation it is identical with L^ (= ka, kaha), a having been changed to o in this instance. The same is also the case in Hindu! , where kaun, who? makes the Formative either in ka, kohe or kahe. I have been made alive by remembering (him); what will he do to me having met (me)? Sh. Suh. IV, 7. SECTION II. THE INFLEXION OF NOUNS. 209 Why do the vacillating ones talk of strong wine? Sh. Kal. II, 25. 4) The interrogative pronouns ^^^ keh5, jj-gj^ keharo and j-jLiJ^ kujaro, what? which? These three interrogative pronouns may either be used absolutely or adjectively with a substantive. Instead oi ^^ keho the form ^l^f keo is also used in Lar; j>^^ keharo may also be written 3>4^ keharo or it may be contracted to yS^yS kerho; about their derivation see Introd. §. 2, 6. They are inflected regularly. The Dative Sing, of jjLii', i. e. ^^5^ ^^vLio^ kujare khe and the Ablative of the fem. Sing. ^CvLivy kujarea (frequently also written CvLi^i') is generally used as an interrogative adverb, Vhy?' Svhat for?' In which wise wilt thou, o afflicted one! pass (thy time) without the bountiful? Sh. Jam. Kal. IV, 16. ^y=^ 5^^i >?^^ c5f^ u^* jj'^^i^-f-^' What has happened to Qais? having come they speak thus. Maj. 39. J^ >^ u4^. 5-^ >^>^' (5"f^ ^j^^ Why has thy own state been made by thee thus? Maj. 655. T r u m p p , Sindhl- Grammar. 210 SECTION 11. THE INFLEXION OF NOUNS. §. 36. VI. INDEFINITE PEONOUNS. 1) The indefinite pronoun j^ ko, any one; some one. The root of this indefinite pronoun is the same as that of the interrogative (Sansk. ^^S'H?): "the Formative Sing, and Plural is therefore identical in both pronouns. SINGULAR. Nom. 3/ ko; fern. ^ ka. Format. ] "> i ^i ~ i..w4A> kahe, com. lustrum. J ^ " Genit. ^ (j-^^^ kahe j5 etc. Dative. ^^ ^j^S' kahe khe. ( ^45" ^4!^ kahe khe. Accus. < * ' [ji^ ko; b" ka. Ablat. ^14^ ^-^^ kahe kha. PLURAL. Nom. ^ ke, com. Format. ] -, ., ^ . . ^ ^ \^,S kane; ..vf kme. lustrum. J ^ y - Genit. ^^ ^f kane jo etc. Dative. ^45* ^< kane khe. I^y wf' kane khe. ^r ke. Ablat. ^l^ ^ kane kha. •• , .. I ^ ..I ^ SECTION II. THE INFLEXION OF NOUNS. 211 Nothing else will be of use to thee, except that, which thou hast sown thyself; Not a grain givest thou to any one, accumulating thou hoardest up treasures. Mengho 10. >^ ^ •' • .. I ,. I ^ ^ ^ .. I Some (lightenings) flash over China, some take notice of the Samarqandis. Sh. Sar. lY, 12. I do not other (work) for any, even his I am. Sh. Um. Mar. YH, 5. The emphatic form of this pronoun is also in frequent use: SINGULAR. Nom. ^^ koi, any one; fem. Sl^ kaL Format. ^a.^I>'^ kahi. PLURAL. JSTom. ^j^ kei, or ^-^^f kai, ^j^^xf kai. Format, ^xf kani or ^^^f kanhi. Because there will be at the door of my friends some (== several) longing like me. Sh. Jam. Kai. YIII, Epil. To some, some men some (peculiar) knowledge has been allotted. Sh. Sor. I, 17. Instead of the emphatic form of this pronoun ^i' ko may also be repeated: 02 212 SECTION II. THE INFLEXION OF NOUNS. ^ "^ •• ' - I Some reproach of the liquor-seller (fern.) has fallen upon their gall -bag. Sh. Jam. Kal. IV, 18. A neuter form of ^ is $^ ki, something, a little; it is not inflected. With hard labour scoop a little out the heart from the sugar-cane. Golden Alphab. VI, 8. With a negation S signifies: no one, nobody, and ^ ki: nothing; for emphasis' sake they are fre- quently reduplicated, in which case the negation is put between them, as: ^ ^ ^ ko na ko, nobody at all, 5" .j ^ kl na ki, nothing at all. ^y^ ^ ^ ^j-yo ^Uj ;j^ ^K ^y -3 gi J jeki, wha- tever, is not inflected. SINGULAR. Nom. sXa^ jeko; fem. LC^-^ jeka. y .. . .. . Format. ) ,^ o. , , , , Instrum.M^^ ^^ ^^^'' ^^^'^' Genit. ^ ^-^ ^-^^ j^^^^ kahe jo etc. Dative. ^^ ^-^^ c^■^^ ^^^^^ kahe khe. \s-^ \J^^ ij-f^ ]^^^ kahe khe. Accus. \" ySUsb. jeko; LXa^ jeka. Ablat. ;jW^ c)"^ cH-^^ j^he kahe kha. Accus. 214 SECTION 11. THE INFLEXION OF NOUNS. PLURAL. N'om. /^Xl^ jeke. - I " i Format. ) Instrum.Js^^S^^ ^^^""^ ^^''^' c^f J"^ J^^^ ^^^^• Genit. ^ ^ ^^ jane kane jo etc. Dative. ^^ ^S w^ jane kane khe. ^^ ^i" ^^ jane kane khe. ..I ^ ^ ,^Xx^ jeke. Ablat. ^J^ ^ ^^ jane kane kha. Whatever (word) be in his mind, hear that his word. Maj. 43. Whatever thou wilt pray to the Lord of the world, that will be thy companion (i. e. to the other world), Mengho 9. Instead of jiW j^ko the poets very frequently use ^^jf, reverting the order of the two pronouns. Whatever thing thou hast to say, o Bijalu, let me hear that! Sh. Sor. II, 17. isf^ iS-^ C57 ^'i ^-^ '^ ^h >^^ U5 (5f (5f Which trees soever give no good fruit, those are cut off and thrown into the fire. Matth. 7, 9. There is also a reduplicated form of this pronoun: j.^Xa^ jekoko , but it is only used in the Nominative Sing. and Plural. SECTION II. THE INFLEXION OF NOUNS. 215 SINGULAR. Norn. jijXj^ jekoko; fern. b^LjCo^ jekaka. PLURAL. Nom. ^:CjCA.i^ jekeke, com. The neuter form of it is: jCjC^ jekikl. I - ' " rr - Whosoever is angry witli his brother without a cause, he will be guilty of judgement. Matth. 5, 2. Annotation. Another compound of ji^ is j.$^>5> harko, every one, whoever (Hindustani: harkoi); it is only used in the Singular and inflected regularly, as: ]^om. j.S'li hark5, fem. (^li harka; Format. jj.^Is'li harkahe, com. §. 37. VII. THE RECIPEOCAL PEOjNOUN J^Ij pana, 'self. The reciprocal pronoun in Sindhi is J^(J pana, 'self', in person, in contradistinction to ^j^Lj panu, s. m., one's own person or personality. It is derived from the Sansk. '^irHl, soul, self, which becomes in Prakrit either 't^'-MI (Yar. m, 48) or ^IWT^ (Yar. Y, 45). From the latter Prakrit form appana, the Sindhi J^Lj has sprung by dropping the first syllable 'ap'. Annotation. The Marathi reciprocal pronoun apan points likewise back to the Prakrit appana, whereas the Hindustani ap (possessive: ap-na) is to be traced back to the Prakrit form appa; similarly the Panjabl: ap, possessive ap-na. In Gujaiati both Piakrit forms reappear: ap, and possessive: apan- no. 216 SECTION n. THE INFLEXION OF NOUNS. From the original signification of J^lo pana, "souF (like the Hebrew ti^'?i^), its application may be easely ex- plained. It refers in a sentence always to the chief- snbject, be it distinctly expressed or only tacitly under- stood. In the Genitive (j.^^ ^^^l paha j5 etc.), which serves as a possessive pronoun, it may be translated by ^own'; but at the same time it points out with a pe- culiar nicety the subject, to which it must be referred, and may then be translated by the respective possessive pronoun, required by the subject. SINGULAR and PLURAL. Nom. J.Lj pana, self; masc. and fem. Format. ) ^ , - _ Instrum./^ *•* Genit. ^ ^i^^l paha jo; j.;*- ^^. ipahR jo; j.^ ^L pa jo (in Lar). Dative. ] ^ -x- - ^ i - Ablat. ^LiLi pana; ^Lgi" ^U pana kha. An adverbial form is ^^.A^ili^ panahi, of, from, by himself or themselves, in person; in a similar sense the Ablative ^ULj pana is also used. By himself he knows his own person; his own person takes notice of himself; By himself he sees himself; by himself he is be- loved. Sh. Kal. I, 18. Thou theyself art thy own (i. e. thy soul's friend); SECTION 11. THE INFLEXION OF NOUNS. 217 thou (thyself art) in presence of (thy) friends. Sh. Abirl V, 12. •^ '^) ^^ ^ "^^ '^ yf '^^^• Do not worship thyself; o JogT, keep (thy) devotion! Sh. Eamakali VH, 20. j^^ ^iis ^ ^j.xj .45'! ^^ ^4^ How wilt thou say to thy brother: let me ]3ull out the mote from thy eye? Matth. 7, 4. In this last sentence the subject, to which the re- ciprocal pronoun is to be referred, must be found out from the context or the emphasis of the speaker. ^o dhure is not a reciprocal pronoun, as alleged by Capt. Geo. Stack; it is the Locative of w;i>4> dhuru, 'extremity', 'exact spot' (Panjabi: dhur, adv.), used adver- bially. The same is to be remarked of jLaj pinde, which is the Locative of Jij ijinclu, s. m. 'body', and signifies: 'in person'. For this reason its Grenitive is j^ JLL pinda jo etc. But ask thy own body (i. e. thyself), having turned thy face upon it. Grolden Alphabet 43, 7. 'One another' is expressed in Sindhi in the fol-= lowing way: Their hearts always remember each other. Maj. 200. 218 SECTION 11. THE INFLEXION OF NOUNS. §. 38. Vm. PEONOMmAL ADJECTIVES. Under this head we class only such adjectives, as participate more or less of the nature of pronouns and are somewhat irregular in their inflexion, and such, as are derived from pronominal themes. All other adjectives, which may, according to their position in a sentence^ supply the place of the pronoun, we exclude from this list, such as: p3.i falano, a certain x^erson, j'jXi^ hikiro, one , lij Bio , another , i^ sajo , whole , as they are treated and constructed as regular adjectives. 1) Indefinite pronominal adjectives. We have to deal here with the pronominal ad- jectives .j^jJ^ sabhu, whole, all, every one; the emphatic form of which is ^I^yj^jS^ sabhoi; with the compound d<^j^ sabhuko, every one, and ^jj^>5 miryoi or ^3^-5 miroi, all, whole, every one. a) The pronominal adjective ..g-A.IL sabhu. It is derived from the Sansk. ^c(, Prak. ^cof; Hindustani: sab (Marathi: sarv); in Sindhi b has been aspirated (as in Panjabi: sabh) on account of the elided r (see: Introd. §. 15, B. c.) SINGULAR. l^om. ^^^ sabhu; fem. ^^.L sabha. Eormat. | - - ^ -, \^j^ sabna, com. Instrum. J Genit. s.^ ..^-auI sabha jo etc. Dative, ^f ^Z, sabha khe. SECTION II. THE INFLEXION OF NOUNS. 219 Accus. Ablat. JSTom. Format. 1 sabha khe. .^^ sabliu; fern. .^^1 sabha. ^1^5" .4^ sabha kha. PLURAL. ^^L sabhe, com. Instrum. J Oenit. Dative. Accus. Ablat. l^j^AA. sabhane, ^-^^^ sabhine; ^•^•^^.^ sabhi= nine; ,j.a.^a^ sabhe. j.^ ^j^jJ^ sabhane jo etc. ^^f (j-i-i-^ sabhane khe etc. ^^^ ^j4^ sabhane khe. ..g.A.1 sabhe. ^Laa^^^ sabhanea {^jIx^Zj sabhina). jjL.^ ^j^-?^ sabhane kha etc. In the Nom. Plur. we find occasionally ^^aIw sabhe written, instead of ,^aaL sabhe. In the Formative Plural ^j-f<^j^ sabhe may be used, instead of ^j^^ etc., when the noun immediately follows in the Formative (e). l^ ij'4J'-f, ^rr^^ ^^^5 ^'^'^ '■^^ r*^ My whole life is useless; my time (pi.) has been lost by me. Sh. Surag. V, Epil. By Allah all the undertakings of that friend are carried out. Maj. 688. " . I ' :: ' . " ^!'.- \ "*' Sitting they read with love, causing always their eyes to shed tears; 220 SECTION II. THE INFLEXION OF NOUNS. Volumes beautiful in all ways, and other elegant books. Maj. 140. 141. y/J^^M ^^^^JJ^Km ^SiXjM yZS" iXXS yJM S.S> ^JajLww It is an oath of the Lord (i. e. by the Lord), that my friend is the most beautiful. Sh. Barvo Sindhi 11, 6. h) The pronominal adjective Si^x^ sabhoi. The inflection of ^^^jj^, 'all', 'whole', 'every one', is somewhat irregular. SINGULAR. Nom. ^j-^^ sabhoi; fern. ^^SLg-^ sabhal. Format. Instn l^L^^AA*. sabhei; fem. ^I^j^ sabhaia. rum.J"'"'* etc. etc. PLURAL. Nom. ^^.fi^jJL sabhei, or: ^4^^^ sabhai, com. ^^^^ ' I^-a^aI- sabhini or: ^^^.^-JL sabhini. lustrum. J ^^ - * W-- . • etc. etc. Ablat. ^jU^aII; sabhinai or: ^pLj^^j^ sabhineai. Come in, o Punhu! all pains are gone! Sh. Desi 11, Epil. I " t I T - ? * - ..I •• , ^ ..■'..-' The safety of all, says the Sayyid, is there. Sh, Abiri V, 6. To Todi (Suhini) belongs more honour than to all (others). Sh. Suh. Ill, 9. SECTION II. THE INFLEXION OF NOUNS. 221 c) The pronominal adjective ^^^ sabhuko. The compound pronominal adjective j.X^aL sabhuko is inflected as follows: SINGULAR. Nom. jJ^4'^**' sabhuko; fem. IXI^a^ sabhaka. Format. ^.^jX^jJ^ sabhakahe, com. etc. etc. etc. PLURAL. Nom. ^^-i^ sabhake, com. Format. ^JC^a^ sabhakane. etc. etc. etc. There is also a neuter form of this pronoun: ^JC^a;! sabhukl. The emphatic form ^ji,S<.^jJ^ sabhukoi is also used (see ^^j^)- ^;La^ (5?;"^ (1^? LX^A^ ^/f^ U^^'"^ In Savan (July — August) every one slips (into the river), this one (goes into it) merry in the cold season. Sh. Suh. m, 17. I come at every time, using shifts I go. Sh. Barvo Sindhi n, 7. Having drunk a cup of love we understood every thing. Sh. Kal. n, Epil. d) The pronominal adjective ^^}^i^ miryoL The pronominal adjective i^Hrt'j^ miryoi or ^Sjv^ miroi is inflected in the same manner as ^jj..^-^ sabhoi. 222 SECTION II. THE INFLEXION OF NOUNS. SINGULAR. Nom. ^>:?V? niiryoi or: ^^j^ miroi; fern, ^^m niiryaL Format, ^^aj^ miryei or: ^^^jyo mirei; fern. ^Lj^? niiryaia. etc. etc. etc. PLURAL. JSTom. ^5^.V? miiyei or ^^^:yi mirei; ^-U mirai (in Lar); com. Format. ^'U mirini; ^^v? niiryam. etc. etc. Ablat. ^Llip mirinea or: ^L^ ^^''ho mirini kha. ^^O ^4^ J^. -^^ ^^ -ykk:^ ^^'H Every good tree gives good fruit. Matth. 7, 17. u;^ (5?^)^ 4^^ u^^ '^ csf*^ O^ There is no living in the world; all the days (of life) are two. Sh. Kal. II, Epil. (^jjir L^ \djS .4JK J.5j.x) ^^ySyo The devotees, taking yesterday leave from all, went off. Sh. Eamakali Vn, Epil. The Locative Sing. masc. ^^ajj^ mirei, 'in all', 'throughout', 'altogether', is very frequently used, where we would employ the simple adjective all, whole; but it is to be noticed, that the Locative ^aj^ mirei always follows immediately the noun, on which the stress is thus to be laid. A hot wind has set in; the world in all (i. e. the whole world) has been singed. Sh. Abiri I, 11. SECTION II. THE INFLEXION OF NOUNS. 223 The gravel -stone throughout (i. e. all) make red with blood for the sake of (thy) husband. Sh. Abiri VIII, 8. O bard! upon thee (i. e. for thy sake) I sacrifice aU (my) property. Sh. Sor. lY, 10. 2) Correlative adjectives. The Sindhi possesses a great facility to derive cor- relative adjectives from pronominal bases. a) The pronominal adjectives, denoting 'quantity' are formed by affixing to the original Sanskrit - Prakrit bases or other bases formed alike, the adjectival ter- mination ro, as: jwCaS^ ketiro, how much? Sansk. f^R'^IrT Prak. ^f%^. As similar phenomenon is to be noticed in the cognate idioms, as Hindustani: kitta and kit- na; Panjabi: kit-na; Marathi: kit! or with the affix k: kitik; G-ujarati: ket-lo; but Bangali: kat. &) The pronominal adjectives denoting 'size', are formed by affixing to the respective pronominal base the termination: j3 d5, as: jjwvi^ kedo, hoAv large? This termination is properly not an adjectival affix, but an adjective: so; vado, 'great', the first syllable of which is dropped in this composition. This is clearly proved by the Marathi, as: ke-vadha, how great, and the Gu- jarati: ke-vato (but Panjabi: ke-cla, as in Sindhi). All these pronominal adjectives admit again of a diminutive form, by adding the affix ro (see §. 11), as: j-ijL^ kediro, how small? c) The pronominal adjectives denoting 'kind' are formed by adding to the pronominal bases keha, jeha, teha, eha, hua (tiha), \h.^ diminutive affix ro, in consequence of which the long vowel of the pronominal 224 SECTION n. THE INFLEXION OF NOUNS. base is shortened to its corresponding short one, as: y-f^ keharo, of what kind or manner? The pronominal bases, from which these three kinds of adjectives are derived, are: e or he, this; o (u) and ho (hti), that; the relative jo (je), the correlative so (te), and the interrogative ke. We exhibit them in the following survey: From the base: e or he Quantity. j^^l etiro j^^A^a hetiro this much. Size. sjol edo jJu55 hedo as large as this jjJLjl ediro jvhediro as small as this Kind. jj^l eharo y-U^ hiaro of this kind. o or ho 30^ I otiro jo^5> hotiro that much jjjl odo jijic hodo as large as that 3^-03! odiro 3^0^55 hodiro as small as that 3*iil uharo yus^ huaro of that kind. jo (je) and so (te) j etiro as much ^yXjJ tetiro so much 3 JU^ jedo as large 3JL0 tedo so large 3j4^ as small svJuu tediro so small j eharo of which kind. 3l^teharo of that kind. ke ketiro ^) how much kedo how large kediro how small keharo of what kind. All these correlative adjectives are inflected re- gularly, according to th*eir respective termination (masc. and fem.l 1) Not to be confounded with jy^>^ is the interrogative prono- minal adjective ^^y^ kao, which of more than two, Sansk. ^fT'H; about its formation see Introd. §. 9. SECTION 11. THE INFLEXION OF NOUNS. 225 §. 39. IX. PRONOMIJSTAL SUFFIXES, attached to nouns and postpositions. Instead of the inflected cases of the absolute personal and possessive pronouns the Sindhi uses very extensively the so-called suffixes or pronouns, which are affixed to nouns, postpositions (adverbs) and verbs. The use of these suffixes constitutes quite a pe- culiar feature of the Sindhi language and distinguishes it very advantageously from all the kindred idioms of / India , which are destitute of pronominal suffixes ; but at ; the same time the construction of the sentences is very frequently thereby rendered so intricate, that it presents great embarrasments to a beginner. In this respect the Sindhi quite agrees with the Pas to and the Persian, being the connecting link between the Indian and Iranian languages. Here we shall describe the manner, in which the suffixes are attached to nouns and postpositions; the verbal suffixes will be treated in their proper place. The pronominal suffixes, which are added to nouns and adverbs, are: Singular. Plural. I pers. ^ me. ,j^l u or ^^i hu. n pers. :& e. ^ va. in pers. (j^ se. ^ ne or ^ na. The suffix of the I pers. Sing, me corresponds to the Prakrit Grenitive Sing. T{ my; the Persian suffix is -♦-^ am, Pasto me, as in Sindhi. The suffix of the 11 pers. Sing, e has sprung from the Sansk. Grenitive Sing. ^, thy, t being elided in Sindhi according to Prakrit rule (see Introd. §. 7). In Persian Trumpp, Sindhi-Graramar. P 226 SECTION 11. THE INFLEXION OF NOUNS. final e (te) has been dropped and t preserved (= at), whereas the Pasto has retained the original form of this pronoun, only with transition of the tenuis into the media =^ t> de. The suffix of the III pers. Sing, se is to be re- ferred to the Prakrit Grenitive ^ (shortened from ^T^Zf), literally: hujus. In Persian it has become ^^-^ whereas in Pasto s has been changed to h (Zend he) and then altogether elided = ^ e. The suffix of the I pers. Plur. u or hu accedes to postpositions only, no suffix of the I pers. Plur. being in use with nouns. It is a contraction from the Prak. Genitive Plur. ^1^, the first syllable being dropped in Sindhi. The Persian form is Li ma, Pasto y? mu or ^! um. The suffix of the 11 pers. Plur. ^ va is derived from the Sansk.-Prak. Grenitive Plur. '^; Persian on the other hand V^^ (pointing to the Sansk. Grenit. Plur. ^"^TT^^) but Pasto y) mu (m == v). The suffix of the III pers. Plur. ne or na has ap- parently sprung from an old pronominal base ^ na, which is already in Pali substituted for ^, that; the Prak. Genit. Plur. would be '^'P^ (cf Lassen p. 325; Yar.VI, 4), shortened ne, or na from TJJT'^* These suffixes, according to their etymology, supply, when attached to nouns, the place of possessive pronouns; but when joined with postpositions or ad-^ verbs, they may stand in lieu of any inflected personal pronoun. The suffix however, which properly belongs to the noun, may also be attached to the verb, as will be explained under the verbal suffixes. SECTION II. THE INFLEXION OF NOUNS. 227 §. 40. I. Pronominal suffixes attached to nouns. When a suffix accedes to a nouu, its final vowel unclero'oes in some instances a change. But it is to be noticed, that the suffixes are not used promiscuously with nouns, but for the most part only with those re- ferrino; to man. far less with those referring to animals or to inanimate objects. In the Nominative Singular: 1) Xouns ending in 'u' undergo no change before the suffixes. 2) Xouns ending in o generally shorten the same to V; but o may also keep its place before the suffixes. 3) Masc. nouns ending in i change the same for euphony's sake either to yu or to ya. 4) Fern, nouns ending in i change the same either to ya or shorten it to 'i'. 5) Xouns ending in 'e' (i) remain unaltered before the suffixes. In the Formative Singular the suffixes accede to the final voAvel without any further change, with the exception of nouns ending in o. the Formative Singular of which terminates before suffixes in a, and not in e. In the Xominative Plural a final lono; vowel is shortened respectively and final nasal n dropped before the suffixes; but final i of masc. nouns is changed to ya, as in the Xom. Sing. In the Formative Plural the suffixes accede to the termination ne without anv further chano-e. Xouns ending ui u (u) and a are hardly ever found with suffixes: of nouns ending in 'a' there are some in- stances, but they are very rare, and only found in poetry. On the whole the suffixes are for the most part attached P2 228 SECTION H. THE INFLEXION OF NOUNS. to nouns ending in 'u' and o, far less to those ending in 1 (masc. and fern.) and 'e'. The way, in which the suffixes are attached to nouns, may best be learnt from the following examples. 1) ISTouns ending in u (masc.) Nom. Sing. Jvxj nenu, eye; Format. JwO nena. Nominative. I pers. jU-o nenume, my eye. i> * Sing. < II pers. .J^ nenue, thy eye. m pers. ij/^-UJ nenuse, his eye. Formative. I pers. jU-o nename; |V.^i-o nenahime. Sing. < II pers. «Lo in pers. (ji*AAJ nenase; ^j»Jj^j^ Nominative. ^ 9 n pers. "yj^ nenuva, your eye. nenae; ^aj nenahe. nenahise. Plur. Plur. Sing. TIT pers. jji^j nenune, their eye. Formative. n pers. ^Iaj nenava; y«^Lo nenahiva. Ill pers. jjuLo nenane; ^^A-o nenahine Nom. Plur. J^x3 nena; Form. ^^^«Lo I pers. (U-o nename , my eyes, nena-e, thy eyes n pers. Ill pers. y^ijo nenase, his eyes. nenane. Formative. nenanime. r^^ ^^aLu nenani. ^j»jJ^ nenanise. SECTION n. THE INFLEXION OF NOUNS. 229 Plur. Formative, y-xLJi nenaniva. O^^ nenanine. Nominative. n pers. ^vo nenava, your eyes. HE pers. ^jXfJi nenane, their eyes. In the Formative Sing, there is instead of the suffix me, the form hime also in use, as: a^I-o nenahime; and instead of se we find likewise the form hise, as: u^-^^ijo nenahise. In the Format. Plur. the suffix of the 11 pers. e is generally contracted with the final e of the ter- mination ne to e (e) or even i, or he is affixed, to avoid a hiatus, as: ^JJ^ nenane, ^^^i;^j nenani or: ^, --f-^A-y nenanehe. In poetry final 'u^ is frequently lengthened again to o before the suffixes; but final 'a' may also be likewise lengthened, if required by the metre, as: ^U-o nenana, instead of ^j-l-o nenana. Some nouns of this class, which do not change final 'u' in the Formative Singular, are somewhat irregular in attaching the suffixes. These are: ^Jj piu, father, i\^ bhau, brother, iLi mau, mother, ^^t> dhiu, daughter, f 9 ^ nuhu, daughter-in-law. ^^ piu, father. " SINGULAR. Nomin. and Format.: ^^ piu.g I pers. jv^^ piume; f»Lo piame; (V^l? pinhame; *-§-b pinhime, my father. Sing. s>i> n pers. ^^ piu-e; sL-o piae; ^^^Ij pinhe, thy father. I ;. m pers. j/^^ piuse; ,j>-LL piase; (j^ii pinhase. his father. 130 Plur. Nomin. Sing. SECTION II. THE INFLEXION OF NOUNS. II pers. ^j piuva; ^Lj piava; ^i^j pinhava, your father. m pers. ^j^j piuna; ,^4-^. pinhune, their father. PLURAL. wu piura; J^ormat. ^^aj piurane or: ,j^j piune. Nominative. Formative. 1 pers. |*^Aj piurame, i*^r^- piuranime. my fathers; li*^. pi^^i^^ie. II pers. ^f'vAJ piura-e, thy fathers; ^Aaj piunl. in pers. j^lo piurase, his fathers; jj^aj piunise. Plur. m pers. ^ Iaj piurava , your fathers ; ^Aaj piuniva. pers. ^wAj piurana, their fathers ; ^j-aL piunine. ^L^j bhau, brother. SINGULAR. Nominative and Formative iL^j bhau. Sing. ^. - I pers. (vjL-^j bhaume; (♦L^ bhame; ,^14^ bha- name, J>1^ bhanime, my brother. II pers. sL^j bha-e; ^il^ bhane, thy brother. ni pers. (j^L^j bhase; u^L.^ bhanuse, his brother. Plur. --i, ^ II pers. ^^14^ bhauva, ;-jL^ bhanuva, your brother. Ill pers. ^JoL4? blmuna, their brother. SECTION n. THE INFLEXION OF NOUNS. 231 PLURAL. Nomin.: yjL.^j bhaura; Format.: jj>jI^ bhaurane or: ^L^ bliaune. '^ Nominative. - Formative. I pers. (•vjL-g"? bhaurame, I |VJ>.j1^j bhauranime. my brothers. [ ^^^ bhaunime. etc. etc. ^U man, mother. SINGULAR. Nominative and Formative: ^Lx» man. I pers. *.jL;o maume; (♦L mame; j%-g.iU manhime, my mother. Sing. \ n pers. &U mae; ^iU mane, thy mother. in pers. (j^Li mause; j^Lx) mase; ,jjgoLo manuse; jjj^JLo manise, his mother. In pers. ^Lx) mava; ^Li manuva, your mother. Ill pers. ^U mane; ^Li manune, their mother. PLURAL. Nomin.: laU maura; Format.: ,joLo maune. Nominative. Formative. I pers. (•^L^ maurame, my mothers; jU^L^ maunime. etc. etc. ^^4> dhiu, daughter. SINGULAR. Nomin. and Format, ^o dhiu (Ji?i> dhia). Sing. I pers. ^si^o dhiume; ^Iss^o dhiame; *aa^j> dhi- name; ^j^^ dhinime, my daughter. 232 SECTION 11. THE INFLEXION OF NOUNS. Sing. < II pers. (5A^4> dhiya-e; ^'U^t> dhme, thy daughter. in pers. (jj*aj54> dhiuse, ^jt*j^i^ dhiase; u^L^i> dhi- nuse, his daughter. PLURAL. Nomin.: wc»t> dhiaru; Format.: ^^)^4> dhiune. Nominative, Formative. pers. f»vA^4> dhiarume, my daughters. ^s^c> dhiunime. etc. etc. ^ nuhu (or: ^3), daughter-in-law. SINGULAR. Nominative and Formative: ^ nuhu. I pers. ^ nuhume; ^ nuhame; J^ nuhi- name; jU^ nuhinime, my daughter- in-law. gj nuhu-e; ^^i nuhe; ^i^ nuhine, thy daughter-in-law. pers. (j/^j nuhuse; ^j*^ nuhase; jj^^i nu- ^ hinise, his daughter-in-law. II pers. ^4^ nuhuva, your daughter-in-law. Plur. "jni pers. ^j4^ nuhune; ^j..^ nuhane, their [ daughter-in-law. PLURAL. Nomin.: y^ nuharu; Format.: ,j^ nuhane. Nominative. Formative. I pers. j»l^ nuharume, jU^ nuhunime. my daughters-in-law. etc. etc. Sing. n pers. ^^ nuhu m SECTION II. THE INFLEXION OF NOUNS. 233 A noun with suffixes may be followed by post- positions; in this case the suffixes are added to the Formative of a noun. The people said to his mother: ask him thyself. Maj. 42. .. \ ^ '- " I -' ^ May that thy son fall into the forest (i. e. away with that thy son) , who will cut off my brother's head. Story of Eae Diacu p. 1. O mother, away with thy house (literally: to the well with thy house); away from me goes the little caravan. Sh. Hus. n, 7. ij^Ui ^yJ ^ LI ^t)^Li ^Li (^j^j ^-^^ By no perplexity was Suhini kept back; in the stream was her devotion; From which poor (woman) such a one was born, that her mother may well boast: If thou seest her father, thou mayst also love him a little. Sh. Suh. m, 13. Thy mother and thy brothers are standing outside. Matth. 12, 47. His mother and his brothers, standing outside, wished to speak to him. Matth. 12, 46. 234 SECTION II. THE INFLEXION OF NOUNS. U^:?^ (5;^-^; (5^^ -^''-^ (j^ \J^} ^LL^f j-xXir ^pL5? ^^5 ^-u:^ ^.15 ^LS -'I "I ^ ^ When I sit in silence, having forgotten their abuses, Then my heart goes like sand, moaning after them. Maj. 679, 680. To-day there is no talk (iL^iLr) of theirs; they are the whole day in the hut. Sh. Mum. Eeno V, 12. 2) Nouns ending in 5. Nouns ending in do not differ essentially from those in 'u', as regards the annexion of the suffixes; they generally shorten final o to 'u', but they may also retain the same in the Nom. Sing., which is frequently the case in poetry. The Formative Sing, always ter- minates in 'a', not in e, when followed by suffixes. In the Nomin. Plural final a may be hkewise preserved be- fore suffixes, instead of being shortened to V. ^^fi matho, head. SINGULAR. Nom. : j^^joo matho ; Form. : ^.^ mathe = j^^ matha. Nominative. Formative. I pers. ^xJo mathume , I ^.^^^ ^) mathame ; my head; [*™g.4-^i^ mathahime. n pers. ^^4^^) mathu-e, I ^^^^ matha-e; thy head; U-^4-^ mathahe. m pers. ij^x^ mathuse, [u^^^ mathase; his head; | ^_;Jl.^;oo mathahise. Sing. 1) In Siro the people very commonly substitute 'i' instead of 'a' in the Formative Sing, as: iv^axj mathime etc. 2) In poetry the long vowels may be retained, as: s=^-^^ ma- tho-e, ^\.^Xjq matha-na. SECTION II. THE INFLEXION OF NOUNS. 235 Plur. II pers. ^4ax> your head; mathuva, III pers. ^^4-^ their head mathune , o — -- PLURAL. Nomin.: Lgjci matha; Format. Nominative. I pers. J^£o mathame, my heads; Sing. ] ^^ P^^^* i^ matha-e, thy heads; III pers. (j*J^ mathase, his heads. matha va; mathahiva. mathane ; mathahane. ^jj^ mathane. Formative, jvA^^ mathanime, ^x^jijo mathani; ^4^^ mathanihe. ^juJL^ mathanise. Plur. \ II pers. "y^ mathava, ^fi^ mathaniva. your heads. in pers. jj^x) mathane, ^^^^ mathanine. their heads. ^^b 3jjLp.5" j^i Jl^^ ^A.|j| ^ Who art thou, whence comest thou, what is thy name? Maj. 167. Where the sight of the Lord is, there are their abodes. These are their tokens: concealed they wander about in the world. Sh. Ramak. II, 9. 236 SECTION II. THE INFLEXION OF NOUNS. 3) Nouns ending in i (masc.) Nouns ending in i (m.) generally change tlie same to ya, far less to yu, before the accession of the suf- fixes; in the Formative Sing, e must always be changed to ya. The same is the case in the Nom. Plur., so that only the context can decide, whether a noun is put in the Nominative or Formative Sing, or in the Nominative Plural. In poetry a final short vowel may be lengthened before a suffix, as: ^l^lio dhanyase, instead of: y^Joit) dhanyase. SINGULAR. Nom.: (^a54> dhani, master; Form.: ^^Xic> dhanya. Nominative. Formative. I(vlii4> dhanyame, ^,^^ dhanyame. jvli^4> dhanyume, my master. Sing. Plur. n pers. in pers. II pers. ni pers. ^/J^i> dhanya-e, tli^t> dhanyu-e, thy master. ^j.Joi^ dhanyase. ^^Ja5t> dhanya-e. j^j^'^ dhanyahe. \j^^j^c> dhanyase. va. (jrfJait> dhanyuse, his master. ^Iit> dhanyava, ^lii^ dhanya ^^4^ dhanyuva, your master. ^jlXio dhanyane, ^ji^^^ dhanyane. jj^iio dhanyune, their master. Norn, Sing. SECTION II. THE INFLEXION OF NOUNS. 237 PLURAL. ^^I^j> dhani; Format.; ^j^^'^ dhanyune. Nominative. Formative. I pers. ^^i> dhanyame, *Ali54> dhanyui my masters. n pers. ^^Ai^i> dlianya-e, tliy masters. mime. ^-}lsJSiC> dhanyuni. ^j^k^licf dhanyunehe, m pers. uw.lL»t> dhanyase, ^j*jj^ii> dhanyunise. his masters. n pers. ^y^i> dhanyava, 'yk^i:> dhanyuni va. PI I your masters. m pers. ^j^ic> dhanyane, ^jMUxii> dhanyunine. their masters. ;^. (5t ?%• ^ ^^l 'Piy^-y There is constantly in my body the talk of my friend. Sh. Suh. lY, 7. O my master, do not make apart (thy) quarter from those friends. Sh. Barvo HI, 5. Because her steersman is sturdy, therefore she floats facing the current. Sh. Surag. m, 6. 4) J^ouns ending in i (fem.) Nouns ending in i (fem.) either shorten final i to 'i' before the suffixes or change it to ya; the latter is always the case with adjectives and participles ending in 1. The termination of the l!^omin. Plur. u is shortened to V and the final nasal dropped before the suffixes. 238 SECTION H. THE INFLEXION OF NOUNS. SINGULAR. Nom.: ^jlj bai, lady; Format.: ^IJ ba-ia. Sing. Nominative. Formative. [VjLj baime, ^jLI bayame. *.jLj bayame, my lady. ^Lj baya-e. j^LJ baya-e, thy lady. u*4Lj baise, u^LS bayase. (j^G bayase, his lady. I pers. ^LS baye, n pers.o puphi, a father's sister, has, besides the re- gular forms, also fU-fo xmphiname or: (*1^^, puphinime. Like the moon on the fourteenth of the month was his turban in the plain. Sh. Ked. Y, 1. ISTot by any messenger have they been asked; inside is their grief. Sh. Eamak. YI, 4. 5) Nouns ending in e (fem.) Nouns ending in e remain either unaltered before suffixes or change final e (i) to ya, as well in the No- minative as in the Formative Sino^ilar. SINGULAR. JSTom.: ^y-^ chokare, girl; Format.: ^y^- No7nmative. Formative, ^Sy^ chokarime, thy girl; the same. $ j»Il5j^> chokaryame. ^Jj.4jN chokare, thy girl; the same. ^jlSl^ chokarya-e. ^IS'i^^ chokaryahe. (j^Jj-^ chokarise, his girl; the same. j^Jj-^ chdkaryase. Sing. I pers. II pers. ni pers. 240 SECTION II. THE INFLEXION OF NOUNS. Plur II pers. m pers. yy^}^s^ chokariva, your girl; the same. J.jl5j.49^ chokaryava. ^w5j.^ ch5karine, their girl; the same. jj^ Jj-^ chokaryane. PLURAL. Nom.: ^jy,yS^^ chokaryu; Form.: ^Jj.^ chokarine. Nominative. Formative. I pers. ^l5j.^ chokaryume, ^jSj^s> my girls. chokarinime Sing. ! ^^ P^^^- i^;^«^ ch5karyu-e, isi/r^ thy girls. chokarini III pers. (j^v^j-^ chokaryuse, ^j^^^j..^ his girls. chokarinise. Plur. n pers. ^/Jj.^ ch5karyuva, ^^yfy^ your girls. chokariniva in pers. ^/Sy^i^ chokaryune, ^^yfy^ their girls. chokarinine. The substantive noun ej.:^ joe or &j\ zoe, wife, presents, when joined by suffixes, some irregularities, as: SINGULAR. Nominative. Formative. A-jj.:?. joime, my wife. Sing. I pers. < ^;y=^ joyame; (^j.s. joname ; *-gij^ jonhame ; jjj.^ jonime; ^}=^ jonhime; The same. Sing. SECTION II. THE INFLEXION OF NOUNS. 241 Nominative. Formative, ^^^}^ joe, ^^j^ j5ye, thy wife. II pers.r- jone, ^>=- jonhe. m pers. ^y^ joise, ^j^^j:^ joyase, his wife. (jj^s^ jonase ; jj^*.^ j^ jonhase. The same. Plur. II pers. ^j.:^ joiva, ^^^ joyava, | your wife. [The same. y^y^ jonava, ^}^ jonhava.i m pers. ^jo^::. jome, ^j^:^ joyane, their wife. >The same, ^jj^ jonane, ,^.^3.^^ jonhane. PLURAL. Nominative. Formative. 1 pers. (4j.^ joyume, my wifes. [Vaj^^ joyunime. etc. etc. When he was seated on the judgement seat, his wife sent him word. Matth. 27, 19. The other nouns, ending in u, a, V are generally not used with suffixes, though occasionally one or another is found with a suffix; in this case final u is changed to u' in the Nominative, and in the Formative to ua, whereas a and V keep their place before suffixes. Trump p, SindM-Grammar. Q 242 SECTION II. THE INFLEXION OF NOUNS. ^^ydS '^d^i^ J^A Law (^^jI^L^^ I^ ^^ Whatever their lifetime is, it has been spent in sorrow. Sh. Eamak. Ill, 4. §. 41. 11. PRONOMmAL SUFFIXES attached to Postpositions and Adverbs, The rules, according to which pronominal suffixes are attached to nouns, are also applicable in reference to postpositions and adverbs. Any pronominal suffix may be joined with a postposition, but with most of them only the suffix of the third person Singular and Plural is in use. It is however quite optional in Sindhi, either to subjoin a pronominal suffix to a postposition, or to put the absolute pronoun before it in the Formative, with or without the Genitive case -sign ^^, as: ^^'^ vatise, with him, or: ^^ ^^ huna vate. 1) The postposition jtXll sando. jcXlIw sando is originally not a postposition, but an adjective, and therefore declinable, as well as j^, the Grenitive case-sign, for which it is very frequently sub- stituted (see §. 18). It corresponds to the Panjabi sanda, being (Sansk. part. pres. ^rff = ^?^) and sig- nifies therefore: 'belonging to'. It is now used as a regular postposition, chiefly in connexion with suffixes, before such nouns, to which suffixes are not attached, either for the sake of the final vowel, or for per- spicuity's sake, or, as in poetry, for the sake of the metre. 1) Short 'a' may be lengthened to a in poetry for the sake of the rhyme. SECTION 11. THE INFLEXION OF NOUNS. 243 SINGULAR. Masc. jjJ^ sando. Sing. Plur. Nom.: jjdl sand5. I pers. ^jJll sandume, my. n pers. fetXll sandu-e, thy. HE pers. j^jJl sanduse, his. I pers. ^^tXll sandu, our. n pers. jlUaw sanduva, your. m pers. j^JuLw sandune, their. Form.: jdl sanda. I»ja.l saiQdame. fetXLl sanda-e. j^tXLl sandase. ^yjcUv sanda-u. ^jo^ sanda va. jjjalw sandane. Sing. PLURAL. Nom.: ijdiL sanda. Form.: ^^jdL sandane, I pers. ^OjJL sandame, my. n pers. &iXlL sanda-e, thy. m pers. j^tXH sandase, his. |W4XIaL sandanime. ^jdl; sandani. ^tXll sandanise. Plur. £>" I pers. ^^JcUw sanda-u, our. n pers. ^iXlL sandava, your. m pers. ^JolI sandane, their. ^^tXll sandineu. ^iXll sandiniva. ^tXliL sandanine. It has been stated already (see: nouns ending in o, §. 40, 2) that o and a may also be preserved before the suffixes, as: |*jjdiL sandome, j^lJs-Ll sandase etc. Q2 244 SECTION II. THE INFLEXION OF NOUNS. Sing. Fern.: ^^^xH sandi. SINGULAR. Nominative. I pers. j^JcXl*! sandyame, my. II pers. ^^iXl^ sandya-e, thy. ni pers. (j^jJll sandyase, his. Formative, The same. Plur. i- I pers. ^^JoLw sandy ati, our. II pers. ^.tXlIw sandyava, your. in pers. jjJtXl.^ sandyane, their. Sing. Plur.<^ PLURAL. I pers. f^jd-1 sandyume, my. n pers. ^^tXll sandyu-e, thy. ni pers. ^tXll sandyuse, his. I pers. (not in use). II pers. ^JtXLl sandyuva, your. m pers. jjotXLlsandyune, their. (UJtXll sandy unime. ^AJiXl^ sandy um. ^^jtXH sandy unise. (not in use). ^AjJoL-l sandyuniva. ^jjj>i\lL sandyunine. The Plural of jjol is very little in use, jJJaw preceding a noun in the Plural generally in the Singular. A^tXAAA/ v:^^ ^^v£i.Lww ^:s>' ,^^^».^«*jo .-.^ajLww (c:?^^ Even that is my native country, where my sweet- heart is. Maj. 86. Thy government, o Sumaro! has been reconciled to the Lord. Sh. Um. Marui VI, Epil. SECTION 11. THE INFLEXION OF NOUNS. 245 &^iXXjM (^-w i^-f^ ^^-6^ ^^^7t^ f^y^')^^ The people (and) whosoever are thy relatives, will give thee reproaches. Maj. 292. The women have on the head two plaits, The men have on the heads hair: In the hands sticks, On the heads plaits: These are their habits. Yerses of the Mamuis. The garden (of Eden) is their place; the noble ones have gone to Paradise. Sh. Ked. IV, 5. In poetry jjulw is now and then used without suf- fixes, which must then be supplied from the context: ^^v-wwt> jjiltS liXLww i^y^ ^-gA.n.' /-jL^tXi The worthy ones, says Latif, see his gifts. Sh. Sor. I, 14. 2) Postpositions ending in 'u'. ^IL sanu, with. SING. PLUR. I pers. jjLIl; sanume, with me. ^yj^\^ sanuhu, with us. n pers. ^iLl sanu-e, with thee. ^iLw sanuva, with you,. ni pers. j^LL sanuse, with him. ^L^ sanune, with them. 246 SECTION U. THE INFLEXION OF NOUNS. In the same way the suffixes are attached to jj>aaw I senu, with. In the third person Plural we meet often in poetry the form ^IXj^ senana or ^LLu« senane, in- ' _ ' '' ' stead of ,j«Lu« senune. > ^ ^L^ 5^4^. '^ ^ ^j^ jj^' -^^^ 4S^^ u^ u^ As long as there is a breath with thee, compare none with Punhu. Sh. Ma^B. Y, 5. My soul is gone with them, o mother! how shall I sit in Bhamboru? Sh. Hus. XI, Epil. 3) Postpositions ending in e or e (e). ^ kane or ^ kane, near, with, to. SING. I pers. *.a5^ kanime, to me. n pers. xf kane , to thee. in pers. u^5^ kanise , to him. PLUR. ^jyj^S kaneu, to us. ^ kaniva, to you. ^j^ kanine, to them. About the derivation of ^ see §. 16, 4. Other postpositions of this kind are : *> gare , to ; v£)5 vate, near, with; ^4^^ manjhe, in; ^-gJuic hethe, below etc. Before the suffix of the third person Sing, final i (e) is often lengthened to i, as: u^-^'j vatise, near him, and before the suffix of the third person Plur. to 1, as: ^j^x^jsxx) manjhina, in them. SECTION 11. THE INFLEXION OF NOUNS. 247 In one palace there are laklis of doors, in thousands are to it windows. Sh. Kal. I, 23. If we are beaten by them, even then it is our ad- vantage. Sindhi Eead. Book, p. 64. jj^ feLitXij J^ixj ^^ ^If L^ \i Whatever be the matter with thee, o Bijalu, let me hear that. Sh. Sor. 11, 17. Do not unbosom thyself to them; weeping do not make it public. Sh. Ripa I, 8. His disciples came unto him. Matth. 5, 1. Postpositions and adverbs ending in e are treated differently; they either retain e before the suffixes or they shorten it to e (i); thus the postposition ^-^ khe, the case -sign of the Dative or Accusative, retains its final e before the suffixes, as: ^j^j^ khese, to him (her, it), ^^.^4^ khene or ^J*A^ khena, to them, whereas ^\ ute, upon, shortens final e to e (i) as: (jjuol utise, upon him (her, it) or: (j^^jI utehise; ^s\ utine, upon them or: (jM^ol utehine. Others again vary, as: ^^xxj mathe, upon (properly the Locative of j.^^^ math5, the head), -4^ matha-e, upon thee (the Formative of j-g-Xo), but jj^j^jo mathise, upon him (being" properly the Locative of .4^, the top). 248 SECTION II. THE INFLEXION OF NOUNS. ..^Jl/JO Lua/» ic-^^ ^Uo .L^ yMXjOyS>' During the rainy season, four months, rains have fallen upon thee. Maj. 646. There is no reproach upon it; if thou wilt ask any thing, ask it. Sh. Khambh. I, 10. To the postposition ^j^ me (in) the suffixes are attached in the following manner: u^^lfjo mese, in him (her, it) or: j-^lo maise (in Siro); ^^Ili mainu, in us; ,j-yo mene or ^^^ mena (in Sir5: ^jjyo maina) in them. 4) Postpositions ending in a, a, au, 6. Those, which terminate in a, remain unaltered be- fore a suffix, as: eLLy^) to thee, (y-Ui^ kenase, to him, jjLL5^ kenane, to them. Similarly jjL^ kha, from, as: U^14^ khase, from him, ^jL^ khane, from them (the final nasal being dropped before a following dental n); ^jL^ matha, from upon (properly the Ablative of j.^xxi matho, the head), ^L^ mathae, from upon thee, (j^jL^jc;© mathase, from upon him; yj^Lx^iLj puthiase, from behind him, after him (properly the Ablat. of ^j puthe, the back). Before the suffix of the third person Plural a eu- phonic 'i' is occasionally inserted, especially in poetry, as: ^j^L^:di manjhaine, instead of: ^L.^.:doo manjhane, out of them. Those ending in au, au, au (termination of the Ablat. Sing.) remain likewise unchanged before suffixes, the final 1) This postposition or adverb is never found without suffixes. SECTION II. THE INFLEXION OF NOUNS. 249 nasal only being dropped before them, as: u^^jol^^ nia- thause, from upon it, ^Li^ mathauva, from upon you; U^juuL^ khause, from it, ,^jl^ khaune, from them. Those ending in o change it to a before suffixes, as: u^LI puase, behind him (from ^jIj puo). I .. •♦<. .. I -^ .. I .. I Then the mother asked Majno: what (matter) has happened to thee? Maj. 44. My limbs melt, no languor befalls them. Sh. Kha- h5ri, Epil. I. I sacrifice myself for thee; thus he spoke. [MaJ. 755. That whole state becomes known out of them. Sh. Kal. I, 17. ^ ^ - ..I Then that, which is ^ain, becomes ^ain, if thou re- move from it the dot. Sh. Kal. I, 21. This head is ready ; o bridegroom , for you I sacrifice it. Sh. Ked. lY, 8. ^ Such days will come, that the bridegroom will be taken from them. Matth. 9, 15. 250 SECTION III. THE VERB. SECTION III. THE VERB. - The great deterioration, the modern Indian lan- guages have undergone, is nowhere more apparent, than in their conjugational process. They have lost nearly- all the Sanskrit tenses, especially those of the Past, which were too intricate for the conception of the vulgar, and have therefore been compelled to have recourse to com- positions, in order to make up for the lost tenses* They differ very greatly as to the method, which they have followed in this respect, every one of them exhibiting some peculiar features, which are not to be met with in the other idioms. Chapter XIL Formation of the verbal themes, the Imperative and the Participles. §. 42. Formation of the verbal themes. I. We have seen already (§. 7, 2) that the In- finitive of the Sindhi verbs, terminating in anu, cor- responds to the verbal noun of the Sanskrit and Prakrit. The root of the Sindhi verb is therefore not to be sought in the Infinitive, but in the Imperative, which ex- hibits the crude form of the verb without an additional increment, except that of the final vowel, which is no part of the verbal root. Properly speaking there is only one class of verbs in Sindhi, as all verbs, with a slight difference, are in- flected alike. There are therefore no different con- jugations, as in Sanskrit, but the same rules of in- flection apply equally to all verbs. 1 SECTION III. THE VERB. 251 In some tenses though there is a marked difference between neuter and active verbs, and we may there- fore, for practical purposes, divide the Sindhi verbs into neuter and active ones. 1) The neuter or intransitive verb ends in the Infinitive in anu and in the Imperative in V, as: ^JUd hal-anu, to go, Imper. Jki hal-u, go. J^r^ var-anu, to return, „ ^^ var-u, return. But in derivative verbs, where the termination of the Infinitive is preceded by a, the Infinitive ends, for euphony's sake, in inu, as: ^jCI^ kara-inu, to be blackish, Imper. i.\\^ kara-u. When the verbal root ends in short 'a' or 'i', a eu- phonic V is inserted between it and the increment of the Infinitive, as: ^j^j pa-v-anu, to fall, Imper. ^ pa-u. ^'^ ni-v-anu, to bow, „ yj ni-u. 2) The active or transitive verb ends in the In- finitive likewise in anu (in Sir5 commonly in inu), and in the Imperative in 'e' (and partly in \i'), as: j^jJL^ jhal-anu, to seize, Imper. ^y^ jhal-e. ^y^, phur-anu, to plunder, „ w^j phur-e. But when the increment of the Infinitive is pre- ceded by 'a', a and o, the Infinitive ends, for euphony's sake, in inu^), as: ^^^ ma-inu, to measure, Imper. -i ma-e. ^L^JLr galha-inu, to speak, „ &l^ilf galha-e. ^ji63 dho-inu, to carry, „ &^3 dho-e. 1) Some Sindhis, especially the Musalmans, write aud pronounce instead of ainu : a-anu or contracted: anu. 252 SECTION m. THE VERB. If a verbal root (active or neuter) end in i and u, these vowels are respectively shortened before the in- crement of the Infinitive, as: 0^^ pi-anu, to drink, Imper. ^^ pi-u. jjtj pu-anu, to string beads, „ i^ pu-u. In some instances radical o is likewise shortened to 'u' in the Infinitive, as: ^yi^ dhu-anu, to wash, Imper. ijjcj dh5-u. ^^j ru-anu, to weep, „ j^ ro. A number of Sindhi verbs have a different form when used in a neuter or active sense, but it would be wrong to say, that such neuter verbs are changed into an active form; they recur to a different Sanskrit form, from which they are derived and must therefore be con- sidered as independent verbs. The most common of these are: Neuter. Active. ^L§^l ujhamanu, to be extin- ,j;4^^^ ujhainu. guished. ^tol udamanu, to fly e>?^^i udainu. J^4^ bajhanu, to be bound ^^i^ bandhanu. ^^.^' bujhanu, to be heard ^iiXXj bundhanu. J>.sx^ bhajanu, to be broken . . . ^.^^ bhananu. J^.i^ bhujanu, to be fried .... ^^^.sL^ bhunanu. JjJL^j phatanu, to be torn u;^ pharanu. ^h J^panu, ^^ ^^ ^^^^ i^ Jananu. J^ Jamanu, J J^.1^ chupanu, to be touched . . . ^^.^a* chuhanu. ^j^^s^^ chijanu, to be plucked. . . ^^-^ chinanu. SECTION III. THE VERB. 253 Neuter. ^,yS^i^ dhopanu, to be washed . 0^3 dubhanu, to be milked. . ,^4^i dajhanu, to be envious . ^^y^ssi'S dhrapanu, to be satiated ^^4t*J rajbanu, to be boiled ^h^ rahanu, to remain . . . 0^ sujanu, to be heard. . . ^2S kusanu, to be killed. . (j^L^ khajanu, to be eaten J^^oL^ khamanu, to burn . . ^^\y^^ khajanu, to be raised JjiJ^ gasanu, to be abraded. J^ labanu, to be reaped . . Jj4^ labhanu, to be obtained ,j^^ lusanu, to be scorched . ,:oUo mapanu, I, i . • Y3 ^ -^ • ' y to be contame( Jj^Lo mamanu, J ^^jj^ musanu, to have ill luck . ^^^ visamanu, to be extinguished jj^l^. vikamanu, , > ^ „ * > to be sold . . . ^^ vikanu, J^LS^ vehamanu, to be passed. . hapamanu, to be lessened J yabhanu, to be copulated . Active- ^y^^ dhuanu. J^i duhanu. (j^j dahanu. dhra-inu ,j^Jo^ randhanu. ^^^s rakhanu. ^\yj^ sunanu. 0^^ kuhanu. ^L^ khainu. (j^Lgi^ khainu. ^xyXj^ khananu. jj^^ gahanu. jjPJ lunanu. ^\y^ lahanu. ^yi luhanu. Lh? Uo mainu. muhanu. visamu. ^; vikinanu. ^Li« vehainu. ^^Lxi hapainu. J^ yahanu. 254 SECTION lU. THE VERB. n. Almost from every neuter or active verb a Causal may be derived. Those causals, which have sprung from a neuter verb, are, as regards their signification, active, whereas those, which are derived from an active verb, are doubly active. The Causal is derived by adding to the root of a verb the long vowel a, to which the increment of the Infinitive accedes as usual; e. g.: J;.^!. vircanu, v. n., to be tired; causal: ^IL^^ vir- c-a-inu, to cause to be tired or to tire. J^S dasanu, v. a., to show; causal: ,^Lli dasa-inu, to cause to show. fl^ysaS dhoinu, v. a., to carry, causal: ^Ij^sn^ dho- a-inu, to cause to carry. But when the verb ends in radical 'a', euphonic v is inserted between the final root-vowel and the causal increment, as: J^io ma-inn, v. a., to measure; causal: ^^ys ma-v-a- inu, to cause to measure. Exceptions to this rule: a) When a verb ends in radical r, r, rh, h, pre- ceded by a short 'a', the causal increment may be in- serted in the root itself, coalescing with the short radical V to a, as: j^lj baranu, v. n., to burn; cans.: ,j^\S baranu, to kindle. ^^ garanu, v. n., to drop; cans, '^"jlf garanu, to cause to drop. J^i-j.j parhanu, v. a., to read; cans.: ^^S\^ parhanu, to cause to read, to teach. Jj4? gahanu, v. n., to work hard; cans.: ^\^ ga- hanu, to make work hard. SECTION III. THE VERB. 255 In a number of verbs, the final r (r) of which is preceded by the vowel 'i', a is inserted before the final radical and T dropped, as: J^l^ajJu sudhiranu, v. n., to be arranged; cans.: ^jjLitX^ sudharanu, to arrange. jjl^. visiranu, v. n., to be forgotten; cans.; ^^X^^ vi- saranu, to forget. ^TJo^ kindiranu, v. n., to be spread; cans.: ^71 Ju^ khindaranu, to spread. ^•^^1 ujiranu, v. n., to be waste; cans.: ^j'jL^f uja- ranu, to lay waste, etc. etc. But the regular mode of forming the causal is also in use, as: J^jl aranu, v. n., to be caught; cans.: J^jKM ara-inu, to entangle. '^JS taranu, v. a., to fry; cans.: J;»jt^* tara-inu, to cause to fry. ^^'C parhanu, v. a., to read; cans.: ^{sn'-C parha- inu, to cause to read. ^jJ^^ sambahanu, v. n., to be ready; cans.: ^^jL^IlI sambaha-inu, to get ready. h) When final r or r of a verbal root be preceded by the short vowels 'i' or 'u', the causal increment a coalesces with them to e and o respectively, as: J^l^j phiranu, v. n., to turn; cans.: ^y>^j> pheranu, to cause to turn. ^^iyj^ khindiranu, v. n., to be spread; cans.: ^i^ljfXj^ khinderanu, to spread (besides ^JlJ.*.^). 256 SECTION HI. THE VERB. ^j%^^ vichuranu, v. n., to be separated; cans.: j-jj (^ ^ . vichoranu, to separate. Those verbs, in whicli the root- vowel 'i' coalesces with the causal increment a to e, may add, besides the causal increment, a to the end of the root, without altering the simple causal signification of the verb: as: ^^'y^, phiranu, v. n., to turn; cans.: ^Zf^, pheranu or: jjollygj phera-inu. Some verbs with radical 'u', form the causal in the common way, as: ^'j^ kuranu, v. n., to be tired; cans.: ^^(>^ kura-inu, to tire. A few verbs change in the causal the final cerebral t (tr) and d to r, as: ^S^ budanu, v. n., to be drowned, cans.: '^-ly^ bo- ranu, to drown. ^1j!j trutranu, v. n., to be broken, cans: ^i}J t^o- ranu, to break. c) If a verb end in radical 'i' or 'u', r is inserted after the causal increment a, as: ^^ di-anu, v. a., to give; caus.: drijanu, v. n., to be afraid; caus.: ^^A'ks3 dre- Jaranu, to frighten. j^^aa; sikhanu, v. a., to learn; caus.: ^^L^Xj^ww sekha- ranu, to instruct. ^.^.♦^ sumhanu, v. n., to iall asleep; caus.: ^"^L^^-l sumharanu, to put to sleep. J^^ vananu, v. n., to be lost; caus.: J^^jQ^ viiiainu, to loose. ^.■s^ virca-inu; double caus.: ^jfXs^l^ virc-a-r-a-inu , to cause (another) to weary. Simple caus. : jjvL5^ garanu; double causal: ,^jK*Lf gar-a- inu, to cause to shed (tears). Trump p, Sindlii-Grammar. R 258 SECTION IE. THE VERB. Simple cans. : ,j)*j-S^^ vichoranu; double cans.: J^K-j.^^ vichor-a-inu, to cause to separate. Simple caus.: J^JlZA^:> pher-a-inu ; double caus.: ^^.Sljtlv^. pber-a-r-a-inu, to cause (another) to cause to turn. Simple caus.: J^jCL^f gha-r-a-inu; double caus. : ,j.Sl^tjL4^ gha-r-a-r-a-inu , to cause (another) to cause to wound. Annotation. The Prakrit forms the causal either by adding the increment e (Sansk. ay) or ave (Sansk. apay = abe = ave, cf. Varar. VII, 2Q^ 27). In the modern Indian idioms only the latter increment is in use, which has been shortened to a in SindhT, Hindustani and BangalT, the syllable ve having been dropped. In Gujarat! the causal is formed by adding the in- crement av (and vad, when the verb ends in a vowel); in Pan- jabi by means of the increment aa. In Marathi av is generally shortened to av. The insertion of euphonic r in SindhT (in Hindustani and PanjabT 1) has its precedent in the euphonic 1, which is inserted in some Sanskrit causal themes. The double causal is formed in Hindustani by inserting V before the simple causal increment a; the same is the case in PanjabT and GujaratT. IV. Almost from every neuter, active or causal verb a Passive may be derived by adding to the verbal root the increment ^^ janu (j-anu). A few verbs, chiefly denominatives, are only found in the passive form, as: J^jLlyf ukandhijanu, to long for, ^^'^\ anguri- janu, to be exchanged, (^^IfO damirjanu, to be angry etc. Any neuter verb may take the passive form, without changing its original signification. The passive of neuter or intransitive verbs is mostly used impersonally (HI pers. Sing.) , whereas that of active and causal verbs is inflected through all persons. SECTION III. THE VERB. 259 The passive increment ^^ janu is joined to the verbal root, if it end in a consonant, with or without the conjunctive vowel 'i', as euphony may require it; but if the verbal root end in a vowel, the conjunctive vowel 'i' must always be employed, as: ^^J puranu, v. a., to bury; pass.: ,j*^^^^, pur-janu, to be buried. ghatanu, v. n., to lessen; pass.: ^^jsxic^f ghati- janu, to lessen. ^^^^^ vinainu, v. cans., to loose; pass.: ^iLS^ viiia- i-janu, to be lost. Those verbs, which end in a radical 'a' and in the Imperative in ^u' (see §. 43), as: ^jii ca-v-anu, Imper. 1^ ca-u, to speak, drop before the increment of the passive the euphonic v of the Infinitive, as: ^j^ivi ca- i-janu, to be spoken; ^jlj pa-v-anu, to fall, Imper. J, pass. J^^ixj pa-i-Janu, to fall. Those verbs, which shorten their final root -vowel (i, ti, o) before the increment of the Infinitive (§. 42, 2), retain their long vowel before the passive termination j-anu, as: Jj^j pi-anu, V. a., to drink; Imper. ^aj piu; pass, ^sxj pi-janu, to be drunk. {^y-ri pu-anu, v. a., to string beads; Imper. ^J pu-u; pass. (^%^J pu-ijanu, to be strung (as beads). ^^4> dhu-anu, v. a., to wash; Imper. ij=;&j dho-u; pass. j^^j.504> dh5-ijanu, to be washed. Exceptions to these rules are: 0»lgj thi-anu, v. n., to become; Imper. ^^^43 thi-u; pass, ij^iv^' thi-janu, to become. R2 260 SECTION III. THE VERB. ^1?^ karanu, v. a., to make; Imper. Ji^ kare (Prec. ^ kije); pass. ^iv5" ki-janu, to be done. Annotation. In Sanskrit the Passive is formed by adding y to the root of the verb; in Prak. y is dissolved into la or ijja, and in the Apabhransa dialect ija or ijJa is employed for the formation of the Passive (Lassen , p. 467). The increment of the Passive is therefore in Sindhi j, joined to the affix of the verbal noun or the Infinitive = j-anu. The Sindhi (and to some extent the PanjabT) is the only modern idiom of India, which has preserved a regular passive voice, all its sister languages being compelled to resort to compositions, in order to express a passive voice. The common way to form a passive voice in the kindred idioms is, to compound the past participle passive with the verb jana, to go, as in Hin- dustani: \^y^ Lj*l^ Klx) jj»jyo mai mara jata hu, I go being beaten = I am beaten. But the use of the passive voice, if it may be called so_, is very limited in the cognate languages, and it is avoided wherever possible, which is greatly facilitated by a great number of verbs having a neuter or passive signi- fication. §. 43. The Imperative. The Imperative represents the root of a Sindhi verb, as stated already, and as the whole conjugational process depends a great deal upon it, its formation must be explained in the first place. 1) The Imperative of neuter and passive verbs always ends in V^), as: J^lio mar-anu, to die; Imper.: yo mar-u. L^l ac-anu, to come; Imper.: -A ac-u. U^ £' 1) The only exception to this rule is: ^j»jO*.jLj pabuhanu, v. n. , to smile, which has in the Imperative, besides the regular ^*jl.J pabuhu, also: -?^Jv, pabtihe. SECTION in. THE VERB. 261 j^itXJ gad-ij-anu, to meet; Imper. : -.J.? gacl-ij-u. Those verbs, which insert a euphonic v in the In- finitive, droxD it again in the Imperative, as: ^jji na-v-anu, v. n., to bow, Imper.: p> na-u. If a final vowel has been shortened in the Infinitive, it is restored again in the Imperative, as: J^^l^' thi-anu, v. n., to become, Imper. ^a^ thi-u. ^^ cu-anu, V. n., to leak, Imper. i^ cu-u. ^^. ru-anu, v. n., to weep, Imper. j. ro (= ^is). Similarly: ^^^ veh-anu, v. n., to sit doY*m; Imper. ,^. veh-u. The following verbs form their Imperative both re- gularly and irregularly: jj^l ac-anu, v. n. , to come; Imper. _.! ac-u and iT a-u^). J^^ van-anu, v. n., to go; Imper. J>^ vaii-u and ^j^^ va-u. 2) The Imperative of active and causal verbs ends in 'e', as: JjJLj pal-anu, v. a., to foster; Imper. JIJ pale. ^Ix^ ghata-inu, v. cans., to lessen; Imper. &lx^ ghata-e. But there is a considerable number of active verbs, which end in the Imperative in 'u' and not in 'e'; some have both terminations. These are: l) From an old root I a, which is no longer used in Sindhi. but in Hindustani (Iji a-na). 262 SECTION III. THE VERB, j^ajI upinanu, to sift . 5^^| akhanu, to inform 0.^! ughanu, to wipe . . Jpi alanu, to deny . . . ij-^^ bujhanu, to understand ^itXjJ bandhanu, to bind. ^j^JUj bundhanu, to hear, ^.ic^ bhananu, to break . J^i^ bhunanu, to fry. . ^^;^^ puchanu, to ask . . ^^^j purjhanu, to understand Ohyi partiranu, to understand J^i^ parhanu, to read. . . J^j pasanu , to see . . . . j^jj pinanu, to beg .... ^^^ puanu, to string (beads). Lj pibanu, to grind 9 -- ^^j*^, pihanu, ^^^ pianu, to drink. . . J^iL^ jananu, to know , ^^y^ jahanu, to copulate . jhinikanu, to scold ^4-^4 cubhanUj to prick . Imperative, ;^j| upinu. .45"! akhu and ..^T akhe. 4^1 ughu. Jf alu. -^^ bujjhu. .5CJUJ bandhu, ^JOj bundbu, A^ bbanu. x^j bhunu. ^sJ puchu. v^^j paruru. ^^ parhu. JfJ pasu. J^j pinu. t^ puu. ^4^. pehu. -4^ pihu. ^Lf Janu. 4^ jahu. JCL^ jhiniku. ,4^4 cubhu. SECTION UL THE VERB. 263 ^li caranu, to graze . . . ^j*^^ cakhanu, to taste . J^L cuganu, to peck up food j^^..^^ cughanu, to puncture. cumanu, to kiss . jj^Ais. cunanu, to crimple (clotli) •r 3 ^^ cavanu, to speak . . ^^^-^^ cukanu, to soak up . j^^Xg^ chinanu, to pluck . ^^ chuanu, , ^^ ^^^^^ J,44^ chuhanu, J ^lio dhainu, to suck . . qIsho dhunanu, to choose ^j^A5>c> dhavanu, to blow (with bellows). ^jysao dhuanu, to wash Jjji daranu, to eat up i^^S disanu, to see . (j^i dahanu, to vex. 9 J^i duhanu, to milk ,^4^r rakhanu, to keep 0^^ sibanu, to sow. . ^^ sikanu, to long for ^jJ^Si^ sikhanu, to learn ^^L1 salanu, to divulge ^J,^^sJ^ samujhanu, to understand Imperative. L^ caru. .^JCi cakhu. 3iL cugu. 4^ cughu. (^ cumu. (j^ cunu. ^=^ cau. ^^ cuhu. ^j^^s^ chinu. I i^4'> chu-u. [,.44-> chuhu. iL^t> dhau. ^^4> dhunu. y.;DO dlia-u or ^j^o dha-e. ij.5ej dho-u. ji daru. J^^ disu. j^o dahu. ^S duhu. ^J rakhu. ,^y^ sibu. J^M, siku. ^..^Xw sikhu. Jlw salu. .44^-^ samujhu. 264 SECTION m. THE VERB. Imperative. ^"y^jjJ^ sambliiraiiu J to recollect . I^aH sambliiru, 0JLiul sunananu, to recognize . . ^LiJu sunanu. JjXLy sinikanu, > to blow the nose . > to smell smiikann , 0»^X-Iaa. singlianu, ^ly^^ik^ snngliann, ^^L^ sunanu, to hear . 0.^^ sahanu, to endure ^^ katanu, to spin ^hSs^ kadhanu, to pull out j^L^ khainu, to eat khatanu, to earn Q^ kahanu, to say ^^^^ kuhanu, to kill . ^'i^ khananu, to lift . ^^)^j^k^ khahann, to scratch ^Ju^T khedanu, to play ^^)*j^ khianu, to eat jj.-^I/* ginhanu, to take ^14^ ghuranu, to wish ^j^.^ gahanu, to rub ^^)*^f gehana, to swallow J^jG lakhanu, to ascertain ,^4^j likhanu, to write tXLw siniku. lClI suniku. ,-^^ singhu. ^^^jL, sunghu. ? - sunn. .^ sahu. o^r katu. j&Ss' kadhu. iL^ kha-u. ^^ khatu. ^^ kahu. ,^ kuhu. Jj.^ khanu. ,^L^f khahu. Jou^ khedu, ^ Idiiu. .4-^ ginhu. j4f ghin^u, 4?^ gahu. .4f gehu. .4^ lakhu, ^jCi likhu. SECTION III. THE VERB. 265 Lnperative. j^aII limbanu, to plaster .... v^uJ limbu. ^jj lunanu, to reap ^} lunu. 0».gj lahanu, to obtain ^ lahu. Jj^A^i lahananu, to have to receive . ^^^ lahanu, J^ixi munjanu, to send . . . . vsxi munju. ,j^.^Lo mananu, to need. . . . • <^^ \a^ mane. ^jXjJq mananu, to ask cXjLo manu. ^jjjo mananu , to shampoo .... ^ manu. ^l)>^^ vathanu, to take ^^ vathu. J^^^^ vijhanu, to throw .... , (^^^ vijhu. ^f^ vikinanu, to sell ^.5^ vikinu. ^xi hananu, to strike . . . . . ,^ hanu. 0^^) yahanu, to copulate . . . ^^ yahu. The following active verbs form their Imperative in an irregular way: 0oi dianu, to give; Imper. ^^S de (instead of: ^^'i diu). l) Capt. Stack in his Sindhi Grammar has adduced the following verbs also as active and ending in the Imperative in V: ^Xj bakanu, to chatter, ,j^-L^ bhulanu, to forget. 9^9 - 0*ix.i:^ camburanu, to stick close to, j^Xl^^ jhakanu, to prate, 0».^-ua; suhanu , (^jL.§XvA/ siiha-inu, I f^'ir^y vacuranu, to stick to, f^^Mj^ visahanii, to trust, \^^ vananu, to please; ^^)^y rucarm, to please, but all these are properly intransitive verbs and therefore quite regular in their Imperative. 266 SECTION III. THE VERB. 9 ^ jj^jo nianu, to take away; Imper. ^ (instead of ^ niu). Verbs wMcli end in the Imperative Sing, in 'u', form the Plural in o (or yo, with euphonic y, if the verb end in any other vowel but 'a' and ti), and those, which end in the Imperative Sing, in e, form their Plural in yo or io, as: ' I acu, come, Plur. j.£s^l ac-o. iiiDj dho-u, wash, „ ^i.ySSiO dho-yo. ^ pa-u, fall, „ j^j pa-o. (^i de, give, „ p^ dio. , - vT T . . [>^^ jlial-yo or S^ jhal-e, seize, ,, T ,. ,^ ^ . j^A^ jhal-io. An older form of the 11. pers. Plur. is the termi- nation ho, which is also in use, as; j-gi-^ jhal-iho. The other persons of the Imperative must be supplied from the Potential. There is another from of the Imperative, ending in je^), which is added equally to the root of neuter and active verbs. This form of the Imperative is pro- perly a Precative, implying exhortation, request or prayer, as: ^yjo motanu, to return; Imper. ^yi motu; Prec. Jyi mot-ije, please to return, j^ls^ ^atanu, to scatter; Imper. cio^ vit-e; Prec. ^j^ vit-ije, please to scatter. If a verb end in 'i' or i, the initial 'i' of ije is dropped, as: 1) In poetry ije is now and then lengthened to eje, as well in neuter as active verbs, ending in the Imperative in 'u' or 'e', as: ^•.5 kar-eje, from ^^yi karanu, Imper. yS kare. /f>^^ vaneje, from ;j^^^ vananu, to go, Imper. J>^ vanu. SECTION III. THE VERB. 267 J^i^ kliiann, v. a., to eat, Imper. ^^5^ khi-u; Prec. ^ khi-je. ^^^j^ thianu, v. n. , to become; Imper. ^^s thi-u; Prec. ^^ thi-je or: >s^* thi-je. Quite irregular is ^S karanu, to do, in the Pre- cative, as: '^^S karanu, Imper. S kare, Prec. ^ ki-je or: >s^ ka-je. " " " Neuter or such active verbs, as end in the Im- perative in 'u', take frequently, especially in poetry, the termination iju instead of ije, as: J^ sunanu, to hear; Imper. ^L sunu; Prec. Lx», sun-iju. This termination is also now and then found in active verbs, ending in the Imperative in 'e', as: J^AjL^ bha-inu, to think; Imper. ^^L^ bha-e; Prec. Js^^L^ bha-iju. The Plural of the Precative ends in ijo (or ejo, as the case may be), as: ^y\ pur-ije (^^^, pur-eje), shut up; Plur. j^^^^ pur- Instead of ijo (ej5) the terminations ija, ijae (ija-e), ijahu (ijau) ijaha are also in use, especially in a ho- norific sense, and are therefore also referred to a subject in \h& Nominative, as: ^s^ var-iju, return; Plur. L^.^ var-ija. ^>^^ van-iju, go; „ fiLiv:^^ van-ija-e. X^ sun-iju, hear; „ ,iLs^ sun-ijaha. >s^vJ parh-iju, read; „ iLiv^o^S parh-eja-u. 268 SECTION III. THE VERB. Annotation. In Prakrit the different (10) conjugations of the Sanskrit have already been discarded and only the first of them is in common use. The II pers. Sing, of the Imperative ends in Prakrit in 'a', which in Sindhi has been changed to V and ^e' respectively; the II pers. Plur. ends in ha (Sansk. "If dha) , and in Sindhi in o , h being commonly dropped. — In the cognate idioms the final vowel of the II pers. Sing, of the Imperative has been dropped altogether; in the Plural the Im- perative ends in o, as in Sindhi, with the exception of the Marathi, the Plural Imperative of which ends in a, and the BangalT, the Plural Imperative of which is identical with the Singular. The Sindhi Precative is to be referred to the Prakrit in- crement ija or ijja, which is inserted between the root and the inflexional terminations in the Present, the definite Future and the Imperative (Varar. VII, 21). Lassen's conjecture (p. 357), that this increment has sprung from the Sanskrit Precative, is borne ont by the modern idioms. — The Gujarati forms the Precative in the same way as the Sindhi by adding to the verbal root the increment aje (Plur. ajo). — In Hindustani iye is joined to the root of the verb for the III pers. Sing, (generally with ap etc.), it being considered more respectful to address a person in the III pers. Sing.; and iyo for the II or III pers. Plur.; Jie is only used, when the root ends in I or o. — In Panjabi the increment T is added to the root for the II pers. Sing., and To for the II pers. Plur. Similarly io is joined to the root in Bangali, as well for the II. pers. Sing, as Plur. §. 44. The participle present. From the Imperative or the verbal root the Par- ticiple present is derived in the following way: 1) Neuter verbs ending in the Imperative in V, add to the root the affix and 5 (see §. 8, 11), as: i^^^JbD halanu, to go; Imper. Jk;o hal-u; Part. pres. j jJJbft hal-and5. The same is the case with active verbs, the Im- perative of which ends in 'u', as: SECTION III. THE VERB. 269 J;.Xi hananu, to strike; Imper. Jji hanu; Part. pres. jjdli han-ando. Some of these however use also the other form in indo, as: J^Ll sunanu, to hear; Imper. J^ sunn; Part. pers. jdlxL sunando or: jJUaIvw sunindo. Those verbs, which end in radical a, and in the Imper. in 'u', form, for euphony's sake, their Participle present in indo, and not in and 5, as: J^L^ kha-inu, v. a., to eat; Imper. iL^^ kha-u; Part. pres. jjd-oL^ kha-indo. J^oLiJo budha-inu, v. n., to become old; Imper. i.li(Xj budha-u; Part. pres. jJo-oLijLj budha-indo. Those verbs, which shorten their final vowel in the Infinitive or insert a euphonic v (§. 42, 1. 2), do the same before the affix of the Participle present, as: ^^ pa-v-anu, to fall; Imper. ^^ pa-u; Part. pres. fj^^ pi-anu, to drink; Imper. ^>o pi-n; Part. pres. jJCLo pi-ando. ^y&t> dhu-anu, to wash; Imper. ^^o dho-u; Part. pres. jjup04> dhu-ando. In some verbs, with eux^honic v inserted, a con- traction takes place, as: jj^i ca-v-anu, to say; Imper. ^ ca-u; Part. pres. jjo^ ca-v-ando or: jjJ^ cundo. ^^ hu-anu, to be; Imper. ij.5> h5-u; Part. pres. jjj^^ htindo (instead of jjd^ hu-ando). A similar contraction takes ^Dlace in: 1^70 SECTION III. THE VERB. ^lyJi^ klii-aiin, to eat: Imper. ^^ klii-u: Part. pros. sJlLy^ khindo. (joS cli-anii. to give: Imper. ^5 de: Part. pres. jJujo dindo. jj^ ni-anii. to take away: Imper. ^ iie: Part. pres. jjuxj nindo. The follo^Ying verbs form their Participle present in an in^eo-nlar wav: j^^l ac-anii. to come: Imper. _.! ac-u; Part. pres. ^jjjj indo. ' »-. vananu. to go; Imper. ^: vaiiu; Part. pres. jtUj^ vendo or jcUj* vindo. 2) Active and cansal verbs form the Participle present by adding the affix in do to the root, as: J^"!^ bharanu, v. a., to fill; Imper. y^ bhar-e; Part. pres. jjJjw^ bhar-indo. JplitU? gandha-inu, to cause to connect; Imper. ^Li^Ju? gandha-e; Pcirt. pres. jJUL-oL5>Jur ganciha-indo. The verb ^3" karanu, to do, forms its Part. pres. both regularly and irregularly, ^iXx^S kar-indo or: jjj/ kando, ^iXlf kindo. 3) The participle present of the Passive voice is formed by adding the affix ibo to the root of the passive theme (cf. §. 8, 13), as: J^^ pasanu, v. a., to see; pass. (^^^.^^wS pas-ijanu; Part. XDres. j-A^ pas-ibo. ^1^ ca-v-anu, v. a., to say; pass. 0*ivi ca-ijanu; Part. pres. j-j^ ca-ibo. SECTION III. THE VERB. 271 J^^3 dhu-anu, v. a., to wash; pass. 0%j^^ dh5-ijanu; Part. pres. >^>^^ dho-ibo. ^l^^ pi-anu, v. a., to drink; pass. ,j.^o pi-janu; Part. pres. jjLfj> pi-bo. J^I^* tlii-anu, V. n., to become; pass, ^sx^ thi-janu; Part. pres. ^^^ thi-bo. ^"S karanu, v. a., to do; pass. J^ ki-janu; Part. pres. ^ ki-bo (also: j^ ka-bo). The Participle present is also used in the sense of a Future, as will be seen under the future tense. §. 45. The Participle past. From all Sindhi verbs, be they neuter, active (causal) or passive, a past participle may be derived by adding the affix io or yo (the latter always, when the root ends in a vowel) to the root of the verb (see §. 8, 14). The past participle of neuter verbs implies simply a prae- terite sense, whereas that of active (causal) verbs always denotes a praeterite passive signification. J^Li jaganu, v. n., to be awake; p. p. j-^f^Li jag-io, having been awake. J^ji^ khatanu, v. a., to gain; p. p. j-v^L^ khat-yo, having been gained. ,|j.jL4j1j parbhainu, v. cans., to quiet; p. p. j-}L.^jlJ parbhayo, having been quieted. J^osv.^5^ parkhijanu, v. p., to be tested; p. p. j.^4^ parkh-io, having been tested. Those verbs, which insert euphonic v in the In- finitive, drop it again before the affix of the past par- ticiple, as: 272 SECTION HI. THE VERB. ^J^ ca-v-anu, to say; p. p. j^ ca-yo. ^^ na-v-anu, to bow; p. p. j.Ai iia-yo. If a verb end in 'i' or i, the initial 'i' of the affix io is dropped in the past participle; the same is com- monly the case, when the root ends in one of the Pa- latals c, ch, j, jh. ,^^ ni-anu, to take away; p. p. ^j ni-o. j^^l^* thi-anu, to become; p. p. ^X^ thi-o. J^ocs^ ji-anu, to live; p. p. j.^ ji-o. i^^d. kuchanu, to speak; p. p. j.^ kuch-o. J^^^ sojhanu, to investigate; p. p. j-g^j-w sojho. If final o and i has been shortened in the Infinitive, it is restored again (with a few exceptions) in the past participles, as: ^^j dhu-anu, to wash (Imper. i.^ssii> dho-n); p. p. j.jjjS4> dho-yo. J^ ji-anu, to live (Imper. ^j^ ji-u); p. p. j1ks> ji-o. About the compound affixes ya-lu or ia-lu, ya-ro (ia-ro), which are attached to the past participle, in order to impart to it more the nature of an adjective, com- pare §. 9, 22. A considerable number of verbs form their past participle in an irregular way, that is to say, they have retained the old Sanskrit-Prakrit form of the past par- ticiple, modified only according to the laws of trans- mutation of letters, as current in Prakrit and Sindhi. We subjoin here an alphabetical list of them. ^L^l ubhamanu, v. n., to boil up; p. p. jJL^jI ubhano. i^^i ubahanu, v. n., to stand; p. p. y^^^] ubitho. ^\ utanu, V. a., to say; p. p. ^\ uto. SECTION III. THE VERB. 273 J>i! V. n., to be woven, ^.f ,^1 V. a., to weave, j ^xL^I ujhamanu, to be extingnislied ; p. p. jiL^:^! njhano. J^l V. n., acanu, to come; p, p. j.j| ayo. jj^fil V. n., udamanu, to fly; p. p. j.il5! udano. ^wS'l V. a., ukaranu, to engrave; p. p. jjw5l ukaryo or: yX^^ ukhato. J^^l V. a., ughanu, to wipe out; p, p. ^!^f\ ughatho, ^1 alanu, v. a., to deny; p. p, j.Jf alto. ,j^f ulahanu, v. n., to descend; p. p. j-^l ulatho. ^f ananu, v. a,, to bring; p. p. jtXjf ando. J^.^ bajhanu, v. n,, to be bound; | p. p. j.^ bajho or JjijcAj bandhanu, v. a,, to bind; ] ^Jo badho. ^ bujhanu, V. n., to be heard; 1 ^^ ^^ ^^^ ^^^^j^_ J^iXu bundhanu, v. a., to hear; J ^Ju budanu, v. n., to be drowned; p. p, jJLj budo. ^^^^■g? bhajanu, v. n., to run away; to be broken; ,^;,i^j bhananu, v. a., to break; J^^ix^ bbijanu, v. n., to get wet; p. p. j.a^j bhino. J>ixJ.j bhuianu, v. n., to be fried; ^? , t __ Y^T' ^ • ' ' f P- P- >%^ bhugo. ^^.ix^j bhunanu, v, a., to fry; J ^J*^^ bhucanu, v. n., to be digested; p. p. ^x^ bbuto. ^jj-^ bhunanu, v, n. , to wander about; p. p. j.!^ bhuno. J^ bihanu, v. n., J ^' , * [to stand up; p. p. 14x0 bitiio. j^.^-o bihanu, v. n., ^ ± x j^ ,.^ . ^ ^Lj painu, v. a., to get; p. p. pij pato. Trumpp, Siudhl-Grrammar. S p. p. y^ bhago. 274 SECTION III. THE VERB. vl>=?. P^Janu, V. n., to be finished; p. p. I ^' P^no, [ijcsi' pujito. ^^^ pacanu, v. n., to be cooked; p. p. tXo pako. ^j^,.^^j purjhanu, v. a., to understand, p. p. j^t>U purdho. J^lj parcanu, v. n., to be reconciled; p. p. < -^>H -^ ' [i^lj parco. jjlS parnanu, v. a., to entrust, p. p. p'S parto. J^^. pavanu, v. n., to fall; p. p. j.^. pi5. ^tj puanu, V. a., to string (as beads); p. p. ^\.j puto. J^jL^^, phatanu, v. a., to tear; p. p. ^jL^j pbato. (j^L^. pliasanti, v. n., to be caught; p. p. j-^'l^J phatho. J^iLg-j phitanu, v. n., to be injured; p. p. jiLg.^ phit5. ^J^■^, pahucanu, v. n., to arrive; p. p. jXg.1 pahuto. J^>14^, phasanu, v. n., to be caught; p. p. j^i^. phatho. J^^Iw^ phisanu, v. n., to burst; p. p. 34^. phitho. ^LlJ pehanu. W. n., to enter; p. p. s-^iLo petho. ^.^^ pehanu, j^^.^^ picanu, V. n., to be credited; p. p. jJUj pito. J^^-o pisanu, V. a., to grind; p. p. ^^. pitho. J^Aj pianu, V. a., to drink; p. p. ^x^ pito. 0*4^. pihanu, v. a., to grind; p. p. j-^a-v^s pitho. J^* tapanu, v. n., to be warm; p. p. ^ tato. J^* Cusanu, V. n., to be gratified; p. p. | -^^ ^- ^^' [j-§^* tutho. J;.X1^' thakanu, v. n., to be weary; p. p. jX^* thako. ^JL^ jhalanu, v. a., to seize; p, p. SECTION IIL THE VERB. 275 J^Q* trahanu, v. caus., to frighten; I p. p. j-g^'Q* tratho. J^p trahanu, v. n. , to be frightened ; J p. p. ^'p tratho. 0oLi Japanu, v, n., to be born; I p, ]), plL Ja-o, ^IL ^xi Jananu, v. a,, to bring forth; J Jayo or j^i^ Janio. ^^L^ Jananu, v. a., to know; p. p. pl^ Jato, J^^ jabhanu, v.n, to be copulated; j ^^ ^^ ^^ .^^^^^ J^,'^.> jahanu, v. a., to copulate; J i^X:^ jumbanu, v, n., to be deeply engaged; p. p, jjc:^ juto or yXj jhalio. ^Xi. cukanu, v. n. , to be finished; p. p. jjCa^ cuko. J;>14t> chupanu, v. n., to be touched; I .. ' ^h i~ J;.^4> chuhanu, v. a., to touch; J ^JLg^ chutanu, v. n., to get loose; p. p. }':i^ chuto. j^^^kscg^ chijanu, v. n,, to break; ^j_^l^ chinanu, v. a., to break off; ^^^-^ cuhanu, v. a., to soak up; p. p, j^L cutho. ^^)J^t>o dudho. Jjsio duhanu, v. a., to milk; J 0.L^5 drijanu, v. n., to be afraid; p. p. py^ drino. ^^i>yi drahanu, v. n., to tumble down; I p, p. ^^'^o dratho. J^IJiS drahanu, v. cans., to demolish; J p. p. ^Uo dratho. ^^J^'^ disanu, v. a., to see; p. p. s-gJJ ditho. S2 p. p. j^,^g> chino. 276 SECTION III. THE VERB. ,:wj|l5>5 dhrapanu, v.n., to be satiated; ^,- :: -n _. u^' r^ ' ^ ' ■> ' [ P- P- >jl v^4> dhrao. J;.jip&t> dhrainu, v. a., to satiate; J j^iS dahanu, v. a., to torment; p. p. jjot^o dadho. ^'i dianu, v. a., to give; p. p. jj^ dino. ^l^s rijanu, v. n., to be watered; p. p. jt>. rido >%•; rijio. J^; rajhanu, v. n., to be boiled; 1 ^ ^ ^^^^ ^^^^ J^icXj^ randbanu, v. a., to cook; J l^)^j^\ rujhanu, v. n., to be busy; p. p. y^C>\ rudho. J^J racanu, v. n. , to be immersed; p. p. ij" rato. J^x rusanu, v. n., to be sulky; p. p. j^\ rutho. Jj^^t rumbhanu, v. n., to be engaged; p. p. ^c>\ rudho J^j rubhanu, J or yJ^'^ rumbhio. ^t] ruanu, v. n., to weep; p. p. j.js runo. J^^^s rijhanu, v. n., to be pleased; p. p. jj&Jus ridho. J;*js3oLx)Ll/ samaijanu, v. n., to arrive at the years of dis- cretion; p. p. jiLx)Ll samano or: j->UoLl samayo. ^d: sujanu, v. n., to be swollen; p. p. ji^ suno. ^di sujanu, v. n., to be heard; p. p. suo ^'j^ sunanu, v. a., to hear; J y^ sumo. J^4^ sijhanu, v. n., to be seethed; p. p. ysaCs^ sidho. JjXl sukanu, v. n., to be dry; p. p. jjCl suko. ^JLIu salanu, v. a., to divulge; p. p. jJC-LL salto 3^-U*/ salio. J^'^UL samaijanu, v. n., to be contained; p. p. jJU samano. SECTION III. THE VERB. 277 0*4^^ samujhanu, v. a., to understand; p. p. ^xlL sa- muto or j-^^w samujho. J^,^,»w sumahanu, v. n., to go to sleep; p. p. 3.^^ suto O 9 or jl^^j^ sumhio. ^y.^jlL sambhiranu, v. n., to be prepared; p. p. fi^^jj,^ sambhtiro, jJ^^^aa^ sambhfmo or: y^y^/jS^ sam- bhirio. ^ir karanu, v. a., to do; p. p. j.^ kio, j.^ kayo; ^jiS kito. ^;U^r kumatijanu, y, p,^ to wither; p. p. jiU^r ku- ^y^/ ktimaijanu, ^an^ or ^U/ kumayo. ^jo\-^ khamanu, v. n., to be burnt; p. p. jiL^^^ khano. ^r^.1^ khapanu, v. n., to be wearied; p. p. j>x^ khato or yit^ khapio. ^^4^ khupanu, v. n., to be fixed; p. p. j-X^ khuto or yJ^ khupio. 0^1^ khisanu, v. n., to be reduced; p. p. j..^A.gi^ khitho. J^.lug5^ khusanu, v. n., to be plucked out; ]3. p. yj^^ khutho or y%^^ kbusio. f^ kuhanu, v. a., to kill; | ^ ^ ^ ^^^j^_ ^ZS kusanu, v. n., to be killed; J j^l^ khananu, v. a., to lift up; p. p. y^^ khayo or j.AA^ khanio. Jj^$^ khuhanu, v. n., to be tired; p. p. j..^^^ khutho. ,j^ gapanu, v. n., to stick (in mud); p. p. j-aT gato. J^if* gutanu, V. a., to plait together; p. p. yxf guto. ^^ySS gasanu, v. n., to abrade; I J^4^ gahanuj v. a., to rub; J p. p. j.=g,^f gatho. 2T8 SECTION IH. THE VERB. ^IJ" gusanu, V. n., to fail; p. p. j>^ ^^^^^^ Jjolii lainu, V. a,, to apply; p. p. jol^f lat5 or ^jS layo, ^iS lahanu, v. cans., to cause to descend; p. p. ^^^3 latho. J>1J labhanu, v. n., to be obtained; ,-, -t -fi _ Y^: f P- P- j^tJJ ladno. Jj4^ lahanu, v. a., to obtain; J j^^XJ likanu , v. n, , to be hidden ; p. p, j.jO liko or j.^ likio. J^j limbanu, v. a., to plaster; p. p. i „ " . U^^J limbio. /:>!/• J lusanu, V. n., to be scorched; •♦ '» i-xi - 7 ^ • P- P- H^y I4I1O' Jj.i^ luhanu, v. a., to scorch; j ^2;^ macanu, v. n., to fatten; p. p. jjci mato. .:>Iy^ musanu, v. n., to be unlucky; ..> , . _ Y ^ • ' ' [ P- P- 3-^ mutho. 0^ muhanu, v. a., to cause loss; j ^^^^J^ vardo, j.^^'^ vathito. Jj.^^ vijhanu, v. a., to throw; p. p. j^j^ vidho. J^w vircanu, v. n., to be wearied; p. p. jj\. virto. j^L^. visamanu, v. n., to be extinguished; p. p. jiLIu^ visano. J^^ vasanu, v. n., to fall (as rain), p. p. ^^^ vatho, ^^•| utho, j.4j^ vutho. J^l^* vikamanu, v. n. , to be sold; p. p. jil^^ vikano. Jj.A^ vikinanu, v= a., to sell; p. p. j^ vikio. SECTION III. THE VERB. 279 ,ly^^ vananu, v. n., to go; p. p. p^ vio. J^i^. vehejanu, v. p., to bathe; p. p. jjc^^ veheto. 0.^^ velianu, v. n., to sit; p. p. j.^J^ vetho. J^^yoLj^ hapamanu, v. n., to lessen; p. p. jiLl^ hapano. J^J yabhanu, v. n., to be copulated; j ^ ^ ^^ ^^g^^. J^ yahanu, v. a., to copulate; J §• 46. The participle of the Future passive or the Gerundive 0- The participle of the Future passive or the Gerun- dive is formed by adding to the verbal root the affix ino (or ano, if the verb end in 'i' (i) and optionally ino and ano, if the verb end in V (o)). The Gerundive can only be derived from active verbs; neuter verbs form also a similar participial noun by means of the affix ino, but it is not to be confounded with the Gerundive; see §. 9, 12. The final vowel of a verbal root undergoes the same changes before the affix of the Gerundive, as before the affix of the Infinitive (§. 42), so that for practical pur- poses the rule may thus be given, that the termination of the Infinitive anu is simply changed to ano (ino), in order to form the participle of the Future passive. About the derivation of the affix ino see §. 8, 12. J^^^ vijhanu, v. a., to throw; Gerund, j.1^^ vijhino, what is to be thrown. J^S dianu, v. a., to give; Gerund. j.1jj dian5, what is to be given. 1) A kind of participle of the Future active is formed by at- tacliing the affix haru to the Infinitive, as: sL^^LsO halana-haru, one who is about to go; see §. 9, 33. 280 SECTION EI. THE VERB. .s- ? ^y^C> dhuanu, v, a., to wash; Gerund. -^^c> dhitand or j.il55t> dhuino, what is to be washed. ^jL^^ khainu, v. a., to eat; Gerund. j.ioL^ khaino. what is to be eaten. §. 47. Indeclinable past participles. The Sindhi uses different past conjunctive or in- dechnable participles. 1) The form most in use is that ending in i (o) or e. a) Neuter or such active verbs, as terminate in the Imperative in 'u^, form the past conjunctive parti- ciple by joining to the verbal root the affix i, as: ^r,J^ var-anu, v. n., to return; past part. conj. ^^^l var-i, having returned. ^>lw sunanu, v. a., to hear; p. part. conj. !«/ sun-i, having heard. Those verbs , which end in a radical i, coalesce with the affix of the past part. conj. to i, as: 0.^4^* thianu, to become; Imper. ^^'s thiu; p. p. conj. ^j^s thi, having become. Those verbs, which end in ti, shorten u before the affix 1 (as before the affix of the Infinitive), as: 0^^ pu-anu, to string (beads); Imper. ^y^^ pti-u; p. p. conj. ^^ pu-i. But those verbs, which shorten radical final o to \i' in the Infinitive, restore the same again in the past participle conjunctive, as: ^^y ru-anu, to weep; Imper. y r5; p. p. conj. ^jj> ro-i. SECTION III. THE VERB. 281 If in the Infinitive euphonic v has been inserted between the verbal root and the affix of the Infinitive, it is dropped again in the past part, conj., as: ^I^ ca-v-anu, to speak; Imper. ^ ca-u; p. p. conj. X^ ca-i, having spoken. J^lj pa-v-anu, to fall, forms either regiilarly: ^^j pa-i, or irregularly ^^Jaj pe-i, having fallen. The verb ^^\ acanu, to come, makes in the p. p. conj. either regularly ^^f ac-i, or irregularly ^^1 ac-e. The verbs Jjoj dianu, to give (Imper. ^(3 de) and J^ nianu, to take away (Imper. ^ ne) make in the p. part. conj. ^ajo de-i and ^Z^J ne-i or ^^ na-i. Passive verbs, be they derived from neuter or active themes, form the p. part. conj. quite in the same way, as verbs of the active voice, by adding the in- crement i (o) to the passive base, as: ^j^.iLjj.J lo-ij-anu, v. p. to be moistened; p. part. conj. ^rsvSjj lo-ij-i or j.iS\oy lo-ij-o, having been moistened. h) Active and causal verbs, ending in the Im- perative in 'e', form the past part. conj. by adding the affix e to the root of the verb, as: ^JUo malanu, v. a., to polish; p. p. conj. JJo mal-e, having polished. ^^\^ lagainu, v. cans., to apply; p. p. conj. ^LSJ laga-e, having applied. 2) The second past participle conjunctive is formed by adding to the root of the verb, be it transitive or intransitive, the affix yo (or io). This form is only used with a Present, Future or Imperative, and may therefore in most cases be translated by the present participle, as: 282 SECTION III. THE VERB. ^j^ motanu, v. n., to return; p. p. conj. ^^yt mot-yo (mot-io). jj^.^A^ sithanu, v. a., to compress; p. p. conj. j.^^a*/ sith-io. If the verb end in 'i' (i), it coalesces with, the affix io, as: ^'6 dianu, to give; p. p, conj. p5 dio. 0.AJ pi-anu, to dink (Imper. ^^^ piu); p. p. conj. ili pio. Those verbs, which shorten original o to 'u' in the Infinitive, restore the same again in the p. p. conj., as: j^yo4> dhu-anu, to wash (Imper. ^ys^o dho-u); p. p. conj. j-sjjoo dho-yo. ^ys ru-anu, to weep (Imper. j. ro); p. p. conj. j.jj. ro-yo. The verbs J^l^ khananu , to lift up , ^ki hananu, to strike, ^^Ci^karanu, to do, drop, as in the past par- ticiple, their final radical before the affix yo, as: J^lgi^ khananu, p. p. conj. y.uj^ kha-yo or: y^^i kha-yo. J^ii hananu, p. p. conj. ^.^ai ha-yo or: yi ha-yo. ^If'karanu, p. p. conj. y^ ka-yo or: jjcT ki-yo (ki-o). 3) The third past participle conjunctive is formed by adding to the root of transitive verbs, irrespec- tively of their termination in the Imperative, the affix je (i-je), and ji (i-ji) to the root of neuter verbs. This form is generally used with the Present and Past tenses. ^yX^ khananu, v. a., to lift up (Imper. ^^^4^ khanu); p. p. conj. ^5^^^ khan-ije. 0.:it. vircanu, v. n., to be tired; p. p. conj. ^^^3^.^ virc-iji. 4) The fourth past participle conjunctive is formed SECTION m. THE VERB. 283 by putting ^S kare, the ^. j). conj. of ^1^ karanii, ** I after the x^ast partic. conj. ending in i or e. This compound form is used with the Present, the Future, the Past tenses and the Imperative, as: ^^S (^»; vari kare, having returned; Inf. ^j<^ varanu. ^^S JJo male kare , having polished ; Inf. ^^^ malanu. ^S ^^^}i loij-i kare, having been moistened; Inf. oiJ loij-anu. Annotation. The indeclinable past participles are formed in Sanskrit either by the affix tva or ya. In Prakrit tva is changed to tuna and (by elision of t) to una, and ya becomes ia. In Sindlii the first form of the past participle conjunctive ending in i (or e) corresponds to the Prakrit affix ia. The second form of the p. p. conj., ending in yo, is identical with the first, and the same must be said of the third form ending in ji (or je), the Sanskrit affix ya (Prakrit ia) haA'ing been changed in SindhT to ja (= je), as in the case of the Passive. This is fully borne out by the kindred idioms. In Hindus- tani vre find the following forms of the past part, conjunctive (Inf. mar-na): mar, mar-e, mar-ke, mar-karke. In the first form mar the affix ia has apparently been dropped altogether, whereas in the second mar-e the affix ia has been contracted to e. The affix ke in mar-ke, corresponds to the Sindhi affix je, j having been changed to a guttural, with transition of the Media into a Tenuis. Mar-kar and mar-karke are compound past participles conj. like the Sindhi form. Similarly we find in Panjabi (Inf. ghall-na, to send): ghall and ghall-ke. The Gujarati uses two forms of the past part, conj., one ending in i (used especially in compound verbs), as lakhT^ having written, and the other in ml, as lakhinT. The first form is identical with the Sindhi affix I, the latter, Ini, cor- responds to the Prakrit affix una, I having been substituted for u. The Mar at hi uses only one form of the past. part, conj., ending in un, as karun, having done; this affix quite coin- cides with the Prakrit affix una. — The Bano:alI uses either 284 SECTION IH. THE VERB. the affix ya (iya), as dekhiya (dek-e or dekh-i also being employed), or the Locative of the past participle, dekhite, in the state of having seen. Chapter XIII. Formation of the Tenses and Persons. §• 48. In treating of the Tenses in Sindhi we must dis- tinguish simple and compound Tenses. I. Simple tenses. In the Active and Passive Voice there are only three simple tenses, viz.: the Potential, the Aorist and the Future. 1) The Potential, which implies possibility, un- certainty or a wish, is formed by adding to the root of the verb the inflexional terminations. The ab- solute personal pronouns may also be put before the verb, where any stress is to be laid on the person, but they may also be omitted, where such is not the case, the respective person being sufficiently pointed out by the inflexional termination itself. Neuter and such intransitive verbs, as end in the Imperative in 'u', and all passive verbs, receive the same personal terminations, whereas those transitive verbs, which end in the Imperative in 'e', differ from them in the I and partly in the 11 pers. Sing, and in all the persons of the Plural, by retaining their characteristic 'i' (e) before the inflexional terminations. SECTION III. THE VERB. 285 Personal terminations of the Potential. Verbs ending in the Imperative in ^u'. Singular. Plural. I pers. -a II pers. -1, e -0 II pers. e -ane Verbs ending in the Imper. Singular. -ya, -ia -ie, ye; i, e in ^e'. Plural. -yu, iu e -yo, id -ine, ine In reference to verbs, ending in the Imperative in 'u', it is to be observed: a) A final long vowel is shortened before all the personal terminations in the same way, as before the affix of the Infinitive; e. g. ^^^ ruanu, to weep, Imper. ss ro, Potential I pers. ^bs ru-a, I may weep; J^L pianu, to drink, Imper. ^Jaj piu. Potential I pers. ^jLo pi-a, I may drink; J^^' pu-anu, to string (beads), Imper. iJ pti-u, Potential I pers. ^Lj pu-a, I may string (beads). In poetry an original long vowel may be restored again in the III pers. Sing,, the personal termination e being at the same time shortened to 'e', as: ©jn ro-e, he may weep, instead of ^S. ru-e. h) The euphonic v, which is inserted between the root of a verb ending in 'a', and the affix of the In- finitive, is commonly retained in the Singular and the III pers. of the Plural, but dropped commonly in the I and n pers. Plural, as: Inf. ^^j pa-v-anu, to fall. Potential, Sing. I pers. ^Ij!j pa-v-a, 11 pers. ^j^S pa-v-e, HI pers. (^^j> pa-v-e; III pers. Plur. ^"yj pa-v-ane; Plur. I pers. ^yji^^ pa-u, II pers. j.^j pa-o. In the 11 and III pers. 286 SECTION III. THE VERB. Sing, however v may be also dropped, as .v^^i ca-e, thou may st say; ^^ ca-e^), he may say. c) In the m pers. Plur. verbs , which end in 'u' (u) or original 5) and 'a' (with euphonic v inserted) fre- quently contract the inflexional termination u-ane, a- v-ane, to tine, as: ^^s rune, they may weep, instead of ^^j ru-ane; ^^^ pune, they may fall, instead of ^^ pavane; ^^ cfme, they may say, instead of ^li cavane. A similar contraction takes place in the II pers. Sing, and in the HI person Plur., if a verb end in 'i' (i), as: jo-jS di, thou mayst give, instead of ..>aj^ di-e; _ *" * . . ^. - *'" ' ^jj^ dme, they may give, instead of ^j3 diane; ^j^o ni, thou mayst take away, ^^^ nine, they may take away; jJ.aj pine, they make drink; jj-v^ khine, they may eat; but the uncontracted form is equally in use. d) Yerbs, which end in a radical a, and in the Im- perative in 'u', insert in the I pers. Sing, and Plur. and in the 11 pers. Plur. a euphonic y before the flexional termination, as: ^^LSLiJj budha-y-a, I may become old, ^^.liJo budha-y-u, ^LSjio budha-y-5, we, you may become old. In the HI pers. Plur. they end likewise, for euphony's sake, not in ane, but in ine, as: ^^L^ kha-ine, they may eat. An exception to this rule is ^L4^ kha, I may eat, instead of ^j^l^ kha-y-a. In reference to verbs, ending in the Imperative in 'e', it is to be observed: 1) The characteristic 'i' (e) of the Imperative may be contracted with the inflexional termination of the 1) /c^ ca-e is even contracted to ^ss^ ce, when used more in ..I * .• i' the sense of a particle, to quote the words of the speaker ('says he'). 1 SECTION III. THE VERB. 287 I and II pers. Sing, and the 11 and I pers. of the Plur. to ya, ye (yi), yu, yo, or not, if the verb end in a consonant; but the contraction must take place, if the verb end in a vowel, as: ^LJiX^:^ chadya, or j^LjL^^, ^^^S.^ chadye or ^aSjL^ chadie etc.; but: ^LjL^ bha- ya, jj^L^j bha-ye etc. from ^{^ bhainu, to think. In poetry however the looser form is also in use, as: jjLoL^ bha-ia or ^LIji.4^ bha-iya. In the II pers. Sing, the in- flexional termination ye or yi may also be contracted to e or 1, as: jjm.5^ karine, or irregularly in ^f kane or ^ kine. Annotation. The Sanskrit Potential has aheady qiiite dia- . / ' appeared in Prakrit. But, abstracted from this significant cir- ' cumstance, there can be no doubt, that the Sindhi Potential corresponds originally to the Prakrit Present tense. In Sindhi itself there are many reminiscences , that the Potential properly represents the old Present of the Prakrit; for it is very often, chiefly in poetry, used without the characteristic j.-^J, in the sense of the Present. After the custom had gained ground, to express the Present by joining the y^ tho to the old Present, the old Present was reserved to denote a Potential mood. The inflexional terminations of the Sindhi Potential correspond very closely to those of the Prakrit Present, as: Prak. I pers. Sing, ami (Sansk. ami), Sindhi I; II pers. Sing, asi (Sansk. asi), Sin- dhi e (or f), ^a' being dropped (as a conjunctive vowel) and s 288 SECTION IH. THE VERB. being first changed to h and then dropped altogether; III pers. Sing, a-ti or a-di (Sansk. a-ti), and by elision of t or d: a-e, Sindhi e. In the I pers. Plur. the Prakrit has different termi- nations, as a-mo (Sansk. a-mah), a-mu, a-ma, or a-mo, a-inu etc. These latter terminations have given rise to the Sindhi termi- nations u, m being elided and final 'u' lengthened to u and nasalized at the same time; II pers. Plur. a-ha (Sansk. a-tha), Sindhi o, h having been dropped and 'a' lengthened to o; III pers. Plur. a-nti (Sansk. a-nti), Sindhi ane, t having been elided in this conjunct letter. — The Hindustani, PanjabT and Gujarat! coincide in this respect with the Sindhi, forming the Potential in the same way, as the Sindhi, only with modified inflexional terminations. The proper Potential of the Marathl, which is now commonly called by the Grammarians the "Past Habitual" 1), exhibits likewise the signs of the old Prakrit Present. — The Bangall alone has preserved the old Present tense, formed by joining the inflexional terminations to the root of the verb; the Present is in BangalT also used in the sense of a Potential. 2) The Sindhi has a regular Aorist or Praete- rite tense denoting, that an action once took place in time past. a) The Aorist is formed from neuter verbs, by- joining to the past participle the terminations of the (now in Sindhi) obsolete substantive verb as, to be. This tense is therefore originally a compound, and the par- ticiple must be put, according to the gender referred to, either in the masc. or the feminine. The inflexional ter- minations are only affixed to the I and H pers. of the Sing. masc. and fem., to the I pers. of the Plur. masc. and fem. and to the U pers. of the Plur. masc, the TIT person of the Sing, and Plur. masc. and fem. being left without any inflexional terminations, as well as the II pers. of the Plur. fem. h) From transitive verbs, the participle past of which always has a passive signification, the Aorist is 1) As in the Marathi Grammar, published by the American Mission, Bombay 1854. SECTION III. THE VERB. 289 formed by joining to the past participle the same in- flexional terminations, as to that of neuter verbs, the in pers. of the Sing, and Plur. masc. and fem. and the II person of the Plur. fem. being likewise left without inflexional terminations. If the Agent is to be ex- pressed, this must be put in the Instrumental, the par- ticiple past agreeing throughout with its subject (ex- pressed or only hinted at) in gender and number. The inflexional terminations of the Aorist are: Singular. Mas c. Fem. I pers. -se -se II pers. -e -a (e) n pers. Plural. Masc. ■SI, su ■u Fem. The past participle of neuter and active verbs com- monly ends, as we have seen, in yo or io, fem. i. If therefore the past participle be of the masc. gender, its final o is shortened before the inflexional termination of the I person to u = u-se, whereas the final i of the fem. gender is changed, as before the other pro- nominal suffixes, to ya or ia = ya-se, ia-se; e. g. j-^JLi halio, m., gone, I pers. masc. ^jw^i haliu-se, I went or have gone , fem. ,jujJ ditha-u, you were seen; to the n person fem. no inflexional termination is added, the Plural fem. of the past participle alone being used, the subject of which must be indicated either by the absolute personal pronoun or gathered from the context. It is to be noticed, that in poetry the inflexional terminations are frequently left out, in which case the subject, if it be not indicated otherwise (by an ab- solute personal pronoun etc.)^ must be gleaned from the context. Annotation. The three praeterite tenses of the Sanskrit, with the exception of a few traces (Yarar. YII, 23), have been aheady discarded in Prakrit, their formation being apparently too intricate for the conception of the vulgar. In their lieu the past participle has been substituted in the sense of an A oris t, either with or without inflexional terminations^ the Perfect proper being denoted by a compound tense. The inflexional terminations, which are affixed in Sindhi to the past participle, are derived from the Sanskrit substantive verb 'as', to be, though they be now so much mutilated and differ so considerably from the forms used in Prakrit (Lassen, p. 345), that they are scar- cely recognisable. The termination of the I person Sing, -s i SECTION m. THE VERB. 291 corresponds to the Sanskrit asmi (Prak. amhi), 'm' having been thrown out in SindhT. In the II pers. (Sansk. and Prak. asi) s = h, has been dropped and final i (e) lengthened in the masc. to e, whereas in the feminine the initial 'a' of asi has been retained, and the latter half of it dropped altogether. The masculine termi- nation i is however also now and then applied to the feminine. In the I person Plural the Sanskrit smah (Prakrit amho) has been changed to si (s§) or su; in the 11 person masc. the Sanskrit stha has been first changed to tha, thence to ha, and with the elision of 'h' to V. In Hindustani, Panjabi and GujaratT the Aorist is made up by the past participle without the addition of inflexional terminations, but in Marathi inflexional terminations are affixed to the past participle, as in Sindhi. The same is the case in Ban gall, but with this difference, that it can form an Aorist of the active voice not only from neuter verbs, but also from active verbs; in the Passive though it must have recourse to a composition. 3) The Future, which implies in Sindhi not only the sense of futurity, but also of possibility, uncertainty, is formed a) In the Active Voice, by affixing to the present participle the same inflexional terminations as to the Aorist. h) In the Passive Voice, by affiixing to the present participle passive the same inflexional termi- nations, as to the present participle of the Active. Annotation. The SindhT has quite left the traces of the Prakrit in forming the Future and fallen back to a composition, in order to make up for the lost future tense. It has approached in this respect again nearer to the Sanskrit, which likewise forms the I Future of the active v.oice by affixing the inflexional ter- minations of the substantive verb 'as', to be, to the participial noun ending in ta (tr). The modern Arian idioms differ very greatly from each other as to the method, in which they form the Future. The Hindustani and Panjabi express the Future by means of a compound verb; they add to the Potential of a verb the. past participle ga (instead of the common gia), from the root gam, to go, the gender of which must agree with the subject T2 292 SECTION III. THE VERB. in question. This is properly a Desiderative, and not a Fu- ture; but already in Sanskrit the Desiderative is now and then used in the sense of a Future. Thus we have in Hindu- stani IXJ^yS kartin-ga, masc. , and ^Xj^*j karun-gi, fern. I shall do, literally: I am gone (IT ga), that I do {^)y^ karti), i. e. I will do or shall do; similarly in Panjabi: karanga, masc, ka- rangi, fem. The Gujarati on the other hand accedes again more clo- sely to the Prakrit; the conjunctive vowel of the Prakrit (i) has been lengthened in the I person Sing, and Plur. , in order to make up for the double ss, which has been reduced to a single one (cf. Introd. §. 19), as: lakh -Is, I shall write, Plur. lakh- Tsu, we shall write. In the II and III person Sing, and Plur. the conjunctive vowel has been dropped altogether, as II pers. Sing, lakh-se, thou wilt write etc. The Future of the Marathi is quite peculiar, and, as it seems, made up from the different terminations of the Future, used in Prakrit. The termination of the I person Sing. In (en) seems to have arisen form the Prakrit termination himi (Varar. VII, 12), and that of the I person Plural H, from the Prakrit sisi (= hisi; Lassen, p. 352), the final ^i' of which has been dropped and in compensation thereof medial 'i' lengthened = sis; final 's' has been hardened to 'r' and thence to T. The II person Plur. ends in al, which I would refer to the Prakrit termi- nation -ssaha, the latter half of which (aha) seems to have been dropped, and the conjunct ss reduced to ""s' by length- ening the preceding (conjunctive) vowel = as; ""s' again seems to be hardened to r = 1. A similar process appears in the III pers. Sing., ending in II (el); the Prakrit termination is hidi (= sidi); the initial 'h' has been elided and id(i) length- ened to Id, final ^d' being changed at the same time (as it is usual in the past participle) to ^T. The III person Plural, ending in til is quite perplexing. We would refer to the fact, that in Prakrit hittha is also used instead of hissa (tth = ss; Lassen, p. 353; Varar. VII, 15), though restricted to the I pers. Plural. In Marathi it appears, that tth has also been used in the III pers. Plural, so that the III pers. Plural would i^roperly terminate in hitthinti ; of this initial hi has been elided and the aspirate conjunct tth reduced to tt = t; n is in Marathi always dropped in the termination of the III pers. Plural and SECTIOI^ III. THE VERB. 293 in consequence the preceding vowel (i) lengthened; thus we get tit, of which final '"t' must have been changed to 1 = til. The Bang all forms the Future by affixing to the root of the verb the inflexional termination iba; this is very remark- able and without any analogy in any of the Prakrit dialects. It reminds us very strongly of the Latin termination bo in the formation of the Active Future of the I and II conjugation, which Bopp (Comp. Gramm. II, §§. 526, 663) derives from the San- skrit bhu. It would be near at hand, to compare this affix with the Sindhi affix bo, employed to form the present parti- ciple passive; but its origin will hardy allow of such a com- parison. n. Compound tenses. 1) The compound Potential. The Potential may be compounded: a) with the present participle and the Potential of the auxiliary verb ^^sn huanu, to be, in order to de- note an enduring action or state, as: ^jlli ^(Xxi'C ^*IjT I may be reading. h) with the past participle and the Potential of the auxiliary verb ^ysi^ huanu, to be, as: ^[Is^ j.1!, ^j^^^ I my have wandered about; ^^s^ >-^'<^ 3-^:»4>jJ I was being driven out. The Imperfect may be rendered more emphatic by premising the past par- 296 SECTION III. THE VERB. ticiple^j pio (lia^n.ng fallen), as: ui \5d^'i [1j> ^, they were in the habit of seeing. Annotation. In Hindustani the Imperfect is formed, as already alluded to, by adding tha to the present participle; the same is the case in Panjabi, which adds sa; the Ma- ra thi joins the Aorist of the auxiliary verb asane, viz: hoto etc. to the present participle ending in at or it. The same method is kept to in Gujarati and Bangali, in the latter language with the slight difference , that the Aorist of the auxiliary verb (viz: chilam etc.) is coalescing with the participle present. 5) The Perfect, which implies an action, that has been completed in time past, is formed by adding the auxiliary verb ^Llgil ahiya etc. to the past participle, as: ^Ll^il ^^^ I am gone, ,jLl^l JL^X^^ I have been seized. Annotation, All the kindred idioms form the Perfect in the same way as the Sindhi, by adding the Present of the auxiliary verb to the past participle. 6) The Pluperfect, which implies an action, that has been completed in remote past time chiefly in relation to some other time^ expressed or only understood, is formed by adding the Aorist of the auxiliary verb J^pe huanu to the past par- ticiple, as: ^i.55 £.^i I had gone; ^j^ isi^^ ^ ^^^ been enticed (fern.). Annotation. In Hindustani and Panjabi the Pluperfect is formed by adding tha and sa respectively to' the past par- ticiple. In Marathi the Aorist hot6 etc. is joined to the past participle and similarly in Gujarati hato etc. In Bangali (which must not resort to a passive construction in the case of transitive verbs, as the other idioms) the Aorist of the au- xiliary verb, viz: chilam etc. is united with the past participle ending in ya. SECTION III. THE VERB. 297 7) The compound Future tenses. There are two compound Future tenses in Sindhi: a) The one is compounded with the participle present and the Future of the auxiHary verb ^^^i huanu, which may be termed the Definite Future, as: (j^JLj^i jtXllo I shall be seeing. h) The other is compounded with the past par- ticiple and the Future of the auxiliary verb ^^ysi^ huanu, and may be termed the Past Future, as: j^tXj^5& ^XXs^ I shall have gone; jtVjj.i ^(Xl ^i he will have been bound. Both these tenses do not only denote futurity in its strict sense, but imply also possibility, uncertainty or doubt. Chapter XIV. The auxiliary verbs. §• 49. 9 ^9 A. The auxiliary verb ^^^ huanu, to be. Before we can fully develope the conjugational process of the Sindhi, we must first describe the inflexion of the auxiliary verb ^^5> huanu, to be, by means of which the compound tenses of other verbs are being made up. Infinitive: ^^^p^ hu-anu, to be. Imperative. SING. PLUR. II pers. ^^ or i.^s^ be thou. ^5> or j-^i be ye. ho ho-u, ho hu-o, 298 SECTION III. THE VERB. Precative. II pers. SING. ^^i hu-ije 12^ ho-ije PLUR. e iS liu-ju mayst thou be. ^ hu-jo, may ye be. ^3^ lio-je Participles. 1) Present participle: jtXj^^ litindo, being. 2) Past j)articiple: ^sn bo, j.^ buo, baving been Verbal nonn. ^^s& bn-ano, being. I. THE POTENTIAL. 1) THE SIMPLE POTENTIAL. SINGULAR. I pers. ^jL^ ^jLa55 ^jySf au bu-a, buj-a, I may be. II pers. ^A^ ^'^ (j^ tu bu-e, buj-e, tbou mayst be. III pers. ^^^ ^a;d ysa bu bu-e; buj-e, be may be. PLURAL. I pers. (j^-^ ccj^^ e>^^ ^^^ ■^^' buj-ti, we may be. II pers. j.^ ^j.a;s j^5> jj.a^I abi bo, bu-o, buj-o, you may be. Ill pers. jj.^ cu^^ cc^"^"^ ^^ 1^^^ bn-ane, btine, buj-ane, tbey may be. In tbe II pers. Sing. ^-^ cij-tV^^ bu-i, buj-i is equally in use. In poetry we meet in tbe III person Sing, fre- quently &ys£> bo-e, instead of ^Xsi^ bu-e. SECTION III. THE VEKB. 299 2) THE COMPOUND POTENTIAL. a) The present participle with the Potential ^Lp5 etc. 'May be being'. SINGULAR. Masc. Fern. I pers. ^L^ cijL^ jtXj^^^) ^l^ ^^^ ^<^^^^ htindo hu-a, huj-a. hundi hu-a, huj-a. II pers. ^^s:^ cU^^^ jtXJ^^D ^-ti^ eO"-^^ C5^^^^ htindo hu-e, hnj-e. himdi hu-e, huj-e. Ill pers. ^^ .^A^ 3^ htinda hu, huj-u. htindiu^) hu, huj-u. II pers. j.^ ^j=A^ ItXJ^^ y^ ^y.i ^^jjo^i htinda hu-5, huj-o. htindiu hu-o, huj-o. Ill pers. ^^ (^-^^ 1 4X3^^ ^''c^ ^^li jjptXJ^^ htinda hu-ane, huj-ane. htindiu hu-ane, huj-ane. h) The past participle with the Potential ^jllsa etc. 'May have been'. SINGULAR. I pers. ^Lis ^Is^ huo hua. ^lls& ^^s& hui hua. II pers. ^j^^sn „ „ hue. (j^^ ?, ,j hue. Ill pers. ^^;d „ „ hue. ^^i „ „ hue. TT i 1) The absolute personal pronouns are left out in the following tenses, as they may be easily supplied. 2) The Plural fern. ^•.j^j&^D hundiu may also be pronounced and written ^^..JtXJfcSS hundyu or ,^«.JtXJfc5& hundiyu, and so all the present participles in the fem. Plural. 300 SECTION III. THE VERB. Masc. Fem. PLUKAL. I pers. (jyo U^ hua hu. ^y^ ^y^ ^^1^ ^^' n pers. >^^ „ „ huo. j.^ „ „ huo. Ill pers. ^jli> „ „ huane. ^^ „ „ huane II. THE PRESENT. 1) THE INDEFINITE PRESENT. The Potential with -^^s th5. ^I am'. SINGULAR. I pers. ^j ^Lli hna tho. ^^ ^L^s hua thi. II pers. j..g.j (j^^ hue tho. ^45 ^j^lsa hue thi. Ill pers. yj^ ^ik hue tho. ^^ ^ik hue thi. PLURAL. I pers. L4-5 ^ya hu tha. ^y-"^ (j^ ^fi ^liifi- n pers. 1^3 j.^^ huo tha. ijy^ }^k ^^^ tliiS- III pers. L^* jjj^ huane tha. ^^^-3 (j»-S» huane thiu. Old Present of the Sansk. substantive verb 'as' to be. 'I am'. SING. PLUR. I pers. ^LI^jT ahiya. jj^i^T ahiyu. II pers. (j^-s^jf c ^j*^\ ahe, ahi. j-aj^I ahijo. Ill pers. ^f ahe. ^j*^^ ? ^j^^ ahine, ahine. This form is commonly used in the Present, and always in compound tenses, whereas i^j* ,jLa;o hua tho is seldom to be met with, and never in a compound tense. SECTIOX III. THE VERB. 301 The initial vowel a is often found without a nasal sound as: ^llsef ahira instead of ^ll^t ahiya. "When J if ko na. i 1^ ka na. J ^f lu na not any one etc. precedes suL they are contracted to ^-pi5^ konhe, ^-^^ kanhe, ^^vUS^kinhe; J na. not. preceding ^ll^l etc. may coa- lesce with it. as: .^^ilS nahe or: ^s^\ j na ahe. he is not. 2) THE DEPINITE PRESENT. The present participle with the auxiliary: ^il^\ '1 am being'. SIXGULAR. Masc. Fern. I pers. ^ \1^T 3 Joy^ ^ U^iT ^ J^^ J hundo ahiya. hundi ahiya. n pers. ^^^.y^^fjjLj^ hundo ahe. ^j.>^^ ^^-^^^ hundi ahe. ni pers. ^T „ ,, ahe. ^T „ ,, ahe. PLURAL. hunda ahiyu. hundiu ahiyii. II pers. ix^T \(XiySSi y^ ^^d<^^ hunda ahiyo. hundiu aliiyo. ni pers. ^T to. J^ ^T ^^d^J^ hunda ahini, hundiu ahine. III. THE BIPEEFECT. The present participle with the Aorist of the auxiliarv: v^^^j. 'I was' or: 'was Ijeino-'. SINGULAR. Masc. Fern. I pers. ^yS^ 3 Jo»iD hund(5 hose. ij^Zs^ ^ JJ^js hundi huyase. 302 SECTION III. THE VERB. Masc. Fern. II pers. ^^^i yiX^^sn hundo hue. ^jl^i '3^'^y^ Mndi huia^). Illpers. j.;& jdi^i himdo ho. ^^ ^^%k (^dj^i hundi hui, hi. PLURAL. :6' I pers. ^AAA;L;a tdi^^s hunda huasi. II pers. j.^^ ^yjJ^ \3<^yk hunda hua-u, hu5. Ill pers. Li ^\li> ItXi^i hunda hua, ha. hundiu huyusi. ^y^^ \jy^^y^ hundiu huyu. hundiu huyu. ly. THE AORIST. 1) THE SIMPLE AORIST. The past participle with the inflexional ter- minations. 'I was', or: 'have been'. SINGULAR. Masc. Fem. I pers. ^^sn hose. II pers. ^J.^Xs^ hue. Ill pers. J.5& ho. PLURAL. I pers. ^j^lls^ hua-si. II pers. j.is ^^Xs^ j^aP5 hua-u, hu-o, ho. Ill pers. li ^[li hua, ha. yjj^ huy-ase. ^^^^ J ^l^i hui-a, hui-e. .^^i hui. ^J^J^^y^ huyu-sl. ^^ huyu, ^^ huyu. 1) Or ^^jJXls^ huie SECTION III. THE VERB. 303 Instead of ,j.^U5> liua-si, ^^^L^J hua-sUj the con- tracted forms ij^A^L^ ha-si, ^.^Li hasu, are also in use. — The inflexional terminations are now and then dropped altogether, but in this case the absolute per- sonal pronoun must always be prefixed, as: i.s^ ^y^^^ au ho, I was etc. 2) THE HABITUAL AORIST. The simple Aorist with ^^ the. 'I used to be'. SINGULAR. Masc. Fern. I pers. ^^^ (j^jja hose the. ^^S ^j*^ hujase the. etc. etc. etc. etc. PLURAL. I pers. ^^ ^A*wU;& huasi the. ^^ ^^..k^^ huvus! the. etc. etc. etc. etc. • V. PERFECT I VI. PLUPEEFECT j ^^^^ "^ ^^^^• YII. THE FUTURE. The present participle with the inflexional terminations. 'I shall be'. SINGULAR. Masc. Fern. I pers. (j^Jo^5& hundu-se. ^j^Ju^ hundia-se^), II pers. ^j Jo^5> htind-e. ^'^^ htindi-a ^). HI pers. jjoyo hundo. (^tXjyo hundL 1) Instead of ^jj^^iX^».S^ hundia-se we find also ^J*^^iX^yS^ hundi- yase or ij*^^(Xi^ liundjase. 2) Or (j^Jo^ hundi-e. 304 SECTION III. THE VERB. PLURAL. Masc. Fen. I pers. jjju^lJJ^i hunda-si. ^J^^yiiXiysa hundiu-si. II pers. j c;<^y^ ijp^^^^ htindiu. Mnda-u, hundo. ni pers. \(XiyS!i hunda. ^^tAJ^^s hundiu. The compound future tenses are not in use. As from all neuter verbs, so also from this auxiliary an impersonal or passive form may be derived, as III pers. Sing. Present ^^ cs^j^ ho-ije tho, literally it is been; III pers. Sing. Future: j-aj^^ ho-ibo, literally it will be been. Annotation. The root i^ ho (Inf. ^yS^ hu-anu) corresponds to the Sansk. root ^ bhu, to become, which is assimilated in Prakrit to ho or huva ; the past participle of it is in Prakrit huo or huo, thence the Sindhi huo. In reference to the Potential huja etc., it is to be kept in mind, that Prakrit uses already for the Present (and Future) such forms as hojja, hojja etc., which Lassen derives from the Sansk. Precative iT^TfT (Lassen, p. 357). The root ho is used in all the kindred idioms. The old Present ^jLa^j! ahiya, I am, is derived from the Present of the Sansk. substantive verb ^^ 'as' to be, Prakrit amhi etc. The Mar at hi form of it approaches very closely to that of the Sindhi, as: ahe etc. In Hindustani (hi, hai, hai etc.) initial 'a', which has been lengthened in Sindhi and Marathi, has been dropped; the same is the case in Panjabi, as ha, hai, hai etc. In Gujarati, where initial 'a' has been likewise thrown off, we find the forms chati, che, che etc., which correspond to the Prakrit form ^f^Sf acchi etc. (Lassen, p. 266, 346). In Bang all we meet with the still more primi- tive form achi etc. SECTION III. THE YERB. 305 §. 50. B. The auxiliary verb ^-^ thianu, to become, to be. The verb ^\y^ thianu, to become, to be, is also partly used as an auxiliary verb. Its compound tenses are made up by means of the auxiliary verb ^y^ huanu. Infinitive. ^^^1^ thi-anu, to become, to be. Imperative. SING. PLUE. n pers. ^Ja^j thl-u, jX^' Cy^^ thi-o, thi-5, become thou. become ye. Precative. n pers. ^j^ ,^ thi-je, thi-Je. y^s ,y^ thi-Jo, thi-Jo. mayst thou become. may you become. Participles. 1) Present participle: jJ^wU^j thi-ndo, becoming. 2) Past participle: jl^* thi-o, become. 3) Past conjunctive participles: ^ thi ] j^^j thi-o ^ having' become. ^/ ^ thi kare 4) Verbal noun: j.il^* thi-ano, becoming, being. I THE POTEi^TIAL. 1) THE SIMPLE POTENTIAL. 'May become'. SING. PLUR. I pers. ^jU^j thi-a. ^jy^ thi-u. II pers. ^J*-v4^' ^ ^v^-vl^* thi-e, thi. a,^- thi-o. III pers. ^^' thi-e. ^j.^-j^j^^ithi-ane,thi-ne. Trumpp, Sindhi-Grrammar. XJ 'to 306 SECTION III. THE VERB. 2) COMPOUND POTENTIAL. a) The present participle with the Potential of ^yk huanu. 'May be becoming'. SINGULAR. Masc. Fern. I pers. ^lls^ 3 IlXAa^j jj^^e ^^^iXx^'J thinda hu. thindiu hu. II pers. j.^ I^^x-v^j thinda hu5. jXs^ ,j^j^^^ ^^^^j* thindo ahe. thindi ahe. Ill pers. ^T jiXiA^ ^s^\ ^iXL^ thindo ahe. thindi ahe. U2 308 SECTION III. THE VERB. PLURAL. Masc. I pers. ^j^tr%^ ItLu^j thinda ahiyu. n pers. jjt^l ttXvU4J»" thmda ahiyo. in pers. ^^j^l IcXaa^J thinda ahine. Fern. tliindiu ahiyu. thiiidiu ahiyo. thindiu ahine. m. THE BiPEKFECT. The present participle with ^^s^ hose etc. 'I was becoming' etc. SINGULAR. Masc. I pers. y^jjs j iXx^ thindo hose. n pers. jj.^ 3^^H^* thindo hue. thindi huyase. thindi huia. m pers. J.5& j JUa4> thindo ho. ^^ ^^^Xk^ thindi hui. PLURAL. I pers. ^^\ls^ It3u-V4^' thinda huasi. n pers. f t^ lA%i* thie. f ij*^* ^^i^- in pers. ^j^ thio. ^ thi. PLURAL. I pers. ^j^\.j^ thiasi. ^^^^^yl^'s thiusi. n pers. j.^* c^4^* thia-u, thio. ^^-^' thiu. m pers. \j^ thia. ^^-^ i^au. 2) THE HABITUAL AORIST. The simple Aorist with ^^ the. 'I was becoming, was in the habit to become' etc. SINGULAR. Masc. Fern. I pers. ^^ n*^>^ thiuse the. .^j^ u^--^* thiase the. etc. etc. etc. etc. PLURAL. I pers. ^j jj^aa;La4j ^^j ^j^h^yl^ thiusi the. thiasi the. etc. etc. etc. etc. 1) In poetry often: ^y^ thiose, fern. u^L^^' thiase. 2) Or: ^AA^* thie. 310 SECTION III. THE VERB. V. THE PEEFECT. The past participle with the auxiliary ^ll^jTahiya. 'I have become' etc. SINGULAR. Masc. Fern. I pers. ijLlgjf j.^.^* thio ahiya. ^La.^1 ^4j* thi ahiya. n pers. ^A^T „ „ ahe. ^^^jj „ „ ahe. Ill pers. ^5>T „ „ ahe. ^^M „ „ ahe. PLURAL. I pers. ^^l^T C^ thia ahiyu. ^^-fjT ^jy^ thiu ahiyu. n pers. j.A^I „ „ ahiyo. j.a^I ^y^^ thiu ahiyo. ni pers. ^^^ „ „ ahine. ^j^ „ „ ahine. YI. THE PLUPEEFECT. The past participle with the Aorist ^J^ys^ hose etc. *I had become' etc. SINGULAR. Masc. Fern. I pers. (j/.j.5i ^^^ thio hose. q^J^ ^^ thi huyase. n pers. ^^i J, „ hue. ^j^^ ?? 55 huia. HI pers. ^ „ „ ho. ^^Xs^ „ „ hm. PLURAL. i I pers. ^*wjU;o Ll^' ^/.^'^^/^ ^y^'-^ thia huasi. thiu huyusi. n pers. yli La^j thia hua-u. ^^li u^"^"^ ^^^^^ huyu. in pers. La^ „ „ hua. ^yi „ „ huyu. SECTION III. THE VERB. 311 Vn. THE FUTUEE. 1) THE SIMPLE OR INDEFINITE FUTURE. The present participle with the inflexional terminations. 'I shall become' etc. SINGULAR. Masc. Fern. I pers. j^Ju-^' thinduse. jj^tX-u^* thmdiase^). n pers. (J^jlVaa^' thinde. ^^Xk^^ thindia.^) m pers. 3 Jcaa4j thindo. ^^^^x^ thmdi. PLURAL. I pers. ^j^tjOx^j thindasi. ^^..K^y^iXj^^'S thmdiusi. n pers. ^Jcaa^* thinda-n. ^) ^^(XXk^ thindiu. Ill pers. iJ^-u^-^' thinda. ^j^jJuU.^* thindiu. 2) COMPOUND FUTURE TENSES. a) The definite Future. 9 9 The present participle with the Future j^tUys htinduse etc. 'I shall be becoming' etc. SINGULAR. Masc. Fern. 1 pers. (jwtXi*;© y^^k^^ jj^^ocXj^^d ^iXkj^^ thindo htinduse. thindi hundiase. ~II pers. ^^d^ysa jtLu^^' ^jjjo^^s ^^x^jp thindo hunde. thindi hiindia. Ill pers. jtXJ^^i jjo-y^* ^iX^ysa <^Cs.x^S thindo hundo. thindi hundi. 1) Or (jjjJcXaa.^* thmdiyase, (jw.JtXAX.gJ' thindyase. 2) Or ^j^iXU.^* thindie. 3) Or jcXaa^j thindo. 312 SECTION III. THE VERB. PLURAL. Masc. Fern. thinda Mndasi. thindiu litindiusi. 11 pers. ^(X^^sQ ^iXx^ ^^iXh^^ ^^jdJ./^ tliinda hunda-u. tliindiu Mndiu. Ill pers. f4XJj.5i^ ^(XXj^ ^^^^Xj^s^ ^j^j^Xaa^J tliinda hiinda. thmdiu Mndiu. h) The past Future. The past participle with the Future (jjwtXjj.5D hunduse. 'I shall have become' etc. SINGULAR. Masc. Fern. ipers. (jjjcX,Je.5& j.A=^j' (j^j4X.J9=55 z^-^' thio hunduse. thi htindiase. etc, etc. etc. etc. PLURAL. 1 pers. j^^A-W/f^XJajS La^J ^J.AAW.Je=J4Xi*=5S ^^yj^^ thia htindasi. thiu hundiusi. etc. etc. etc. etc. Chapter XV. Inflexion of the regular verb. §. 51. A. Inflexion of the neuter or intransitive verb. All the neuter verbs end in the Imperative in 'u' (§. 43) and in the participle present in ando (§. 44). SECTION m. THE VERB. 313 But there is also a considerable number of transitive verbs ending in tlie Imperative in \i' and in the par- ticiple present in an do, ^'hich take in consequence thereof the same inflexional terminations as the neuter verbs, with the only difference, that in the Past Tenses they must invariably resort to the passive con- struction. We exhibit now the inflexion of a regular neuter verb. Infinitive. (J^JLS hal-anu, to go. Imperative. SIXG. PLUR. U pers. Jlso hal-u , go thou. Jbs hal-5 , go ye. Precative. hal-i] e , , ^ ' mayst i - i, i -v - '^ ^..^sjd hai-ij-o, may ye go. ,-li> hal-iju, thou D'o. Participles: 1) present participle: jjuii hal-ando, going. 2) past participle: z^J^^ (j^jjUi halanda ahiyu. halandiu ahiyu. n pers. j^T fjul^ halanda ahiyo. halandiu ahiyo. n pers. ^4jT ItxiU ^^■fM tj>>^li^ halanda ahine. halandiu ahine. m. THE n^iPEEFECT. The present participle with ^^s^ hose etc. 'I was going' etc. SINGULAR. Masc. Fem. 1 pers. ^^si jcX^ii U*^^ (J^^-^^ halando hose. halandi huyase. n pers. ^j^^ ^iXxXi \J^^ ^iXlXi halando hue. halandi huia. m pers. ^s^ jjJjLi halando ho. ^%i ^^^^ halandi hui. SECTION III. THE VERB. PLURAL. 317 Masc. I pers. ^^m \iXxXi halanda hnasi. XT i-^ > ^ -r ^ il pers. ^Ais I JaA55 halanda hua-u. in pers. iXs^ ijJLli halanda hua. Fern. halandiu huyusi. halandiu huyu. halandiu huyu. lY. THE AOEIST. 1) THE SIMPLE AOEIST. The past participle with the inflexional ter minations. 'I went' etc. Masc. I pers. ^jZX^ haliu-se. II pers. ijoXl^ hali-e. in pers. ^Xi halio. SINGULAR. Fern. fjjjjiXi halia-se. ^^5 hali-a.^) JLi halL PLURAL. I pers. tj^HXi halia-si. ^^^j^/Ji haliu-si. n pers. ^LLi» halya-u. ^^^ haliu. in pers. ilXi halm. U^^^^ haliu. 2) THE HABITUAL AORIST. The simple Aorist with ^^^ the. 'I used to go' etc. SINGULAR. I pers. ^^ (j^^Ili haliuse the. ^^^ ^j^i haliase the. etc. etc. etc. etc. 1) Or (jj^-JjO hali-e. 318 SECTION III. THE VERB. PLURAL. Masc, Fern. I pers. ^ ^jju^uii ^ ^jj^yjJ^ haliasi the. haliusi the. etc. etc. etc. etc. y. THE PERFECT. The past participle with ^UL^jT ahiya etc. 'I am gone' or 'have gone' etc. SINGULAR. Masc. Tern. I pers. ^jUL^TjXj.^ halio ahiya. ^jLl^T J^i^ hali ahiya. II pers. ^j^J „ „ ahe. ^j^J „ „ ahe. in pers. s^\ „ „ ahe. i»| „ „ ahe, PLURAL. I pers. ^^j^jf Ldi haha ahiyu. ^y^\ ^y^^ haliu ahiyu. II pers. j-v^l „ „ ahiyo. j.^i»| „ „ ahiyo. Ill pers. ^^T „ „ ahine. ^j^J „ „ ahine. VI. THE PLUPERFECT. The past participle with the Aorist ^^s^ hose. 'I was gone' or 'had gone' etc. SINGULAR. Masc. Fem, I pers. ^^st j.^5 halio hose. yj^Ii JkS hall huyase. n pers. jjnaa^ „ „ hue. ^jj^s^ „ „ huia. m pers. $.^ „ „ ho. ^%k „ „ huL SECTION III. THE VERB. 319 PLURAL. Masc. Fern. I pers. ^j^U^a Ldi ^jj^^^^sa ^jy^Xi halia liuasi. haliu huyusi. II pers. yli \lXi halia hua-u. ^jy^sa ijy^i haliu huyu. Ill pers. U5& „ ,5 hua. (j^^ j? ?? huyu. VII. THE FUTURE. 1) THE SIMPLE or INDEFINITE FUTURE. The present participle with the inflexional terminations. 'I shall go' etc. SINGULAR. Masc. Fern. 1 pers. ^J^^^lXi halandu-se. ^i\xXi halandia-se.^) n pers. ^j.jtXLLi haland-e. ^tXlli halandi-a.^) Ill pers. j jJii halando. ^^^XxX^ halandi. PLURAL. I pers. ^j.j^\3 Lii halia hundasi. n pers. ^Jo^5> La^i halia hunda-u. Ill pers. tJoy& Llli halia hunda. hahu hundiusi. hahu hundiu. haliu hundiu. SECTION III. THE VERB. 321 Neuter verbs very often take in the Potential and in the Present tense the passive form, without al- tering in any way their signiiication, and are then in- flected like other passive verbs (see the inflexion of the passive verb), as: fjy^i>^ pharanu, v. n., to be fruitful, or ^j^l^j phar-j-anu; ^j^i'p v. n., lurhanu, to float, or ^^V lurhe-j-anu, ^'U^ kaviranu, v. n., to be angry or fj^^'U^ kavir-j-anu, ^if v. n. acanu, to come, (j^iv-^^l ac-ij-anu, ^^S ^'' '^' pavanu, to fall, or ^J-^^^ P^^-ij^ anu etc. The m pers. Sing, of neuter verbs in the passive form is frequently employed impersonally throughout all the tenses with the exception of the Aorist and Perfect, as: ^^^i halije, it may be gone, ^j ^s^^ halije tho, it is gone, ^55} i.Ai halibo ahe, it is being gone, j.^^ ijdi halibo ho, it was being gone; zjJii halibo, it will be gone. Many neuter verbs are in Smdhi considered both active and neuter, and therefore in the Past tenses constructed either as neuter (i. e. personally) or as tran- sitive verbs (i. e. passively, the agent being put in the Instrumental), as: ^j^^'U virhiuse, I quarrelled or: 3^^) 5 UT* -"^^ virhio, by me it was quarrelled, from ^i'U virhanu, v. n., to quarrel; ^jJ^Jl^ khiliuse, I laughed, or: j^JL^ ^.^ mu khilio, by me it was laughed, from i^^ khilanu, v. n., to laugh; but ^.s ruanu, v. n., to weep, is always constructed passively in the past tenses, as: ^j^^Lis runa-i, he wept (it was wept by him). On the other hand there are also some active verbs Trumpp, Sindlil-G-rammar. X 322 SECTION III. THE VERB. (but ending in tlie Imperative in 'u'), which are con- structed in the Past tenses like neuter verbs, and not passively, as: y^^^X^ sikhiuse, I learnt (not ylj^i^ ^^) from. ^^)J^^ sikhanu, v. a., to learn; j^lCw sikiase, I longed for, from ^X!**. sikanu, v. a., to long for. §. 52. B) Inflexion of the transitive verb. The inflexion of the transitive and causal verb agrees on the whole with that of the neuter verb in the Potential, the Present, the Imperfect and the Fu- ture; but it differs from the inflexion of the neuter verb by being destitute of the Past Tenses of the Active Voice, which must be circumscribed by the 'past tenses of the Passive Voice, the past participle of transitive verbs having always a passive signification. The agent must therefore in the past tenses be put in the In- strumental, or it may, if that be a pronoun, be affixed to the past participle in the shape of a Suffix. It is understood, that the past participle passive must agree with its substantive in gender and number, as well as the adjective. Prom every transitive and causal verb (and partly also, as noted already, from the neuter verb) a passive theme may be derived, which is regularly inflected through all tenses. We exhibit now the inflexion of a transitive verb, ending in the Imperative in 'e'. 1) ACTIVE VOICE. Infinitive: J^jL^ chad-anu, to give up. SECTION m. THE VERB. Imperative. SDsG. PLUE. n pers. (X^:^ chacl-e, give up. ^(X^ cliad-i5^) give ye up. 323 Precative. ■S^s^ chacl-ije. C ^ /v^ >^ chad-ijo, please to give up. Participles: 1) Present participle: j Joj J.^ -^ chad-mdo, giving up. 2) Past participle: jjJL^^ chad-io, having been given up. 3) Past conjunctive participles: ^jL^ chad-e 3jJu^ chad-io ^=i.4?> ^j^^ at^i chad-io. n pers. ^^4^ ^-3 tu chad-ie.^) m pers. (^JL^ ys hu chad-e. ^ yc chu chad-me.^) 1) Or yj^iXj^ chad-yo; the form i^CtV^.^ chad-eho is also in use. 2) Or ^tX.^ chad-e, ^j jcXAjji^s. chadindo hua. ^L^ chadindi hua. II pers. ^j.AAfl5 jJJ.jJ.4^ chadindo hue. in pers. ^^ jjaj jLg^ chadindo hue. I pers. ^yii Sd^ds^:^ chadinda hu. n pers. -yjn ltXAja4^ chadinda huo. m pers. ^j^ iJajJc-i^ chadinda huane. chadindi hue. chadindi hue. PLURAL. chadindiu hu. chadiindiu huo. chadindiu huane. S?. h) The past participle, with the III pers. Singular and Plural of the Potential of the auxiliary verb ,j^^, the agent being put in the Instrumental. 'By me etc. may have been given up.' SINGULAR. The object being masc. The object being fern. mu chadi hue. A^ s.jJL^9. ji* to chadio hue. a^ ^ chade thi. PLURAL. I pers. 143 ;jy44^ U^-'' uy^4^ chadiu tha. chadiu thiu. n pers. L.^' J.J 4X4^ chadio tha. ^j^^j >^^■iT^ chadio thiu. in pers. L^ ^^A^ ^jy'^f'' L^^4-^^ chadine tha. chadine thiu. 326 SECTION III. THE VERB. 2) THE PHESENT DEFINITE. The present participle with ^UL^T ahiya etc. 'I am giving up' etc. SINGULAR. Masc. I pers. ^LI|jT jtX-Lsil^ chadindo ahiya. n pers. ^^ jtXAj J^ chadindo ahe. in pers, ^T jJcAjJ^^ chadind5 ahe. Fern. chadindi ahiya. chadindi ahe. chadindi ahe. PLURAL. ' 'r . -- I pers. ^^A.§iT ftXij^X^s. chadinda ahiyu. n pers. j-AijI ItXAJii^a. chadinda ahiyo. m pers, ^^jJ lJ ... ^ , mu chadiu the. etc. etc. y. THE PEEFECT. The past participle (passive) with ^;s| ahe and ^j«^l ahine, the agent being put in the Instrumental. 'By me etc. has been given up'. SINGULAR. The object being fem. mu chad! ahe. etc. etc. PLURAL. mu chadiu ahine. etc. etc. The object being masc mu chadio ahe. etc. etc. mu chadia ahine. etc. etc. VI. THE PLUPEEEECT. The past participle (passive) with j.;i> ho, La5& hua etc. 'By me etc. had been given up'. SINGULAR. The object being fem. The object being masc. mu chadio ho. etc. etc. mu chadia hua. etc. etc. mu chadT huL etc. etc. PLURAL. i .-. mu chadiu huyu. etc. etc. SECTION HI. THE VERB. 329 YII THE FUTURE. 1) THE SIMPLE or INDEFINITE FUTURE. The present participle with the inflexional terminations. 'I shall give up' etc. SINGULAR. Masc. Fern. I pers. ij^lUj jL^ chadinduse. ,j^i\x^^(X^ chadindia-se. II pers. ^J«5^XxJJ.j jL^ chadindiu. 2) COMPOUND FUTURE. a) The definite Future. The present participle with j^Jo^ hunduse. 'I shall be giving up' etc. SINGULAR. Masc. Fern. ^ J I pers. j^4>o^55 j^XajJc^ ^j^d o 9 i> .: ^ 9 mu chadiu hundiu. etc. etc. 2) PASSIVE VOICE. Infinitive. J^tS-^ chad-ij-anu, to be given up. Imperative. SING. PLUR. II pers. ^iX^ chad-ij-u, }=^^^^^ chad-ij-o, be given up. be ye given up. SECTION III. THE VERB. 331 Participles. 1) Present participle: y^4r^ chacl-ij-i or ^s^(X^ chadij-o, ^S ^^^44^ is^^ ^"^^ chadib5 hue. chadibi hue. 1) Or ^J..K=^(X^:^ chadiji. 332 SECTION III. THE VERB. PLURAL. Masc. Fern. I pers. ^yi Lj44^ ^y^ u;-^44^ chadiba M. chadibiu M. Ilpers. j.a;d ^(X^:^ j.A^ ^JyL „ „ hue. ^s^ „ „ hue. PLURAL. I pers. ^jyi ^^<^'^ chadia hu. ^^5> ^^^(X^ chadiu hu. n pers. j.Ais 55 „ huo. j.^^ 55 55 ll^O. III pers. ^i 55 „ huane. ^i 55 „ huane II. THE PEESENT. 1) THE INDEFINITE PRESENT. The Potential with j^'S tho. 'I am given up' etc. SINGULAR. Masc. Fem. I pers. j^j- ^1^4-4^ isf^ U^^44^ chadija tho. chadija thi. SECTION III. THE VERB. 333 SINGULAR. Masc. Fern. Ilpers. ^- ^^^d^:^ ^^ (j^J4^ chadije tho. chadije thi. Ill pers. j.^- ^4-i^ ^ ^f^ chadije tlio. chadije thi. PLURAL. I pers. V:^ ^yLd<^ ^^3 ^yLiX^ chadiju tha. chadiju thiu. n pers. L^3 >=^^-€~- U^-'f^" >^^^ chadijo tha. chadijo thiu. rH pers. L^:; ^^^44^ ^r^ i^^44^ chadijane tha. chadijane thiu. 2) THE DEFINITE PRESENT. The present participle with ^ll^l ahiya. 'I am being given up' etc. SINGULAR. Masc. Fem. I pers. ^LI^iT }i4^=^ ^^"^f^^ isi^^ chadibo ahiya. chadibi ahiya. n pers. ^A.^7 >^44^ c)-^-f ^ (^^4-4^ chadibo ahe. chadibi ahe. in pers. ^i& I j.jjL^ chadibo ahe. isj ^jJ^4^ chadibi ahe. PLURAL." ' chadiba ahiyu. chadibiu ahiyu. n pers. ^^ LjJ.^^ ^aj^T (j^Lii-i^ chadiba ahiyo. chadibiu ahiyo. m pers. ^^T Ljil^ ^^T ^yl^S^^ chadiba ahine. chadibiu ahine. 334 SECTION III. THE VERB. m THE IMPERFECT. The present participle with ^^s& hose. 'I was being given up' etc. SINGULAR. Masc. Fern. I pers. ^^sa ^j^X^ ^j^i is^*^^ chadibo hose. chadibi huyase. n pers. ,j^P >->^?4^ «j^ cs"?'^^ chadibo hue. chadibi huia. ni pers. ^ >^44^ chadibo ho. ^xi ^^ f. ^ i pers. ^J^\a.S^ \ji(Xj^ ^^.J^MjJiy^p ^yj.y\ ^f-^ chadiba huasi. chadibiu huyusi. n pers. ^^ ^yj^ '■^^^^ U^^ U^^^^^ chadiba hua-u, huo. chadibiu huyu. m pers. L^i LjtX^sa. U^^ \jy^^^>^ chadiba hua. chadibiu huyu. IV. THE AOEIST. 1) THE SIMPLE AORIST. The past participle with the inflexional terminations. 'I was given up' etc. SINGULAR. Masc. Fern. I pers. (j^jL^ chadiu-se.^) ^j^Cyj^ chadia-se. n pers. ^^^Ckj^zs. chadi-e. ^jL^ chadi-a. Ill pers. ptX^ chadio. (5ojL§^ chadiuse the. ^^^' y^jL4^ chadiase the. etc. etc. etc. etc. Y. THE PEEFECT. The past participle with jjLx^l ahiya. 'I have been given up' etc. SINGULAR. Masc. Fem. I pers. ^LL^T >2^^ U^^ ^5^4^ chadio ahiya. chad! ahiya. n pers. ^-s»^T >S44^ ^^^yj^ ^44^ chadio ahe. chad! ahe. m pers. ^5>T ptX^is. chadi5 ahe. t^ k5^^>'-^ chadi ahe. PLURAL. I pers. ^y^ LSa4^ ^yt^ U^44^ chadia ahiyu. chadiu ahiyu. II pers. ^Aj»| iS JL^ j-A^T jj^j J4^ chadia ahiyo. chadiu ahiyo. m pers. ^^jf bJL^ ,j-|3| (j^ j^ chadia ahine. chadiu ahine. 336 SECTION m. THE VERB. VI. THE PLUPEEFECT. The past participle with ^^i^c hose. 'I had been given up' etc. SINGULAR. Masc. I pers. ^ys^ ^^^ chadio hose. II pers. ,j^55 p j^4^ chadio hue. m pers. js^ >J<^r^ chadio ho. Fern, chadi huyase. chad! huia. ^^lsi (^44^ chadi hui. PLURAL. S ? ,:&.•. ^ I pers. jj.A^L;c '-■'^9^ j^^-^j^^ ^JT^^i^ chadia huasi. n pers. y.si> ^"^^4^ chadia hua-u. ni pers. \H ^<3L^ chadia hua. chadiu huyusi. ) > i> ,'. ^ chadiu huyu. 5 5 !> ... ^ chadiu huyu. YII. THE FUTUEE. 1) THE SIMPLE or INDEFINITE FUTURE. The present participle with the inflexional terminations. 'I shall be given up' etc. SINGULAR. Masc. Fern. I pers. ijjuoii.^ chadibu-se. jjw.L44t^ chadibia-se. n pers. ^AjJ^cs. chadib-e. ^L jL^ chadibi-a. ni pers. yiiy^ chadibo. ^j J.^^ chadibi. SECTION m. THE VERB. 337 PLURAL. Masc. Fern. I pers. ,j.x^LjJL4^ chadiba-si. ^jj^yj^ix^ chadibiu-si. n pers. p hunduse. 'I shall be being given up' etc. SINGULAR. Masc. 1 pers. ^d^ysa jj^X^ chadibo hunduse. n pers. ^tXi^i >?<^T^ chadibo hunde. m pers. jtXl^i >^<^4T^ chadibo hundd. Fern. chadibi htindiase. chadibi hundia. chadibi htindi. PLURAL. i pers. ^-A^ftXi«.5B LjiXg^ ^j-j^^J^JiXj^s^ ^^-o-'<:N^ chadio hunduse. II pers. j.JtX3^5> 3-2 ^^^-§^ [^'•fi^y'^^^^ UT^^^"^ Fern. chad! hundiase. chadi hundia. chad! hundi. chadia hundasi. II pers. ;tX^^ '"■^^■i-^ chadia hunda-u. III pers. ItXj^ifi LjJc^ chadia htinda. chadiu hundiusi. chadiu hundiu. chadiu hundiu. Chapter XVI. Compound verbs. §■ 53. The Sindhi possesses a great facility in giving dif- ferent shadows of meaning to a verb by compounding it with another verb. 1) The most common way of compounding a verb with another is to put the past conjunctive par- SECTION III. THE VERB. 339 ticiple of the active or passive mood, ending in 1 or e^), before it.^) The construction of a verb thus compounded depends entirely on the definite verb, not in any way on the past conjunctive participle. In this way are formed a) So-called Int ens it ives, which impart to the de- finite verb a peculiar signification, arising out of the sense of the preceding past conjunctive participle, as: J^: (c^'S vathi vananu, to take off, literally: to go having taken; ,j^: ,^^xi mari vananu, to be dead, lit.: to go having died; ^J^^Z ^5>i carhi vaiianu, to ascend, lit.: to go having ascended; ^"^^^ J^A^ khuli pavanu, to be opened, lit.: to fall having been opened; J^^j ^^ ji pavanu, to become alive, literally: to fall having lived; ^^^ ^^j vahi pavanu, to pour do^Yn (as rain), literally: to fall having flown. — O'^^ C5^^5 vadhe vijhanu, to cut down, lit.: to throw having cut; ^^(Xf \S)y^ sore kadhanu, to pull out, lit.: to pull having moved; J^T (^;^ carhe ananu, to hang up, lit.: to bring having caused to ascend; ^cV.^.jn ^^i'j^J lorhe chadanu, to float off (act.), lit.: to give up having floated away; ^;(^'> j.^b* tanio chinanu, to pluck out, lit.: to pluck out having pulled; ^^ ^^^y mota-e nianu, to bring back, lit.: to take away having caused to return, etc. etc. It is to be noted, that ^i^rkhani, the past conjunctive participle of i^-l^ khananu, to lift up, is used with all 1) The past conjunctive participle ending in io is also occasionally used to make up a compound verb. 2) In poetry though the past conjunctive participle may also follow the definite verb. Y2 340 SECTION lU. THE VERB. sorts of verbs, to intensify their signification, im- plying, that the action is done forthwith, as: J^^JO ^^4^ khani likhanu, to set to writing; ,jU^I ^^i^ khani uja- ranu, to set to x^olish, ^^L^5 ^^ khani vajainu, to set to play (an instrument); '^-k"^ ^X^ khani vananu, to be off. In the same way the past conjunctive participle of ^jP pavanu, to fall, viz.: ^I pai or ^a-o pel, is put before a verb, to intensify its signification ^ as (j^^a^T^aj pal khianu, to eat on or up, literally: to eat having fallen upon it. The augment t^ tho of the Present tense is dropped, when the verb is thus compounded w^ith ^j pai or ^aaj pei. When he was grown up, he died. Abd-ul-Latif's life, p. 2. Take the advice of the pilots, that thou mayst pass the full tide. Sh. Surag. Y, 7. Tears trickle down to the kind one upon the cheek. Maj. 459. In crossing the ocean they were forcibly carried off. Sh. Sam. I, 11. ^ C? '^\'^ "^ "^^ ^^-^ ^ '^ Bring (and) fasten thy own self in the midst of the furnace. Sh. Jam. KaL rHj 13. SECTION III. THE VERB. 341 ^1 L45 ^^Xj jj^^^ ^^^ u^a:^ .3- ^21^5 ^14^ ^u When he sets to play, then four thnes as many deer, wild beasts, birds come on. Story of Rae Diacu, p. 3. Buy those goods, which do not become old. Sh. Surag. Ill, 2. Then having taken out earth from this tank they built cells and a mosque. Abd-ul-Latif's life, p. 22. He who will eat (it) with pleasure, that is my friend. MaJ. 319. &) Compound verbs, implying possibility, and power are formed by putting a past conjunctive participle before the verbs jj;.^^ saghanu^), to be able, and ^.iL:^. ja- nanu, to know, as: ^j^"*^ ^^S c;5r^ kare, karyo sa- ghanu, to be able to do; ^iLL ^^:?5 del jananu, to know to give. ^LiLf J ^53^ ^r jj^^. ^Gj ^ ^.|Ir In what manner shall I weep for my friend? I do not know how to weep. Sh. Koh. YI, 1. Thou didst not understand to give sleeplessness ta (thy) eyes. Sh. Koh. I, 12. 1) With 0».§X^ the Infinitive may also be joined. 342 SECTION III. THE VERB. c) The idea of completion is expressed by putting a past conjunctive participle before the verbs: J^T ra- hanu, to remain, ^^j vathanu, to take, ^^s^- cukanu, to be at an end; ^^^^xi nibhanu or ^^y^ nibanu, to be ended; similarly before ^^If y^j base karanu, to leave off, to have done, as: ^i^ C5^*5 vathi ralianu, to have taken; ,^7 xi^ rami rahanu, to be off; ^^)^^ (^^i^ khae vathanu, to have done eating; j^^X^ ^S kare cu- kanu, to have done; ,j^ u^ ^^ cai base karanu, to have done speaking. In order to see those lightenings he sat down. Amulu Man. p. 146. V The Caran, having slung the harp upon his shoulder, went in the night. Sh. Sor. Ill, 5. >% ^Z' r^T^ O^ ^J^ ^^^ ^ cs?-^ Who so ever looks upon a woman with a heart of fornication, that one has even therein committed al- ready fornication with her in his mind. Matth. 5, 4. <5te (5^*4^ ^7^7v ^5/ ij^ (ji-^' With him friendship has been already made. Maj. 196. u..§o L*w^ ^^ pio, before the Imperative, Present^) or Imper- fect of a definite verb, as: y^L^j.^ s.aj pio manijase, enjoy her; ^j^c^* Lxj pia thiane, they become L;a fj^il^ Ij^j they were seeing. When she comes to the couch, then pull oiit her feathers; afterwards enjoy her. Amulu Man. p. 147. In that (palace) sparks are made like lightenings. Ibid. p. 140. Many of his miracles the other boys used to see. Abd-ul-Latif's life, p. 3. 1) In tliis case the augment y^3 tlio iy dropped aa unnecessary. 344 SECTION HI. THE VERB. 3) The idea of continuation is expressed by putting a present ]3articiple before the verbs Jji' ralianu, to remain and Jp^ vatanu, to go about, as: ^7 jjJj. vendo rahi, he continues going; ^l jtXljAi carmdo vate, he keeps on grazing. (*L^ ^^/o jjL^^/0 ^s^^^ 3tU5>^ i<^^ He kept on travelling in fatigue from Egypt (and) Syria. Maj. 357. His father Shah Habib continued searching (and) seeking him. Life of Abd-ul-Latif, p. 9. ^ -■ / ^ ^ Bijalu goes on grazing the horses. Story of Rae Diacu, p. 2. 4) Two verbs may also be joined by putting the Infinitive of a verb in the Formative case before the verbs: ^^^j laganu, v. n. to apply, ^il acanu, to come, ^•dl vananu, to go. In this way so-called Inceptives are formed, as: ^?J ^j^. ruana laganu, to begin to cry; c>^^ (i>-^5 vasana acanu, to come to ram; ,^^^ ^iX^ sadana vananu, to go to call. ^ ^^^)^ o^j^*^ (j^^' Lh^j u^T^; The lightenings have come to flash (to rain); the monsoon has ascended (his) couch. Sh. Sor. IV, 13. i " \ 'I ' Then whilst they went to buy, the bridegroom ar- rived. Matth. 25, 10. SECTION ni. THE VERB. 345 Chapter XVII. The Verb with the Pronominal Suffixes. §. 54. The Sindhi uses the pronominal suffixes far more extensively with the verbs, than with the nouns (cf. §. 30). The suffixes attached to the verbs express, strictly speaking, only the Dative and Accusative (the object), and, with the past participle passive, also the In- strumental, though we may translate them by any case, save the ^N'ominative. The pronominal suffixes attached to verbs are iden- tical with those attached to nouns, with this difference, that the suffix of the I person Plural, u, which is not in use with nouns (but with adverbs and postpositions), is used throughout the verb. There is further a pe- culiar Instrumental affix, attached to the past par- ticiple passive, which is never used with nouns or adverbs, viz.: 1 for the Singular, and u for the Plural. It appears, that the suffix i is originally the In- strumental Sing. ^[ ina, by him (from ^ hi, this), and u the Instrumental Plural ^1 une, by them (from ^ hu or ^1 ti, that). To the first person Sing, and Plur. the suffix of the same person is never attached, as in this case the reflexive pronoun J^Lj pana, self, must be employed. In the compound tenses and in compound verbs the suffix always accedes to the latter part of the compound, though it properly belongs to the first member of the compound. Similarly the suffix is never attached to the augment ^^ tho or ^'j the, but always to the verb itself 346 SECTION HI. THE VERB. To the past participle passive even two suffixes may accede, the first expressing the Instrumental and the second the Dative or Accusative, as will be shown afterwards. The way, in which the several suffixes are attached to the inflexional terminations of the verb , will be best seen from the following survey. §. 55. I. The pronominal suffixes attached to the auxiliary verbs ^jys^ and ^-^ 1) The Imperative. The same TJ J- 4-' .r^l as the n pers. Sing . and Plur. of the Potential. The Precat }ive. ' , Suffix I pers. SING. jjL^ huj-a-me. PLUR. j»j.^ hujo-me. Sing. Ill pers. be to me. ij^L^ huj-a-se. be to him. be to me. u^^ hujo-se. be to him. Plur. ■ Suffix I pers. ni pers. ^^jL^ huj-a-u. be to us. jjL^ huj-a-ne. be to them. ^^^ hujo-u. be to us. ^^ hujo-ne. be to them. In the same way the suffixes are attached to ^^3 thiju, as: j^ki^j* thij-a-me, become to me, ^j^JiLi^* tliij- a-se, become to him. ^L:^ ^jQ ^X^, ^JyJ J j.-yo iS) (J^-^^' yS& &>J Then if those are in front, be thou in their back. Amulu Man. p. 144. SECTION III. THE VERB. 347 1^' 2) The Potential ^jUsn liua, I may be. SINGULAR. bo • I— I I — I Suffixes of the I pers. I n ^l^i hue-me. m ^ash hue-me. II *jl5i huo-me.^) in jU-*.^ huani-me. bo S ^ II jj^A^ hue-u. m u^-^ hue-u. Suffixes of the II pers. ^L^ hua-e. ^aaa5> hue-i. ^yS& hu-e. ^^xJ^ huan-i.^) PLURAL. yLsi hua-va. ^j^s^ hue-ne.^) ^AA^ hue-va. ^^ hue-ne. Suffixes of the III pers. (j^U5> hua-se. ijj^ass^ hue-se. j^A^o hue-se. ^^s& hu-se. j^j^ huo-se. U^^s^ huani-se. jjLxis hua-ne. n ..sZi^xi huo-u. ur^>^^ ^ySS> hu-va. \jys^ hu-ne. in ^^AA^shuane-u. ^a;s huani-va. ^J^s& huo-ne. ^jjIs^ huani-ne. 1) Or ^yS^ ho-me, (j^j-^i ho-se. 2) Or -^AA^ huane-i. 3) When a nasalized vowel (e) is followed by a dental nasal, the sign of nasalisation (^ in Arabic characters) is generally dropped as superfluous; thus ^-f^^^ hue-ne, instead of ^X^S^ hue-ue, T ahe-va. "yi^j^S ahiyu-va. yt-^: j| ahini-va. Suffixes of the III pers, jjLl^l ahiya-ne. ^j.a55| ahe-ne. j^l ahe-ne. ^yjd^S ahiyu-ne. jj^^l ahiyo-ne. ^A^f ahini-ne. Instead of ^p^S ahe and ^43! ahine the form j^\ atha is also in use, but only when joined by suffixes. It corresponds to the old Prakrit form ^rfN? athi (the ITT pers. Sing, of the substantive verb asmi, I am, see Lassen, p. 345), which in Sindhl has also been trans- ferred to the Plural. The suffixes are attached to it in the following manner : ' Suffixes of the I pers. Suffixes of the II pers. Suffixes of the III pers. Plur. and- Sing. ^S atha-me. ^^•| ath-u. |^3l ath-1, L,AA.^I athe-L "yj^S atha-va. ^J^4^•f atha-se. ^j^\ atha-ne. In the Present Definite: ^Llg-^l ^d^y$> the suffixes accede, as noted already, to the latter part of the compound. 350 SECTION III. THE VERB. (^r^^ (S^'^ I^^T ^j-mL ^LL ^11 With girls of my age I have an appointment, after rain has fallen. Sh. Um. Mar. V, 21. tjl^;3t u^^' ^^i' ^^ ^}i^^^ (^^ est? I have a secret matter, come near, then I will tell (it). Sh. Sor. 11, 22. \Laj S.5 (jw^Lj 3"**^ 3^7*^ (3^"^ CS^ 1^^^* Then having heard the lesson he became glad; he has no other want. Maj. 189. ^yi T^' ^ e>-i^ "-^ \j"fi^ O^^ '^^"^ is^^ cs^ If thou hast a desire in seeing, then lift not thy step far off. Sh. Kal. H, 4. Except the worshipping of the Lord all other things are to thee selfishness, o ignorant one! Mengh5 4. 4XS. ^j^U L^^^ e^jl j^ ^ ^^A^l ^ ^.|i!i We have no wickedness in our heart; those liars calumniate. Maj. 255. We have nothing to do with those stones, but our concern is with their master. Life of Abd-ul-Latif, p. 20. You have no taste of the pain; now you laugh. Sh. Sam. Ill, Epil. 1. SECTION m. THE VERB. 351 No wickedness is in their heart; they have known the retribution. Maj. 218. 4) The Aorist. a) The masc. form ^^a^ hose. SINGULAR. bo Suffix I pers. I II *-u^ hue-me. in (.^ ho-me. pi n *jl;a huo-me. Ill ^ hua-me.^) CO n ^y„;^^ hue-u. m ^y^yS^ ho-SU. Suffix II pers. ^Lljja hosa-e. &J.55 ho-e. ^^LL& huasu-e. ^k hua-e. PLURAL. yLlj.55 hosa-va. Suffix III pers. (j^LL^io hosa-se. j^^ hue-se. j^jjD ho-se. huasu-se. a55 huo-se. hua-se. 1 — I II jj^j^5> huo-su. in ^^iL^it hua-su. jys^ ho-va. 'yJyM.\ ^IZ^js^ hosa-ne. l^huasu-va. ^ hua-va. .^x^55 hue-ne. ^j^5i> ho-ne. ^y^ilsQ huasu-ne. ^^s^ huo-ne, ^j.j^ hua-ne. 1) In poetry long a is frequently retained, as; *Ia5C> hna-niGj &Ia55 hua-e, (jjwLa5D liua-se etc. 352 SECTION III. THE VERB. h) The fern, form yjuJ^^ huyase. SINGULAR. Suffix I pers. Suffix II pers. Suffix III pers. I ^IjwuLJLAiD huisa-e. huisa-se. bQ 1 ^m ^9VW^0m^S§^^ XXtA.XKJ»-A^ \^» rr, II ^^ ^XA^ huiya-se. Uj huiya-me. ^) TIT ^ huya-me. ^i huya-e. ^;«j^55 huya-se. I 9 ? ? ? > > U huyusu-e. huyusu-e. i' II jjli huyu-me. y^Ili huyu-se. p-t III Als^ huyu-me. ^jSJh huyu-e. ijJLsa huyu-se. PLURAL. I pLLvA^ huTsa-va. ^Ijljdi huisa-ne bb n ? 9 ..wAAiD huiva-ne. fl l^^^^*^ JJ-iAxj I* XX vy. m huye-su. m ^y^^ hui-su. ^li huya-va. ^^ huya-ne. I -0 5 5 ? huyusu-va. > J J huyusu-ne. II > 9 9 huyu-su. j» « ff> huyu-ne. ,3 < m 9 9 9 huyu-su. ^Ia5> huyu-va. ^jjn huyu-ne. O 9 ,v O 7 ^ 0--7 ^ 1) Or |VAA^5C huie-me, jV^^Ait huye-me, ^XxS^ huya-me. SECTION III. THE VEEB. 353 That to j.55 ho, ^^k hui etc., when forming with the past participle passive the Pluperfect, also a suffix, denoting the Instrumental, may be attached, will be shown in §. 56, 5. It is to be observed, that the inflexional termination of the I pers. Sing. masc. and fem. , se, becomes sa before the accession of the suffixes; the fem. termination y^A5> huyase is at the same time reduced to its original form ^a55 hui, as: ^V^L^^ hui-sa-e. The suffix of the I pers. Plur. is in the Aorist su or si, and not u, as in the Imperative, Potential and Present. In the n pers. fem. Sing, the form ^^ huje or .j^si^ huyi is employed, when followed by the heavy suffix su or SI, the accent being then thrown on the last syllable of the verb, as: huye-su or huyi-su. In the same way as to ^ys^ hose and ^j*Z^ huyase the suffixes accede to ^^^-c^' thiuse and ^j^^^j^ thiase, and to every other neuter verb in the Aorist, for which ^j*^j<^ thiuse may serve as paradigm. The Aorist (j^J-^J thiuse. •i-H m n a) The masculine form ^j>^^ thiuse. SINGULAE OF THE SUFFIX. Suffix I pers. r^' thie-me. in |V-^* thiu-me.^) Suffix n pers. thiosa-e. ^ja4j thiyu-e. Suffix m pers. thiosa-se. ^j*^/1j^ thie-se. u^-*-^* thiu- se. l) In poetry the diminutive affix S*i ro is frequently attached to the past participle , to wliich the suffixes accede according to the common Trumpp, Sindha-G-rammar. Z 354 SECTION m. THE VERB. SINGULAR OF THE SUFFIX. Suffix I pers. n ^^^3 *.A^* thia-me I tbid-me. Snffix n pers. thiasu-e. ^^ thiya-e. Suffix in pers. thiasu-se. Lr>^' thio-se. PLURAL OF THE SUFFIX. ♦rH II ^j^^ju^- tliie-ii. in jj^j^^j thio-su. tlii5sa-va. > thiu-ya. •5. ij^ju-^' thia-se. thiosa-ne. ch^^* thie-ne. II ^y^y^ thio-su. Ill jj^A*;U4j thia-su.. thiasu-va. -:g^ y^ tHa-va. (J.A4J thiu-ne. thiasti-ne. thio-ne. ^j.!^' thia-ne. &) The feminine form (j^-^-^j thiase. SINGULAR OF THE SUFFIX. 1 Suffix I pers. Suffix II pers. Suffix III pers. I ^3 1.^x45 thTsa-e. jjjJLa^^V-^J' .s- II [v1a4j thia-me. thisa-se. j^AA^j thia-se. Ill 1^145 thia-me. ^4j- thiya-e. jj^i^o thiya-se. rules, as: (•v*-^-'' thiaru-me, y^J-«§-3 thiaru-se etc. But in the I. and II pers. the diminutive affix is never added. SECTION III. THE VERB. 355 SINGULAR OF THE SUFFIX. Suffix I pers. n jUa^j thiii-me.^) m ^JL^ tliiu-me. Suffix II pers. thiusu-e. 5H^' thill- e. S ^ CO PLURAL OF THE SUFFIX. n •iL.w.A.^' thisa-va. tliie-su. HI ^JyJ,^^.J^ thi-su. j*^^* tliiya-va. Suffix III pers. thiusi-se. ij*jJ^^ thiu-se. ij*jju~^ thiu-se. ^jL-wIa^j thisa-ne. thiu-su. m thiu-su. ^ o s> thiusi-va. thiu-va. ^j-j^ thia-ne. ,j44^* thiva-ne. thiusi-ne. ^^^-v^j tlnu-ne. ^-^* thiu- ne. When his father haying gone and searched (after him) took and brought him, then he was coming forth. Life of Abd-ul-Latif , ]}. 3. As much as was necessary to him, he was taking- out of that vessel Ibid. p. 21. 1) Or witliont the final nasal: iv^* tliiu-me. Z2 356 SECTION III. THE VERB. >% Hearing this story her mind became mad. Maj. 375. ^T >^ !^^* VJ-^ ))^^ ^) isir^ Without them (i. e. removed from them) abundant pains have befallen me in the furnace. Maj. 663. Having removed the little daughter and placed her in their own house, they made her read (i. e. they in- structed her). Life of Abd-ul-Latif, p. 46. is^ (s^ o' (57 ij^ '^^ u^i^ ^^ y^ \/^ Whatever pieces were remaining to them from eating, those they used to put in the hole of that ta- marisk tree. Abd-ul-Latif 's life, p. 23. 5) The Future. ' 9 a) The masculine form y^Jo^5> htinduse. SINGULAR OF THE SUFFIX. bb Snffix I pers. I TT " " ' JJL jUJtXJyi> hunde-me. ,-^^ '09 hundu-me.J^ Suffix II pers. htindosa-e. Suffix III pers . ^ 9 hundosa-se. 9 htinde-se. hundu-se. fejo^i htindu-e.^) 9 t 1) In poetry frequently *JtXJ^56 hundo-me, |»!tXi^5> hunda-me etc. 9,^ *' 2) Or [^iy^y^ htlnde. SECTION IIL THE VERB. 357 SINGULAR OF THE SUFFIX. Suffix I pers. Suffix II pers. Suffix III pers I ^Jy^^SlyS^ Urf*J^I3^^ hundo-me. ^) J hundo-se. III ^JO^ ^dSysa hunda-e. - J hunda-me. hunda-se. PLURAL OF THE SUi^.b'lX, I .0, . , ^LLjjJ^i • htindosa-va. htindosa-ne. Pi < TT ^ " ' 11 ^^.^tXj..^ ^JJ^i m Mnde-u. hunde-ne. TTT ' " ' 111 jj^^j<>J^5> htindo-su. htindu-va. hundu-ne. I . . ^0 '»'''' ^ 5 . -^ 9 hundasu-va. Mndasti-ne. TT ' " ' u3^^^ s hundo-su. Mndo-ne. Ill ^^I;f3i^ - J htinda-su. htinda-va. hunda-ne. h) The feminine form (j^jtXj^iC Mndiase. SINGULAR OF THE SUFFIX. Suffix I pers. Sing. I Suffix n pers. htindisa-e. Suffix III pers. hundisa-se. 1) Or ^^(X>yS^ hnnda-u-me. 358 SECTION III. THE VERB. SINGULAR OF THE SUFFIX. ^ < Suffix I pers. himdia-me.^) TXT ^ O J ILL jvJtX3ye hundya-me.^) hundyu-me. mo ? > hundyu-me. Suffix n pers. hundya-e. hundiusu-e. 9 9 hundyu-e. PLURAL OF THE SUFFIX. TT ^ p. " ' hundie-u. TTT ' " ' iii ^yM^^lXiyS^ hundi-su. rTl n •mmO ^4XJ^ htindiu-su. iS hundiu-su. hundisa-va. hundya-va. ^o J o i^ a 9 hundiusu-va. ^ O J O J hundyu-va. Suffix in pers. hundyu-se. > O 5 hundyu-se. htindisa-ne. hundia-ne. htindya-ne. 9 o i> o ? htindiusu-ne. ^^A-^y^ hundyu-ne. 9 9 ^Jid^'^yS!^ hundyu-ne. 1) Or AiX^JtX.Ja.^ liundie-me. 2) The final i (y) of i^i\jy^ hundi is frequently dropped in poetry, as, *Jo«.5i liunda-me, instead of *-JtXJyo htindya-me (hundia-me). SECTION ni. THE VERB. 359 In the same way as to y^cxl^^s hunduse and ^^iX^yS^ litindiase the suffixes are also attached to the Future of the active and passive voice, and consequently to the present participle of both voices. The head, o friend, I shall give to thee with salu- tation as a present, o bard! Sh. Sor. Ill, Epil. The merciful one, having bestowed mercy, will join me with him. Maj. 182. -ilj ^4;:^ ^J j^yo ^>i ^(Xf ^^sa (Thy) sweetheart will join thee on the Habb, as a guide on the way. Sh. Ma^B. Y, 5. Whatever else he will ask, that shall be given to him. Story of Eae Diacu, p. 7. ^j^jjaj j4^ '-^ (^ Jf^ (ih?. \J^ ^s^ isi^y^^ ij'^^-^'i^ If laziness will be made, then also death will by no means give us up. Sindhi Eead. book, p. 63. ^ •• i " I ^ ^ You will be angry with me and turn me out of the service. Sindhi Eead. book, p. 51. Sisters, says Abd-ul-Latif, my friends will remember me. Sh. Um. Mar. I, Epil. 360 SECTION III. THE VERB. ^JjLljJJyD Lit .i' On whose nose thou seest the nose ring, that one, having recognised, take out, then that one I shall be to thee. Amulu Man. p. 150. ?, - > J ? Be ready (and) careful, the lightening will flash upon thee suddenly. Sh. Surag. YI, 5. ;^'5 t5t ^^i ^ ^ cJr4. c5#5 U-^ ^^' 3;'-^>^ cHVfl So it is good, that we having gone fall amongst them and with the assistence of each other we shall beat and subject them. Sindhi Eead. book, p. 64. Then they will say to her: o princess, last night thou hadst gone to an amusement. Amulu Man. p. 145. §. 56. II. The pronominal suffixes attached to the regular verb. 1) The Imperative. (The same as the Potential.) Having come he said to (his) mother: give me leave (and) permission. Maj. 77. The people said to his mother: ask thou thyself him. Maj. 42. SECTION m. THE VERB. 361 Show us that place, where the devotee has become red. Sh. Mum. Eano IH, 9. Lord 5 show to us their face with (out of) kindness. Sh. Ked. IV, 5. ^"^ ^^}^^' 7^^ ^)^* "^^^ ^^^ Give him a quick arab horse ,f having placed jewels on the saddle. Sh. Sor. I, 18. The Precative. SINGULAR. PLURAL. Suffix I p. Sing. *j>L^4"i^ chadija-me. ^^=^3^^^ chadijo-me. Give me up. Give ye me up. Suffix c . ,_ in p. Sing. (jj^jLi J^£s. chadija-se. y^j.^iX^s. chadijo-se. Give him up. Give ye him up. Suffix ^ . ... ^ -.,, . i ... . I p. Plur. ^^AjL^^jL^ chadija-u. ^^jj^^J.^ chadijo-u. Give us up. Give ye us up. Snffix III p. Plur. jjLicX^^ chadija-ne. ^^=^ix^ chadijo-ne. Give them up. Give ye them up. i^'^i^ ^'trpy-%^'^ ^y^ (^-^ L^S'Lio ^;Lf .^3 ^:^ ys& 0. ^ Those ten (or) twelve dishes having eaten from above go away from her. Amulu Man. p. 144. When we both come together, then please to give us this money. Stack's Gram. p. 135. 362 SECTION m. THE VERB. When I dismiss the court, then kill him. Story of Rae Diacu, p. 4. 2) The Potential. SINGULAR OF THE SUJb'i^TX. Suffix I pers. Suffix n pers. Suffix HI pers. I I^'"^^^^ 1 :^ A ^ chadia-e. chadia-se. n fjjti^^ chade-me.^) .♦. ^ chade-se. ILL j^j4^ Sf^f^ 0-5.^4^ chade-me. chade-i. chade-se. I i ... ^ chadiu-e. chadiu-se. ^■ n f^:>C^ Lr>^^^ ^ chadio-me. chadio-se. m j^44^ (5^44^ (j^jiX^ chadini-me. chadin-1. chadini-se. PLURA L OF THE SUFFIX. I ^0. :£ .% ^ chadia-va. chadia-ne. t J-1 (J^-^'^-r'tX-^ ij-^^fi^ m chade-u. chade-ne. in ^y^M^rr ^^fi^ ij^^-i^ chade-u. chade-va. chade-ne. l) Or A.AAJtX..^^ chadie-me, [*-A.JiX^^ cliadT-me. SECTION m. THE VERB. 633 PLURAL OF THE SUFFIX. Suffix I pers. Suffix n pers. Suffix m pers. I ^0 ^ .♦. ^ chadiu-va. chadiu-ne. chadio-u. chadio-ne. chadine-u. chadini-va. chadmi-ne. In the same way the suffixes accede to the Potential of the passive voice. The Potential and Present of the regular passive is however very rarely found with a suffix, more frequently that of intransitive verbs in the passive form, as: ^^ ^I'LoS gadija-e tho, I meet with thee. In the Imperfect the suffixes accede, as stated already, to the auxiliary verb ^^.s^ hose. ^-r - ••I ^ I , Lord, give leave of absence to the prince, that I may come having laid him at the feet of the Faqir. Amulu Man., p. 1. Having gone speak, o guest, that I may give thee there this head. Sh. Sor. I, 13. -5 O -- Even thou remainest me in the heart, even towards thee (are my) eyes. Maj. 211. 364 SECTION m. THE VERB. Then the mother in (her) wise gives her her own advices. Maj. 288. Whatever may be necessary to thee, take that out of this (vessel). Life of Abd-ul-Latif, p. 21. Whatever he may ask you for, that bring and give him. Amulu Man., p. 148. (^ I .. - - ^ • Brahman! woman! become pieces of flesh, in order that the dogs of Kec may eat thee! Sh. Ma^B. I, 1. O Eano, the record (pi.) of our conversations kills us. Sh. Mum. Eano V, 10. Though their wounds flow, yet do they not their sigh divulge to the people. Sh. Kal. II, 23. 3) The past participle. (The III pers. of the Aorist.) The way, in which the pronominal suffixes accede to the Aorist of neuter verbs, may be seen from the paradigm of (j^l^* thiuse. In the Aorist of the passive voice the suffixes are only attached to the m pers. Sing, and Plur. or to the past participle passive. The suffixes thus attached imply either a Dative-Accusa- tive (the object in general) or an Instrumental. The suffixes of the I and 11 pers. of the Sing, and Plur. may at the same time denote the object or the agent, but SECTION III. THE YERB. 365 in the HI pers. Sing, and Plur. different suffixes are employed to express the object or the agent, se and ne denoting the object, and i and u the agent (see §. 54). Both 1 and u are considered as heavy suf- fixes, which draw the accent from the first to the last syllable of the verb; final o of the past participle must therefore be changed to a before them (and for eu- phony's sake with an additional nasal to a), to give a support to the following heavy suffix. In the fem. Sing. an a must likewise be inserted between the final i and the suffixes i and u, to which even the feminine Plural termination u must give way, so that the Sin- gular and Plural of both genders become ahke, if joined by the instrumental suffixes i and u. a) The past participle with single suffixes. The masc. Sing. ^jjLi^ chadio. Suffix I pers. Suffix n pers. Suffix III pers. Sing. i^M^ jjo^LjL^ chadiu-me. chadyu-e. ^) chadia-i. Plur. ^^Ly^Sj^ ^j^bjL^ chadio-su. chadyu-va. ^) chadia-u. The masc. plur. Ij44^ ^^^ idia. Sing. (^44^ |5^4^ ^a^Lj44?^ chadia-me. chadya-e. ^) chadia-i. Plur. > 1 :& .♦. ^ ^^^^ ^yJ>\.j ^' '^> :•♦•• "» Having come thou hast seen that high bank, of which thou hast heard with (thy) ears. Sh. Surag. HE, 9. (My) friend has been separated by thee, calculates Sorathi. Sh. Sor. I, Epil. ^o.AJLx^N .5&L^ |*Xi jjbf J'-'b ^ \J'^''^ ^"h^i^-^^^ 7^ By her a son was born, to whom by them the name Mia Glhulam Shah was given, Abd-ul-Latif's life, p. 35. i> ... ^ 1) Written and pronounced frequently *.J4Xg.:^ cliadiu-me, without an intervening nasal. SECTION m. THE VERB. 367 Having drunk a cup of love we understood every thing. Sh. Kal. H, Epil. ^^ ^"^ ^>^ iJ^ ^y" £iji isf ^^^ If by you the Baroc, the sweetheart, had been seen with the eyes, as by me. Sh. Hus. XI, 1. ,.^-uj ^j-fr^ }^y^ ^j^'^ }^ c^?^^ (j^iXc J ^y Was never sent by them to thee any message with love? Maj. 648. Would that I had not suffered so much anxiety about the mountaineer. Sh. Abiri Y, 17. Even from the midst he was cut off by thee; thou didst not make one step. Sh. Hus. X, 27. I have never informed me about thee nor remem- bered thee, o friend! Maj. 757. What wants unction she does not anoint; her beauty has been wasted by gTief. Sh. Um. Mar. HE, 7. We have not any bread taken with us , therefore he spoke thus. Matth. 16, 7. I likely would not have been stopped by you; you aU would have slided down (into the river), ha^dng taken jars (to swim upon). Sh. Suh. I, 3. 368 SECTION III. THE VERB. U^:?pl4^ |4$'Lj (5^ JJ;-^. ;-^L^ j^lS For the sake of seeing my friend I applied little peepings, i. e. I peeped a little through. Sh. Kambh. 11, Epil. 1. Lest some say to me: by thee the daughters of the Thar have been put to shame. Sh. Um. Mar. II, 17. Then having thrown (your) mouth into (your) sleeves, you would have made wailings in the desert. Sh. Hus. XII, 6. Suffixes of the III pers. Sing, and Plur. denoting the object. Sing, (j^ jL^ chadiu-se. Plur. ^jL^ chadiu-ne. Sing. (jjoJ4^ chadia-se. Plur. ^jo44^ chadia-ne. (j^jJL^ chadia-se. ^jjjL^ chadia-ne. ^jt,j^(X.^ cnadm-se. jjojLg^ chadiu-ne. ^y^y^v ^-^ C5^^ >^ u^ (5^^ c^ M^v <^^ 3^ One says: a jinn has fallen into his body, another says: his understanding has turned round (i. e. he has become mad). Maj. 40. Yesterday met with us a Kapari, a mendicant babu. Sh. Mum. Eano III, 4. SECTION III. THE VERB. 369 All those have been forgotten by me, whoever (be) my relatives and friends. Maj. 212. g^bj^ ^^ ^^y j.A^J j.A4^ ^j.^J5^ >^J"^ In the bottom she has got leaks , from the sides water flows in, The mast has become old, all her ropes are dangling. Sh. Surag. m, 6. That little daughter also, when she was hearing the talk of him, used to stand up herself, and having taken and brought a piece of bread, was giving it him. Abd-ul-Latlf's life, p. 46. ^LSJVX) Lg.5 ^yjQ ^J^Mj ^-^J ^^y^ y^ '^ If there had been to you, like as to me, a meeting with the sweetheart Punhu. Sh. Hus. XIE, 6. Cc5^ '^ CJ^^' ;'>^ CS^ J'"^ (5^ u*^^^ O^ JN'o intelligence of this our state has come to thee. Maj. 229. Their speech perhaps would not be forgotten by you. Sh. Hus. XII, 7. 1) ^aj pi-e instead of ^J piya-e, Trumpp, Sindlu-Grrammai'. A^i 370 SECTION III. THE YERB. - ^ " ^ - ... ^ 5 They went having given me up; some (word) has fallen upon their gall bag. Sh. Ma^B. HI, Epil. u^rtyi erf-' >^5 UT^ 'o^^-^ u*'^^ In that wise, as the advices came to her, she, having gone, answers him. Maj. 424. By the wine nothing was done to them; by the ill-language of the released one they were killed. Sh. Jam. Kal. IV, 18. At a vice every body takes offence; (my) friends have taken offence at (my) virtues. Sh. Asa IV, 24. ^y^ (J'"%-^'^"? (S^"^ ^^^ »i^^'^ (j-^f^ '^■i-^^7^^. \J^ y, ^4^' (54^ ij^^ By whom were enchantments made to thee? how wast thou confused, o camel? Upon (thy) eyes are hoods; in the plain (thy) feet were grated. Sh. Kambh. H, 39. Of slender loin, of straight nose, their eyes filled with lamp-black. Sh. Sam. I, 35. &) The past participle with two suffixes. To the past participle passive two suffixes may be attached, the first denoting the agent and the latter the object (Dative -Accusative), as: SECTION III. THE VERB. 371 ^jUoj.j4i.^ chadio-ma-e = p44^ (s-^ f-^ u;-"^ thou wast given up by me , literally : by me it was given up in reference to thee. To suffixes of the II pers. Sing, and Plur. no further suffix is added, joint suffixes of this kind being mostly found in the III pers. Sing and Plur., very seldom in the I pers. Sing, and Plur. The suffix used for the I person Singular is in this case not me, but ma (the Instrumental of ^.IjI au), as 'me' would not be strong enough to support the following suffix. The Instrumental suffix of the HI pers. Singular i is either contracted with the preceding a to a, or is retained before a following suffix; the suffix of the m. person Plural keeps its place before another acceding suffix, but is frequently shortened to u (u). ISTo change of gender and number can take place in the participle, when joined by the suffix of the in person Singular or Plural; but when the participle is provided with a suffix of the I person Singular or Plural, it must agree with its subject in gender and number. SINGULAR. Masc. Fern. Suffix I pers. Smg. ^jLij.j chadia-u-su. pj.x3LjJ..g£s. chadia-u-va. ^jyjl^ ,^;. ^ 1) Or shortened: |vAAJLj4X^£i. chadia-ii-me and with elision of the final nasal: *.v6U\yK^\.^ j^^ ^\ ^5^^ j=J J» jjb* "^^-^^ .;sL^ P»^L£ ^L^ Mia Grhulam Shah, having jumped from the couch, having come (and) seized the hand of the gentleman, seated him upon the couch at its upper part (hterally: from its upper part). Abd-ul-Latif's life, p. 7. LT-^^V^ \j^y^ (^^^ ^^'^ 4>La^I j.j| ^3l Having risen he came to (his) master and addressed to him standing the petition. Maj. 6. She said to them: fathers, what reason have you to ask after this? Amulu Man. p, 140. 374 SECTION III. TIIE VERB. Having given all this as a gift to the Faqir he started them off. Ainulu Man. p. 140. They, having placed their money in deposit with an old woman said to her. Stack's Gram. p. 135. Having prepared bread and brought (it), they placed it before him. Abd-ul-Latif's life, p. 48. 4) The past participle with the auxiliary ^s^^ ahe etc. (The Perfect.) The single suffixes, be they referring to the agent or the object, are joined to s^l ahe and ^j^l, but chiefly to the form ^'s\ atha (§. 55), and not to the participle itself. But to the form .^ji atha a double suffix may be joined, the first implying the agent and the latter the object, as: ^U.a.^-1 j.jS, I have given to thee, literally: it has been given by me in reference to thee. The suffix of the HI. person Singular and of the II. person Plural does not admit of a second suffix. The original i of ^fN? atthi reappears again and is lengthened at the same time, when followed by a double suffix in the II. and III. person Singular, to give a support to the heavy joint -suffix. SECTION m. THE VERB. 375 Suffix I pers. Sing. Singular and Plural. ^U^'l piX^ chadio athi-ma-e. (jjJUj^'I IjJ^r^ chadia athi-ma-se. ^Ua^jI iS^ry chadi athi-ma-va. ^^U-ygj| ^j^ hua-i and j^«.ajLa55 hua-u the contracted forms ^j.AAjL55 ha-i and (j^/iL^ ha-u (from yS^) are also in use. SECTION m. THE VERB. SINGULAR. 377 ^LX)jJ» >StX^^ Suffix I pers. Sing. Suffix in pers. Sing. Fern. chadi liui-ma-e. chadi hui-ma-se. chadi hui-ma-va. chad! hui-ma-ne. Masc. and Eem. Sing, and Plur. J<^'^Cj^ (^j^J.4^ chadio hua-i-me. ^AAjlIi Lj^X^r^ chadia hua-i-e. (j^^A^LliS ^44^7^ chad! hua-i-se. Masc. chadio ho-ma-e. chadio ho-ma-se. chadio ho-ma-va. chadio ho-ma-ne. *-djL-^ ,.,^^4X4.-. chadiu hua-i-su. La5> ajLa55 5J Suffix I pers. Plur. chadio ho-su-e. O } s> '' " chadio ho-su-se. ^o ? j^ :. ^ chadio ho-su-va. chadi5 ho-su-ne. „ hua-i-va. ,, hua-i-ne. chad! hui-su-e. chad! hui-su-se. ^^^' chadi hui-su-va. chadi hui-su-ne. 1) Or shortened: *.aajIaP^ liua-1-me , and with ehsion of the final nasal of the first suffix: *.-olA;a hua-i-me etc. 378 Suffix in pers. Plur SECTION m. THE VERB. Masc. and Fern. Sing, and Plur. (W^lAio (^j^.ss> LjiXg^ chadia hua-u-e. yj^jj.-oL/^ (5^^ cnadi nua-u-se. ^y^j^jJills!^ jj^jiX^ chadiu hua-u-su. „ „ liua-u-va. hua-u-ne. ^0 i> .^ y PLURAL, Masc. Suffix I pers. Sing. ^Ulli LIJ.^^ chadia hua-ma-e etc. etc. Suffix I pers. Plur. ^yj^llsa Ld^T^ chadia hua-su-e. etc. etc. Fem. chadiu huyu-ma-e. etc. etc. chadiu huyu-us-e. etc. etc. ^jja >^? L^-^^ 3^ (j--y^f^ ^:^ u*"^ u^^ 7^^. '-^ )"^^^ <5) O son of the potter! with me thou hadst made a term of two months. Story of Eae Diacu, p. 5. Give us that letter, which thou hadst promised. Abd- ul-Latif's life, p. 49. He looked towards that servant, whom he had in- structed beforehand. Ibid. p. 9. 1) Or sliortened ^aajLa^ hua-u-me, and with elision of the final nasal of the first suffix: *-vjIa5& hua-u-me j etc. SECTION in. THE VERB. 379 ^' - n'S* I-- i^"^-* -•I-' By reason of tliat word, wHch the Faqir liad spoken to you, tie has not come himself. Abd-ul-Latif's Hfe, p. 49. ^-y^ )4^ c5^ ^^ y^i LTj^ r^ i^e ^ >^^^ >^^ ^aJL^Ji That nose ring, as it had been said to him by the fairy, he threw into the jar of the slave -girl. Amulu Man., p. 150. What royal word had been spoken by them. Ibid, p. 143. 6) The Future. (Active and passive voice.) See the paradigm of j^dj^ hunduse. 380 SECTION IV. ADVERBS, POSTPOSITIONS, SECTION IV. ADYERBS, POSTPOSITIONS, CONJUNCTIONS AND INTERJECTIONS. Chapter XVIIL Adverbs. §. 57. The Sindlii has only a limited number of original adverbs.^) Adverbs are not derived from adjectives by any change of the adjectival termination, but the ad- jective as such (in the masc. Sing.) is either used in an adverbial sense, or the adjective, agreeing in gender and number with the subject referred to, is employed, where we would use an adverb as a complement to the verb, as: 3^5 ^j^ yk^f he weeps much: y^ ^J^< ^^^ ^fj ^ he eats only bread. A number of substantives are at the same time also used adverbially, either in the ITominative, the In- strumental, the Locative or the Ablative case, similarly some adjectives in the Locative and Ablative have re- ceived an adverbial signification. 1) Adverbs borrowed from the Arabic or Persian are here only so far taken into consideration, as they are commonly used in Sindhl. CONJUNCTIONS AND INTERJECTIONS. 381 I. Original adverbs. ^) The most common of tliem are: v3lJl apaka, accidentally. Jl apare, excessively. cjI ate. verv. C i aju, to-day. Jo 1^1 acanaka, I suddenly; ^..^L^l acacete, unawares. c - T T ^ ^ on the ^t ^^'^^^^- fourth day o - - , 1 _ I (from the ,.ySiyS tarena, ^ ,^ ^^^/ ' J present). j^\ asahn. wholly; com- pletely. aJuJI albattah, certainly (arab.). vXJLcl umalaka, in a moment. Ql ana, till now. ,j^ base, enough. JjCJLj bilkule, wholly; ab- solutely (arab.). ^j^ bineha, completely. ^^^ patia, o^, phate, completely ; at all. ^vj pareha, after to- morrow. <^JS turtu, quickly. ^ys toe, then. -^4^' thahapaha, quickly. ^SLi. jai, positively; ne- nessarilj. ^L janu, to say so: as if. ^i^oL^^ jhatepate, > instantly. oyo:^ catepate, ;j.jCo* jelvuse, perhaps, j.^^ cho, why? Ijs..! sada, always. tXJLi say ad, cL^SL^ saita. ^M. sat a. perhaps, (pers.) ^l< kalha., , •, ■ yesterday. .41^ kalha,] ljs.5^ kadacite, perhaps. S kara^), as if; to say so; like. 1) The numeral adverbs see §. 29. 2) Or \S karu. 382 SECTION IV. ADVERBS, POSTPOSITIONS, jLT gadu, together. J lura, straight- forward; instantly. LT^ masa ^L-iL^ masa, ^j.A.w^ mase. with difficulty. ^I:^JLX) muftu, gratuitously, (pers.) J na, not. vLxJ nipatu, very; ex- ceedingly, vi^j nitu, ;Cj o6 nitu pratu nicu, with a wellcome. always. r nikani, thoroughly; wholly. .^^ nethe, finally; at last. yL>^ vetare, very greatly. SLi hane, C5^ iL^ hane-i. now; im- mediately. 9 ^ } ^ ^w4j^v5> harubharu, certainly. 1aa5> hiara, now. jjya htinda, possibly; perhaps. Ix5& hera, now. ;^,K<^5> hekari, still more; still further. 4:?*^ (S^' C>-^'^ (^* U*^' ;5J.l5'f ^1 I am very longing as well after the spinning place as after the country. Sh. Um. Mar. II, 1. As yet thou art ignorant, thou takest no notice of the furnace. Sh. Jam. Kal. Ill, 11. ^iljj ^^S ^^j^ -^^ Having snatched (it) quickly she rose and flew away. Amula Man. p. 147. ^ .. - - ?.": ' u. \- ' ?' The returning of him, who falls into the face of Mtimala, is effected with difficulty. Sh. Mum. Rano ni, 5. CONJUNCTIONS AND INTERJECTIONS. 383 (5^^* }H^ isf^.^ ^f^'^ .^L^j-U ^Zf^ At length the king, sitting (and) sitting, becomes dissatisfied. Amulu Man. p. 143. "■^t (5-^ (5?^. (J^f -^r^ ^'j^^ (^d-Uj ^>:^ If thou having read the Kanz, the Qudtirl, the Kafia^), understandest them all, It is as if a lame ant , which has fallen into a well, contemplates the sky. Sh. Jam. Kal. Y, 4. r. .!"- I- ^..T ^ > j^S«-CvaA/0 ^WavO ^•.AJI (^wA«* U^-^^ U^-^^^ Perhaps I have been forgotten from the mind of the beloved. Maj. 507. O - 9, ^ In smiling they (i. e. the teeth) are apparent, as if the sunflowers would laugh. MaJ. 55. Thou art welcome, thou art welcome! Amulu Man. p. 141. II. Peculiar use of Adjectives. The following adjectives may be either used as (indecl.) adverbs or they may agree with their subject in gender and number even in such constructions, where in English an adverb would be used. 1) Grammatical treatises in Arabic. 2) (^-^J is substantive, after which (^v> kare is to be supplied: i. e. having made a favour thou art come = thou art welcome! 384 SECTION IV. ADVERBS, POSTPOSITIONS, sol ado^), opposite; in front. j.As.j! ocitoly, unexpected; unexpected; suddenly; by chance. jOjl odo, 1 * jjSjt odird, dim, | jjb^l avelo, out of time; late. ^^^,ic>y^ caudharij round about. aj&jfj dadho, hard, intense; very much. j..^LL sajhuru, early. jjt^LL samuho, in front. y\Sy^ savaro, 3;^>- early; at an early hour. -yS^dyL sudho ^) , I accompanied by; along with (with '^iL sao I ^^^ Instrumental). ^y^^C^Jj^ mahandiyo, in front; before. jj.^^^ vejhiro, dim, " 1 near; close to. In the same way the Adjectives, implying time or place, derived from adverbs by the affixes aho or aro are either used adverbially or they may agree with their subject in gender and number, as: 1) jtSt fj^jl fijJ-^L'^ c3-€^.^ ^^y ^® ccnstructed with ^^^si- tr I or ,^^. 2) 5.5>i>^ is probably derived from tbe Sansk. ^J^^ , with; ^y s^ . from ^tf^j joined by. CONJUNCTION'S AND INTERJECTIONS. 385 ^i;cir;! 5ralio, somewhat on this side; from ^x;( ore, on this side. ' ^ji5>L^ agaho, somewhat in front; fr'om ^S age, be- fore, in fr'ont. ^iifiUcjij poetaho, a Kttle behind; fr^om ^^j-j poete, in the rear. ^jjfiL^Xo mathaho, somewhat higher up; from ^^^ mathe, on; upon. j.l^ joru, force. ^3^ zoru, j ^^''^^JO dihari, daily; subst. f. ^vL^S dihari, day. ij^^^lL subaha, to-morrow; subst. f. ^j4^ subaha, the morrow. o^ savera, early; subst. f. Ij^Iw savera, the early ' hour of day. J o - J Then, because they will sleep out of time, therefore the sun wall even there rise to them. Amulu Man., p. 145. Bb 2 388 SECTION IV. ADVERBS, POSTPOSITIONS, My lover Majn5 is sorely displeased. Maj. 294. ^ ' ^ ^ Daily it (the mouse) used to spend a great portion from it for the sake of the companions. Sindhi Eead. Book, p. 55. IV. Substantives and Adjectives used adverbially in the injBlected state. 1) Substantives. ^j^A^n agahi (instead of agehi), before, Locat. with emphatic hi, jfrom ^\ agu, the front. ^\ age, before; Loc. from, j.5^ ago, the forepart. Kd^S andare, inside; within; Loc. from \o^\ an- daru, the inside. Jy^\ andaca, K^^^ ^^^j^.^. ^^^^ ^^^ ^^^ ^j^jJl andaro, J 43aSf ananda, well; in good health; lustrum, from txlif anandu, happiness. J^jl 5rake, at last; Loc. from J^jl oraku, the end. w5Lj bahare, outside, Loc. ^jIliLj bahara, from the outside, Abl. from ^iLS ba- haru, the outside. .Lj pare, on the o]oposite side, Loc. ^Qj para, from the opposite side, Abl. from JLj paru, the opposite side. CONJUNCTIONS AND INTERJECTIONS. 389 ^^Li pase, on the side; near; Loc. from j^lJ jo^^so, the side. ^Ll^j puthea, behind; from the back; Abl. from ^j puthe, the back. eij poe, after; Loc. from ij.j pou, the latter part. ^\11 pua^), I from behind; - I after; Abl. ^j}A^ Haqqo, justly; Abl. from i^j^ Haqqu, justice. jjUXL Hukuma, I violently; Abl. I from liCi huku- ^l hukumane, J ^^ ^^^^^' Instr. J ^^' command. ^jjX^y^ Xuseo, willingly, Abl. from (Jt^ X^^^j pleasure. ^i.^L> dileo, willingly; Loc. from J^ dile, heart. .j\ zorCj forcibly; Loc. from sj\ zoru, force. (J^Uo mage, ^j^^[^ magahi, emph. ^^ mathe, on the top; Loc ^jL^aJo matha, from upon; Abl. syj3 mure, ^^;^ murahl, emph. ^Ajjj^x mura-1, emph. at all; completely; Loc. from J^u magu, place. from j»^i matho, the head. at all; } com- pletely; ^^j_ tXl^ mahande, in the beginning; before; Loc. ^\S^x^ mahanda; from the beginning; before; AbL from K^o mtiru, capital. ? ^ ^ irom iXx^xi mahandu, be- ginning. 1) (^v./^. pua etc. instead of ^LjiJ poa. 390 SECTION IV. ADVERBS, POSTPOSITIONS, ^jgiw^j nihice, certainly; Instrum. from j-^J^ nihicd, certainty. ^^ vice, in the midst; Loc. from '^ vicu, the midst. ^j^di hadehi, emph. JLi hade^), at all; Loc. from jLi hadu, the core. .^iu^i hethe , below ; Loc. 1 ^ ' .. i - x i ^ -, • ' I Irom .J^L^ hethu, ^L4^ hetha, from below; Abl. j ^^^ ^^^^^^^ * Laside is to the Adesis (Jogis) the Lord personally. Sh. Eamak. IT, 6. ;^ S^y^ ^ i^ ^yJ^, iSf ij}i ^^^ Outside another speech is used; in the heart there is a wounded fierce look. Sh. Ramak IH, 2. Nothing else at all he asks; give the invaluable (thing) to this one. Sh. Sor. I, 8. > ^ rr fi i In front will be Mustafa; in the rear the world will march. Sh. Barv5 Sindhi 11, Epil. 2. 2) Adjectives. ^Liyi agiya, before; Abl. from ^j-^l agiyo, first; prior. oJSl anante, exceedingly; Loc. from vLJil anantu, endless. 1) l5*^Lx) ^\yA and iXS^ signify in a negative sentence, ""by no means'. COXJUNCTIOXS AM) INTERJECTIONS. 391 ^)^ \ ore, on this side: near; Loc. uL^;3' .j»j^ bedohu, faultless. ^cvJ pare, far off; Loc. u^T^ j'^L. parea, from a distance; beyond; Abl. fem. pehere, at first; Loc. from v!> paru, re- mote, distant. fi^om ,.r.r4J pe- U^Ttt- pehera-i, from the first; Abl. hero, the first. caiiia, well: in a good manner; Abl. fem. from j.^-ii cano, good, dhire, o"entlv; Loc. from ;w^5^^ dhiro, o'entle. dadhia, violently; Abl. fem. from i^^jfj da- dho, violent. sabhea, effectually; Ablat. from .-§-?L.l sabhe, effectual. samhune, in front: Loc. from a.I.^lJy samhuno, of the front. savere, earlv; Loc. from. iy^- savero. earlv. mathia. disgustingly; Abl. fem. from ^^^ ma- th5. bad. haure or ^^ u^ hore. o-entiv: Loci ,. hauria : Abl fem. liauro, gentle. 392 SECTION IV. ADVERBS, POSTPOSITIONS. (5^ V^ ijL^ 0*^f ^?J^ iSyi, j^. The pain went far off with the coming of (my) friend. Sh. Jan. Kal. II, 10. You will feel very disgusted. Sindhi Eead. Book, p. 51. Standing on the road give forcibly three cries and say. Ibid. p. 66. V. Adverbs derived from the Pronominal bases. From the pronominal bases a number of adverbs is derived by means of certain affixes, which coalesce with the pronominal base. We exhibit them in the following survey. Pron. base. Manner. Place. Direction. Time. i, 1, e he. JajI la^) ^1 ite^) ^a.j| ede^) ^jjy^jf e-si*) ^J-UiD hia o^ hete (^jLa;& hede ^^j^ he-si ^aS! i§ in this wise. here. in this direction. up to this time (or place). 1) Or short: (Jjj la, ^Xs^ liTa; ^j| ua, ^J^^ jia etc. 2) Or ,JS\ ite, .J^^sa hete; also /ff-gol ithe; ^*l ute etc. 3) There are many other forms of this adverb, as: ^S^iX^} edaha, ^^ajul edahu, ^S^ik^S!^ hedaha etc.; see Stack's Sindhi Dictionary under the different forms. 4) Or ^avua/wjI es'^a, ^J^^} e-sla etc. This set of adverbs is ge- nerally compounded with the postpositions ^^ajIj ta-T, ^^^j'"' ^^"^ ^^ ic^y^ tonl, as: ^^^jIaaaaw^jI esTtai etc., or shortened: ^^^^^^^JiMt.^} es-taT etc. CONJUNCTIONS AND INTEKJECTIONS. 393 Pron. base. Manner. Place. Direction. Time. 5 u,u,6,h6. ^^1 ua > 1^1 u-te ^:>3l o-de ^J.Xaa;j| 0-Sl ^y^ hua c>i hu-te ^ij.ia ho-de ij.juvj.55 ho-Sl ch2I ue there. in that up to that 1 direction. time. (J^ hue in that wise. J^ y^ Cu-^-- U^?^ jia ji-te je-de je-si jade-hi u^^ v:i«^ \j^^ ^^ ji-e. ja-te ja-si Ja in which where. in which as long as. when. wise. direction. so ^i^ Ci\J ^iX^- ^:^V^" ti-a ti-te te-de te-si tade-hi c>^: v,:iO cT^^ J^ ti-e ta-te ta-si ta in that there. in that so long. then. wise. direction. 1) Or ^^^ ji-te; ^^-^ Ja-te, ^a^ ji-tlie, ^^^-^^ ji-the. There is also a lengthened form ^c^v^ J^-te, ^-.g-jl^s. ja-the. All these forms may equally be used with the Correlative ti (as ti- te etc.) and ki. 2) Instead of the postfix j-a^ sT, the postfixes j^ajU tal, j-o^* toT, i^y^ toni, may also be joined to ^^^s* je and ^J^ te, as: j.aSUca^ je-taT, ^AjLAA,*i te-tai etc. 394 SECTION IV. ADVEKBS, POSTPOSITIONS, ko ki-a ki-e in what wise? ki-te ka-te where? " I I kede in what direction ? ke-si ka-si how long. kade-hi when? Some of these adverbs are again compounded with adverbial postfixes (and partly prefixes): as: ^^Li ja-ki or ^L£vXiLi ja-ki-ta, so long as; ji^LiJ^ jadeh-a-ko, ^^jLi jadeh-o-ko, l5^LiJ.i jadeh-a-kura (a-kara), from such a time as, since. ^^^15 ta-ki or ^L£^L5 ta-ki-ta, as long as; jyi^jLji* tadeh-ako, jSy^iXs tadeh-o-ko, SisaJJ tadeh-a-kura, from that time; yS'liSf kadeh-a-ko^) etc., from what time? ,-j»*Jol ed-te, (^voljjul ed-tai or^^liju! ed-tahi, a little in this direction; ^^JX^ je-kadehe if (at any time). The adverbs implying 'place' and 'direction' may also be put in the Ablative, as: (jLSj it-a, ^^jLSI it-aU; ^v^i it-ahu, ^^^LSf it-ahu, from this place, hence; ^jLS'l ut-a, ^j^jI ut-u, ^^^J'l ut-ahu, from that place. 1) The forms: ^Ls^JL^^ jadeli-a-ko etc. are properly double compounds viz.: ^L^jLa" jadeh-a, the Ablative and J.> ko or ^^..j kii, a postposition (identical ^vith ^^^-^ khu) Trom'. In the same way J$\.S^(X£^ jadeh-a-kara is compounded from ^li^tX^ jadeh-a (Abl.) and y> kara (or kura) postposition, up to, literally: from which time up. CONJUNCTIONS AND INTERJECTIONS. 395 tlience; ^Lib tit-a, ^j^h tit-u, ^^jL% tit-au, from that place; ^L^^c^ kith-a, ^^^x5^ kitli-u, ^^5&L^5" kith-ahu etc. from what place, whence? ^IjLj! ed-a, ^^jljuf ed-au, ^•.^Jul ed-ahu, ^j^^lJol ed-ahu etc. from this direction. The emphatic i (!) or hi (he) very frequently ac- cedes to these adverbs, as: ^1*>a^I, ie-i, in this very wise; ^a5| ita-i or ^^| ita-hi^), even here; ^jLS] ita-i, ^^IliJ it-a-hi, even hence; ^il^l eda-i, ^^^Jol eda-hi, in this very direction; ^lilJuf ed-a-i, from this very di- rection etc. The eyes of my body are there, where the side (country) of my companions is. Sh. Um. Mar. I, 12. Lpj-^ \jzy^ jcUaa; j^^ <^^^ p}-%^^ Where is gone to the Jogis' emotion of yesterday? Sh. Eamak. I, 30. Thence a camelman has come; this information is correct. Sh. Um. Mar. II, 6. cs^-y-f-' ^AAAAj ^^.J.g.> ^^j ^j-».^ As thou wilt, even so it shall be unto thee. Matth. 15, 28. 1) The final e these adverbs is changed to *"a' before the em- phatic 1, for the sake of euphony; but e keeps its place also, as: /^^^*' ute-], in that very place. 396 SECTION IV. ADVERBS, POSTPOSITIONS, f>^ tUai- ,j^w^5> ^-yo ^4-^ ^^ u'"-';'"^^ (5^ U^^* I ask, o gallant young man! how far did your purpose go? Then he says: I dwell in the city of Mekka, my purpose went up to this place. Maj. 168, 169. ' ,. - j>i - " .. ^ ? - ' j>i - " As long as they get ready, ascend thou and sit down. Amulu Man. p. 144. >^f-> '-^•^ 0^-"° UT^;-^ (j^^^^ u"-^ u-^ Since I entered into connexion with the Jats, o companions ! The mountaineer is gone off, having torn (my) body; I am also from that time (only) half (and) afflicted. Sh. Desi, Chat. 6. VI. Compound adverbs. The SindhI uses a considerable number of compound adverbs^), which are formed either by reduplicating the adverb (or noun), or adding a similar adverb (or noun), or by adding an adverbial affix or postposition. 1) Such compound adverbs may be written in one word or se- parately. When joined by a conjunctive vowel it is usual to join them also in writing'. CONJUNCTIONS AND INTERJECTIONS. 397 1) Eeduplicatecl adverbs, (with or without a conjunctive vowel; cf. §. 12, 11, 2). (^wygj {Srf^ bhere bhere, constantly. Ju JJ pale pale, every moment. ,-§Aji -6^.^ dehu dehu, day by day. ^ir^'ir rateorate, night by night. wllll sarasare, entirely. ^^4^ (j^L^ ghari ghari, constantly (hour by hour). ^^IfJil^ji/J nethanethe, at last. -?;53^;5 varehovarihe, year by year. Ci wi hara hara, constantly. ^^iXliyS^odi handhohandhe , place upon place, etc. etc. etc. 2) Adverbs compounded with a similar adverb or noun. O ^ -- > > ,j«^lww -I aju subaha, in a day or two. ^^j»jii jj.-^55j^ jadehi tadehi, constantly. ^jj3 i^^ jie tie, in any way. .-^-uSj-jir ratodiha, night and day. ^IJo ^oA5^txf' kadehe kadane, now and then. ^.^ ^h^ hethe mathe, down and up (up and down), etc. etc. etc. 398 SECTION IV. ADVERBS, POSTPOSITIONS, 3) Adverbs compounded with an adverbial postfix or postposition. j^^?f aga-bharo, a little in front; a little ago. ^^^\ age-te, in front; in future. ^j^^aLiSjj poe-talio, a little in the rear. ^;^j.j poe-te, behind. l^LSfJ rat-a-kara, since night (lit. from night up). ^y^\j^'^ kalha-ku, since yesterday. Compare also the compound adverbs of §. 58. They remember no pains in the body, constantly they are happy. Maj. 801. One, having joined all bones, place upon place, having read an incantation, besprinkled them. Sindhi Read. Book, p. 53. Chapter XIX. POSTPOSITIONS. §. 58. The Sindhi has no prepositions, but only post- positions, as all adverbs or particles, which influence in any way the noun, are placed after the noun and not before it. Only ^s re, ^^^ ria may be optionally used as preposition or postposition.^) 1) In poetry the postpositions are freq[uently turned into pre- positions, if required by the metre. CONJUNCTIONS AND INTERJECTIONS. 399 There is only a small number of original post- positions in Sindhi, wMcli require the noun in the For- mative; far the greatest part of the postpositions now in use are originally adverbs (i. e. substantives and adjectives used adverbially; cf §. 57, 11. ITT. lY.), which either retain their original adverbial signification and are consequently constructed with ^^ je, or which are already treated as postpositions and require the For- mative of the noun governed by them; the greater part of them may therefore be constructed with or without ^£^ je, and be put before or after the noun, they govern. I. Postpositions proper, requiring the Formative of the noun governed by them. Lj bhara, on, with such a part downward; against; supported from. Sansk. H^, adj.^) 7^- y^ bhare, J pare, on, upon; Sansk. '^'Rft. ^^^LS tai. ij^p toi, > up to, till; Sansk. ^T'^; Hindust. ^^^ tai. (5)^ toriO, ' . ,- _ ^ up to; till. ^p toni, f ^ 1) y^ bhar has already in Hindustani a signification bordering on that of a postposition. In Sindhi the substantive >-^j bharu, prop, support, is also in use, of which j-^ bhare is the Locative. 2) Apparently derived from vj-j torn, the end; ^s'i}^ ^^H? = ^^vij> tore-i, emphatic Locative. 400 SECTION IV. ADVERBS, POSTPOSITIONS, ^j* te^), on, upon; Sansk. ^r|^. from -upon; from; upon (for the sake of). ^LS ta, 1^ U>^' ts, 1 o^ ja, ^ jia, (S-^-v^ Jia, Jie, J^ m, '",1: daha, ^i de, i^L»S daha, daM, daku, *#^ re, '^^ ria, like, as; Sansk. "mm. >; ;l: towards; in the direction of. from the direction of; towards^); Abl. form. without; Sansk. '^iT. sarti, according to; conformable to; Sanskrit BKH??;, Prak. ^TT;^ or ^TTWt. 1) Instead of te, ta etc. the Panjabi froms ute and uta are also occasionally used in Sindhi. 2) The forms ^)J^<3 daha, ^^j^O dahu are also in use; emphatic: (^^.^13 dahi. 3) The Ablative forms daha etc. are generally used in the sense of the Locative. CONJUNCTIONS AND INTERJECTIONS. 401 ^u sa, ^^ sanu, ^ se, senii , with; Sausk. t1*1- ^\.ioyL siidha, alono' with; Sansk. ^TW*J il^^ ^ sia, up to; till; Sansk. ^?WT; Panjabi: si. IT kara, up to. >y kane^) ] ^^' ^^^^ ^^' Sansk. ^il|, edge (of a ^^aT kane , vessel); Sindhi uT, rim, border; Panjabi: kanni. ^OTkana^), L.^^. ^^^^ ^^^^^ ^^kano, j ^^^ khe , to ; as regards ; in reference to ; Sansk. ^Jf, > from; Abl. form. ^l4rkha, ^^kho, ^^khaiv ^gare, to; with (Lar). ^ 8'^^' j like, as. ^^!^ laku, from -up; Panjabi: lago (Sansk. ^T^). ..^-rpwc manjhe, in; to (with verbs implying motion); Sansk. Tf^, 1) Instead of ^^JS kaue, ^^JS^ gane is used in Lar: similarly i[jS^ 2'ana istead of ,.^lj.J kana and ,.i«.Ar kano. j^-^^ 5"!^", ^^'^■' g^^^IlOj mSLcau ui ^^^^ ivctuci ttiiu ^^, 2) Frequently written without the final nasal, i. e. l-o kana. Trumpp, Sindhi-Grammar. Cc 402 SECTION IV. ADVERBS, POSTPOSITIONS-, jjL-^^doo manjha, from- — in^, out of; Abl. form. ^^;o me, in; to (witli verbs implying motion); Sansk TfUf-^ Hindust, ^j^. ^ ' I from — in; out of; Abl. form. ^yo mo, J e>5 vate, near to; with; in exchange of; Sansk> root '^^; Sindhi subst. v£^^. ,jU; vata, from — near; from; away from; Abl. form. {S'y^ LIa.^x) ^^ ^^j ^J^x jX3^3 {S%^ v^^^L^ ^SS^IJj Shah Sahib, having gone to one mountain, was fallen asleep on one side (lying on one side) for six months. Life of Abd-ul-Latif, p. 39. Having offered many thanks to God (and) having descended from his couch he went to his court and sat down. Abd-ul-Latif's life, p. 30. uF ^jLS ^c> ^laX ^^5 ^sy^ G! ..I '"J father, I sacrifice (myself) upon the name of God, i. e. for God's sake. Amulu Man., p. 41. The lightenings glittered in the north like a sun- flower, Sh. Sar. II, 1. ^>^ ^^ (5f; ^f ^7^ jri^ h/ Having directed her face towards the Malir she weeps; having stood up she says. Sh. Um. Mar. IH, 8. CONJUNCTIONS AND INTERJECTIONS. 403 f^ ^; v^^i <^; ^^ vj^. uk By themselves the fruits ripen without guarding, without a fence. Sh. Um. Mar. Ill, 14. ^aav ^^ .sni^ ^^)^ -f^^ ^-^"4 j'-'^ r^v ;; Eeturn with Punhu a moment! away with twelve months with others! Sh. Ma^B. YI, 6. In the upper rooms reproach has been my lot all (my) hfe long. Sh. Um. Mar. Y, 1. Then what do they see? that a vessel of wine, filled up to the rims is placed there. Sindhi Eead. Book, p. 68. I will collect and guard property and not give any thing to any one. Grolden Alphab; X, 7. I am come having taken a matter hidden to thee. Bh. Sor. II, 18; Ks( u^ O-^f^ is=^ ^^ (5-^; 'f^ y^ isf u^-^ Having gone td the house of somebody (and) having stolen from his food it (i. e. the mouse) ate it. Sindhi Read; Bookj p. 62; Cc2 404 SECTION IV. ADVERBS, POSTPOSITIONS, >^ \J^ iS-fi''^ ^^ agio. before; in front. .dll andare, within. ^Cjol andara, from within. jOjl ddo, ] .. .-. , -J- - Tk- \ near to. jvjj! odiro, Dim. 1) y6\ ado, jtSjl odo 3"^^^ vejlio may also be constructed with ^^r khe. 2) ^\ e&%J and ^^KLfDJ are more frequently constructed with the postposition \^J^-^ or the Ablative, than with (^■^« 406 SECTION IV. ADVERBS, POSTPOSITIONS. i^.jl ore, on this side. ^L.jl oria, from this side. ^LJ bahare, outside. ^IliLj bahara, from without. .tXj badire, > in lieu of; instead of. ^jLdj badira, sLj pare, on the opposite side; across. ^ ) ' ^ M from the opposite side ; on the part of. ^isLS paro, J ^^ll pase, on the side of; near to. sjLjLic^^ patandare, according to (mostly without ^s.). ^ *•* ' Sri ^jll^xl puthia, on the back of; after. ^^iblS paraputhe, behind one's back. ^5^1 pare, beyond; far from. y ^^. P . ? i after; subsequent to. ^ULijJ puiiana, J £=^j poe, after (always constructed with ^L^ or the Ablative). ^Cj pua, on the back of; behind. ^ioLi X^tire, on account of (Arab.). LSt>li caudhari, round about. ^jy^o^ o^f^^ caugirde, around (Pers.) CONJUNCTIONS AND INTERJECTIONS. 407 ^^Xi^y dhare, without; apart; round about (also constr. with ^jL^^ or the Abl.). "Xio dhara (always with ^z^) on, upon (on tho prop of). '^yj^[ rubaru, in the presence of (Pers.), ^j.^Ll samho^). }^-^ LIL samhuno, on account of in front; before; over against. ^^4^11 samhune^ ,-^jLl sange, V? I jjLfcUL sanga, y^ sire, on, upon; on the top of. ^^^ Ivaze, in lieu of (Arab.). jj«Tl^ karane, on account of; for reason of. ^1^ kane, ^^ kane, (^J lage, for the sake of. on account of; as concerns (mostly ^ lage, J witli°"t isf)- ^^^jCc mathe, upon. ^l^£o matha, from upon. ^^U\Jk^M manjhara, , . _ "^ \ } from — withm; out oi. ^J^Xi^^<^ manjharo. 1) Oi* ^jj-^La« samulio, ^y^ljM samuliu. 408 SECTION IV. ADVERBS, POSTPOSITIONS, JljU/o muqabile; over against; opposite to (Arab.). v^^^^x) mtijibe; according to; conformably to (Arab.). jj^ mahande, in front; before. ^ o -- ^ . like to; as (mostly without ^a>). jjlja^ mahanda, ^^L^y vaste, on account of (Arab.). Ixif^ vangurUj ^Cl^ vange, ^L^l^ vangia, _.^ vice, in the midst of. ^^^ vighe^), by reason of; by. yXj^ vetare, besides (mostly with ^^), .. ' _vi . - T^. > near to. yj^.^ vejhiro, Dim. .^juia hethe, below. ^jI^Iks^ hetha, from below. y^ U^y^ ^Sj'%-? J7f^ ^}^t^ ts^ ^j^^L^ .Hm^ Having paid thy respects before Shah Sahib beg (of him). Life of Abd-ul Latif, p. 34. Those who have died before dying become not extinct when having died. Sh. Ma'B. lY, 7. 1) (c-§^^ vighe, apparently shortened from ^-^^ vighine, Nom. ^-y-^^ obstacle, Sansk. T^^f, is used only when speaking of some disability or distress. CO^^JUNCTIONS AND INTERJECTIONS. 409 The point of this proverb is this, that it is necessary, to make (one's) expenses according to the income. Sindhi Eead. Book, p. 58. y^ jLo^ ^^^Lo f*;tX-^ j-^**^. cH-^^ i3-^^ ^yy^ After few (or) many days Ma/dum Sahib died. Abd- ul-Latifs hfe, p. 37. After this time thou art my mother (and) sister. Ibid. p. 42. . ur^'^ J^^5 (J^5 >-^ -^-^ (5i^'5 Whith what face shall I go to the presence of my country? Sh. Um. Mar. Y, 5. tSf ^ (5?^- (5^^ C5^ U*"-^ (Jff ^tU55 ^1 From the top of that place a piece has been cut out. Life of Abd-ul-Latif, p. 45. i5^T (ii^A^. ^?Slo ^^ d,^ ^?j ^^ ^^;4^ My daughter is grievously vexed by a demon. Matth. 15, 22. ..I 1 .. I .. I •• I Shah Jamal, being mounted on a horse, having come near to the couch alighted from the horse. Abd-ul-Latif 's Hfe, p. 7. 410 SECTION lY. ADYEEBS, POSTPOSITIONS; Chapter XX. CONJUNCTIONS. §. 59. The conjunctions serve to express the relation, in which either the single words of a sentence or two or more sentences stand to one another. According to their signification the conjunctions may be divided into: 1) Copulative. and u;^ au, . u>^i ai^), -? hi, ^ t>hi, ^ bill, '^. pi, ^^ pune, (^^ punu, j^' — ^jAj tia-tiaj as well -as. also. He also, after he was grown up, died. Abd-ul- Latifs life, p. 2. 1) Generally written, for the sake of abbreviation -^. CONJUNCTIOKS AND INTERJECTIONS. 411 Therefore they are often also beaten. Sindhi Eead.. Book, p. 50. ^c> ;^i J>Sl ;^ ^La^jI ^^Xa^I ^I . I am very longing as well for the spinning place as for the country. Sh. Um. Mar. II, 1. 2) Concessive. J ta, I then (as apodosis in a conditional sentence LS ta I generally not translated). .J J ta bi, ^.._ - ^ . [- nevertheless; then also; even then. ^ ,jM«^Jj tadehi bi. (5)3^* tore, ^j.j tone, ^jjjcxc. jetore'), isf}^ jetone, -s> je, although; if. " f ^^ r^ -^ c5#5 >^ i)^ (5f oi^' c^^^. Sft ^^' (5^5 i^-^-^* C5^-'^5 . ** ' ' " ' If from her limbs the cloth is stripped, (then) a brilliancy like lightening is effected. Amulu Man. p. 141. -^^ 7^ ^ (jLiy ^^c^ ^L^J ;jLi ^L5 ^!^ ^^ ^L5 Then he says: (if) I die, I obtain honor; I if return,. it is, to say so, a shame. Maj. 408. although; notwithstanding. 1) Very often also written separately: i^'ij^ /^^ 412^ SECTION IV. ADVERBS, POSTPOSITIONS, ♦• ^ ** 1 Though their wounds flow, nevertheless they divulge not (their) sighing to the vulgar. Sh. Kal. 11, 23. The heart also shall be given to one, though hundreds covet (it). Sh. Barvo Sindhi HI, 7. Change thou that company, although the profit of a thousand would accrue to thee. Sh. Earn. Kal. Vin, 25. 3) Adversative. ^^^ bigire, " }l para. > but. 0.J pana. ^jjo- tore, 1 1 ±- - ( either. ^jj.3 tone, j J J — ^^':p tore — na ta , either — - or. ^Li ja, either; or. o^ — ^JlL ja — ja, either — or. yke. ^ T _ > or. ^.Ci magare, except; but. J .3 na ta. otherwise; else. CONJUNCTIONS AND INTEEJECTIONS. 413 ^14^5 hatha, ^j-LoL^xi hatha-!, emphat., ^}^i hatho, ^j^j^xi hatho- 1, emphat., but rather; on the con- trary (PanjabT). > ^ (j^ ^^ c^^5 uP^**' ^ -^ Cu^ (5?<^^ (^jr' Either they go to the bank or (they go) with them in the stream. SL Suh. \ill, 1. Do men pluck grapes from thorns or figs from a thistle? Matth. 7, 16. No man can do the service of two masters; for either he will keep enmity with the one and make friendship with the other; or he will seize the skirt of the one and not at all mind the other. Matth. 6, 24. ^^i »iL>l5 ^=?^ ^Aj ^ (j'Af jf ^^p^ ^ }S^ j^l j^ Art thou he, w^o was coming, or shall we look out for another? Matth. 11, 3. 1) ^f kane is postposition and not the III pers. Plur. of tlie Present {\^j^ =^ \:)^-r^ ^^ Stack supposed; see Stack's Gramm. p. 101, Note. The verse quoted there does not quite agree with the Risalo. 414 SECTION IV. ADVERBS, POSTPOSITIONS, We have ho con'cern with those stones, but oiii" concern is with their master. Life of Abd-ul-Latif, p. 20.. 4) Causal and Final. ^) 3 ta, that; in order that; also an expletive^ in quoting the words of a person^ that; so that; in order that; because; as. jfe. jo, that, in order that; because; ^j!^^^ jela. ^^^i^ jelha, > because; wherefore* ^j-f^ jelahe, ^SLaj ^^ ^^a:5^ jela -tela .o ^-- ^j^A^ jela-ta, chajo^), because; i correlat. because -therefore; 1) We have classed the causal and final conjunctions under one head, because many of them are used in the one or the other sense. 2) These compound conjunctions are commonly written separately^ but by some they are also joined in one word; •^ ^T^ literally: why? because etC;; of different kind are such expressions as:- ^ &^ ^jJii for this sake, that = be<;ause; CO^^JUNCTIONS AKD INTERJECTIOXS. 415 ^ ^^ L^ clia kane ta, Js &Sl L.^ cte lae ta, because. i^ £^1 L^ cha lae jo, j jL.^s> clio ta, ^ L.^ clio jo, L^ SO, therefore, j^ ^— j^ jo -SO, correl. because — therefore. ^il^ soko, ^jij.^ soko-ta, j^iSl^ sokohu, J ^s.5"s..u- sok5hu-ta. because. vo ma, not, in a prohibitive sense (con- structed with the Imperative or Po^ tential). be it not that: lest (constructed with the Potential). lest (constructed with the Po- tential). ^lii mata , j\jJO i^ jo mata. <^ machane , o4^ maclianu , o4? machune , ^2)-^^ machunu, This is not becoming, that we, having comitted a theft, drink wine after. Sindhi Eead. Book; p. 69. U^ -^.'^ L>^' ^ ;3^ i^^ i^^^, -^^ L^Ay^ O Mengho, having directed (thy) face and having risen seek, in order that thou mayst find (it) in the body. Mengho 23. 416 SECTION IV. ADVERBS, POSTPOSITIONS, In order that I, having risen, may make some search for the unity. Maj. 9. Thou boasted and smilest thereat, that people call the 'Mia\ Golden Alphab. X, 3. This is the custom of the friends, that they do by no means pluck the plucked ones. Sh. Barvo Sindhi HI, 9. ^li 4^ si-^ >^ ^r^ ^ U^^? "^y"^^ C5^ Saying: your honour, it is not becoming thus, that laughing they shake hands. Maj. 348. ^:^ti> \^d<^^ Lj^ ^j^a:^ LlsDJ 1^^^ (jl^-^^-y* Therefore they were chosen by the Lord, because they were mixed up in the Unity. Sh. Kal. I, 8. ^f ^^j^ ^145" ^L^^ ^455 jCXj ^^^^ ^ &y L^ Because a joyful moment is better than a painful life. Sindhi Eead. Book, p. 62. The advantage is on our side, because (our) name will become great and renown will come out of it. Ibid, p. 64. Then, because they will sleep out of time, there- fore the sun will rise to them in that very place. Amulu Man. p. 143. INTERJECTIONS AND CONJUNCTiaNS. 417 Do not sit upon a bedstead, having placed a string of cowries upon (thy) neck. Sh. Um. Mar. 11, 2. I seek, I seek, may I not find, please God, that I may not meet with (my) sweetheart. Lest the grief, that is within (my) heart, may be calmed down! Sh. Hus. YII, 3. Be it not that thou repent of it after, like the deer and the donkey. Sindhi Eead. Book, p. 68. 5) Conditional. Jifjs> Jekara, ^A^ajij^ jekadehi, if (at any time). iS^ |iJLw ^i^^ Jj ^ .iiXlf ^ijic> ^^Jp ^2^ If thou puttest a cap on thy neck, then become a sound Sufi. Sh. Jam. Kal. Y, 8. If there be such lovers, show kindness to them. Maj. 776. jdA^V^ j^ ^U^ ;5;L'^ }-%^ ^r • If we sing, then upon the melody of the song its master will awake (and) settle (with us) the account of the whole life. Sindhi Bead. Book, p. 68. Trumpp, Sindhl-Grammar. D d if 418 SECTION lY. ADVERBS, POSTPOSITIONS, 6) Interrogative. - ' I interrogative expletive, generally not ^ ki, I translated. O princess, do we dissuade you? Amul. Man. p. 145. Chapter XXI. INTERJECTIONS. §. 60. In treating of the Interjections we abstract form such nouns or phrases, as are or may be used in the sense of Interjections, e. g. ^'Lo mathe, silence! (s. £), ^^ cano, good! ^^ sacu, true! A^S iJJI allahu ailamu, God knows! (lit. God is wiser, scil. than I), and only adduce such particles, as have now become strictly inter- jectional. Besides the Vocative signs, mentioned already in §. 16, 8, the following are the most common; they imply: 1) Assent. ^^A ahe, ^M ae, ^jj^jf ai, ^li ha, ioLi hao, ^i ha-u, 3.^5 hao. yes. CONJUNCTIONS AND INTERJECTIONS. 419 Jio bale, •*'* > yes! true; even so! ^j bala, j ^^ bhala, J^^ bhali, ^.f^ ji^O? y^^' (^ respectful term of ascent.) 7" well; good! maru. .^ varu 3^ea! indeed! well! The Devs will say to thee: wilt thou recognise her? Then say: yes. Amulu Man., p. 150. Well, show me those things. Ibid. p. 147. y=rr (5^ ^^y^ ^yi ^^^ (j-^?*-^^ \s^^ Abate too high acrimony; if they say to thee: bodu (pooh), say thou: jiu (very well). Sh. Jam. Kal. YIII, 22. They, who have love to Grod, they, indeed, boast. Maj. 778. My heart does not remain a moment without thee, truly! o Sir! o Lord! o Baroc! Sh. Abiri Ohot. Epil. 2. 1) ^>f^ jiu is apparently the Imperative of (J^-*^ jianu, live! D d2 420 SECTION IV. ADVERBS, POSTPOSITIONS, 2) Commendation. J.JI j.JI alo alo, bravo! bravo! (j;^l4:?^ cbabase, (j^jL^ sabase, ^^&- nsqn, ,5&l^ vahu, well done! bravo! (Pers.) praise to! (Arab.] .s^ All said: friend, the prince has that very same drawn ont from so many! praise be to him! and having got a bravo! bravo! he went away. Amulu Man. p. 151. Praise to Kae Diacu, who has given (and) exhibited (his) head! Story of Eae Diacu, p. 17. 3) Astonishment. y] lo, look there! behold! xLo mare. cs^^ft) U marebhini wonderful ! oh ! ^^l.^^LoAi maremanjjha. Companions, I shall not say then: behold the pain and the reproach of (my) friends! Sh. Suh. Y, Epil. 1. CONJUNCTIONS AND INTERJECTIONS. 421 4) Desire. J14^ chala^), ^^^^^^^^^ ^^ ^^^^, ^^^_^^^ ^^^^, ^^^^^^^^^ JLi salaj J ^ ' > woiilcl that ^ mana ^l^i* *JU| allaliu tuliara^) )^ „ „ tub lare \^y^ 5, „ toliara God keep lliee! good bje! JLw ^^^w9>w> ^-f^ ij*-^ j) tAJe^3 \L^«.j JL^' Would to God, that the Pauhars Avere reconciled, o darling Mam! TTould to God, that the Pauhars were reconciled T^dth me! Sh. Um. Mar. I, Epil. Would that (mj) sweetheart having come to the shore, would make (= say) alas! alas! Sh. Suh. Y, 20. Jlijj- ^l i^\ li fjajj ^L:^ When (we) shall come, depart! God protect thee! Maj. -437. 5) Uncertainty. ^=. aJI allahuje^), " ' - , _ God knows! perhaps! ,^ ^'l ala je, C5T LiL^ ninana, God knows! 1) Corrupted from the Arabic phrase: eUJf ^Lw ^1^ if it please God, 2) Properly: ^l^^l LS X-UI God be thy protection. 3) This is an eliptic phrase : if God (will or please). not so exactly (a polite ne- gation; Arab.) 422 SECTION IV. ADVERBS, POSTPOSITIONS, 6) Dissent. ^ Xaira, ^ (5?^-^ Xaii'^i-Xairu; J na, no. Have we before committed any theft on tbee? SLe says: no, girls; ye have not committed any theft. Amulu Man. p. 145. 7) Disapprobation and reproach. .^jt ohe, oho! JJ.J bodu, pooh! fy! (a contemptuous reply.) ^ic^j phithe, hoot! ^ thu, fy! ^^ chi, I '* v-._ tush! <54^ chi, J ^ll^iUo mahiya, fy! hoot! ^sa hvLj tush! pish! ..^5> hethe, down with! away with! 8) Grief and complaint. ^i.j^\ afsosUj alas! .if aha, alas! LiT aha^), alas! what a pity! 1) L^ij aha is at the same time also an interjection denoting pleasure, ahal POSTPOSITIONS AND INTERJECTIONS. 423 Jo barebare, alas! ah! woe! (^.A^ Haifu, woe to! (Arab.) Ivj.^5^ ^i}-^ gh5ra ghora, alas! alas! o misery! \jy\^ vavela, alas! lackaday! (Arab. Pers.] &\j vae, 1 also ! woe ! vo ve, Li ha, &Li hae. ^ASti lia-e\), cs-: SSi iS",^ liae hue. alas ! ^1 s^ hoe. hue ah ! alas ! :i>L^Ii haihate, alas! ^^ ^l5Co ^^1 ^^^ ^jl^ ^f JU ^:?. ^4ax» ^.-dA^ ^1 .. " ..1 ..I Woe to my state, that I am wicked (and) useless! Maj. 756. j.L^'j j.i^ jo. ^4^^ J.XC ^5" ^4^1 ^j^f Ij^ 1^-3.4^ To make, alas! alas! in such a business, for which a remedy is impossible, is not the custom of wisdom. Sindhi Eead. Book, p. 56. 1) Contracted also ^S^ lie. 424 SECTION IV. ADVERBS, POSTPOSITIONS, CONJUNCTIONS etc. Woe ! sisters ! I shall not live then without the Jat ! (Plur.) Sh. Desi YH, Epil. 2. Having made alas! alas! she lifted up, burning, her hands. Maj. 758. Lackaday! lackaday! why were ye terrified? empty has become the men's apartment! THE S^^riVT^^X, We divide the Syntax into two parts, the ana- lytical and synthetical. In the analytical part the chief constituent parts of speech, which have been described in the elementary grammar, are to be con- sidered according, to their exact signification, their in- trinsic value and their special application. In the syn- thetical part it will be shown, how the different parts of speech are linked together in order to form a sen- tence and how two or more sentences are joined to- gether. L THE ANALYTICAL PAET. SECTION L THE NOUN. Cliapter I. On the absence of the article in Sindhi. §• 61. The Sindhi possesses no article definite, as little as the Sanskrit and the modern Arian tongues of India. The noun may therefore be definite or indefinite, as: JK the woman or: a woman. There are no fixed rules, by which a noun may be known as definite or indefinite, the only safe guide 426 I. THE ANALYTICAL PART. is attention to the context. On the whole it may be remarked : 1) A certain number of nouns have by themselves a definite meaning, as: ^^^ hio, the mind, X^ siju, the sun, jJow^jI ubhirando, the east, Sy^ surgu, the heaven, ^| ubhu, the sky etc. Similarly all proper nouns. 2) If a noun stands in apposition to a proper name, it is thereby rendered definite, as: v:Io!^. jj*^^ ^^ country of China, ^cJ ij"^^ ^^ fairy Husine. If for any reason a noun is to be pointed out as indefinite, the numeral adjective yl^s^ one, or the in- definite pronoun j.5^, some one, any one, is used. There is some slight difference in the use of 3 vXi and ^5^ the first particularizing the noun by implying that only one person or thing is unterstood, the latter generalizing the same, by implying, that some one out of many, or something, which is not further described, is intended. jLJGs may also be used in the Plural, especially before another numeral, to render the number somewhat doubtful, as: ,.««.;s>--Uo ^ |-iX]» some two men, or about two men, the number not being fixed as certain. — If some portion or quantity of a thing is to be indicated ^ (or ^/S^ ki) is ^ui before the noun, irrespectively of the gender of the noun (as in Hindustani ^^^f). }^ -^-^ 7^^ Uy*^ J^^ In the city of Bhambhoru evil chats are constantly made about me. Sh. Ma^B. lY, Epil. ^iS ^si ^iLr 1^3 1/ ^ With some physician there was a servant; one day the physician gave him some medicine to pound. Sindhi Eead. Book, p. 51. Li vjL^ o*..w ^r?-^ c^^ ijLwwf Amongst us there were some seven brothers. Matth. 22, 15. y^ 7^)5 (^f >^?^ 7^^^ ^ ^^ Are ye (some) amirs, are ye (some) vezirs? Amulu Man. p. 160. 428 I. THE ANALYTICAL PART. Whatever milk and scum of butter there will be, that I will give to foreigners. Sindhi Eead. Book, p. 60. Some villager had put some quantity of grain in (his) garner. Ibid. p. 54. Chapter II. On the gender of nouns. §. 62. The Sindhi possesses only two genders, the mas- culine and feminine, the neuter having been lost in the course of time. As to the special use of the genders it is to be remarked: 1) The masculine gender is the next and refers either to male beings, or to things and abstract ideas. a) The masculine gender denotes living beings in general (the females being included therein) as: ^jysn'ilxi a man (generally); j^ baco, a child; ;^jL:i janvaru, an animal; fjj-^^ ghoro, a horse (generally). But in some nouns, implying inferior animals, the feminine in- cludes both genders, as: ^I bala, a snake (generally); ^^£c makhe, a fly; ^^s* ju; a louse etc. But if the gender of a noun is to be expressly mentioned, yj naru, a male, and ^oU madi, a female, must be put be- fore it. The people of the city of Mekka assembling form crowds. Maj. 38. I. THE ANALYTICAL PART. 429 God said: tlie earth bring forth living beings after their own kind, cattle and creeping animals. Sindhi Eead. Book, p. 14. They do not allow a male bird to sit down. Amulu Man. p. 141. It is an anomaly, that the nouns \Lj bazu, j^lj baso, j^Xlcc sikiro, o>J^ caragu, sJl^^ sican5, j*..wJ.aj baisird, •j5lJ lagaru, denoting different kinds of female hawks, are masculine, whereas the nouns ^Iw^ basina and cC^^ cipaka, denoting male hawks, are feminine. h) If a neuter idea is to be expressed, the masculine must be employed, the masculine generally supplying the place of the neuter, as: ;c| ^£v^ it is good; tj.^ ^y^ it was said by one. But this is only the case in the Singular, the masc. Plural of an adjective (or participle) never being used in a neuter sense. It must not be lost sight of, that the masc. form of an adjective cannot be employed in Sindhi in the sense of an abstract sub- stantive ^) (as in Latin , Greek or German) , but that the corresponding substantive mu^st be used (cf §. 9, I. 1, 2) or the adjective must be accompanied by a substantive denoting 'thing' or 'matter'^); only the masc. Singular 1) In sentences like the following: 5 J^\,55> ijjy^ iXl^ to do good allowed, ^^\ tKX:^ is an attribute, belonging to ^^^-^ , literally: IS I well doincy is allowed. 2) It is a different case, when adjectives are used without a sub- 430 I. THE ANALYTICAL PART. of the past participle passive may be used in the sense of a neuter substantive* Ye will become like God, knowing good and evil. Sindhi Read. Book, p. 19. Will he not give to them good things? Matth. 7, 12. Surely, what is written (in fate), will be fulfilled; from that, which is written, no one will escape. Maj. 258. U^7>.f ^^ ^y^ ^J)LS tari^a, date, day, is also occasionally omitted. ^LLT ^P ^-^ ^ ^ ^^. ^U ^ JJ Then the mother asks Majno: what has happened to thee? Maj. 44. fair husband of Sorathe! do some (word) of mine! Sh. Sor. I, 11. On the fourteenth (day) the moon rose; on the twenty-ninth the vulgar sees it. Sh. Kambh. II, 10. Chapter III. Number. S. 63. The Sindhi has only two numbers the Singular and the Plural, the Dual having been dropped already 432 I. THE ANALYTICAL PART. in Prakrit (cf. §. 15). As to their special use it may be remarked: 1) Arabic nouns in the so-called broken Plural are (according to their original signification) treated as collective nouns, and consequently constructed with the Singular of a verb (or adjective). The Arabic fern. Plural in ^^^^1 is likewise treated as a Singular. But now and then the Arabic Plur. is constructed with the Plural of a verb etc., or it is put in the Sindhi Plural form and treated accordingly. Ask, if some children are destined for me from the threshold of God. Amulu Man., p. 139. Blessed are those, who are peace - makers ; for they shall be called children of God. Matth. 5, 9. ^^ ^(X& ^U:2> ^5>! o*.^ (Jj^ ^aj^Ij3 ^il^ .J " " '- •• i " -' •• I Then the Lord gives thee a meadow, where the gardens of Eden are. Sh. Sor. I, 9. Do ye not see, that the Lord of the world with all companions , and all prophets are come. Life of Abd- ul-Latif, p. 37. 2) With numerals the Singular form of a noun may be used, though the Plural is more common (cf. §. 23). 3) The Plural is frequently used in a honorific sense, when speaking with respect of any person. A noun I. THE ANALYTICAL PART. 433 in the Singular may therefore be constructed with the Plural of a verb (adjective etc.), or the noun itself may be put in the Plural, though implying only a Singular. This is frequently the case with the nouns j^jt>, ^jje, For the same reason the II pers. Plural of a verb is used, w^hen addressing politely a person, but not so frequently as in Hindustani, the common people being as yet in the habit of addressing each other by the II pers. Singular. Abd-ul-Latif used to play in his youth with boys of his age the play lika lik5ti (hide and seek). Life of Abd-ul-Latif, p. 9. "Woe, o sisters, I shall then not live without the Jat (i. e. Punhu). Sh. Desi YI, Epil. 2. ^ , /. - -^, ^ c ^ By the discourse of (= about) my beloved, by the recollection of my friend my crippled life has been re- vived. Sh. Jam. Kal. Ill, Epil. isf^ isi^ c»^ u^-^j*-^ ^^ c^^^^?^ ^f" S?t^ "^^ ^^"^ Having come to the Shah he said : Sir , give me also to drink. Life of Abd-ul-Latif, p. 32. 4) The following nouns modify their signification in the Plural: Trumpp, Sindhi-Grrammar. ^ 6 434 SINGULAR, lyol Amiru, s. m., Lord; Amir. I. THE ANALYTICAL PART. PLURAL. Iv^l, tlie ^^L5 or coffin of the Imams Hasan and Hu- sain, carried about in tlie Muharram. >^^. peko, Adj., belonging or relatino; to one's father. 'pLi cavaru, kho, CO s. m. a gram of cleansed rice. s. £, yel- lowness. IXo peka, the relations of i' one's wife (her father's family). JIlLi cavara, I cleansed rice 14^:^ cokha, J (i^ general). LilS dana, grain (in general). ^^j>r zardiyu, the dark spots in the teeth of an old horse. (j^.LL sariyu, rice in hnsk (in general). Cs^lL sahm^a, the relations (or family) of one's father- in-law. ^y^tr^ seyn, vermicelli (in general). Liljli nanana, the relations of one's mother (the mother's father's family). 5) The following nouns are only used in the Plural: j.!>l3 dano, s. m., a grain ^^^<^ zardi, ^c>^ jardi, <5sLl sari, s. £, a grain of rice (in husk). jwiLL sahuro. Adj., belonging or relating to one's father- in-law. ^x*A/ sei, s. f. , a piece of vermicelli. pUlj nanano, Adj., belonging or relating to a mother's father. f '. - T- _r ,j«-jw5L baburiyu, s. f. , tufts of tangled hair (as worn by faqirs). ^-.^^ pithu, s. f., pieces. JJ..AJ J>* treyu, s.f., certain funeral rites, performed during ' three days after the decease of a person. I. THE ANALYTICAL PART. 435 the short hair of an infant. \i5lL junda, s. m., IjcXli Junclira, s. m., Dim., IjLl^ jhinda, s. m., 1,^ javira, s. m., a neck ornament of gold beads. \y!^ citra, s. m., the hot days. ^JkjH^ dhanijn, s. £, grain boiled and afterwards parched. LS*;j\ ratiriya, s. m., A kind of superior rice. ^yj^ katiyUj the Pleiades. 1^ knhara , s. m. , boiled dry grain. LiLf ganja, s. m., a kind of rice. lljix motiya, s. m., a kind of rice. ^jL^ muhadra, I s. m., barley separated from the ^jL^ muhadha, J li^sk. LUjU vapamba, s. m., the capsules of the Corey a arborea (a medicinal plant). ^4)i-€^ hathoriyu, s. £, handcuffs. Chapter IV. The cases of the noun. §• 64. I. The Nominative. As to the special use of the Nominative it may be noted: 1) Nouns or proper names standing in apposition to another noun are generally coordinated to the same, Ee2 436 I. THE ANALYTICAL PART. as: \oj^ ^^s^Cf the harbour Karaci; JoC ^j.J3 liCJ the play lika likoti; ,5cL.cioLj y^^-i^ci the Mng Shamsu etc.; but the noun in apposition may also be subordinated by means of the Grenitive; cf. §. 67, 4. ^ £^^^ ^^; ^-^) ^^ ? ^f Well! smiles the queen -mother of the king Diacu; i. e. saying: well! she smiles etc. Sh. Sor. Ill, 6. Laila is the name of a woman, who (is) the daughter of the Qazi Qamar. Maj. 33. ^^' ^jOlyoLw ^X:^^ ,5>L/o *w^ i^*^ The month (= moon) (of) Muharram was seen; an- xiety befell the princes. Sh. Ked. I, 1. 2) Substantives implying a number or quantity may be likewise coordinated to another noun, instead of governing it in the Genitive (cf. §. 23), as: ^o ofj lots of liberal persons. There are throughout lakhs (of) tale-bearers and scouts upon lovers. Maj. 254. Having cut with (their) swords they made heaps (of) carcasses. Sh. Ked. Ill, 4. '^^ is-^^) ^i ^5 s!'? ^^y^ ij''^ Having taken buckets (of) heart -pleasing gifts be content! Sh. Sor. IH, 4. 3) The duration of time is expressed by the No- minative (or by the uninflected case generally). 1. THE ANALYTICAL PART. 437 The (whole) eight watches (i. e. day and night) the hook of the Grreat {= God) is in my skull. Sh. Sor. I, 20. Those, who watch during the nights, I shall make (my) friends. Sh. Jam. Kal. Y, Epil. 2. C5^^ ur° ^^■'^ U>^* ^>^'(; c5?>7^^ -^; Stay for my sake this night, o darling! Sh. Sam, I, 20. 4) The Nominative is frequently used absolutely to avoid two or more nouns following each other in the inflected case , which is contrary to the Sindhi idiom ; the case, in which the nouns should properly stand, must then be taken up by a pronoun or pronominal adjective. If the stress be laid upon some part of a sentence, it may be put quite absolutely, its relation or subordination being taken up by a pronoun. This is especially the case, when a noun is nearer defined by a relative pronoun in the JSTominative, the noun being then attracted by the following relative. Fruits, clusters of flowers, (kinds of) honey, they try the taste of all. Sh. Um. Mar. YI, 9. o^ vJ-f^' uxf^ 3^ ^l^ysL^ ,j^ ^LxioLj ^ -^]iX^ (As to) the entering of a rich one into the kingdom of God, the passing of a camel through the ear of a needle is easier. Matth. 19, 14. 438 I. THE ANALYTICAL PART. oLf (^lXa^sJ ^^<>.Jw^J (^lXa54> ^^iXAJsLw ^^^ iS'*':^'"'^ ^ She remembering tlie Lord, trembling, shaking, fearing, lifted up (her) neck and made: Man. Sindhi Eead. Book, p. 64. Then ye will become children of your father, who is in heaven. Matth. 5, 45. §. 65, II. The Vocative. By the Vocative a person or thing taken perso- nally is addressed; the Vocative stands therefore in no connexion with other nouns or with a verb, and is ge- nerally put at the beginning of a sentence. 1) The Vocative is used without any interjectional particle, if no particular stress is laid upon the address; but if the attention of the person spoken to is to be roused, the interjectional particles Lj ya, ^1 e, ^\ ai, jl o, y^ are used promiscuously with masc. and fem. nouns, ^\ 1 and ^1 ai only with fem. nouns. In addressing an inferior person, or when speaking very affectionately to a person, the interjectional par- ticles ^v re (^s re) and ^--l are (^vf are) are used with masc. nouns, and ^-l ri (^s ri) and ^-A ari (^^sl ari), (cf §. 16, 8, Note) with fem. nouns, be they in the Singular or Plural, ^-l^ bari, ^-'i ri and ^yy\ riu are I. THE ANALYTICAL PART. 439 also used indepenclentlv of a noun, in addressing an in- ferior female (or intimate friend). I have been quickened, companions, come in my Punhu! Sh. Desi n, Epil. j-^T j5>JjliT j.^ ^^^ ^^3^ C^l^ For God's sake, camelmen, do not drive on the camels ! Friend! tliou art the protector of my crippled life! Do not extinguish (my) affection, o sweetheart! Sh. Desi m, 1. ^T ^ ^^ ^ J^ ^ LJ lAli, ?Ali, misfortune is on the orphans! The order of God has come, o Imams. Sh. Ked. V, Epil. ^ * > , - Hallo! son of man, doest thou go having beaten our mother? Amulu Man. p. 148. Hallo! cook, bring bread! Ibid. p. 144. 2) Adjectives preceding or following a noun in the Vocative are likewise ^Dut in the Vocative. But if an adjective defines another adjective in the sense of an adverb, it remains uninflected. 440 I. THE ANALYTICAL PART. I Sweet, charming friend! mayst thou fertilize the whole world! Sh. Sar. IV, 12. very kind friend! they (= she, Sing.) have given me up with difficulty (i. e. unwillingly). Maj. 664. 3) The Nominative Plural is occasionally used in- stead of the Vocative, especially with nouns terminating in V (masc). ,^^ ^ Of Who are ye? whence do ye come from? ye men of foreign appearance? Nanga jo Qisso, v. 23. Ye, that labour and are heavy laden, come unto me. Matth. 11, 28. 4) A number of nouns are commonly found in the Vocative only, as: jJol amare (^il amane), ^T ai, Jul ay ale, ^-;o! ami, ^U mai, o mother! an affectionate term for a female; ^^jj adi, ;C4>l5 dadi, o sister! Liy?^ jija or (^^^ jiji, o aunt; \S\ ada or I5l5 dada (Nom. jof and 3^13) o brother! LjI aba and Lj(J baba (from jj| and j.jlj), o father! a term, which may be applied even to a child (male or female); ^LI^ miya (Sing, and Plur.) o friend! a respectful address. ij^^ £--y y'^t u>-^^. Lr'' (5:^^. ST"' mother! hope is fulfilled, Punhu has arrived at Kec. Sh. Desi, Chot. 4. I. THE ANALYTICAL PART. Ui --„ J child (o father!) I make thy espousals with the son of the king Lain. Amulu Man. p. 142. Fathers! what reason have you to ask after this very (thing?) Ibid. p. 140. jj.AX> ^ ^-ijJ 3^ ^ ^LOo oJ j.J^I ^^1 Having come, o darling, o friend! cover with dust the tomb of the deceased one in the mountain- passes. Sh. Ma^S. YI, Epil. §. 66. in. The Instrumental. 1) The Instrumental either denotes the agent, by whom an action is performed, or the instrument, by means of which any thing is done.^) The Instrumental in Sindhi is not only used with the past tenses of transitive or causal verbs (which always have a pas- sive meaning), but also with any tense of neuter verbs implying a passive signification.^) By the people of the caravan the loads have been bound up; in thy eyes there is sloth. Sh. Surag. HI, Epil. . . ' I " 1) The sense is different, if the postposition ^jil.'W be used with a noun denoting an instrument. In this case it is implied, that some one was accompanied or armed with any thing, but not, that he has performed any thing by a certain instrument. 2) Independently of a verb the Instrumental of ijli nalo, name, is used quite in an adverbial sense, as: (c-^tJ (^y"^ iX*-^ yf^ 3r^? one faqir, by name Muhammad |Alim. 442 I. THE ANALYTICAL PART, ^p ^y£ jsb^^ ^y^ (X^^ ^ ^x^x^ Suhini was killed, says the Sayyid, by (her) re- lationship. Sh. Suh. Y, 17. By the lovers (God) is never forgotten. Sh. Jam. Kal. VII, 1. By means of (my) feet I cannot arrive (there); the country of (my) friend (PI.) is far off. Sh. Khambh. I, Epil. ^La^j^ jj^ajUXJ >ii^ u>^7^. -^ [s^ c^^v By drops they are not reconciled; they have espied the jars of the heroes. Sh. Jam. Kal. lY, 9. 2) The Instrumental expresses causality^) (by reason of, by dint of): ^^) ^; u'-^^ >^; ^^ '?^ <5^ ■ On the seventh in the month the blood went out of the veins by reason of dryness; On the eigth in the month the eyes of the lover die of thirst. Maj. 478, 477. 3) The Instrumental expresses the way and manner^ in which any thing is done. He kept the custom (good breeding) in a good manner before the Qazi. Maj. 173. 1) In a similar sense tiie postposition ^^^ may also be employed. I. THE ANALYTICAL PART. 443 'There is no purpose in both mansions', in this wise they spoke. Sh. Jam. KaL Y, 23, '^/)^ u;"^.^ ^•;^- ^Ai is^ u^^ To both helpless ones (there is) pleasant talk in many ways. Maj. 198. 4) The Instrumental expresses the price, for which any thing is bought or sold.^) Are not two sparrow sold for a piece? Matth. 10, 29. Fine black woollen blankets come there to hand for a paltry (sum). Sh. Um. Mar. YI, 8. §. 67. lY. The Genitive. 1) It must be remembered, that the Genitive in Sindhi is originally an adjective, formed by the affix yc^j which always requires the Formative of the noun, to which it accedes; the Genitive admits therefore of gender, inflection and number, like other adjectives. In- stead of j.:^ its diminutive form y-i^ jaro is also found in poetry, and especially jJolI sando (cf. §. 16, 6) and its dim. form j-jt)^ sandiro. The Genitive case -sign i.^ etc. may also accede to a noun with suffixes; in poetry it is frequently dropped altogether , to be supplied from the context. jlXaI may also be separated from the noun, to which it belongs. . . ' I - l) But the postposition m'*'^ ^^7 also be used in this sense. 444 I. THE ANALYTICAL PART. The understanding of the duties of a faqir is not easy. Mengho 37. friend, into my soul falls the desire after thee! Sh. Barvo Sindhi II, 2. O J > 1 - By means of the magic power of the bucket he became wealthy. Sindhi Read. Book, p. 67. .♦I .. .. ^ .. ,1 The masters of the house having got up what do they see? that a thief, having collected all things of the house, having bound a bundle, having drunk wine (and) having become intoxicated, dances. Ibid. p. 69. Having stolen daily from the houses of men all sorts of food they were bringing it to him. Ibid. p. 62. To the forest with that thy son, who will cut off the head of my brother! Story of Eae Diacu, p. 1. The grass of (my) fatherland I consider as musk. Sh. Um. Mar. II, 1. 2) As regards the position of the Genitive, it ge- nerally precedes the noun, by which it is governed, like I. THE ANALYTICAL PART. 445 other adjectives; but if the stress be laid on the go- verning noun, or if the euphony of the sentence should require it, the Genitive follows the same. In poetry the Genitive precedes or follows the noun, on which it is dependent, either immediately or separated by one or more intervening nouns, as it may be required by the metre or the rhyme. Whoever flees from the trouble of labour, his state will become like that of the dogs. Sindhi Eead. B., p. 61. ^\ L^J adJi ^:s^ ist"^ o stXJf ^^^ j»La.- j^xf jvxS^I In my heart there is a thirst after the Jam Ari. Sh. Hus. YHI, Epil. ^LI^ ^^.^^yrr (5^^ J4^^. u;-^ 0^7^ u;^'-^/ Complaints about the separation I shall utter to dear Punhu, o friend! Sh. Hus. VIII, Epil. 4) One noun is often made dependant on the other by means of the Genitive, where we should properly expect an apposition.^) In this way dlS nalo, name and similar nouns subordinate the appellation in the Ge- nitive. The same subordination in the Genitive takes place, when the genus is nearer defined by the species, as: a fig-tree, or when a geographical appellation, as: town, mountain, river etc. is followed by a proper name, as : the river Indus. In some instances the English idiom resorts to the same construction, as the Sindhi, e. g. the city of London. From whom hast thou learnt the word (of) 'se- paration', dear friend! Sh. Barvo Sindhi II, 8. The woman uttered the word (of) 'money' slowly. Sindhi Read. Book, p. 68. H^i isf^ T^i'^ ^ 3^5 >^ (5^ u5 P'-*" isir^ is^ ^^^ That very dry post stood as a green tamarisk tree, having become big and thick. Life of Abd-ul-Latif, p. 23. There was a very respectable inhabitant of the town of Thata. Ibid. p. 45. 1) See §. 64, 1. I. THE ANALYTICAL PART. 447 5) The Grenitive describes the material, of which something is made or composed; in this case the Gre- nitive quite supplies the place of an adjective. I ' I The garment of John was of camel's hair and round his waist a girdle of leather. Matth. 3, 4. She, having put on bracelets and buttons, will cause to bring (call for) a garment of pearls and rubies. Amulu Man. p. 144. 6) The Genitive describes the nature or quality of the noun, on which it is dependent (Grenitivus qua- litatis). But in this case the Grenitive must always be accompaniecl by an attribute, be that an adjective, pronoun or another noun in the Genitive; the repetition of a |noun may also serve as an attribute. In poetry, and even in prose, the Genitive case-sign is frequently dropped, so that constructions of this kind can hardly be distinguished from those with the Locative, see §. 70, 4. One of them was nine years old, the other eight years. Sindhi Eead. Book, p. 50. Without understanding science is of no use. lb. p. 54. From Kec came a caravan, camels of a fine kind. Sh. Desi m, 8. Having given clothes of different kinds he started them off. Amulu Man. p. 140. 448 I. THE ANALYTICAL PART. 7) When the Genitive is dependent on nouns, im- plying a part, quantity or measure, it expresses the whole of that, of which the governing noun forms a part. But if no such noun precede and a part is to be singled out, a postposition must be used (as: Which a woman took (and) hid in three measures of flour. Matth. 13, 33. A jar of wine fell into his hands. Sindhi Eead. Book, p. 62. .. I ^ •• .. , .. - I " n In one of those (houses) my beadstead shall be, in the other that of the king. Amulu Man. p. 142. If two persons of you become one-hearted respecting a petition. Matth. 18, 19. 8) A certain number of adjectives and appellatives, which have partly taken the signification of substantives, may subordinate another noun in the Grenitive. Of this kind are the nouns formed by the affix aku, au (see §. 8, 9) and others. Lovers, drinkers of poison, are verry happy when seeing poison; They are always used to the chain and the execu- cutioner. Sh. Kal. II, 33. I. THE ANALYTICAL PART. 449 -- 5 Tlioii art a resident of the waste and desert. Sindhi Read. Book, p. 69. A vagabond, accustomed to bits, no breeding and good beiiaviour. Maj. 304. Which histre is upon thee, for that head I am lono'ino;. Sh. Sor. 11, 7. }^ >^ cr^-^; c5^^5 "^^^ J4^.^ ;r^ cr'*^-^ v^^^ --^^ <^^ The Sayjid, by name Shah Habib, was originally an inhabitant of the village Yango Yilaso. Life of Abd- ul-Latlf, p. 1. 9) The Genitive is used, without being dependent on a governing noun, to express a space of time, as: ^ ^fs by night, jljsx -^.5 by day etc., the noun, by which the Genitive is governed and which is idioma- tically left out, being JL?^ velo, time. This construction is therefore identical with that mentioned in §. 64, 3. In Hindustani jl5^ is used in the same sense. « Sitting at (the time of) evening prayer I spread out my skirt on the water. Sh. Sor. Y, 14. >?L? ^-L^ ^')^ }^ c^f; ^jfi i'LS The bard sang the first night at the side of the castle. Sh. Sor. 11, 1. T r u m p p , SinclM- Grammar. F f 450 I. THE ANALYTICAL PART. By day they used to sit in its shade. Life of Abd- ul-Latif, p. 23. 10) A number of adjectives require idiomatically the inflected case of the Grenitive (i. e. ^^), when a noun is made dependent on them. The most common of them are: jSf ado, in front; jOjl od5 (Dim. j-j^j-l odiro), near to; ^j.^LlL samuho, in front of, opposite; ^j.JtXJLgi mahandiyo, in front; 3.4^^ vejho (Dim. 3^4:^^ vejhiro), near etc. These adjectives being mostly used as ad- verbial postpositions (§. 58, II), the same construction has apparently been preserved, when they are used as regular adjectives. When they came near to Jerusalem. Matth. 21, 1. ;^^ ur° ^h^ P d^-;^' u^- ;^^ 7^^^ Look at the rising of the moon; the friend is near to thee, far from me. Sh. Kambh. 11, 7. The eyes are opposite the eyes the whole day and night. Maj. 219. 11) The relative -adjectives 3.4.^ jeho, jv^r^ jeharo, such as, like as, fit to, j^xLL sando, like as, jv^x:?- je- tiro, as much as, and jJus^ jed5, as large as, are always constructed with the simple Formative of the noun, that depends upon them. Majno, the son of Mahmud, is then not such as to come, i. e. is not hkely to come. Maj. 719. I. THE ANALYTICAL PART. 451 jLjitS tXjtS u^9 ^7*^ c^^v-^^. 1^:)^'-^ Teetlis like Jasinum flowers the Bountifal has given her. Maj. 54, Which is blessed in all ways, like thou, o wise one. Maj. 825. In that (there is) pven thou, thou; (there is) no other sound (as much as the twinkling of an eye =) for a moment. Sh. Jam. Kal. Y, 19. Then no mote, as large as a sesamum seed, came into thy body, o friend? Ajaib v. 21. 12) When a noun is subordinated by means of the Genitive to the Infinitive of a neuter or active verb, the case-sign of the Genitive may be optionally dropped. }H^ ck^; -f^^ 0)r^ (5t ^^ ^;;>^' «J^ p'-^y* The villager occupied himself in (the) removing of that little grain. Sindhi Read. Book, p. 56. The Mughals, having taken (their) swords came for the killing of the Shah, i. e. 'in order to kill him'. Life of Abd-ul-Latif, p. 15. ^j^AAJli^ SJi. yy^ £=3»J (jL^ ^^^'6 c>«*Jt3 ^jj^ After the seeing of this affluence she offered up dutiful thanks. Sindhi Eead. Book, p. 55. Ff2 452 I. THE ANALYTICAL PART. o-i^^ yi i>^ y^ ty^ ^t9 ^#5 ^^/^^ ^ u'-^^^ Till the passing away of heaven and earth not one jot of the law shall in any way pass off. Matth. 5, 18. §. 68. V. The Dative. 1) The Dative denotes the more distant object, in reference to which the subject is acting. This is already indicated by the postposition ^^ khe (§. 16, 4), by means of which the Dative case is made up \ and which originally signifies: 'on account of, for the sake of, in reference to'. In prose the postposition ^^ is always put after the Formative of a noun, but in poetry it may precede the noun, or it may be dropped al- together. When a Genitive, depending on a noun in the Da- tive, follows the same immediately, the postposition ^j^ is put after the Genitive case -sign. Come near, dear friend, do not give pain to the distressed. Sh. Abiri X, 4. jol ^A^ ^ ^ SyXxi vb c>..w«^ ^U Then Maste IN'aze came and said thus to the elegant. Ajaib, V. 90. 1) In poetry the postpositions ^^'f kane, ^^j kane and yj gare are used in the same sense as jc^>. I. THE ANALYTICAL PART. 453 j^5 .; ii5 i^>r ^^r ^.y sif May no sunshine apply to the camelmen, may no hot wind apply to the camels! Grod, may no hot wind blow to the sons of An! Sh. Desi I, 25. Having bound (him) they delivered him to the po- lice-officer of the town. Sindhi Eead. Book, p. 69. 2) The Dative with the auxiliary verbs ^J^s to be, and 0*1^' to become, to be, expresses the idea of pos- sesssion. 1 have hope in God. Sh. Sor. I, Epil. -^ is( '^^^^ yl « > ^ , - ^y^H u^. <5^ (sf^ ^^ o^-^^ (j^^'^ Having driven on I came to Kec, where Punhu himself (is). Sh. Abiri Y, 1. O fair Lady, after death thon wilt come to Punhu. Sh. Ma^B. lY, 5. tsf^ g^ (s^'-^; -^ ^ )^ iA^^^^^ The work of a messenger (i. e. travelling) does not at all bring to Kec. Sh. Abiri lY, 10. 5) The Dative is used to express time, when only an indefinite space of time is spoken of, whereas the postpositon ^/.A or -^^sLo, in, is employed, if the time, during which any thing is done, is to be noted. Qaisare says: arrive that very night in Kelat. Sh. Sar. IY,'3. Go to (thy) friend at day-break, in clear day, Sh. Suh. Ch5t. 11. 11. THE ANALYTICAL PART. 455 ^ J'^^f c>^-^ty ^ff^T^-? ^"i^-" i^^i Immediately at that time an order was given to the chamberlains. Ajaib, v. 15. §. 69. YI. The Accusative. The Accusative has two forms in Sindhi, it is either identical with the Nominative or with the Dative, i. e. the idea of the Accusative may be expressed also by means of the postposition ^^^. 1) The Accusative is commonly expressed by the form of the Nominative, whenever the verb governs only an Accusative, and not at the same time a Dative. When he shall keep his own horses, boats, soldiers and make his own judgements and thoughts. Amul. Man. p. 139. If I shall marry, I shall marry this very fairy Hu- sine. Ibid. p. 141. 2) But when the subject of the sentence is an ani- mate noun (in the Nominative) the object (Accusative) must be marked out by means of the postposition ^ to avoid a possible mistake. If the subject be animate, and the object inanimate, the object (Accusative) gene- rally remains in the uninflected form (i. e. without the Postposition), if there be no danger of misappre- hension. If both, subject and object, imply inanimate things, the object may likewise remain uninflected. 456 I. THE ANALYTICAL PART. ' I -- " I " y^S (5-^5 <$^ Sisters, says Abd-ul-Latif , praise ye the (well-known) friend. Sh. Abiri Chot., Epil. 3. >-^; ^'j^ u^V^ 0^^ ^ Having gathered first the tares , having bound bundles to burn (them), gather (and) put afterwards the wheat in the garner. Matth. 13, 30. Whatever longing there is, learn (it); otherwise look at the longing ones. Sh. Jam. Kal. YII, 7. 4) Whenever an active verb is constructed imper- sonally in the past tenses (§. 94, 5) the object must be pointed out by the postposition ^^^5^ signifying: as regards. 458 I. THE ANALYTICAL PART. Then it was abandoned by the caravan as regards her, while being asleep, i. e. she was abandoned by the caravan while being asleep. Sh. K5h. I, 8. ^3bj i^? }^f^ Make the weak one pass the Harho, says Latif. Sh. Desi lY, 4. I will make you fishers of men. Matth. 4, 19. 1) But both objects may also remain in the uninflected state, though implying persons; see §. 94 ^ 3. I. THE ANALYTICAL PART. 459 6) When an active verb subordinates at the same time a near and a more distant object (iv e. an Accu- sative and a Dative), the Accusative (in the uninflected state) generally follows the Dative, except a particular stress be laid on the Accusative, in which case it pre- cedes the Dative. ,^U. ^^ ^^^ \Xxs> ^^ (j^-o ^il4i?^ J^l< The accomplished one causes daily nice blandishments to be made to Qais. Maj. 223. ^^Cs^^ ^sy^^ is^ u^^ -^ The hands the little daughter shall wash us. Life of Abd-ul-Latif, p. 48. i^^i^ (5-f^^ ^^^^ ^Y^ti ^^^ '"^ ^- '■" ^^^ ^7— But one (grain) thou doest not give to another with thy hand, having thrown in an obstacle, o brother! Mengho 11. §. 70. YII The Locative. The Locative, as noted already, can only be ex- pressed in the Singular of masculine nouns terminating in 'u'; in all other nouns and throughout the Plural the Locative must be circumscribed by the postpositions ^^yKjo and ^^ivc, 'in'. In poetry these postpositions are commonly dropped and only the Formative of a noun is used to express the idea of the Locative, in the Plural the contracted form of the Formative (ending in e or a) must in this case always be employed. But also in prose the postpositions ^j^yo and ..g-^ are frequently left out idiomatically, especially after nouns implying time. When a substantive in the Locative is accompanied 460 1. THE ANALYTICAL PART. by an adjective ending in 'u', the adjective must be likewise put in the Locative; but adjectives of other terminations, pronouns or numerals are only put in the Formative. 1) The Locative expresses in Sindhi not only the place, in which an action is going on, but also di- rection and motion to a place. The Locative is therefore used after verbs of motion, such as: J^l va- iianu, to go, ^^1 acanu, to come etc. ^y^ ^-J^ ^J^S ^^^ Sj\i L^AJ^ J ^5 •^^^ i5-t=^^^ ^st^ ^/ -f^^ }}^ ^y^ ;N"o crows were sitting on a tree; evening tide has set in; she seizes the opportunity. She stepped in, having taken the jar into the hand, having heard the call (to prayer) of the evening. Sh. Suh. I, 14. In the caldrons the limbs boil, where not a grain does descend in the eddies. Sh. Kal. 11, 27. In deep, very great love are hares and jackals. Maj. 548. May not any one, friend! trust in a Baluchi promise! Sh. DesT, Chot. 7. I go to the forest; I have seen the footstep of Punhu. Sh. Hus. Y, 4. I. THE ANALYTICAL PART. 461 /^ c5^ f^ (My) beautiful friend came at day -break to (my) house. Sh. Khambh. I, 9. (My) body weeps in the nights {and) in the days, in the chains (i. e. in prison). Sh. Um. Mar. V, 7. 3) The Locative is used also in the sense of the Latin Ablative absolute, to express a state or circumstance. In this way either an adjective may be used absolutely (i. e. substantively, so that an attri- bute may be joined to it) or a substantive with an ad- jective; in either case the participle present ^d^y^ in being, being, should be supplied, but is idiomatically left out/) 1) About the Locative of the participle present and past, see §. 81, 2. 462 I. THE ANALYTICAL PART. ^4^ -^^ An orphan, of torn clothes, to look upon like a basil leaf. Maj. 303. ■'^^"^ i> " ^ ^ ^ Of deer-eyes, of ears of a wild goose, of a Kovil's speech. Ibid. 52. ^/^ Sfr"^ i-f'f (^/i?^ /-^^-^^ Of a neck (and) breast like a pigeon, amiable. Ibid. 60. 5) The Locative is used also in computations, the sum or price, at which something is computed, being put in the Locative (cf. also §. 66, 4). Thy step I do not balance with ten billions, if thou become comforted. Sh. Sor. II, 4. '^ r -' r ' J ' ' ' That heart, which is not at all obtained for a price, thou hast asked. Sh. Sor. 11, 15. §. 71. Vm. The Ablative. The idea of the Ablative is expressed either by the Ablative case (c£ §. 16, 5) or by postpositions, as: ^Lgi^ ^J}^, Ur from, ^\Jo, ^l^^'i from-in, ^jli, (jL^Jc^J from- upon etc. 1) The Ablative denotes in the first instance se- paration, removal, distance from a place or thing; it is therefore commonly used with such verbs, post- positions and adverbs, as imply a distance or separation from any thing (place, time etc.). 464 I. THE ANALYTICAL PART. This one came, having made a journey from a foreign country. S. Sor. I, 5. U^^ u^if" ^A^i C4^ u;L^ ,sf^ When I fled from Bhambhoru, then all pains became delights; Having descended from the mountain-pass I became in my own person Punhu. Sh. Abiri Y, 2. I will scoop out of (my) shoulders something, o bard, and give it thee with the body. Sh. Sor. II, 22. yXi ^jLa:^- J^i^Xx) ^^M^Mj ^^y\ jj^&>! Before death, o Sasui, o fair Lady! die whilst living! Turn not aside from that company, by which the soul has been lost on the road. Sh. Ma^B. lY, 6. 2) The Ablative is therefore used in comparisons, the object, with which a noun is compared, being put in the Ablative, to state the distance or difference of one noun from another (c£ §. 21). &i^ O^ U^%^ '^ U^jrf 5^7^. ^* ch^^^^ erf If thou desirest to meet thy friend, then esteem virtue more than vices; (literally: esteem virtue before vices.) Sh. Jam. Kal. YIII, 22. 1) ^.gX] the same as LXi, the latter having been, after a poe- tical license, aspirated, for the sake of the rhyme. L THE ANALYTICAL PART. 465 >«^^ is'-" ^-^^ is^^)^ i^^ J-i^ ^jUP u^-'f isiyi 3pi^ Having built a dwelling better than all other faqirs (lit. good from), he lived at Bhita (i. e. on the sandhill). Life of Abd-ul-Latif, p. 21. 3) The Ablative expresses the ground, reason or feeling, out of which or with which an action is done. Respect Muhammad, the intercessor, out of un- derstanding (and) love. Sh. KaL I, 2. Gro, ye scholars, that she may eat with pleasure. Maj. 117. 4) The Ablative denotes also instrumentality and accompaniment; but this use is restricted to in- animate nouns and to poetry; in prose either the In- strumental or ^Q postposition ^j^LL would be employed for this purpose. Those say to thee: do thou not return a word with (thy) mouth. Sh. Jam. Kal. VIII, 17. Give thou praise to the wise one publicly with (thy) tongue. Sh. Surag. I, Epil. L The mouthfuls, which thou, o camel! hast obtained (and) plucked with the mouth. Sh. Kambh. 11, 29. 1) LjLjx instead of ^^uUv. Trumpp , Sindhi-Gramniar. Gr g 466 I. THE ANALYTICAL PART. Go with the gold to the banker, (but) do not at all take down the load! Sh. Surag. IV, 9. 5) With neuter verbs the Ablative (especially with the postposition ^jL^O denotes the agent. The same is the case with passive verbs, if the agent be an inani- mate noun. " ' C- '♦*• ,''09 c^ I -' Master, I have done wrong, forgive me that! Life of Abd-ul-Latif, p. 20. CS^'-i^ U^-6^ C54>^ ul u^^"" V"^ U^.<>-^4^* ^-^ I shall become a candle in the night, being burnt by that dehght. Sh. Khambh. I, Epil. 3. ^ys^ #; Go again ye all, who have husbands! Ibid. IV, 9. Even me kill my own pains. 2) The Genitives j.^^ ^j-^ ^nd j.^ ^j-^ i^y? thy, are possessive adjectives in the [N'ominative and inflected accordingly. In poetry the case -sign j.^ is frequently dropped, but then the forms ^yj and p must be em- ployed. Instead of the possessive adjectives the prono- minal suffixes attached to nouns (verbs and postpositions) or to jjoL (cf §. 40, 2) may also be used, and in certain cases ^ ^j-^,1 see §. 77. The Genitive of the personal pronoun of the I and II pers. Sing, and Plur. (Lat. mei, tui etc.) is expressed by the Formative ^^ ^^4^>«, ^5^ «j4^' ^^-s which is also used before such postpositions, as require ^:^, cf. §. 58, n. 6£2 468 I. THE ANALYTICAL PART, My heart is fixed there, here is (only) earth and flesh, Sh. Urn. Mar. VI, 16. 3^5 >^ O^^^ C5^ c>^7e o^^ ;4^ ur" It is my friend's turn to come to my house. Sh, Kambh. I, 9. Thy companions, thy friends have been carried down the river by the waves. Sh. Surag. YI, 6. r- 3^X3^4^ ji^f ^jL^r ^^;J ^^ ^o ^ti ^iii ^^XU^ Whoever loves son or daughter more than me, is not worthy of me. Matth. 10, 37. > o ? Come, walk after me, i. e. follow me. Ibid. 19, 21. 3) ^^5^ tj^^-^ and j.^ (^4-^* are also used substan- tively, especially in the Plural, in the sense of: my, thy people or friends. I have a very great longing; would that my (friends) had returned! Sh. Sam. 11, 17. 4) The Accusative of the personal pronouns must always be marked by the postposition ^.^f, which in poetry however is frequently dropped. But if in a sen- tence a Dative and Accusative of a personal pronoun (or pronoun of the III pers.) should occur, the Dative takes the postposition ^i' as well as the Accusative; L THE ANALYTICAL PART. 469 constructions of this kind are however avoided, whenever possible. ^) (To =) Upon me (is) thy reproach , o my friend! •Sh. Mum. Eano II, 14. Go not away from Kak anywhere, o Rano, it is not right for thee. Sh. Mum. Rano I, Epil. g-i^ ^ ^y^ ^ ^f^^ ^ -^ "^^-f-? (5f^ u^^^' Bhita does not give you up, and thou do not run away! Life of Abd-ul-Latif , p. 21. 3) When the personal pronouns are accompanied by an attribute in the inflected case, they must precede it in the Formative. Make some turn, o husband, to the hut of me, the lowly one! Sh. Daharu III, 1. Woe, by me the humble one nothing was then said! Sh. Desi lY, Epil. They will give to me the afflicted a sign, for God's sake. Sh. Koh. Ill, Epil. 1) This may be done easily by a passive construction, as: ^f (>4 ^-f^i ^5^^ ^? (^4^ e;^? uy^ I have presented you into his hands, i, e. made a present of you to him. Amulu Man. p. 148. 470 I. THE ANALYTICAL PAKT, §. 73. 11. Demonstrative pronouns. 1) There is no personal pronoun of the III pers. (Singular and Plural) in Sindhi, its place being generally supplied by the demonstrative y» that, he, she; but if a distinction between a nearer and a more distant object is to be made, the demonstrative pronoun ^ this^), is referred to the object near at hand , and ^s& to the more distant one. When the subject (or object) of the sen- tence immediately preceding is to be taken up again by a pronoun, the demonstrative pronoun j..^^) is used. is^) is-j ^ isf o^ isf- U7'' isf u^ ^^ u^?^^ When the groan of her dying came upon her ear. Sindhi Eead. B. p. 64. Thou art a man, she a woman. Amulu Man., p. 147. 5? ^SL4/,L4^- ^5? ^-yj ^/) ^t; ^sf^ ^ That one has in his mind (the word) 'night', these ones think this. Maj. 34. 1) ^S& is also used idiomatically in the following way: Otherwise this is the kingdom , this thou , i. e. I will have nothing to do with the kingdom nor with thee* Amulu Man. p. 141. 2) The demonstrative pronoun j.^, when joined to a personal pronoun, signifies ''therefore^; as: Umar of the Sumiro clan, therefore how shall I put on silk? SL Urn. Marui VII , 6. I. THE ANALYTICAL PART. 471 >^ ^^ '4^^ ^5<^4^ u>^' ^ r^ P9 )^ K^y U'^ ^^ 7->^ t5^^ C5^ Ur^ ^ jV >^ O"?^^ >' .. I ..I When you find it, come and give me intelligence. Matth. 2, 8. Then I shall see that, (and) then send to you a slave- girl. Amulu Man. p. 150, These trees you will not obtain; those trees there (are) many. §. 74. in. The relative and correlative pronoun. 1) The relative pronoun^) in Sindhi is ^c>, who, which, and the correlative ^^ that, which usually takes up the relative. Besides the relative j.^., the indefinite pronouns jX^s^, j.5jjs> whosoever, ^^j^ whatsoever may jalso cor- respond to the following correlative ^. The place of the relative pronoun may also be taken up by a relative adverb. Instead of the correlative ^^ a demonstrative may be used, if the stress be laid upon it. The sentence headed by the relative pronoun may either precede or follow that commenced by the corre- lative j.^, according to the emphasis laid on either 1) The relative j^, when followed by a personal pronoun in the same sentence, signifies "^as' (Lat. quippe qui) ;^ U^^'^ Cff^ ^ (5"t^ ^^^ SfT ^^ "^^^^ "Woe to my state, as I am bad and useless! Maj. 756. I. THE ANALYTICAL PART. 473 pronoun; for the sake of emphasis the correlatives may be repeated. When the relative (and correlative) refers to a pronoun of the I or II person, the verb of the relative sentence is usually in the HI person, and not in the I or II person. In poetry either pronoun may be dropped. That, which shouted: a coward (is) the cat, ran also away. Sindhi Read. B. p. 64. Those, which thou considerest as verses, are signs. Sh. Suh. IX, 6. That will be a companion to thee, whatever thou pray est to the Lord of the world. Mengho 8. ^^i\XMi Ci^Ca. 0»^Lju/ jsSf ^^^X^ ^J^J^\.JM /c-'3"^ That is my native country, where my sweetheart (is). Maj. 86. May I not be forgotten by them, whom I do not drop out of (my) mind. Sh. Sam. II, 4. Those trees, which give no good fruit, are cut off (and) thrown into the fire. Matth. 7, 19. I, who is (= am) given up in the mountains, how shall she (= I) arrive at Kec? Sh. Desi, III, Epil. 474 I. THE ANALYTICAL PART, 2) The relative pronoun (and, as the case may be, the correlative) usually precedes the substantive, to which it refers, but the relative may also follow, if the sub- stantive has one or more attributes. The subject of a sentence is frequently first expressed by a demonstrative pronoun, and then taken up by the relative and corre- lative, to render it more prominent. "Which cat {= a cat that) eats her own young one, will that ever give up a mouse? Sindhi Read. B. p. 53. ? .-"- Give up that traffic, in which there is no jewel. Sh. Surag. lY, 8. (5?^j5 ^?^v 7-^^ (5^ u^f^^* >^ 3; ^5 t5^''-M >^ 7^3^ The faqir, who was powerful (in magic), to him in- formation was brought. Amulu Man. p. 147. is^ .4^ >^f ^ ^J^ i?^ C5f ^J^'-" y^ A mad, strange thief, a foreigner, who reads (studies), Shakes laughing hands with thy daughter. Maj. 240, 241. ^yA ^LIia*. L^ L-LgX*« ^^ (♦Ljj^ ^5 lo^ ^^ jj& Those, who were great men (and) warriors, went destitute out of the world. Mengho 4. 4) The relative and correlative pronoun may in the same sentence be subject and object, so that the sentence is doubly correlative, the object, if a pronoun of the III person, being likewise expressed by the relative and cor- relative. I. THE AKALYTICAL PART. 475 For whom they are longing, with them join them. Maj. 203. ^l^ ^ ^yL J5 j.a. (j.r ^A-"^ Jj ^^ That kindness they bestow, which is bestowed on them. Sh. Surag. IV, 4. 5) In the first member of a correlative sentence (or, as it may be, in the second) ^^ y^ is occasionally used instead of the simple relative j^, which is then taken up again by a following correlative. ^^x^ LaA.55 ^^ ^^ .-gJoLj ^:^ ^tVf^ (J"^* Those friends, who are wanted, have gone on a journey. Sh. Sam. I, 24. v^Lj ^:^ ^si- ^'J ^^^4 When those, who said: he is alone (God), he has no partner, Kespect Muhammad, the intercessor, out of love with their hearts. Then (none) out of them was entangled in a place, where there is no landing. Sh. Kal. I, 3. 476 I. THE ANALYTICAL PART. u^^ c;;'4^ u^>i^ u;^7^* ^l Where so many hours are written in fate, There so many have come to pass. Sh. Ma?B. Y, 9. 7) The correlative adjectives and adverbs (cf. §. 38, 2), when placed after each other, imply an indefinite sense. The same is the case, if a relative be joined with an interrogative. The cat, having eaten some (a number) of the mice with delight, went off. Sindhi Read. B. p. 64. The princess, having enticed him somehow, having gained (his) heart, drew him out (i. e. got the secret from him). Amulu Man. p. 147. §• 75. IV. The interrogative pronouns. 1) IxT who? is applied to persons and L^ and ,stiyf what? to things only; these three pronouns are used ab- solutely and not joined adjectively to another noun^); in which case the interrogative adjectives j-^aT, }y^^ which? and jv-^S^ of what kind? are to be employed. 1) y/S is occasionally joined adjectively to a noun in poetry, as: Which hero shall we send to the combat of the snake? Story of the snake v. 59. I. THE ANALYTICAL PART. 477 The interrogative pronouns are not only used in direct interrogatory sentences but also in indirect in- terrogatory ones, when the governing sentence contains a negation; but if the governing sentence be positive, the relative s.^^ is preferred. The same rule applies to the interrogative adjectives and adverbs. I do not know exactly, who it is. Life of Abd-ul- Latif, p. 13. I also do not tell you, by what order I do this, Matth. 21, 26. I shall also tell you, by what order I do this. Matth. 21, 24. 2) The interrogative pronouns (adjectives and ad- verbs) are frequently used, where a negative answer is expected. ^MO iii/i3 ^^ CST^' y'^ "^ '^ U^^-:^^ ^^ (.:>.4«*ao By fate I have been put into prison; otherwise who would come into this fort? Sh. Um. Mar. I, 8. §• 76. y. The indefinite pronouns. 1) ^f some one, any one, when standing by itself, is applied to animate beings and ^f to things only; but when j.r is used adjectively, it may be joined to any noun; similarly ^5" also may be put before nouns, when a part or quantity is to be expressed, cf. §. 61, 3, 478 I. THE ANALYTICAL PART. , .. I ^ .. I ^ ^ Nothing else will be of use to thee, except what thou hast sown thyself. Mengho 10. 2) j.$" is now and then added to a personal pronoun (expressed or only implied in the inflexional termination of the verb) in an interrogative or negativ-e sentence, for the sake of emphasis, with nearly the same sense as ^. Wilt thou, having forsaken (me) go at all to the mountains? lover, I did not think thus. Sh. Desi, m, Epil. 3) When ^f is repeated in the next sentence, it signifies : one — another. o^^rf^' ^>^ ^s^ P u^ c57^ \j^ LT^ ^>^ r One says: a demon has fallen into (his) body; another says: his understanding is upset. Maj. 40. §. 77r- The reflexive pronoun. 1) The reflexive pronoun J^Lj (Sing, and Plur.) 'self, always refers to the subject of the sentence (expressed or only understood); somewhat intricate is the use of its Grenitive, the reflexive pronominal adjective j.^^ ^ji^.j 'own'. When the subject of the sentence is a pronoun of the I and 11 person (expressed or only impHed in the verb), its application is clear enough; but when the subject is of the III person (or any noun), the question arises, whether the possessive pronouns 'his', 'her' etc. refer to the chief subject of the sentence (Lat. suus) , or to I. THE ANALYTICAL PART. 479 some other subject (Lat. ejus etc.); in the first case the reflexive pronoun must be employed, in the latter a demonstrative. ^h^ U^ e;^ C5^4^ u^ 3^ f"^^ <^'^5 ^)^^ csf"*^ Having risen (and) greeted (and) having met with great respect (and) politeness they sat amongst themselves. Life of Abd-ul-Latif, p. 36. O pure friend, show thy face! Sh. S5r. I, 10. Having come with his (own) servants to the service of Shah Sahib, he was present. Life of Abd-ul-Latif, p. 31. That wealthy one, marvelling at his (the other's) recognising her, asked him. Sindhi Read. B. p. 61. 2) In addressing a person the reflexive pronominal adjective j^ ^j^^rt is now and then used (like the Hin- dustani \i u^l etc.), instead of the peculiar pronoun, that would be required, as: ^( JL/o s.:^ ^j^?, (^^ (j-V?jLl> master, this is your property, which under certain cir- cumstances could also be translated: master, this is our property, when the spaker includes himself, as: Send forth some mice of our country and land. Story of the mice and the cat, v. 35. 480 L THE ANALYTICAL PART. 3) The reflexive pronominal adjective ^ ^j4^ ^^J also refer to the object (noun with postp., or Dat. and Ace.) immediately following. I am come to make quarrel the son with his father, the daughter with her mother. Matth. 10, 35. 4) When the subject of a sentence is a noun with a possessive pronoun, the peculiar possessive pronoun (if such occur with a noun) must be used and not ^ ^;4^jj because the use of ^ ^^^, would give quite a different sense. Similarly when the subject of a sen- tence is a personal pronoun and when in the next sen- tence, joined to the preceding by a conjunctive particle, a noun with a possessive pronoun occurs, the peculiar pronoun must be used for the reasons stated above. ? .- r ^ u^r^- c5^ ^ ^"^ c5f ^J-^ >^ c^■^ >^ (If) there would be in my kingdom some hero of mine. Story of Shamsadu, v. 40. > •♦ I am a man under authority and under my hands are soldiers. Matth. 8, 9. 5) The subject, to which ^s>^ ^^^^ refers, must oc- casionally be gathered from the context; but when thus used without a clear subject, to which it may be re- ferred, it generally implies the I person (Singular or Plural). I. THE ANALYTICAL PART. 481 HaviiiQ: removed far from our comitrv mav our lot be made auv where I Story of the cat and mice, v. 20. 6) ^s. c>"i^ ^^ ^-^^*^ ^^^^^^ substantively, signifjiiig my, thy etc. property, friends or people. Take what is thine and oo. Matth. 20. 14. SECTION IL THE Y E E B, Oiapter Vl. §. 78. The Infinitive. 1) The Infinitive as well of neuter as of active (cau- sative) verbs is treated in Sindhi as a regular substan- tive. The complement (^object), which is required by an active verb, is subordinated to the Infinitive either by the Genitive or by the Accusative in its uninflected form, or governed by the postposition ^^^5^ c5%^' u^ >^ yj^ J^)^^ ^ O^ The Hving (= life) of the disappointed one gets on with difficulty without the Jat. Sh. Abiri V, 9. LIT ^i ^,;U ^ ^U ^U5" u;-^;0 S^ The Mughals, having taken their swords, came to kill the Shah. Life of Abd-ul-Latif, p. 15. Trumpp, Sindlii-Grammar. H ll 482 I. THE ANALYTICAL PART. To ascent the impaling stake, to see the (nuptial) bed, this is the business of the lovers. Sh. Kal. II, 8. ^^b j^:^ j4^ .44sxi ^^4^ u^;r' csf^^-^ It is by no means proper to put that into the house. SindhT Eead. B. p. 65. ' 2) The Infinitive is added as an expletive object to the verbs 0o<3 to give leave, ^4X4^ to let go or allow, '^^-^ to desire, and partly also to J^n^^JCI to be able. But when the verb, which subordinates an Infinitive, requires an object (Accus.), it puts the same in the Ac- cusative, according to the signification of the finite verb. C5^* (V-li* jj^J y^yi ^/i ^"^^^ J> J|J Tears don't let me write (lit. give no writing); dropping they fall upon the pen. Sh. Um. Mar. 11, 9. The Mughals did not allow the Shah Sahib to come (lit. gave him no coming). Life of Abd-ul-Latif, p. 15. They do not allow a male bird to sit down. Amulu Man. p. 141. >^ }^^^-^ i^'^^ c^vfJ^^^ ^ ^^ c^^^ is-^ is^l Many prophets and pious people had wished to see this very (sight). Matth. 13, 17. 3) The Infinitive may also be turned into an ad- jective by the accession of the Genitive case -sign j.^.. In this case the Infinitive itself is strictly treated as a I. THE ANALYTICAL PART. 483 substantive, as regards its government, and j.^. is nearly used in the same sense as j..^^ or jv,^,>, cf. §. 67, 11. But he was not of the eating of the crocodiles, i. e. he was not destined to be eaten by the crocodiles. Story of Eae Diacu p. 1. This word is mere joke and impossible. Chapter VII. §. 79. The Gerundive. 1) The Sindhi derives from the Infinitive of active verbs a regular Grerundive or participle future passive (cf. §. 8, 12, b; §. 46), which agrees with its subject in gender and number, except the construction be ren- dered impersonal by the use of the postposition ^, cf. §. 94, 5. The agent is put in the Dative (like in Latin) or expressed by a pronominal suffix. / ^* >- C5t^ }Y ^^? ^ S?f ^-^ ^^ If by thee some complaint is to be made, come and make it. Amulu Man. p. 150. Whatever thou hast to get from me, that is alms (i. e. given in alms). Matth. 15, 5. ^i (5?f^ T'y^ C5^ iS"}^ 1^0 w, whatever thou hast to say, say. Amulu Man. p. 143. Hh2 484 I. THE ANALYTICAL PART. 2) But when the construction is rendered impersonal by the use of ^ or when a Dative occurs in a sen- ^ 1 tence, the agent must be expressed by the Instrumental, to avoid the double use of ^^. Thou shouldst have seized this horse. What is to be got by me as regards thee (i. e. from thee), give that to me. Matth. 18, 28. Chapter VIIL The Participles, §. 80. I. The participle present. 1) The participle present agrees as a regular ad- jective with the subject of the finite verb (expressed or implied). Is it used, when an action is to be described as lasting or continuing, for which purpose it may be repeated. ^^^ .;oLx^*^ ItXA^M^ l^ U;^-^-^-^* j^;-^ '^)^^ ist-^^-f^^ U^-^ Then whilst eating her mind became drunk (and) mad. Maj. 178. l) Occasionally ehi is shortened to ahi, as: ^^^ Turn thou back the camel; pass the night, whilst I am w^eeping. Sh. Mfim. Eano I, Epil. §• 81. 11. The participle past. 1) The past participle of neuter verbs agrees with its subject in gender, number and case; the form in 'alu' is used, when the participle passes more into an ad- jective. The past participle of active and causal verbs (implying always a passive sense) agrees likewise with its subject in gender, number and case, except the con- struction be rendered impersonal by the use of the post- position jL^ (cf §. 94, 5). 2) The past participle of active (and partly also of neuter) verbs with a passive signification, is used also substantively, cf §. 62, 2, and may therefore be con- structed with a postposition. ^ .. ••>[ ^ ^ The Qazi, having done the word (= what was said) of the scouts, became a tyrant. Maj. 296. L THE ANALYTICAL PART. 487 After being broken it became beyond (= more) a tbousand billions. Sh. Surag. IV, 17. 3) The past participle of neuter and active verbs is frequently used in the Locative Singular (cf. §. 80, 2); if the subject of the past participle do not differ from that of the finite verb, it is not expressed, but if it do differ, it is added in the Formative. But the subject of the past participle may also refer to a more distant object, or it may not be expressed at all, in which case the Locative is used absolutely. The impersonal con- struction of the past participle by means of the post- position ^^^ is also retained , though the participle be put in the Locative. The past participle in the Locative is used sub- stantively, but nouns, depending thereupon, are idio- matically only put in the Formative , and not subor- dinated by the inflected Genitive case-sign ^^. By lAzrail having come, Sasui was awakened whilst sleeping, i. e. in the state of being asleep. Sh. Abiri YIIT, 5. ^A^j- j-ja^Av ^ ^j| (j.:^ £^| ^s^] ^1 O God, may those come, by whose coming (my) heart becomes glad. Sh. Desi III, 5. CJp C5^ )^^-? ^"^ ^fH^ UT^ Whilst I stood upright, they went to the landing- places of the harbour. Sh. Sam. 11, 2. Whilst the physicians were seated (lit. in the state of the physicians being seated), the friend entering came to (my) door. Sh. Jam. Kal. II, 10. 488 I. THE ANALYTICAL PART. Those 7 who do not understand much, after one letter has been touched, Sh. Jam. Kal. Y, 29. Since I have seen the Dothis , many days have passed to me (ht. In the being seen the DothTs). Grolden Al- phabet xxvm, 2. Sitting near whom the pain becomes intense. Sh. Jam. KaL YIII, 25. ';L-i-^3f ;j.^t ^.^3 v:>4^ e>^^^ ^^L4^ Which being eaten coughing arises, vomiting comes on. Golden Alphab. XVIH, 10. §. 82. III. The past conjunctive participles. The past conjunctive participles (cf. §» 47) very greatly facilitate the conjunction of the different members of a compound sentence and are therefore very extensively in use. They are translated according to the tense of the finite verb. 1) The past conjunctive participles commonly refer to the subject of the finite verb, and in a passive con- struction, to the agent (Instrumental); but when to the past conjunctive participle of ^j^ an attribute is added, it must remain in the Nominative, though the subject (agent) referred to be in the Instrumental. Having thrown (them) into the jar, having secured (them) take care (of them). Life of x\bd-ul-Latif, p. 11. I. THE ANALYTICAL PART. 489 Thou wilt go to die, Majno, being dried up by thirst. Mai 407. The Dev Ahriman having taken me from the country carried me off. Ajaib v. 119. ^^aa^Lass- i^ty° ^^^TT" [S^ is^y^ Lsi"^ ^"^ cj'?^"^' Then having heard the call, having become glad in (her) heart, she said. Maj. 702. 2) The past conjunctive participles may refer also to the object (Dative, Accusative) in a sentence, and in a passive construction one past conj. participle may refer to the agent (Instrumental) and another to the subject. ^y^) ^^^l Hi) ^'^ ^^')^ c5f o-f To them, who remember (their) friends, the night passes in weeping. Sh. Jam. Kal. I, 18. Having tarried they would possibly have been cured by the physicians having applied plaster. Sh. Jam. KaL n, 5. 3) In an impersonal (neuter) or passive construction the past conjunctive participles may be used absolutely, without any reference to a subject, which must be gathered from the context. U^-^' ^^"^ is'^^ ^ J^ From that hour her daughter was made whole. Matth. 15, 28. Chapter IX. The tenses of the verb. §• 83. I. The Present. 1) The Sindhi has two forms for the present tense^ one identical with the Potential, to which the inflexional increment j^", ^^^ etc. is added, the Present inde- finite, and the other being compounded with the present participle and the auxiliary verb ^llgiTetc, the Present definite. The present tense of the passive voice is formed in the same way as that of the active voice, but its use is very restricted, neuter verbs being substituted wherever possible. There is also a simple and compound Potential, as well of the active as of the passive voice, to express the idea of the present tense (cf. §. 90). 2) The first form of the Present tense, the Present indefinite, expresses our common Present, i. e. an action begun and still continuing in the present. The- increment j.^' may optionally follow or precede 492 I. THE ANALYTICAL PART. the verb ^) , but when the verb commences a sentence , it is put after it (poetry excepted). In poetry s.^* is often separated from the verb by some other words, either preceding or following it. When the negative adverb J, 'not', accedes to the verb, J immediately precedes j.^j, and both the verb^); but in an interrogative sentence, or when a particular stress be laid on the verb, they may as well follow it. In poetry ^^ is very frequently omitted and the Present indefinite then coincides with the Potential, so that only the context can decide, whether the Present indefinite or Potential is intended. In prose also j^ is dropped, when the interrogative pronoun L.^ what? and the adverb ^li when, precede the verb. Instead 'of the increment ^ the past participle j.^j (from ^^S to fall) is also used, but with this dif- ference, that a more enduring action is thereby implied. Remembering (her) guardians she gives a thousand blows. Story of the cat and mice v. 11. The king, the Lord of the kingdom, executes his own orders. Ajaib v. 5. Hearing they do not hear nor do they understand. Matth. 13, 13. 1) When an interrogative pronoun or adverb, as l^^ , j^^ ^^^"> occurs in a sentence, it generally attracts y^. 2) But when in a sentence *J — -J neither — nor, occurs, the adverb -3 is put before that noun , on which the stress is laid. I. THE ANALYTICAL PART. 493 For those rich inhabitants of the jungle I weep nights and days. Sh. Um. Mar. II, 11. When they see, one big black snake is seated (there). Life of Abd-ul-Latif, p. 16. 3) When occurrences are related, as the narrator or person, he speaks of, saw them, the Present is fre- quently used, in order to transfer the hearer to the scene of action. The same is the case , when the thoughts are given, which somebody had at a time. When the Mughals saw the Shah Sahib, that he is (= was) sitting in the house. Life of Abd-ul-Latif, p. 15. What does he see? that his children (and) his wife go night and day about in begging. Sindhi Kead. Book, p. 62. j> y^ ^^:?^ ^'\y^ y^ w^Lo .$\Jii (jLXxi u5^Lx) ^^^S Having there built a shrine of the Shah Sahib in that very place they sat down : ' because the Shah Sahib is here'. Life of Abd-ul-Latif, p. 26. 4) The Present is also now and then used for the Future, to signify thereby, that the action will be done forthwith. 494 I. THE ANALYTICAL PAKT. Ur**'^ L^J ^^u;l ^ ^ly ^Li ^yS Take thou now rest; we see (i. e. shall see). Amulu Man. p. 149. 5) The second form of the Present, the Present definite, denotes a lasting or habitual action. The auxiliary is occasionally dropped, especially in sentences of general import. Whoever is walking according to his will, that is my brother and sister and mother. Matth. 12, 40. .ij.5" itUr ^ ^^ U4^ ^yc> ^y^'f^ Why are the people giving me reproaches? Sh. MaiB. Y, 14. §. 84. II. The Imperfect. The Imperfect denotes a past action, which is in- complete in reference to some other past action. It implies therefore duration, habit or frequent oc- currence. I " ' •• " ' Whenever the Shah Sahib was going to that very village, the Mughals were quarrelling with him. Life of Abd-ul-Latif p. 15. I. THE ANALYTICAL PART. 495 §. 85. m. The A o r i s t. I. The simple Aorist. The Aorist imphes indefinitely, that an action took place in past time. It is therefore commonly used in narrations, where past events are reported irrespectively of their duration. We may therefore translate the Sindhi Aorist either by the Imperfect or Perfect. The Aorist of neuter verbs has an active meaning; some neuter verbs though (implying a passive sense) may also be constructed with the agent in the In- strumental. Active verbs are constructed passively in the Aorist (Perfect and Pluperfect), the agent (subject) being- put in the Instrumental and the past participle agreeing with the subject (properly the object) in gender, number and case (cf. §. 92, 2), or being constructed impersonally by the use of the postposition ^ (cf. §. 94, 5). It is understood, that the Aorist (Perfect and Pluperfect) of the passive voice is also used personally, agreeing with its subject (expressed or implied in the inflexional ter- minations) in gender and number. I was asleep, those went off, they drove away the young camels. Sh. Hus. YI, Epil. [Sy^^ Qw^j^ (j^^Xa^ ^y^\ ^'y^y^^ Perhaps I have been forgotten by the dear Martis. Sh. Um. Mar. V, 13. y^^ C57^ -^7^ >^ ^^; ^T^' '^^' The bard sang the first night at the side of the castle. Sh. Sor. II, 1. 496 I. THE ANALYTICAL PART. ^;3^ ^^^ 7^;^ <5?; ^b^ c)¥; Who, having remained the night in the deserts, looked out for the mountains. Sh. Khahori I, 3. isl^ ^^ C5-^^ d-^' L^;>^ S^l^ C5^ ^^ Those, who were made tawny by the Kak (river), the redness does not leave. Sh. Mum. Rano IE, 4. 2) The compound or habitual Aorist. The compound Aorist with the indeclinable increment ^ denotes in the first instance, that an action was done repeatedly in past time or for any length of time; it is therefore chiefly used, when an occupation, habit or manner is to be described. In the second instance it implies, that an action had been commenced in past time and was still going on at the time mentioned, and in this respect it nearly coincides with the Im- perfect, with the only difference, that generally a simple Aorist corresponds to it. The increment ^'j is usually put before the verb, but is may also follow it; it may be also separated from the verb by some intervening words, in the same way as j^'. Instead of ^^^ ^^aj (the Locative of ^^ with emphatic i, instead of ^^aaj piei), is also used, which more strictly points out commencement and continuation. ^ .. I .. - ..I - I •• I •• I " Where the night used to befall him, there he used to sleep. Life of Abd-ul-Latif, p. 21. On account of her food she used to make lakhs of jumps. Story of the cat and mice v. 13. I. THE ANALYTICAL PART. 497 The pebbles of Karbala his mother was gathering, 5 All was wiping him away from the wounds the drops of blood. Sh. Ked. Y, 2. The drums in the cells went on sounding by them- selves as they pleased, and from them this tune was coming. Life of Abd-ul-Latif, p. 36. '^ y*i cr^* ^^ '^r csf^ cH-4 '^'^^ -^^ c^?'^ (5^3""* ^^^-^ C5^^"^ -^Lj ^^^ (5^^^^' (^^ v«^^Lo ^Lw When Shah Jamal was (as yet) going to his village, the Shah Sahib died on the second day. Then when Shah Jamal heard the message of the removal of the Shah Sahib, he was coming again behind (the mes- senger). Ibid. p. 6. §• 86. lY. The Perfect. 1) The Perfect denotes an action, that is completed and finished in the past, so that it extends to the Present. I do not live at all, nor am I at all dead. Sh. Hus. IX, 16. Trumpp, Sindhl-G-rammaj!. J| 498 I. THE ANALYTICAL PART. u'^^ C5?^^ ch^lS c^^i ^ ^;3^ ^ ^4^'l Do not bring near the camels, I have been tor- mented by the camels. Sh. Desi I, 14. 2) The Perfect is occasionally used to represent an action as done already, whereas it is intended or ex- pected, that it will be done forthwith. ^f j.X^ ^' As the fairy had told, so she threw that very nose- ring into the jar of the slave-girl. Amulu Man. p. 150. I. THE ANALYTICAL PART. 499 (s?^ e5 ^>^ Llfj^^ ^si^'^ ^ ^^5^ Had you seen (when you were there) some one at the side of (her) sweetheart, o DothTs? Sh. Hus. VI, Epil. 2. 2) The Pluperfect is frequently used in Sindhi, where we would use an Imperfect or Perfect. When an action is represented, from the point of the speaker, as com- pletely past some time hence, so that its results were already clear at the time mentioned, or when it is implied, that since an action has taken place, something else has happened, that could be said about it, the Plu- perfect is used and not the Aorist nor the Perfect. The Sindhi idiom is much more accurate in discerning the different shades of meaning, than the English, and the correct use of this tense requires therefore a careful attention. 0O Laj ^ 3-6-^^ 4^5 V^^ ^l^ JU>^ .iS&Lw --^^3 i^'y^ One day Shah Jamal sat with the Shah Sahib, and also many other faqirs were sitting (i. e. had seated them- selves before). Life of Abd-ul-Latif, p. 5. jdL& (X«^ ^^ VjHy? -^* fstH -^^;3 ^ v,j;^Uo Maxdtim Sahib received the intelligence, that Mia Nur Muhammad had gone (but was no longer there) to have an interview with the Shah Sahib, Life of Abd- ul-Latif, p. 29. Ii2 500 I. THE ANALYTICAL PART. §. 88. Y. The Future and Future Past. 1) The Sindhi has two forms for the Future, the simple or indefinite Future and the Future definite. The first form corresponds to our common Future and denotes a future action in general, the latter form implies, that the future action will last or endure for some time. ;^^ 4^k^ (j'-^ ^^ (j^ U^:;S>^;L^ -P^ I shall graze their camels , having seized the bridle of the camels. Sh. Hus. IX, Epil. i ^ s> ^ At that very time an hundred fairies will be dancing near the Dev Sufed. Amulu Man. p. 144. 2) The simple or indefinite Future is used also to denote possibility, inclination or doubt. g^tUT ^Lr ^y^ ^y^ ^s^ >j* ^L.ccoLi O king, I will speak one word to thee. Amulu Man. p. 143. boy, wilt thou give us a ram? Life of Abd-ul-. Latif, p. 17. 3) The Future indefinite is also used for the Im- perative, when an order is not strictly given, but when it is expected, that it will be done spontaneously; it may therefore alternate with the Imperative. I. THE ANALYTICAL PART. 501 Honour thy father and thy mother, and love thy neighbour as thyself. Matth. 19, 19. 4) The past Future is seldom to be met with in the sense of a strict past future action, which should have taken place, before another action will be possible, but it generally implies uncertainty, doubt or possi- bility in reference to a past action, as: jjo^ ^} lsh, he may have come. Instead of the past Future the Aorist is commonly used in Sindhi, especially in con- ditional sentences; see §. 98, 6. Chapter X. The Moods. §. 89. I. The Indicative. The Indicative represents an action or thought as real, and is therefore used, not only when matters of fact are related, but also when suppositions (in con- ditional sentences) are considered as really taking place (cf §. 98 &, 3). The Sindhi uses consequently the In- dicative in such sentences, in which the speaker makes a subjective assertion, which he considers as true and real, whereas in the English idiom the S'ubjunctive would be used in such cases. q^-| j.^^ ^ c>^;>f c^^ 7^ cp" -^^;^ u^ ^^^ It would be better for him, that he were drowned in the depth of the sea. Matth. 18, 6. 502 I. THE ANALYTICAL PART. §. 90. n. The Potential. The Potential is, as stated already, the old Present and expresses therefore only present time; but by means of the present and past participle and the Potential of the auxiliary verb J^y^, a Potential of the Present de- finite and Perfect may be formed; these compound forms however are of very rare occurrence. 1) The Potential, in its widest sense, denotes in- definiteness, possibility, uncertainty or doubt. Then, think I, I eat together with thee bread. Amulu Man. p. 146. Companions, how shall I act with (= towards) them? Sh. Abiri Vm, Epil. Wilt thou not pull me out this wood? Amulu Man. p. 148. ••I •• I * • He delivered him into the hand of the tormentors, as long as he shall not repay all, what is due unto me. Matth. 18, 34. 2) The Potential serves also to express a usual or habitual action. Drinking the water it makes (it, i. e. the river) I. THE ANALYTICAL PART. 503 bare ground, it dries up the whole world. Nanga Jo Quisso, V. 40. A kingdom I do not compare with (my) needle, o companions! Sh. Um. Mar. YI, 18. That one shall go with me, who does not make (^= consider) her life sweet. Sh. Abiri VI, 2. 3) The Potential is frequently used in the sense of an Optative or polite Imperative, especially for the I. and in. person Singular and Plural. O friend, may the lovers obtain (their) sweethearts as guides! Maj. 817. May there be blessing to all! that our business (and) affair has succeeded. Story of the cat and mice v. 52. O God, mayst thou bring camelmen, who take off messages of love. Sh. Um. Mar. 11, 9. Quickly, with speed, they shall bring this infor- mation and intelligence. Story of the cat and mice v. 38. 4) The Potential is used with the Interjections ^U, JLi. would that, with the conjunctions ^^), not (prohi- 1) With -J the Potential may also be used, if the injunction ba more strict. 504 I. THE ANALYTICAL PART. bitive), ^LSi, O*-^? j*^ niay it not be, that, lest; J that, ^, ^L:^, (J-*.:?*? that, so that, in order that; (^vjJ although; ^^, ^Xa^^, ^J^JXv=> if (cf. §. 98 &, 1); and with the adverbs tVl^i, possibly, u^^s^, perhaps etc., if the sentence be indefinite. O physican, do not give a powder! o God, may I not become well! Sh. Jam. Kal. IT, 13. (J^?^'^ ^J.A£a.| J JL^ nL.^JXa/0 CS^i"^ Would to God, that thou, o beggar, wouldst not come any more. Sh. Sor. 11, 9. ^^^ ^-yi d>-^ L^iV^ ^r^ eH^^. -J vii>D "I * * ' I * Cut off, that thou mayst be approved, lest loss befall thee. Sh. Kal. H, 17. Thus, o camel, lift up (thy pace), that I may meet there (the friend) in the coming night. Sh. Khamb. H, 15. Make some such jump, that ye fall upon that garment. Amulu Man. p. 150. Having given (thy) soul to the omnipotent, thou mayst possibly be put into the track of (thy) friend. Sh. Surag. Ill, EpiL I. THE ANALYTICAL PART. 505 §• 91. m. The Imperative. 1) The Imperative is restricted to the II. person Singular and Plural; for the other persons the Potential must be used. The Imperative has two forms, the Imperative strictly speaking and the Precative (cf §. 44). The Imperative expresses a command, whereas the Pre- cative implies an exhortation, request or haste. When a negation accedes to the Imperative, .3 is used to express a strict negation, whereas ^ is used in a prohibitive sense. With the Precative Jxi is commonly joined, but j may also be employed, if the injunction be more strict. yf .•> jXll ^y) J.AS. C>-^4 The lions said: be thou not anxious. Amulu Man. p. 151. ^j^^.^X/^ .X) ..g^^ ^^X^ ;J"|^ ^l^ }yo^^ O Stimard, do not throw and tighten chains upon the chaste one! Sh. Um. Mar. HI, 9. Come near, good friend, do not apply a funeral pyre to the afflicted one! Sh. Abiri X, 5. 7, 6. What is pure do not give to the dogs. Matth. 506 I. THE ANALYTICAL PART. 2) When two Imperatives are joined together by the conjunction .3 or jjb, the first Imperative is hy- pothetical. Eeturn quickly, o dear friend, if you mean to go, then return. MaJ. 439. n. THE SYNTHETICAL PART. 507 11. THE SYNTHETICAL PAET. CONSTEUCTION OF THE SENTENCE AND CON- JUNCTION OE SENTENCES. SECTION m. THE SIMPLE SENTENCE. Chapter XL Subject and Predicate. §. 61. In every sentence there must be a subject and a predicate; subject is called that person or thing, of which something is said and predicate that which is said about it. 1) The subject may be expressed either by a sub- stantive or adjective or pronoun or numeraL It is not expressed, if it be a personal pronoun and its predicate a verb, except a stress be laid upon it, as: ^ jjLILo I see, but ^LIS ^ ,j^-iT I see (not you). The subject must always be in the Nominative. 2) The Predicate may be expressed either by a verb, or adjective (participle), or substantive, or numeral with the auxiliary verbs ^j^s^ to be and J^lgo to become, to be. The predicate may be joined to the subject in a threefold manner: ) by way of asssertion, as: ^l ^3 Sm the girl weeps. 508 II. THE SYNTHETICAL PART. b) by way of interrogation, as: jjj l^ who is come? c) by way of command (or desire), as: ^^^ go (thou). 3) The subject and predicate, if they be substan- tives or pronouns, may be nearer defined by an attri- bute. The attribute is commonly an adjective, but it may also be a substantive in the Genitive (with or without an adjective, pronoun etc.), on which another noun in the Genitive may depend again, as: a great man came j.j| ^y^'i^ 3^5 or: this is a great man ^| ^jysa'jl/) jo^ ^ the Lord of the kingdom died ^^ ^^ ^5^^^ >^ ^-^-^ the son of the Lord of the kingdom died. (^yo "§-y*' ^^^.^ ^^ tXA/o Vt*^ AH the people of the kingdom (of) Maghrib will go to die. Nanga Jo Qisso, v. 51. 4) The subject and predicate, if they be proper names, substantives or pronouns, may also be nearer de- fined by a noun in apposition, as: ^T >^t> oo^fj ;^jj^ the country (of) China is far off; ^5^T ^^Iy^ 'y^ (5? this is the city (of) Kara6i. II. THE SYNTHETICAL PART. 509 Chapter XII. Concord of the subject and predicate. §. 93. 1) If the predicate be a verb, it must agree with its subject in person, gender and number. This rule is strictly adhered to in Sindhi, even in such cases, where the subject in the Singular implies plurality, cf. §. 63, L 2. A subject in the Singular however may be constructed with the Plural of the predicate, when spoken of politely or honorifically , cf §. 63, 3. I do not reject the word of mother and father. Amul. Man. p. 142. iA")^ tX^' ^^f :j Z ^d L^f Standing the strangers ask: where is Muhammad, the intercessor? ISFanga jo Qisso, p. 15. 2) If the predicate be an adjective, participle, pronoun or substantive, from which a feminine may be derived (cf. §. 14), it must agree with its subject in gender, number and case. (In the same way every attribute must agree with its substantive in gender, number and case, whenever possible.) What is thy pleasure? Amulu Man. p. 140. C5f^ C5f^^ ^>^? U>^ From above descended a slave ^ girl. Ibid. p. 140. By all the companions they were seen, those maimed young men. JSfanga jo Qisso, v. 17. 510 11. THE SYNTHETICAL PART. LT^ \j^ c5^5 ^) ij^-f'*'^ istP cs?^'""**' u;^ ^ ^ Some cat was tending her young ones with some great love (and) pleasure. Story of the cat and mice v. 8. Chapter XIII. Enlargement of the sentence by a near and remote object. §. 94. 1) The verb, which refers to the subject as its predicate, has a double form; it is either of the active voice, if the subject be active, or of the passive voice, if the subject be passive. The active voice of a verb has a treble signifi- cation; it is either neuter (intransitive), or active (transitive), or causal. The verb is called neuter, if the action be restricted to the subject, as: ^^ ^^ js^ /♦ i he goes; active, if the verb necessarily requires a (near) object or Accusative, as: J^^ ^-^ ^^^^ ^J•^ lie seizes him; and causal, if it requires one or two Accusatives. 2) N" enter verbs commonly subordinate only a remote object or Dative, as: ^^ j..^^ J ^-^ (j^** i^ does not please me; but some neuter verbs may also subordinate a near object (Accus.), as: He went that way. Ajaib v. 44. 3) Active verbs subordinate a near object (Accus.), and, as the case may be, a remote one (Dative), as: ^j ^lx> ^^ ^1 give him bread. Active verbs may II. THE SYNTHETICAL PART. 511 also subordinate a double Accusative, one implying the near object and the other its attribute. In this case the first object is generally defined by the postposition f^^ by means of which the construction is rendered impersonal and the concord between the object and its attribute dissolved, so that the attribute remains in the uninflected form of the Singular, though the object, to which it refers, may be a Plural. But both may also remain in the uninflected state (Singular or Plural). Some verbs govern a double Accusative, one of a person, and one of a thing, as ^^)4^. ^^ ^^^ some- body a thing, though it may also be constructed with the postposition j^Li^ to ask from a person, or with ^^. Make the lepers clean. Matth. 10, 3. As long, as I live, I shall not make any other (my) husband. Sh. Um. Mar. VH, 6. Keep the fasts of Eamazan, give (thy) wealth as alms. Golden Alphabet 4, 7. 4) Causals, derived from neuter verbs, subordi- nate a near, and as the case may be, a remote object (§. 69, 6); and causals, derived from active verbs, may subordinate two near objects (a double Accusative), the first generally being defined by the postposition ,^4^ St I and the second remaining in the uninflected state (§. 69, 5). Having made drink the travellers a bowl try (it). Sh. Jam. Kal. lY, 7. 512 11. TPIE SYNTHETICAL PART. 5) Eegular passive verbs can only be derived from active or causal verbs; for the passive form, wliich neuter verbs occasionally assume, does not essentially alter their signification. In a passive sentence the near object (Accus.) is made the subject, and the subject of the active sen- tence is turned into the InstrumentaP), the remote object (Dative) keeping its place, as usual. But with the passive Present, Imperfect and Future the In- strumental is not used, the agent being expressed by means of the postposition jjL^^ if it cannot be possibly avoided. Of the passive voice only the past tenses (past par- ticiple passive) are in common use, the other tenses being expressed, wherever possible, by a neuter verb. The past participle (passive) agrees either with its subject in gender, number and case (§. 93, 2), or the construction may be rendered impersonal, the past par- ticiple containing at the same time subject and pre- dicate, in which case the (proper) subject of the passive sentence must be subordinated as a remote object by means of the postposition ^fj 'as regards', 'in re- ference to'. This impersonal construction must always take place in the passive, when an active verb governs a double Accusative, one implying the near object and the other its attribute. The near object must in this case be subordinated by the postposition ^^^5^, whereas the other object, as the predicate, remains in the un- inflected form of the Singular, referring to the (neuter) past participle. 1) In a longer sentence, when the agent is separated by a series pf words from the verb , the agent is frequently repeated for the sake pf perspicuity, by adding a pronominal suffix , corresponding to the figent, to the verb. II. THE SYNTHETICAL PART. 513 But wlien a causal verb governs two near objects, the first (implying a person) must be subordinated as remote object by tlie postposition (^^, whereas the St 1 second is made the subject, with which the past par- ticiple agrees in gender and number. Thus also the son of man shall be afflicted by them. Matth. 17, 12. Death was agreed to by those, who saw the af- flicted one (Ht. by whom it was seen as regards the af- flicted one). Sh. MaiB. Vn, 16. By what reason (and) disorder have you been made ill? (ht. by what reason and disorder has it been made ill as regards you.) x^anga jo Quisso, v. 24. The king, having come, related tliis whole matter to the Yazir Saifal. Amulu Man. p. 142. Chapter XIY. Enlargement of the sentence by a nearer definition of the verb as predicate. §. 95. The simple sentence may be enlarged to a consi- derable extent by a nearer definition of the verb as predicate. Trumpp, Sindhi-G-rammar. Kk 514 n. THE SYNTHETICAL PART. 1) The verb may be nearer defined by one or more cases, on which again another case may depend, viz.: the Instrumental (agent etc.), the Accusative (of time etc.), the Ablative and the Locative, and by nouns with post- positions generally. At some time one man sat on the bank of the river with his wealth (of buffaloes). Sindhi Reading Book p. 59. That one began to go to school one year later than (from) his elder brother. Ibid. p. 50. 2) The verb may be nearer defined by adverbs ge- nerally, especially by adverbs of time, place and manner, and by postpositions with pronouns. t5^ viJ.^ K ^L5 ^ ^yA Give me now some advise. Amulu Man. p. 147. Thus they talked amongst each other four goodly months. Maj. 235. This also is with me. Amulu Man. p. 147. II. THE SNYTHETICAL PART. 515 Chapter XV. Omission of the verb as predicate. §. 96. 1) The auxiliary verb ^II^T etc., forming the pre- dicate with or without an adjective etc., is occasionally omitted, especially in poetry and in short proverbial sentences. Let me hear that matter, which (is) in thy heart. Maj. 45. y -^ isf^ >^ cJ-f^-^' u^f"^ -^yi^ r^^^ There (is) a deep well there; no bottom of that is found. Nanga jo Qisso, v. 38. "Where (is) the cowardly cat? where (is) the cowardly cat? Sindhi Eead. B. p. 62. 2) In sentences, which contain an imprecation or curse, the verb as predicate is generally omitted. In such like sentences the Potential of ^^S, to fall, should be supplied, which occasionally is met with. May the courtyard (fall) into the well, the com- panions into the forest, the sisters-in-law into disease! Sh. Suh. rX, Epil. 1. (May fall) into the well those days of life, which are apart from the friend! Sh. Desi VII, Epil. Kk2 516 II. THE SYNTHETICAL PART. SECTION IV. THE COMPOUND SENTENCE. Two or more sentences may be so joined together, that a compound sentence arises. This is done either by way of coordination or subordination. Chapter XVL I. Coordination of sentences. §. 97. 1) Two or more sentences may be so joined, that each one remains independant of the other. This is done without or by the copulative, adversative, disjunctive and conclusive particles (cf. §. 59) and by the negative adverb .j — j neither — nor. ^ ^? ^ f The lover was joined to her by pain, the sweetheart was not joined to her by pleasure (= by dint of). Sh. Abiri YII, 13. jli C5?}^ c^^?^ ^ i^^^ --f^ ^^ 'jH^ Fasten the horses below and go ye up. Amulu Man. p. 149. Either they bring them across, says Latif, or they make a cry from that very spot. Sh. Suh. YIII, 2. I know it, but the Shah Sahib has forbidden (me) to tell it. Life of Abd-ul-Latif, p. 44. n. THE SYNTHETICAL PART. 517 2) Sentences are also coordinated by joining to- gether a disjunctive question. In tlie first member the interrogation is generally not expressed hv a particle, but only by the voice of the speaker; in the second (or third) the interrogation is j)ointed out by the particle ^ ki or y ke. ur^$ ci^fj ^ ^ y ^j^\ ^^^ >w Is it thou or shall we look to the way of another? Matth. 11, 3, Chapter JNJl. Contraction of coordinate sentences into one; concord of two and more subjects and predicates. §• 98. 1) When two or more sentences have either the same subject or the same predicate or the same object or any other common member of speech, they are contracted into one sentence, with or without a conjunctive particle. j^A-o ^-^ (s^*^ i^j'^.yt^ o^j^L-ww j^w^Lw Lord, may (our) dear friends (and) lovers meet (us) again! Xanga jo Qiss5 v. 81. u^! u^^ o^'^ ^7^ ^r^ -^ c^? 1 am not a jinn, demon, fairy, I am a man. Maj. 639. Which then is greater, the sacrifice or the altar? Matth. 23, 19. 518 n. THE SYNTHETICAL PART. (c^ ^T^AAAA-Sk y^jQ ^Xmj.^ («^^. j'-^'aj Li&l \^y Y?, But tliis discourse fell into tlie ear of Mir Hasan (and) Husain. Nanga jo Qisso v. 75. 2) When there are two or more subjects in a sen- tence, denoting animate beings, the verb or adjective (Avith the auxiliary verbs ^t5> and ^2^'J) as predicate is put in the Plural; if the subjects have the same gender, the predicate agrees with them, being put in the Plural, but if they be of various gender, the mas- culine has the precedence. When two or more subjects imply things (or ideas), the predicate is either put in the Singular, agreeing commonly with the last subject, or in the Plural. If they be of various gender, the Plural of the mas- culine or feminine is employed, according as one or the other subject is considered more important. The same rule holds good, when an attribute (adjective etc.) is referring to nouns of diiferent gender. (JJJ«^JI Lv,£a^w*w {^^^^ ^ y^ A male and female was created by him. Sindhi Eead. Book, p. 15. ^j«^| 14^x5 yi[^ ^r^L^j ^ sLx) Thy mother and thy brothers stand outside. Matth. 12, 47. In this pond there will be water and fish. Life of Abd-ul-Latif, p. 27. But for an able army there is no delay (nor) pause. Nanga jo Quisso, v. 154. 11. THE SYNTHETICAL PART. 519 When I saw from afar the places, houses, cells. Ajaib, V. 72. (^^ I^Lw Lv-^' J^Laa/ yM U1a5^ l:s.» (i>^5 L^**"^ UjH*"^ By the lightenings dresses of rain (i. e. clouds) have been made; reeds and herbs have become green; oh! Sh. Sar. lY, Epil. By whom eyes (and) face have been turned towards the buffalo-keeper. Sh. Suh. Y, 9. ^' CJ ^1 Li pli ^LfJ txf u;44^. The farms and ferries of the world (people) are upon that water. JSTanga jo Qisso, v. 36. 3) When two or more subjects of different persons occur in a sentence, the first person precedes the second (or third), and the second the third, the verb being put in the Plural. We and the Pharisees keep many fasts. Matth. 9, 14. Chapter XVIII. II. Subordination of sentences. §. 99. Two or more sentences may be so joined together, that one is not independent of the other, but is only making up for the deficiency of the other. A sentence thus depending on another, is called a subordinate 520 11. THE SYNTHETICAL PART. sentence, and the otlier, that is completed thereby, is called the main sentence. A subordinate sentence may have another sentence coordinated either with or without conjunctive particles; or it may again subordinate another sentence. A subordinate sentence may be linked to the main sentence either by subjunctive particles, or by re- lative pronouns and adverbs or by interrogative pronouns and adverbs. 1) Subordination of a sentence by subjunctive particles. §. 100. Particles, by which a sentence is subordinated to the main sentence are the concessive, the conse- cutive, the causal, the final and the conditional, cf §. 59. a) "With the three first particles the Indicative is used, if the assertion be positive, and the Potential, if the assertion be more vague or uncertain; with final particles the Potential is always used. -- --^ - -^ ^ ^ I' Though they be killed by the knife, they do not at all divulge any thing. Sh. Kal. U, 8. It threw the head of dejection so much on the ground, that its brain was confused. Sindhi Eeading Book p. 58. God, take away the covers, that we may know the truth. Maj. 205. II. THE SYNTHETICAL PART. 521 h) In conditional sentences the subordinate sen- tence generaHy precedes the main sentence, but the conditional part of the sentence may also follow that, which is conditioned thereby. The subordinate sentence is introduced by the par- ticles ^a^, y^=^ if, and j^.^J.X'.a^ if (at any time), and the main sentence by the concessive particle J, ^Lj*, then, which is generally not translated. 1) If the condition and that, which is conditioned thereby, be indefinite, possible, doubtful or un- certain, the Potential is used in both members of the sentence; in the main sentence the Imperative may also be employed. Be not seated here; if thou go, thou mayst obtain (thy) sweetheart. Sh. Abiri YII, 6. Then thou mayst enjoy it at all, if thou perform this very advise. Sh. Abiri YII, 14. }^,/ ^-f-^L? ^"^^ iljf i ^^i l^^ ^ J' If they may have been seen by you, then, for Grod's sake, speak! Sh. Hus. X, 22. 2) If the condition be uncertain, possible or only expected, but if that, which is conditioned thereby, be represented as certain and positive, the Potential is used in the subordinate, and the Indi- cative (commonly the Future) in the main sentence. mother, o mother, I live, o God, if my dear friends remember me! Sh. Suh. VII, Epil. 2. 522 II. THE SYNTHETICAL PART. ^-y^l .j* j=^3 (5jj^:^ j^xj ^^^^L^t c^^ jj^ ^^aX^ If thou construct us here a mosque, then we shall let thee daily make the pilgrimage of the Kaiaba of God. Life of Abd-ul-Latif , p. 4. 3) If the condition and that, which is conditioned thereby, be taken as certain and positive, the In- dicative is used in both members of the sentence. If thou castest us out, allow us to go into the herd of »wine. Matth. 8, 31. If thou shalt divulge it, thou wilt become a leper. Life of Abd-ul-Latif, p. 44. 4) If the condition as well as that, which is con- ditioned thereby, is represented as such, that could have happened under certain circumstances, but which has not happened, because the condition was not ful- filled , the Imperfect , Aorist or Pluperfect is used in the subordinate, and the Aorist in the main sen- tence, or, under certain circumstances, the Pluperfect (cf. §. 87, 2). ^ - ^ ' 03i J 1^ C5- If he had not kept on drinking liquor, he would not have died. II. THE SYNTHETICAL PAKT. 523 CiA^X^w z^-**^' tXJe.^ ,e:2a. s^^\j^S cXA-^a) ij*^\ I have ^yritten a letter to thee; but if I were a bird I would likely have come before the letter, having flown quickly. If the pen would be aware of the heart, it would wee|3 blood out of affection. Sh. Barvo Sindhi, Chot. 6. If those (cries) had been heard by (my) sweetheart, he would likely not have gone off. Sh. Hus. m, 2. 1 If the master of the house had known, (that) the thief will come at a certain watch (of the night), he would hkely have remained on his guard. Matth. 24, 43. If those (works) had been done at Sodom, it would have likely remained until this day. Matth. 11, 23. Instead of the Aorist or Pluperfect the Poten- tial (of the Present) may be used (but very rarely) in both members of a conditional sentence, followed by the particle Li; but more commonly Li is added to a past tense, for the sake of emphasis. Li ^ J ^ ^^ J Li J.i J yi ^ If she had not gone, she would not have obtained (her) friend. 524 II. THE SYNTHETICAL PART. If you had ever understood this word, you would not have condemned the guiltless. Matth. 12, 7. 5) If the condition must have been fulfilled in past future time (Futurum exactum), before that, which is conditioned thereby, shall happen, the Aorist is used in the subordinate, and the Future in the main sentence. JL^« ^\ jjL^ ^j^ci-L^ «jsl^ v^^L^ [**tXi^ ^^txCy^ ** I •• ' " I* If ever Ma/dum Sahib should have died before Shah Sahib, then Shah Sahib will come and be present with the bier of Ma/dum Sahib. Life of Abd-ul-Latif, p. 37. If one shall have come and recognised her, I will give her to him. Sindhi Eead. B. p. 59. 6) The conditional particle ^^ is often omitted in the subordinate sentence, and ^^Xl=^ on the other hand is used without a main sentence, it being passed over in silence, so that S^:^ assumes quite the sense of the interjectional particle ^Uo would that! ^I4J l^^ ^ J^y^ ^L^f ^^^ e>^* 1^;^. O my friend, (if) I die of thy wound, I (may) obtain honour. Sh. Jam. Kal. I, 6. n. THE SYNTHETICAL PART. 525 If we would go to (our) village, (it would be well) = We should like to go to (our) village. Amulu Man. p. 151. 2) Subordination of a sentence by the relative pronoun (also the indefinite pronouns iSi^^^ 3^"=^) ^^^ relative adverbs, corresponding generally to a correlative. (§. 74 sqq.) §■ 101. The subordinate sentence may either precede or follow the main sentence. Come back, o louse of the blanket, which was given to me by the grandfather's family. Sh. Um. Mar. Vn, 3. J Jo^iC -f:^^ 7"^ C5^ Vj' ^'^^ >-^* ^-W >-^^-S^ Whoever is given to gambling, in his house pro- perty does not remain. Sindhi Eead. Book, p. 52. (j^ ^^H \J^}^ ^ ^ 4^.^ C5<^* a^ (1^ As the day gets hot, so I push on in the jom'ney, Sh. Hus. n, 14. ^}?^ tsf^ ^i' 7^. ^5f^^ Where there is not a footprint of a bird, there glimmers a small fire. Sh. Khah. II, 11. 526 n. THE SYNTHETICAL PART. When there are some reeds of the shore, pull them out and bind together a raft. Sh. Hus. YIII, 3. 3) Subordination of a sentence by an interro- gative pronoun or particle. §. 102. The dependant sentence is generally introduced by the particles o, j.^, and y, that, which are not translated. How do I know, how the calculation of the Amir has been made? Sh. Um. Mar. 11. Give me an answer about the marriage, how thou hast arranged it? Amulu Man. p. 142. Take no thought of your life, (saying) what shall we eat, what shall we drink? nor of your body, what we shall put on? Matth. 6, 24. 11. THE SYNTHETICAL PART. 527 Chapter XIX. Abbreviation of subordinate sentences. §. 103. A subordinate sentence may be abbreviated: 1) by using the present and past participle (c£ §. 80, 81), either adjectively, or in the Locative Sin- gular, which is more common. The participle supplies the place of a relative or conjunctional subordinate sentence, into which it may be dissolved, when ne- cessary, as: Pass the night weeping, distilling glasses of liquor; i. e. whilst weeping, or as one who weeps etc. Sh. Jam. Kal. lY, 25. C5?^. (^rT u^^ is?^"^ ^J^ 4^^ ^'i>Vc> ^i:^ Having been seized = after or when or as she was seized by a violent pain, she fell down near some bank. Story of the cat and mice, v. 29. 2) By using the past conjunctive participles. They carry off (my) sweetheart Punhu, speaking Baluchi, i. e. whilst they speak Baluchi. Sh. Desi 11, 13. 528 II. THE SNYTHETICAL PART. Chapter XX. On the indirect oration. §. 104. When the words or thoughts of a person are given with the very same expressions, as used originally, the oration is called a direct one; but when they are only represented according to their general contents or purport, the oration is called an indirect one. In Sindhi the indirect oration is never made use of, but the words or thoughts of a person are always repre- sented in the direct oration and generally introduced by the particle j. He was thinking: 'in some way having sneaked off I will get away^; i. e. that he would sneak off etc. Life of Abd-ul-Latif, p. 20. When he sees: I am sitting near Bhita. Ibid, p. 21. If thou likest: I will meet (my) friend = to meet (thy) friend, then learn the mimicking sound of the thieves. Sh. Jam. Kal. II, 8. APPENDIX I. 529 APFEIVDIX I. ON THE SINDHI CALENDAR. The Muhammadans of Sindh reckon by lunar months after the common Muhammadan aera, called djl^j the flight of Muhammad from Mekka to Me- dinah, the years of this aera are therefore called ^y^^). It dates, according to the best accounts from the 18*^ of July 622 p. Chr. Their months commence with the appearance of each new moon and consist of 30 and 29 days alternately, amounting to 354 days and about nine hours; in consequence thereof l^ew-year's-day falls every year about eleven days earlier than in the pre- vious year. To keep pace with the seasons the Sindhis inter- pose every third year an intercalary month (SjJ lundu), repeating that month, in which the sun enters no new sign of the Zodiac. In naming the lunar months the learned Muham- madans follow the nomenclature of the Arabs; but among the common people the names of those Arabian months only are known, which are noted by some spe- cial religious observance, the other months being called by the names of the Hindu months then being. 1) Another aera, which is also in use amongst the Muhammadans of Upper India, is called j^^^cii, or revenue aera; it dates, according to Prinsep, from the year 592% p. Chr. Trump p, Sindhi-Grrammar. L 1 530 APPENDIX I. Lunar months of the Arabians. 1) lli? muharrarnu ^"y-S inaharamu 30 days. 2) 4) yk^ safaru 29 days. J^^!| «Aj^ rabimlavvalu . . 30 days. 5i -O 5 ^ .^11 *-^j^ rabim-laxiru 29 day 5) J^!^l| ^3U4 jumada-lavvula 30 days. 6) (^jLaJ! ;5i>U£^ jumada - 'i'^ani ^is-^H ^31^^ jumada-laxiru 7) 29 days. 8) 9) 10) 11) 12) .. rajabu . ili^ sa?abanu. >,--.—- ^Ldx)N ramazann . Jl^^ savvalu. sJoiiUI ^^3 M-lqaiadali stXii' ^5^ M qaiadah xiv^l ^<3 M-lHijJah . . . 30 days. 29 days. 30 days. 29 days. 30 days. 29 days. The Hindus reckon by solar years, and luni- solar months. They follow either the Vikramaditya (o*.As>Lil5^) aera, called sambatu (Sansk. ^"^ff^ year), APPENDIX I. 531 dating from the year 57 a. Chr., and commencing with the month of kati, or that of Shalivahana, called saku (Sansk. "^^j, dating from the year 78 p. Chr., and commencing with the month of Cetru. The Hindu year is divided into 12 equal portions, which nearly correspond to our solar months. Each month is divided again (by Hindus as well as Muham- madans) into two parts (-^Xl or .4^^ lunar fortnight), the first from new to full moon (^^^ sudi), and the second from full to new moon (^ctXl badi). The dates of these two divisions {.^x'J lunar date), fifteen each, are reckoned separately. Solar months of the Hindus. ylf^ cetru, from the middle of March to the middle of April. -4^L1j^ vesakhu, from the middle of April to the middle of May. ..^jif^ Jethu, from the middle of May to the middle of June. vLg.n akharu, from the middle of June to the middle of July. ^j^ savanu, I from the middle of July to the middle ^1;^ sranu, J ^^ ^'^g^^^t- j.iXj badro, from the middle of August to the middle of September. y^\ asu, from the middle of September to the middle of October. L12 532 APPENDIX I. ^ kati, from the middle of October to the middle of November. from the middle of November to the middle of December. ^_5^b nahari, ^^ nahari, ^.^Xlc manghiru, ,5^j^. pohu, from the middle of December to the middle of January. ^fU maghu, from the middle of January to the middle of February. J;.^j phagunu, from the middle of February to the middle of March. The Hindus commence the day at midnight, as we do, but the Muhammadans at the previous evening. In the mouth of a Muhammadan therefore the night of a certain day always signifies the night of the pre- vious day, as: ^IT ^:a. ^^^ Friday night = Thursday night, according to our way of reckoning. There is some difference between the Hindu and Musalman names of the days of the week, as subjoined. Hindu. IjjT artaru^) Days of the week. Musalman. . . . liT acaru, Sunday. sumaru yy^ sumaru fr^ nUo^ sumaru, Monday. i.^'-'i-r- 1) Or: y^*§t aditavaru, '^y^S aitavaru, ^l^\ I artavaru. Hindu. ^ijJo mangalu . . lijo budharu . . o^^ vispate . . . ^^JL^' tharu^) . . . IXco sukru . . . . . j,<^^gs chancha.ru . APPENDIX I. 533 Musalman. j,L6l anaro, Tuesday. LSjl arba, Wednesday. (j^jww^ X^misa, Thursday. ^L jumo, Friday. T^rf^'^o chancharu, Saturday. 1) Or: s^L.^j thavaru. 534 APPENDIX IL APPEIVDIX II. SURVEY OF THE DIFFERENT SINDHI -ARABIC ALPHABETS. The Alphabet used in this Grammar (Hindustani). The GoTernment Alphabet. The old Sindhi Alphabet. Roman Characters. 1 1 I a ^ V V b O O V b ^ ^ bh Ui> C^ *^ t ^'■^ e viL) th o cn, ^ t -^ ^ c th ^ vd> ^ •i V u^ P -^■ o o ph C 21 z J S s £ J -^ -«^ a: jh € E € n (ny) £ c c c -^ 21 © ch C C c H t t t X c> i> 4> - d JtO i 3 dh s J t> d s V 4> i 1 d APPENDIX II. The Alphabet used in this Grammar (Hindustani). The Government Alphabet. The old Sindhi Alphabet. Roman Characters, .saiS t> 4> dh j 3 ^ ) ; ; r ; ; ; r ) ) ; z ir (j^ LT s .♦. • s LP U^ (JO s U^ o» a» z io ic Ja t ib ib ii S £ e £ 5 £ e £ T o o o f l3 O O q J^c^ ^ -= .lT k ^^ cT uT kh s S J- g ^ s : W.^ V- XXXVI, 1- 9 ^ift^: Wft^. P- XXXVII, 1. 13 ^t^: ^t^. p. XL, 1. 5 -ftrot: ■%#. p. XLI, 1. 3 ^^: ^^ p. XLH, 1. 12 -fri*^^: f^r^^. p. XLVn, 1. 27 p. 3, 1. 21 e.: o. p. 3, 1. 22 ^■. o. p. 10, 1. 15 (ja-ft*^: oaM^. p. 11, 1. 21 anu: anu. p. 12, 1. 22 C5/4-- iS)^^^' P- 23, 1. 19 ^yy. ^y p. 23, 1. 25 the these: these, p. 29, 1. 29 goal: goat. p. 30, 1. 1 add before p5e: s^j. p. 33, 1. 27 vijti: viju. p. 36, 1. 5 carho: carho. p. 36, 1. 15 tobo: tobo. p. 36, 1. 21 jtUj^L: jtUjjU. p. 37, 1. 27 add before u: in. p. 37, 538 MISPRINTS AND EMENDATIONS. 1. 33 bhue: bhiie. p. 39, 1. 11 ^^J: ^'^. p. 46, 1. 20 4^: J^.. p. 51, 1. 16 yy^j^f: ^^y^^f. p. 51, 1. 27 \^i<:>y. ^ic>y p. 52, 1. 15 c/lIj: lTLL. p. 59, 1. 26 Gujurati: Gujarat!, p. 60, 1. 27 o: e. p. 62, 1. 4 Gu- jarathi: Gujarat!, p. 66, 1. 25 ^j^: (5%^* P- 66, 1. 28 ^L^i^l: ^L4%|. p. 66, 1. 28 4:.1: J^. p. 67, 1. 14 ^ 3^A5tXjl45^ kbandMro : j^JoL^^ Miandlro. p. 67, 1. 14 ^cXjL^ kbandbe: tUL^ khande. p. 68, 1. 9 alti: atu. p. 68, 1. 24 patru: putru. p. 69, 1. 9 y^\S^\y. y^^^y p. 69, 1. 20 kachiro: kachiro. p. 69, 1. 29 J^'i and 5^*5: J^^J^ fj"4^*<3. p. 72, 1. 3 hanoko: hanoko. p. 72, 1. 3 bane: bane. p. 72, L 12 aniko: aniko. p. 72, L 24 coraniko: coraniko. p. 78, L 11 menaged: managed. p. 82, L 7 ^AjG: ^>JG. p. 82, L 26 Sbortened from tbe Sansk. ^^ read: Sansk. ^, sbortened from ^3^. p. 88, 1. 14 Babtivribi: Bahuvribi. p. 88, 1. 25 recognizable: recognisable, p. 90, 1. 21 After TT^ add: fem. p. 92, 1. 4 5^^: ^T^. p. 92, 1. 25 after: Sansk. T?^f add: masc. (also in Sindbi). p. 94, 1. 25 ^3\ ^3. p. 99, L 24 ni: ni. p. 106, L 24 j.jj.j tobo: y^ys tobo. p. 106, 1. 25 Ljj.j- toba: Lj^' toba. p. 113, 1. 6 Whe: We. p. 120, 1. 8 put a Comma after palatal. p. 128, 1. 22 joyu: j5yu. p. 140, 1. 18 ^HL^: ^liLI.. p. 144, 1. 20 ^L^^4f- u^^;4^ P- 144, 1. 21 p^^r: p^. p. 157, 1. 15 hikiro: hikird. p. 157, 1. 16 bekiro: he- kiro. p. 159, 1. 4 daha: daha. p. 164, 1. 14 ^^yl^j.^.: " I _ ^y^^^yc^. p. 169, 1. 23 saba: sata. p. 170, 1. 7 codaha: codaba. p. 170, 1. 8 pandraha: pandraba. p. 171, 1. 20 MISPRINTS AND EMENDATIONS. 539 ^^•1: ^^x:^i p. 173, 1. 3 (5^: ^^f^. p. 173, 1. 16 sweathearts: sweethearts, p. 190, 1. 20 muk ha: mu kha. p. 201, note: Eisals: Risalo. p. 208, 1. 15 whit: with, p. 215, 1. 5 ,^)CjCx^: .^J^Xac^. p. 216, 1. 28 theyself: thyself, p. 230, 1. 5 ^y^/'^Jy^^^ p. 234, 1. 8 Rino: Eano. p. 236, 1. 4 e: i. p. 237, 1. 20 .$^y iy p. 239, 1. 7 ,^lSjfLj: g^wLkf LI. p. 241, 1. 4 jonhe: jonhe. p. 245, 1. 4 ^yl:Sy^\ ^^a5j.£s.. p. 248, 1. 13 ^^LIT: ^\xjS. p. 255, 1. 19 parhainu: parhainu. p. 258, 1. 16 aa: au. p. 261, 1. 8 cu-anu: cu-anu. p. 264, 1. 16 "khahann: khanhanu. p. 267, 1. 29 parh-iju: parh-iju. p. 274, 1. 21 susanu: tusanu. p. 277, 1. 20 kuhanu: kuhanu. p. 283, 1. 32 una: una. p. 286, 1. 20 budhayo: budha-y-o. p. 287, 1. 1 the n and I: the I and II. p. 287, 1. 14 ani: ani. p. 289, 1. 28 ia: ia. p. 294, 1. 8 30.3^^: jjo^j. p. 299, 1. 16 (j.li: ^i. p. 301, 1. 21 tii^i: (j^j^i. p. 310, 1. 19 (ji^Aio: \j»-j^' p. 311, 1. 7 y^jiXiA.^': |jw.JtXAA^j'. p. 311, 1. 8 ^J.aa^j: ^d^kKJ^s. p. 320, 1. 20 ,j«5tXi^: ^tXjyc. p. 323, 1. 9 chad-indo: chad-indo. p. 325, L 2 The object being fern.: being masc. The object being masc: fern. p. 336, 1. 6 (^44^* (^^-i^- P* ^^^' 1. 12 jJ^-Uf^: jtX-U^ p. 342, 1. 18 ^k^\ ^^. p. 348, 1. 10 corpe: corpse, p. 361, L 7 (jii^SS: (j^j.j^. p. 368, 1. 18 chadiu-se: chadiii-se. p. 372, 1. 5 chadia-su: chadia-su. p. 384, 1. 2 ocitoly: ocito. p. 384, 1. 2 for the second unexpected read: unexpectedly, p. 384, 1. 5 odiro: odiro. p. 384, note 2, 1. 2 Trf^* ^Rf^. p. 389, 1. 12 Loc: Abl. p. 395, 1. 20 ^jo^4^: ^j^^. 540 MISPRINTS AND EMENDATIONS. p. 395, note, 1. 1 e o: e of. p. 396, 1. 19 Chat: Chot. p. 402, 1. 2 me: me. p. 405, 1. 2 ^^^jUi: ^^Us.. p. 411 The last two quotations are misplaced there and to be inserted on p. 417, after 1. 16. p, 414, 1. 15 ^^w^JL^: ^14JU^. p. 416, 1. 6 the 'Mia': thee 'Mia', p. 418, 1. 8 form: from. p. 420, 1. 8 ^^JL^: ^d^. p. 423, 1. 6 also!: alas! p. 432, 1. 13 after God, add: or not? HOV "" , Printed bj' F. A. Brockhavis, Leipzig. PRINTED BY F. A. BROCKHAUS , LEIPZIG. Deacidified using the Bookkeeper process. Neutralizing agent: Magnesium Oxide Treatment Date: July 2007 PreservationTechnologies A WORLD LEADER IN PAPER PRESERVATION 111 Thomson Park Drive Cranberry Township. PA 16066 (724)779-2111